Skip site navigation (1)Skip section navigation (2)

FreeBSD Manual Pages


home | help
MPV(1)				  multimedia				MPV(1)

       mpv - a media player

       mpv [options] [file|URL|PLAYLIST|-]
       mpv [options] files

       mpv is a	media player based on MPlayer and mplayer2. It supports	a wide
       variety of video	file formats, audio and	 video	codecs,	 and  subtitle
       types. Special input URL	types are available to read input from a vari-
       ety of sources other than disk files. Depending on platform, a  variety
       of different video and audio output methods are supported.

       Usage  examples	to  get	you started quickly can	be found at the	end of
       this man	page.

       mpv has a fully configurable, command-driven control layer which	allows
       you  to	control	mpv using keyboard, mouse, or remote control (there is
       no LIRC support - configure remotes as input devices instead).

       See the --input-	options	for ways to customize it.

       The following listings are not necessarily complete. See	etc/input.conf
       for  a  list of default bindings. User input.conf files and Lua scripts
       can define additional key bindings.

   Keyboard Control
       LEFT and	RIGHT
	      Seek backward/forward 5 seconds. Shift+arrow does	a 1 second ex-
	      act seek (see --hr-seek).

       UP and DOWN
	      Seek  forward/backward 1 minute. Shift+arrow does	a 5 second ex-
	      act seek (see --hr-seek).

       Ctrl+LEFT and Ctrl+RIGHT
	      Seek to the previous/next	subtitle. Subject to some restrictions
	      and might	not always work; see sub-seek command.

       Ctrl+Shift+Left and Ctrl+Shift+Right
	      Adjust  subtitle	delay so that the next or previous subtitle is
	      displayed	now. This is especially	useful to  sync	 subtitles  to

       [ and ]
	      Decrease/increase	current	playback speed by 10%.

       { and }
	      Halve/double current playback speed.

	      Reset playback speed to normal.

	      Undo  the	 last  seek. This works	only if	the playlist entry was
	      not changed.  Hitting it a second	time will go back to the orig-
	      inal position.  See revert-seek command for details.

	      Mark   the   current   position.	This  will  then  be  used  by
	      Shift+BACKSPACE as revert	position  (once	 you  seek  back,  the
	      marker  will  be	reset).	You can	use this to seek around	in the
	      file and then return to the exact	position where you left	off.

       < and >
	      Go backward/forward in the playlist.

       ENTER  Go forward in the	playlist.

       p / SPACE
	      Pause (pressing again unpauses).

       .      Step forward. Pressing once will pause, every consecutive	 press
	      will play	one frame and then go into pause mode again.

       ,      Step backward. Pressing once will	pause, every consecutive press
	      will play	one frame in reverse  and  then	 go  into  pause  mode

       q      Stop playing and quit.

       Q      Like  q,	but  store  the	current	playback position. Playing the
	      same file	later will resume at the old playback position if pos-

       / and *
	      Decrease/increase	volume.

       9 and 0
	      Decrease/increase	volume.

       m      Mute sound.

       _      Cycle through the	available video	tracks.

       #      Cycle through the	available audio	tracks.

       f      Toggle fullscreen	(see also --fs).

       ESC    Exit fullscreen mode.

       T      Toggle stay-on-top (see also --ontop).

       w and W
	      Decrease/increase	pan-and-scan range. The	e key does the same as
	      W	currently, but use is discouraged.

       o (also P)
	      Show progression bar, elapsed time and  total  duration  on  the

       O      Toggle OSD states	between	normal and playback time/duration.

       v      Toggle subtitle visibility.

       j and J
	      Cycle through the	available subtitles.

       z and Z
	      Adjust  subtitle	delay  by  +/- 0.1 seconds. The	x key does the
	      same as Z	currently, but use is discouraged.

       l      Set/clear	A-B loop points. See ab-loop command for details.

       L      Toggle infinite looping.

       Ctrl + and Ctrl -
	      Adjust audio delay (A/V sync) by +/- 0.1 seconds.

       Shift+g and Shift+f
	      Adjust subtitle font size	by +/- 10%.

       u      Switch between applying no style overrides to SSA/ASS subtitles,
	      and  overriding  them almost completely with the normal subtitle
	      style. See --sub-ass-override for	more info.

       V      Toggle  subtitle	VSFilter  aspect   compatibility   mode.   See
	      --sub-ass-vsfilter-aspect-compat for more	info.

       r and R
	      Move  subtitles up/down. The t key does the same as R currently,
	      but use is discouraged.

       s      Take a screenshot.

       S      Take a screenshot, without subtitles. (Whether  this  works  de-
	      pends on VO driver support.)

       Ctrl s Take  a screenshot, as the window	shows it (with subtitles, OSD,
	      and scaled video).

       PGUP and	PGDWN
	      Seek to the beginning of	the  previous/next  chapter.  In  most
	      cases,  "previous" will actually go to the beginning of the cur-
	      rent chapter; see	--chapter-seek-threshold.

       Shift+PGUP and Shift+PGDWN
	      Seek backward or forward by 10 minutes. (This used to be	mapped
	      to PGUP/PGDWN without Shift.)

       d      Activate/deactivate deinterlacer.

       A      Cycle aspect ratio override.

       Ctrl h Toggle hardware video decoding on/off.

       Alt+LEFT, Alt+RIGHT, Alt+UP, Alt+DOWN
	      Move the video rectangle (panning).

       Alt + and Alt -
	      Combining	Alt with the + or - keys changes video zoom.

	      Reset the	pan/zoom settings.

       F8     Show the playlist	and the	current	position in it (useful only if
	      a	UI window is used, broken on the terminal).

       F9     Show the list of audio and subtitle streams (useful only if a UI
	      window  is used, broken on the terminal).

       i and I
	      Show/toggle an overlay displaying	statistics about the currently
	      playing file such	as codec, framerate, number of dropped	frames
	      and so on. See STATS for more information.

       del    Cycles visibility	between	never /	auto (mouse-move) / always

       `      Show the console.	(ESC closes it again. See CONSOLE.)

       (The  following keys are	valid only when	using a	video output that sup-
       ports the corresponding adjustment.)

       1 and 2
	      Adjust contrast.

       3 and 4
	      Adjust brightness.

       5 and 6
	      Adjust gamma.

       7 and 8
	      Adjust saturation.

       Alt+0 (and command+0 on OSX)
	      Resize video window to half its original size.

       Alt+1 (and command+1 on OSX)
	      Resize video window to its original size.

       Alt+2 (and command+2 on OSX)
	      Resize video window to double its	original size.

       command + f (OSX	only)
	      Toggle fullscreen	(see also --fs).

       (The following keys are valid if	you have a  keyboard  with  multimedia

       PAUSE  Pause.

       STOP   Stop playing and quit.

       PREVIOUS	and NEXT
	      Seek backward/forward 1 minute.

       If  you	miss  some  older  key bindings, look at etc/restore-old-bind-
       ings.conf in the	mpv git	repository.

   Mouse Control
       Left double click
	      Toggle fullscreen	on/off.

       Right click
	      Toggle pause on/off.

       Forward/Back button
	      Skip to next/previous entry in playlist.

       Wheel up/down
	      Seek forward/backward 10 seconds.

       Wheel left/right
	      Decrease/increase	volume.

       Command line arguments starting with - are interpreted as options,  ev-
       erything	else as	filenames or URLs. All options except flag options (or
       choice options which include yes) require a parameter in	the form --op-

       One  exception is the lone - (without anything else), which means media
       data will be read from stdin. Also, --  (without	 anything  else)  will
       make the	player interpret all following arguments as filenames, even if
       they start with -. (To play a file named	-, you need to use ./-.)

       Every flag option has a no-flag counterpart, e.g. the opposite  of  the
       --fs  option  is	--no-fs. --fs=yes is same as --fs, --fs=no is the same
       as --no-fs.

       If an option is marked as (XXX only), it	will only work in  combination
       with the	XXX option or if XXX is	compiled in.

   Legacy option syntax
       The --option=value syntax is not	strictly enforced, and the alternative
       legacy syntax -option value and -option=value will also work.  This  is
       mostly	for compatibility with MPlayer.	Using these should be avoided.
       Their semantics can change any time in the future.

       For example, the	alternative syntax will	consider an argument following
       the option a filename. mpv -fs no will attempt to play a	file named no,
       because --fs is a flag option that requires no parameter. If an	option
       changes	and  its parameter becomes optional, then a command line using
       the alternative syntax will break.

       Until mpv 0.31.0, there was no difference  whether  an  option  started
       with -- or a single -. Newer mpv	releases strictly expect that you pass
       the option value	after a	=. For example,	before	mpv  --log-file	 f.txt
       would  write  a	log  to	 f.txt,	 but  now  this	command	line fails, as
       --log-file expects an option value, and f.txt is	 simply	 considered  a
       normal file to be played	(as in mpv f.txt).

       The  future  plan  is that -option value	will not work anymore, and op-
       tions with a single - behave the	same as	-- options.

   Escaping spaces and other special characters
       Keep in mind that the shell will	partially parse	and mangle  the	 argu-
       ments  you  pass	to mpv.	For example, you might need to quote or	escape
       options and filenames:
	  mpv "filename	with spaces.mkv" --title="window title"

       It gets more complicated	if the suboption parser	is involved. The  sub-
       option  parser  puts  several  options into a single string, and	passes
       them to a component at once, instead of using multiple options  on  the
       level of	the command line.

       The suboption parser can	quote strings with " and [...].	 Additionally,
       there is	a special form of quoting with %n% described below.

       For example, assume the hypothetical foo	filter can take	 multiple  op-
	  mpv test.mkv --vf=foo:option1=value1:option2:option3=value3,bar

       This passes option1 and option3 to the foo filter, with option2 as flag
       (implicitly option2=yes), and adds a bar	filter after that. If  an  op-
       tion contains spaces or characters like , or :, you need	to quote them:
	  mpv '--vf=foo:option1="option	value with spaces",bar'

       Shells  may  actually  strip  some quotes from the string passed	to the
       commandline, so the example quotes the string twice, ensuring that  mpv
       receives	the " quotes.

       The  [...] form of quotes wraps everything between [ and	]. It's	useful
       with shells that	don't interpret	these characters in the	middle	of  an
       argument	 (like bash). These quotes are balanced	(since mpv 0.9.0): the
       [ and ] nest, and the quote terminates on the last ] that has no	match-
       ing [ within the	string.	(For example, [a[b]c] results in a[b]c.)

       The  fixed-length  quoting  syntax  is  intended	 for use with external
       scripts and programs.

       It is started with % and	has the	following format:



		 mpv '--vf=foo:option1=%11%quoted text'	test.avi

		 Or in a script:

		 mpv --vf=foo:option1=%`expr length "$NAME"`%"$NAME" test.avi

       Suboptions passed to the	client API are also subject to escaping. Using
       mpv_set_option_string() is exactly like passing --name=data to the com-
       mand line (but without shell processing of the  string).	 Some  options
       support	passing	 values	 in  a	more  structured  way  instead of flat
       strings,	and can	avoid the suboption parsing mess.  For	example,  --vf
       supports	 MPV_FORMAT_NODE,  which  lets you pass	suboptions as a	nested
       data structure of maps and arrays.

       Some care must be taken when passing arbitrary paths and	 filenames  to
       mpv. For	example, paths starting	with - will be interpreted as options.
       Likewise, if a path contains the	sequence ://, the string  before  that
       might be	interpreted as protocol	prefix,	even though ://	can be part of
       a legal UNIX path. To avoid problems with arbitrary paths,  you	should
       be sure that absolute paths passed to mpv start with /, and prefix rel-
       ative paths with	./.

       Using the file:// pseudo-protocol is discouraged, because  it  involves
       strange URL unescaping rules.

       The  name  - itself is interpreted as stdin, and	will cause mpv to dis-
       able console controls. (Which makes it suitable for playing data	 piped
       to stdin.)

       The  special  argument -- can be	used to	stop mpv from interpreting the
       following arguments as options.

       When using the client API, you should  strictly	avoid  using  mpv_com-
       mand_string  for	invoking the loadfile command, and instead prefer e.g.
       mpv_command to avoid the	need for filename escaping.

       For paths passed	to suboptions, the situation is	further	complicated by
       the  need  to  escape special characters. To work this around, the path
       can  be	additionally  wrapped  in  the	 fixed-length	syntax,	  e.g.
       %n%string_of_length_n (see above).

       Some mpv	options	interpret paths	starting with ~. Currently, the	prefix
       ~~/  expands  to	 the  mpv  configuration  directory  (usually  ~/.con-
       fig/mpv/).  ~/ expands to the user's home directory. (The trailing / is
       always required.) The following paths are currently recognized:

		     |Name	   | Meaning			|
		     |~~/	   | mpv config	dir (for  exam-	|
		     |		   | ple ~/.config/mpv/)	|
		     |~/	   | user  home	 directory root	|
		     |		   | (similar to shell,	$HOME)	|
		     |~~home/	   | same as ~~/		|
		     |~~global/	   | the global	config path, if	|
		     |		   | available (not on win32)	|
		     |~~osxbundle/ | the  OSX  bundle  resource	|
		     |		   | path (OSX only)		|
		     |~~desktop/   | the path  to  the	desktop	|
		     |		   | (win32, OSX)		|
		     |~~exe_dir	   | win32  only:  the	path to	|
		     |		   | the  directory  containing	|
		     |		   | the  exe  (for config file	|
		     |		   | purposes; $MPV_HOME  over-	|
		     |		   | rides it)			|
		     |~~old_home   | do	not use			|

   Per-File Options
       When  playing multiple files, any option	given on the command line usu-
       ally affects all	files. Example:

	  mpv --a file1.mkv --b	file2.mkv --c

			    |File      | Active	options	|
			    |file1.mkv | --a --b --c	|
			    |file2.mkv | --a --b --c	|

       (This is	different from MPlayer and mplayer2.)

       Also, if	any option is changed at runtime (via  input  commands),  they
       are not reset when a new	file is	played.

       Sometimes,  it  is  useful  to  change  options	per-file.  This	can be
       achieved	by adding the special per-file markers --{ and --}. (Note that
       you must	escape these on	some shells.) Example:

	  mpv --a file1.mkv --b	--\{ --c file2.mkv --d file3.mkv --e --\} file4.mkv --f

			|File	   | Active options	     |
			|file1.mkv | --a --b --f	     |
			|file2.mkv | --a --b --f --c --d --e |
			|file3.mkv | --a --b --f --c --d --e |
			|file4.mkv | --a --b --f	     |

       Additionally,  any  file-local  option changed at runtime is reset when
       the current file	stops playing. If option --c is	changed	 during	 play-
       back  of	 file2.mkv, it is reset	when advancing to file3.mkv. This only
       affects file-local options. The option --a is never reset here.

   List	Options
       Some options which store	lists of option	values can  have  action  suf-
       fixes.  For example, the	--display-tags option takes a ,-separated list
       of tags,	but the	option also allows you to append  a  single  tag  with
       --display-tags-append,  and the tag name	can for	example	contain	a lit-
       eral , without the need for escaping.

   String list and path	list options
       String lists are	separated by ,.	The strings are	not parsed  or	inter-
       preted by the option system itself. However, most

       Path or file list options use : (Unix) or ; (Windows) as	separator, in-
       stead of	,.

       They support the	following operations:

		       |Suffix	| Meaning		     |
		       |-set	| Set a	list of	items (using |
		       |	| the list separator, inter- |
		       |	| prets	escapes)	     |
		       |-append	| Append single	 item  (does |
		       |	| not interpret	escapes)     |
		       |-add	| Append  1  or	 more  items |
		       |	| (same	syntax as -set)	     |
		       |-pre	| Prepend 1  or	 more  items |
		       |	| (same	syntax as -set)	     |

		       |-clr	| Clear	 the  option (remove |
		       |	| all items)		     |
		       |-remove	| Delete  item	if   present |
		       |	| (does	 not  interpret	 es- |
		       |	| capes)		     |
		       |-del	| Delete 1 or more items  by |
		       |	| integer index	(deprecated) |
		       |-toggle	| Append  an item, or remove |
		       |	| if if	 it  already  exists |
		       |	| (no escapes)		     |

       -append is meant	as a simple way	to append a single item	without	having
       to escape the argument (you may still  need  to	escape	on  the	 shell

   Key/value list options
       A  key/value  list  is a	list of	key/value string pairs.	In programming
       languages, this type of data structure is often called a	map or a  dic-
       tionary.	The order normally does	not matter, although in	some cases the
       order might matter.

       They support the	following operations:

		       |Suffix	| Meaning		     |
		       |-set	| Set a	list of	items (using |
		       |	| , as separator)	     |
		       |-append	| Append  a single item	(es- |
		       |	| capes	for the	key, no	 es- |
		       |	| capes	for the	value)	     |
		       |-add	| Append  1  or	 more  items |
		       |	| (same	syntax as -set)	     |
		       |-remove	| Delete  item	by  key	  if |
		       |	| present  (does  not inter- |
		       |	| pret escapes)		     |

       Keys are	unique within the list.	If an already present key is set,  the
       existing	key is removed before the new value is appended.

       If  you	want to	pass a value without interpreting it for escapes or ,,
       it is recommended to use	the -add variant. When	using  libmpv,	prefer
       using  MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP;  when using a scripting backend or the JSON
       IPC, use	an appropriate structured data type.

       Prior to	mpv 0.33, : was	also recognized	as separator by	-set.

   Filter options
       This is a very complex option type for the --af and --vf	options	 only.
       They often require complicated escaping.	See VIDEO FILTERS for details.
       They support the	following operations:

		       |Suffix	| Meaning		     |
		       |-set	| Set a	list of	filters	(us- |
		       |	| ing ,	as separator)	     |
		       |-append	| Append single	filter	     |

		       |-add	| Append  1  or	more filters |
		       |	| (same	syntax as -set)	     |
		       |-pre	| Prepend 1 or more  filters |
		       |	| (same	syntax as -set)	     |
		       |-clr	| Clear	 the  option (remove |
		       |	| all filters)		     |
		       |-remove	| Delete filter	if present   |
		       |-del	| Delete 1 or  more  filters |
		       |	| by integer index or filter |
		       |	| label	(deprecated)	     |
		       |-toggle	| Append a filter, or remove |
		       |	| if if	it already exists    |
		       |-help	| Pseudo    operation	that |
		       |	| prints a help	text to	 the |
		       |	| terminal		     |

       Without suffix, the operation used is normally -set.

       Although	some operations	allow specifying multiple items, using this is
       strongly	discouraged and	deprecated, except for -set. There is a	chance
       that  operations	like -add and -pre will	work like -append and accept a
       single, unescaped item only (so the , separator will not	be interpreted
       and is passed on	as part	of the value).

       Some options (like --sub-file, --audio-file, --glsl-shader) are aliases
       for the proper option with -append action. For example,	--sub-file  is
       an alias	for --sub-files-append.

       Options	of  this  type can be changed at runtime using the change-list
       command,	which takes the	suffix (without	the -) as  separate  operation

   Location and	Syntax
       You  can	 put  all  of the options in configuration files which will be
       read  every  time  mpv  is  run.	 The  system-wide  configuration  file
       'mpv.conf'  is  in  your	 configuration	directory  (e.g.  /etc/mpv  or
       /usr/local/etc/mpv), the	user-specific one  is  ~/.config/mpv/mpv.conf.
       For  details  and  platform specifics (in particular Windows paths) see
       the FILES section.

       User-specific options override system-wide options and options given on
       the command line	override either. The syntax of the configuration files
       is option=value.	Everything after a # is	considered a comment.  Options
       that work without values	can be enabled by setting them to yes and dis-
       abled by	setting	them to	no. Even suboptions can	be specified  in  this

	  Example configuration	file

	      #	Use GPU-accelerated video output by default.
	      #	Use quotes for text that can contain spaces:
	      term-status-msg="Time: ${time-pos}"

   Escaping spaces and special characters
       This  is	done like with command line options. The shell is not involved
       here, but option	values still need to be	quoted as a whole if  it  con-
       tains certain characters	like spaces. A config entry can	be quoted with
       ", as well as with the fixed-length syntax (%n%)	mentioned before. This
       is like passing the exact contents of the quoted	string as command line
       option. C-style escapes are currently _not_ interpreted on this	level,
       although	 some  options	do  this  manually. (This is a mess and	should
       probably	be changed at some point.)

   Putting Command Line	Options	into the Configuration File
       Almost all command line options can be put into the configuration file.
       Here is a small guide:

		   |Option	      |	Configuration file entry |
		   |--flag	      |	flag			 |
		   |-opt val	      |	opt=val			 |
		   |--opt=val	      |	opt=val			 |
		   |-opt "has spaces" |	opt="has spaces"	 |

   File-specific Configuration Files
       You  can	 also  write file-specific configuration files.	If you wish to
       have a configuration file for a file called 'video.avi',	create a  file
       named  'video.avi.conf' with the	file-specific options in it and	put it
       in ~/.config/mpv/. You can also put the configuration file in the  same
       directory  as  the  file	 to  be	 played.  Both	require	you to set the
       --use-filedir-conf option (either on the	command	line or	in your	global
       config  file).  If  a  file-specific configuration file is found	in the
       same directory, no file-specific	configuration is loaded	 from  ~/.con-
       fig/mpv.	 In  addition,	the  --use-filedir-conf	 option	enables	direc-
       tory-specific configuration files.  For this, mpv first tries to	load a
       mpv.conf	 from  the same	directory as the file played and then tries to
       load any	file-specific configuration.

       To ease working with different configurations, profiles can be  defined
       in  the	configuration  files. A	profile	starts with its	name in	square
       brackets, e.g. [my-profile]. All	following options will be part of  the
       profile.	 A  description	 (shown	by --profile=help) can be defined with
       the profile-desc	option.	To end the profile, start another one  or  use
       the profile name	default	to continue with normal	options.

       You  can	 list profiles with --profile=help, and	show the contents of a
       profile with --show-profile=<name> (replace  <name>  with  the  profile
       name).  You  can	 apply profiles	on start with the --profile=<name> op-
       tion, or	at runtime with	the apply-profile <name> command.

	  Example mpv config file with profiles

	      #	normal top-level option

	      #	a profile that can be enabled with --profile=big-cache

	      profile-desc="some profile name"
	      #	reference a builtin profile


	      #	using a	profile	again extends it
	      #	you can	also include other profiles

   Runtime profiles
       Profiles	can be set at runtime with apply-profile command.  Since  this
       operation is "destructive" (every item in a profile is simply set as an
       option, overwriting the previous	value),	you can't just enable and dis-
       able profiles again.

       As  a  partial  remedy, there is	a way to make profiles save old	option
       values before overwriting  them	with  the  profile  values,  and  then
       restoring  the  old  values  at a later point using apply-profile <pro-
       file-name> restore.

       This can	be enabled with	the profile-restore option, which takes	one of
       the following options:

		 Does nothing, and nothing can be restored (default).

	  copy	 When  applying	 a profile, copy the old values	of all profile
		 options to a backup before setting  them  from	 the  profile.
		 These	options	are reset to their old values using the	backup
		 when restoring.

		 Every profile has its own list	of backed up  values.  If  the
		 backup	 already exists	(e.g. if apply-profile name was	called
		 more than once	in a row), the existing	backup is no  changed.
		 The restore operation will remove the backup.

		 It's important	to know	that restoring does not	"undo" setting
		 an option, but	simply copies the old option  value.  Consider
		 for  example  vf-add,	appends	an entry to vf.	This mechanism
		 will simply copy the entire vf	list, and does	_not_  execute
		 the inverse of	vf-add (that would be vf-remove) on restoring.

		 Note  that  if	a profile contains recursive profiles (via the
		 profile option), the options in these recursive profiles  are
		 treated  as if	they were part of this profile.	The referenced
		 profile's backup list is not used when	creating or using  the
		 backup.  Restoring a profile does not restore referenced pro-
		 files,	only the options of referenced profiles	 (as  if  they
		 were part of the main profile).

		 Similar  to  copy,  but  restore an option only if it has the
		 same value as the value effectively set by the	profile.  This
		 tries	to deal	with the situation when	the user does not want
		 the option to be reset	after interactively changing it.



	  Then running these commands will result in behavior as commented:

	      set vf vflip
	      apply-profile something
	      apply-profile something
	      #	vf == vflip,rotate=90,hflip,rotate=90
	      apply-profile something restore
	      #	vf == vflip

   Conditional auto profiles
       Profiles	which have the profile-cond option set are  applied  automati-
       cally  if  the  associated  condition matches (unless auto profiles are
       disabled). The option takes a string, which is interpreted as Lua  con-
       dition.	If  evaluating the expression returns true, the	profile	is ap-
       plied, if it returns false, it is ignored. This Lua code	 execution  is
       not sandboxed.

       Any  variables in condition expressions can reference properties. If an
       identifier is not already defined by Lua	or mpv,	it is  interpreted  as
       property.  For example, pause would return the current pause status. If
       the variable name contains any _	characters, they are  turned  into  -.
       For example, playback_time would	return the property playback-time.

       A  more	robust	way  to	 access	properties is using p.property_name or
       get("property-name", default_value). The	automatic variable to property
       magic  will  break if a new identifier with the same name is introduced
       (for example, if	a function named pause() were added, pause  would  re-
       turn a function value instead of	the value of the pause property).

       Note that if a property is not available, it will return	nil, which can
       cause errors if used in expressions. These are logged in	verbose	 mode,
       and the expression is considered	to be false.

       Whenever	a property referenced by a profile condition changes, the con-
       dition is re-evaluated. If the return value of  the  condition  changes
       from false or error to true, the	profile	is applied.

       This  mechanism	tries to "unapply" profiles once the condition changes
       from true to false. If you want to use  this,  you  need	 to  set  pro-
       file-restore  for the profile. Another possibility it to	create another
       profile with an inverse condition to undo the other profile.

       Recursive profiles can be used. But  it	is  discouraged	 to  reference
       other  conditional  profiles  in	 a conditional profile,	since this can
       lead to tricky and unintuitive behavior.


		 Make only HD video look funny:

	      profile-desc=HD video sucks
	      profile-cond=width >= 1280

	  If you want the profile to be	reverted  if  the  condition  goes  to
	  false	again, you can set profile-restore:

	      profile-desc=Mess	up video when entering fullscreen

	  This appends the rotate filter to the	video filter chain when	enter-
	  ing fullscreen. When leaving fullscreen, the vf option is set	to the
	  value	 it  had before	entering fullscreen. Note that this would also
	  remove any other filters that	were added during fullscreen  mode  by
	  the user. Avoiding this is trickier, and could for example be	solved
	  by adding a second profile with an inverse condition and operation:


	      profile-cond=not fullscreen

	  Every	time an	involved property changes, the condition is  evaluated
	  again.  If your condition uses p.playback_time for example, the con-
	  dition is re-evaluated approximately on every	video frame.  This  is
	  probably slow.

       This  feature is	managed	by an internal Lua script. Conditions are exe-
       cuted as	Lua code within	this script. Its environment contains at least
       the following things:

       (function environment table)
	      Every  Lua  function  has	an environment table. This is used for
	      identifier access. There is no named Lua symbol for  it;	it  is

	      The  environment	does "magic" accesses to mpv properties. If an
	      identifier is not	already	defined	in _G, it  retrieves  the  mpv
	      property	of the same name. Any occurrences of _ in the name are
	      replaced with - before reading the property. The returned	 value
	      is  as  retrieved	by mp.get_property_native(name). Internally, a
	      cache of property	values,	updated	by observing the  property  is
	      used  instead,  so  properties  that  are	not observable will be
	      stuck at the initial value forever.

	      If you want to access properties,	that actually contain _	in the
	      name, use	get() (which does not perform transliteration).

	      Internally, the environment table	has a __index meta method set,
	      which performs the access	logic.

       p      A	"magic"	table similar to the  environment  table.  Unlike  the
	      latter, this does	not prefer accessing variables defined in _G -
	      it always	accesses properties.

       get(name	[, def])
	      Read a property and return its value. If the property  value  is
	      nil (e.g.	 if the	property does not exist), def is returned.

	      This  is	superficially similar to mp.get_property_native(name).
	      An important difference  is  that	 this  accesses	 the  property
	      cache,  and  enables the change detection	logic (which is	essen-
	      tial to the dynamic runtime behavior of auto profiles). Also, it
	      does not return an error value as	second return value.

	      The "magic" tables mentioned above use this function as backend.
	      It does not perform the _	transliteration.

       In addition, the	same environment as in	a  blank  mpv  Lua  script  is
       present.	For example, math is defined and gives access to the Lua stan-
       dard math library.

	  This feature is subject to change indefinitely. You might be	forced
	  to adjust your profiles on mpv updates.

   Legacy auto profiles
       Some  profiles  are  loaded automatically using a legacy	mechanism. The
       following example demonstrates this:

	  Auto profile loading

	      profile-desc="profile for	.mkv files"

       The profile name	follows	the schema, where type can be	proto-
       col  for	 the  input/output protocol in use (see	--list-protocols), and
       extension for the extension of the path of the  currently  played  file
       (not the	file format).

       This  feature  is  very limited,	and is considered soft-deprecated. Use
       conditional auto	profiles.

       There are three choices for using mpv from other	programs or scripts:

	  1. Calling it	as UNIX	process. If you	do this, do not	parse terminal
	     output.   The  terminal  output  is  intended for humans, and may
	     change any	time. In addition, terminal behavior itself may	change
	     any time. Compatibility cannot be guaranteed.

	     Your  code	should work even if you	pass --no-terminal. Do not at-
	     tempt to simulate user input by sending terminal control codes to
	     mpv's  stdin.   If	 you  need  interactive	 control,  using --in-
	     put-ipc-server is recommended. This gives you access to the  JSON
	     IPC  over unix domain sockets (or named pipes on Windows).

	     Depending on what you do, passing --no-config or --config-dir may
	     be	a good idea to avoid conflicts with the	normal mpv  user  con-
	     figuration	intended for CLI playback.

	     Using  --input-ipc-server	is also	suitable for purposes like re-
	     mote control (however, the	IPC protocol itself  is	 not  "secure"
	     and not intended to be so).

	  2. Using  libmpv.  This is generally recommended when	mpv is used as
	     playback backend for a completely different application. The pro-
	     vided  C  API  is	very close to CLI mechanisms and the scripting

	     Note that even though libmpv has different	defaults,  it  can  be
	     configured	 to  work  exactly like	the CLI	player (except command
	     line parsing is unavailable).


	  3. As	a user script (LUA SCRIPTING, JAVASCRIPT, C PLUGINS). This  is
	     recommended when the goal is to "enhance" the CLI player. Scripts
	     get access	to the entire client API of mpv.

	     This is the standard way to create	third-party extensions for the

       All these access	the client API,	which is the sum of the	various	mecha-
       nisms provided by the player core, as documented	here: OPTIONS, List of
       Input Commands, Properties, List	of events (also	see C API), Hooks.

       Screenshots  of	the  currently	played	file  can  be  taken using the
       'screenshot' input mode command,	which is by default  bound  to	the  s
       key.  Files  named mpv-shotNNNN.jpg will	be saved in the	working	direc-
       tory, using the first available number -	no files will be  overwritten.
       In  pseudo-GUI  mode,  the screenshot will be saved somewhere else. See

       A screenshot will usually contain the unscaled video  contents  at  the
       end  of	the  video  filter  chain  and	subtitles. By default, S takes
       screenshots without subtitles, while s includes subtitles.

       Unlike with MPlayer, the	screenshot video filter	is not required.  This
       filter was never	required in mpv, and has been removed.

       During  playback,  mpv  shows  the  playback status on the terminal. It
       looks like something like this:
	  AV: 00:03:12 / 00:24:25 (13%)	A-V: -0.000

       The status line can be overridden with the --term-status-msg option.

       The following is	a list of things that can show up in the status	 line.
       Input  properties,  that	 can be	used to	get the	same information manu-
       ally, are also listed.

       o AV: or	V: (video only)	or A: (audio only)

       o The current time position in HH:MM:SS format (playback-time property)

       o The total file	duration (absent if unknown) (duration property)

       o Playback speed, e.g. `` x2.0``. Only visible if the speed is not nor-
	 mal.  This  is	 the  user-requested  speed,  and not the actual speed
	 (usually they should be the  same,  unless  playback  is  too	slow).
	 (speed	property.)

       o Playback  percentage,	e.g.  (13%).  How  much	 of  the file has been
	 played.  Normally calculated out of playback position	and  duration,
	 but  can  fallback to other methods (like byte	position) if these are
	 not available.	 (percent-pos property.)

       o The audio/video sync as A-V:  0.000. This is the  difference  between
	 audio	and video time.	Normally it should be 0	or close to 0. If it's
	 growing, it might indicate a playback problem.	(avsync	property.)

       o Total A/V sync	change,	e.g. ct: -0.417. Normally invisible. Can  show
	 up  if	there is audio "missing", or not enough	frames can be dropped.
	 Usually this will indicate a problem. (total-avsync-change property.)

       o Encoding state	in {...}, only shown in	encoding mode.

       o Display sync state. If	display	sync  is  active  (display-sync-active
	 property), this shows DS: 2.500/13, where the first number is average
	 number	of vsyncs per video frame (e.g.	2.5 when playing  24Hz	videos
	 on  60Hz screens), which might	jitter if the ratio doesn't round off,
	 or there are mistimed frames (vsync-ratio), and the second number  of
	 estimated   number   of   vsyncs   which   took   too	 long  (vo-de-
	 layed-frame-count property). The latter is a heuristic, as it's  gen-
	 erally	not possible to	determine this with certainty.

       o Dropped frames, e.g. Dropped: 4. Shows	up only	if the count is	not 0.
	 Can grow if the video framerate is higher than	that of	 the  display,
	 or  if	 video rendering is too	slow. May also be incremented on "hic-
	 cups" and when	 the  video  frame  couldn't  be  displayed  on	 time.
	 (frame-drop-count property.)  If the decoder drops frames, the	number
	 of decoder-dropped frames is appended to the display as  well,	 e.g.:
	 Dropped: 4/34.	This happens only if decoder frame dropping is enabled
	 with the --framedrop options.	(decoder-frame-drop-count property.)

       o Cache state, e.g. Cache:  2s/134KB. Visible if	the  stream  cache  is
	 enabled.   The	 first value shows the amount of video buffered	in the
	 demuxer in seconds, the second	value shows the	estimated size of  the
	 buffered   amount  in	kilobytes.   (demuxer-cache-duration  and  de-
	 muxer-cache-state properties.)

       mpv is optimized	for normal video playback, meaning it  actually	 tries
       to  buffer  as  much data as it seems to	make sense. This will increase
       latency.	Reducing latency is possible only  by  specifically  disabling
       features	which increase latency.

       The  builtin  low-latency  profile  tries  to apply some	of the options
       which can reduce	latency. You can use  --profile=low-latency  to	 apply
       all  of them. You can list the contents with --show-profile=low-latency
       (some of	the options are	quite obscure, and may change  every  mpv  re-

       Be aware	that some of the options can reduce playback quality.

       Most  latency  is  actually caused by inconvenient timing behavior. You
       can disable this	with --untimed,	but it will likely break,  unless  the
       stream  has  no audio, and the input feeds data to the player at	a con-
       stant rate.

       Another common problem is with MJPEG streams. These do not  signal  the
       correct	framerate.  Using --untimed or --no-correct-pts	--fps=60 might

       For livestreams,	data can build up due to pausing the  stream,  due  to
       slightly	 lower	playback  rate,	 or "buffering"	pauses.	If the demuxer
       cache is	enabled, these	can  be	 skipped  manually.  The  experimental
       drop-buffers  command  can be used to discard any buffered data,	though
       it's very disruptive.

       In some cases, manually tuning TCP buffer sizes and such	 can  help  to
       reduce latency.

       Additional options that can be tried:

       o --opengl-glfinish=yes,	can reduce buffering in	the graphics driver

       o --opengl-swapinterval=0, same

       o --vo=xv, same

       o without  audio	 --framedrop=no	--speed=1.01 may help for live sources
	 (results can be mixed)

       http://..., https://, ...
	  Many network protocols are supported,	but the	protocol  prefix  must
	  always be specified. mpv will	never attempt to guess whether a file-
	  name is actually a network address. A	protocol prefix	is always  re-

	  Note	that  not  all prefixes	are documented here. Undocumented pre-
	  fixes	are either aliases to documented protocols, or are just	 redi-
	  rections to protocols	implemented and	documented in FFmpeg.

	  data:	 is supported in FFmpeg	(not in	Libav),	but needs to be	in the
	  format data://. This is done to avoid	ambiguity with filenames.  You
	  can also prefix it with lavf:// or ffmpeg://.

	  By  default,	the youtube-dl hook script only	looks at http(s) URLs.
	  Prefixing an URL with	ytdl://	forces it to be	 always	 processed  by
	  the script. This can also be used to invoke special youtube-dl func-
	  tionality like playing a video by ID or invoking search.

	  Keep in mind that you	can't pass youtube-dl command line options  by
	  this,	and you	have to	use --ytdl-raw-options instead.

	  Play data from stdin.

	  Play a path from  Samba share. (Requires FFmpeg support.)

       bd://[title][/device] --bluray-device=PATH
	  Play	a  Blu-ray  disc. Since	libbluray 1.0.1, you can read from ISO
	  files	by passing them	to --bluray-device.

	  title	can be:	longest	 or  first  (selects  the  default  playlist);
	  mpls/<number>	 (selects  <number>.mpls  playlist);  <number> (select
	  playlist with	the same index). mpv will list the available playlists
	  on loading.

	  bluray:// is an alias.

       dvd://[title][/device] --dvd-device=PATH
	  Play	a  DVD.	DVD menus are not supported. If	no title is given, the
	  longest title	is auto-selected. Without --dvd-device,	it will	proba-
	  bly  try  to	open  an actual	optical	drive, if available and	imple-
	  mented for the OS.

	  dvdnav:// is an old alias for	 dvd://	 and  does  exactly  the  same

       dvb://[cardnumber@]channel --dvbin-...
	  Digital TV via DVB. (Linux only.)

       mf://[filemask|@listfile] --mf-...
	  Play a series	of images as video.

       cdda://[device] --cdrom-device=PATH --cdda-...
	  Play CD.

	  Access any FFmpeg/Libav libavformat protocol.	Basically, this	passed
	  the string after the // directly to libavformat.

	  This is intended for using libavdevice inputs. type is the  libavde-
	  vice	demuxer	 name,	and options is the (pseudo-)filename passed to
	  the demuxer.


		 mpv av://v4l2:/dev/video0 --profile=low-latency --untimed

	      This plays video from the	first v4l input	with nearly the	lowest
	      latency  possible. It's a	good replacement for the removed tv://
	      input.  Using --untimed is a hack	to output a captured frame im-
	      mediately, instead of respecting the input framerate. (There may
	      be better	ways to	handle this in the future.)

	  avdevice:// is an alias.

	  A local path as URL. Might be	useful in some special use-cases. Note
	  that PATH itself should start	with a third / to make the path	an ab-
	  solute path.

	  Play a local file, but assume	it's being appended to.	This is	useful
	  for  example	for files that are currently being downloaded to disk.
	  This will block playback, and	stop playback only if no new data  was
	  appended after a timeout of about 2 seconds.

	  Using	 this is still a bit of	a bad idea, because there is no	way to
	  detect if a file is actually being appended, or if it's still	 writ-
	  ten.	If you're trying to play the  output of	some program, consider
	  using	a pipe (something | mpv	-). If it really has to	be a  file  on
	  disk,	 use tail to make it wait forever, e.g.	tail -f	-c +0 file.mkv
	  | mpv	-.

	  Read data from the given file	descriptor (for	example	123). This  is
	  similar to piping data to stdin via -, but can use an	arbitrary file
	  descriptor.  mpv may modify some file	descriptor properties when the
	  stream layer "opens" it.

	  Like	fd://, but the file descriptor is closed after use. When using
	  this you need	to ensure that the same	fd URL will only be used once.

       edl://[edl specification	as in edl-mpv.rst]
	  Stitch together parts	of multiple files and play them.

	  Read a slice of a stream.

	  start	and end	represent a byte range and accept suffixes such	as KiB
	  and MiB. end is optional.

	  if end starts	with +,	it is considered as offset from	start.

	  Only works with seekable streams.


	      mpv slice://1g-2g@cap.ts

	      This starts reading from cap.ts after seeking 1 GiB, then
	      reads until reaching 2 GiB or end	of file.

	      mpv slice://1g-+2g@cap.ts

	      This starts reading from cap.ts after seeking 1 GiB, then
	      reads until reaching 3 GiB or end	of file.

	      mpv slice://100m@appending://cap.ts

	      This starts reading from cap.ts after seeking 100MiB, then
	      reads until end of file.

	  Simulate  an	empty file. If opened for writing, it will discard all
	  data.	 The null demuxer will specifically pass autoprobing  if  this
	  protocol  is	used  (while  it's not automatically invoked for empty

	  Use the data part as source data.

	  Like memory://, but the string is interpreted	as hexdump.

       mpv has no official GUI,	other than the	OSC  (ON  SCREEN  CONTROLLER),
       which  is not a full GUI	and is not meant to be.	However, to compensate
       for the lack of expected	GUI behavior, mpv will	in  some  cases	 start
       with some settings changed to behave slightly more like a GUI mode.

       Currently this happens only in the following cases:

       o if  started  using  the  mpv.desktop file on Linux (e.g. started from
	 menus or file associations provided by	desktop	environments)

       o if started from explorer.exe  on  Windows  (technically,  if  it  was
	 started  on  Windows,	and all	of the stdout/stderr/stdin handles are

       o started out of	the bundle on OSX

       o if you	manually use --player-operation-mode=pseudo-gui	on the command

       This  mode applies options from the builtin profile builtin-pseudo-gui,
       but only	if these haven't been set in the user's	config file or on  the
       command	 line,	 which	 is   the  main	 difference  to	 using	--pro-

       The profile is currently	defined	as follows:


       The pseudo-gui profile exists for compatibility.	 The  options  in  the
       pseudo-gui  profile  are	applied	unconditionally. In addition, the pro-
       file  makes  sure  to  enable  the  pseudo-GUI  mode,  so  that	--pro-
       file=pseudo-gui works like in older mpv releases:


	  Currently,  you can extend the pseudo-gui profile in the config file
	  the normal way. This is deprecated. In future	mpv releases, the  be-
	  havior  might	change,	and not	apply your additional settings,	and/or
	  use a	different profile name.

       This subsection describes common	problems on the	Linux desktop. None of
       these problems exist on systems like Windows or OSX.

   Disabling Screensaver
       By  default,  mpv  tries	 to disable the	OS screensaver during playback
       (only if	a VO using the OS GUI API  is  active).	 --stop-screensaver=no
       disables	this.

       A common	problem	is that	Linux desktop environments ignore the standard
       screensaver APIs	on which mpv  relies.  In  particular,	mpv  uses  the
       Screen Saver extension (XSS) on X11, and	the idle-inhibit on Wayland.

       GNOME  is  one  of the worst offenders, and ignores even	the now	widely
       supported idle-inhibit protocol.	(This is either	due to	a  combination
       of  malice and incompetence, but	since implementing this	protocol would
       only take a few lines of	code, it is most likely	the former.  You  will
       also  notice how	GNOME advocates	react offended whenever	their sabotage
       is pointed out, which indicates either hypocrisy, or even  worse	 igno-

       Such  incompatible  desktop  environments (i.e. which ignore standards)
       typically require using a DBus API. This	is ridiculous in several ways.
       The immediate practical problem is that it would	require	adding a quite
       unwieldy	dependency for a DBus library, somehow integrating  its	 main-
       loop into mpv, and other	generally unacceptable things.

       However,	 since mpv does	not officially support GNOME, this is not much
       of a problem. If	you are	one of those miserable users who want  to  use
       mpv   on	  GNOME,   report   a	bug   on   the	GNOME  issue  tracker:

       Alternatively, you may be able to write a Lua  script  that  calls  the
       xdg-screensaver	command	line program. (By the way, this	a command line
       program is an utterly horrible kludge that tries	to identify  your  DE,
       and  then  tries	to send	the correct DBus command via a DBus CLI	tool.)
       If you find the idea of having to write a script	just so	 your  screen-
       saver  doesn't kick in ridiculous, do not use GNOME, or use GNOME video
       software	instead	of mpv (good luck).

       Before mpv 0.33.0, the X11 backend ran xdg-screensaver reset in 10 sec-
       ond intervals when not paused. This hack	was removed in 0.33.0.

   Track Selection
	      Specify  a  priority  list  of audio languages to	use. Different
	      container	formats	employ different language codes. DVDs use  ISO
	      639-1  two-letter	 language codes, Matroska, MPEG-TS and NUT use
	      ISO  639-2  three-letter	language  codes,  while	 OGM  uses   a
	      free-form	identifier. See	also --aid.

	      This is a	string list option. See	List Options for details.


		 o mpv	dvd://1	 --alang=hu,en	chooses	the Hungarian language
		   track on a DVD and falls back on English  if	 Hungarian  is
		   not available.

		 o mpv	--alang=jpn example.mkv	plays a	Matroska file with Ja-
		   panese audio.

	      Specify a	priority list of subtitle languages to use.  Different
	      container	 formats employ	different language codes. DVDs use ISO
	      639-1 two	letter language	codes, Matroska	uses ISO  639-2	 three
	      letter language codes while OGM uses a free-form identifier. See
	      also --sid.

	      This is a	string list option. See	List Options for details.


		 o mpv dvd://1 --slang=hu,en chooses  the  Hungarian  subtitle
		   track  on  a	 DVD and falls back on English if Hungarian is
		   not available.

		 o mpv --slang=jpn example.mkv plays a Matroska	file with  Ja-
		   panese subtitles.

	      Equivalent to --alang and	--slang, for video tracks.

	      This is a	string list option. See	List Options for details.

	      Select audio track. auto selects the default, no disables	audio.
	      See also --alang.	mpv normally prints available audio tracks  on
	      the terminal when	starting playback of a file.

	      --audio is an alias for --aid.

	      --aid=no	or  --audio=no	or --no-audio disables audio playback.
	      (The latter variant does not work	with the client	API.)

		 The track selection options (--aid but	 also  --sid  and  the
		 others)  sometimes  expose  behavior that may appear strange.
		 Also, the behavior tends to change around with	each  mpv  re-

		 The  track  selection properties will return the option value
		 outside of playback (as expected), but	 during	 playbac,  the
		 affective  track  selection  is  returned.  For example, with
		 --aid=auto, the aid property will  suddenly  return  2	 after
		 playback initialization (assuming the file has	at least 2 au-
		 dio tracks, and the second is the default).

		 At mpv	0.32.0 (and some releases before),  if	you  passed  a
		 track	value  for  which  a  corresponding track didn't exist
		 (e.g. --aid=2 and there was only  1  audio  track),  the  aid
		 property  returned  no.  However  if  another audio track was
		 added during playback,	and you	tried to set the aid  property
		 to  2,	nothing	happened, because the aid option still had the
		 value 2, and writing the same value has no effect.

		 With mpv 0.33.0, the behavior was changed. Now	 track	selec-
		 tion options are reset	to auto	at playback initialization, if
		 the option had	tries to select	a track	that does  not	exist.
		 The  same  is done if the track exists, but fails to initial-
		 ize. The consequence is that unlike before  mpv  0.33.0,  the
		 user's	 track	selection  parameters are clobbered in certain

		 Also since mpv	0.33.0,	trying to select  a  track  by	number
		 will  strictly	 select	this track. Before this	change,	trying
		 to select a track which did not  exist	 would	fall  back  to
		 track	default	 selection at playback initialization. The new
		 behavior is more consistent.

		 Setting a track selection property at runtime,	and then play-
		 ing  a	 new file might	reset the track	selection to defaults,
		 if the	fingerprint of the track list of the new file is  dif-

		 Be  aware  of tricky combinations of all of all of the	above:
		 for   example,	  mpv	--aid=2	  file_with_2_audio_tracks.mkv
		 file_with_1_audio_track.mkv  would  first  play  the  correct
		 track,	and the	second file without audio.   If	 you  then  go
		 back  the  first  file, its first audio track will be played,
		 and the second	file is	played with audio. If you do the  same
		 thing	again  but  instead of using --aid=2 you run set aid 2
		 while the file	is playing, then changing to the  second  file
		 will play its audio track.  This is because runtime selection
		 enables the fingerprint heuristic.

		 Most likely this is not the end.

	      Display the subtitle stream specified by <ID>. auto selects  the
	      default, no disables subtitles.

	      --sub is an alias	for --sid.

	      --sid=no	or  --sub=no  or  --no-sub disables subtitle decoding.
	      (The latter variant does not work	with the client	API.)

	      Select video channel. auto  selects  the	default,  no  disables

	      --video is an alias for --vid.

	      --vid=no	or  --video=no	or --no-video disables video playback.
	      (The latter variant does not work	with the client	API.)

	      If video is disabled, mpv	will try to download the audio only if
	      media  is	 streamed with youtube-dl, because it saves bandwidth.
	      This is done by setting the ytdl_format to  "bestaudio/best"  in
	      the ytdl_hook.lua	script.

	      (Matroska	 files	only) Specify the edition (set of chapters) to
	      use, where 0 is the first. If set	to  auto  (the	default),  mpv
	      will choose the first edition declared as	a default, or if there
	      is no default, the first edition defined.

	      Enable the default track auto-selection (default:	yes). Enabling
	      this  will  make	the  player select streams according to	--aid,
	      --alang, and others. If it is disabled, no tracks	are  selected.
	      In addition, the player will not exit if no tracks are selected,
	      and wait instead (this wait mode is similar to pausing, but  the
	      pause option is not set).

	      This  is	useful with --lavfi-complex: you can start playback in
	      this mode, and then set select tracks at runtime by setting  the
	      filter  graph.  Note that	if --lavfi-complex is set before play-
	      back is started, the referenced tracks are always	selected.

	      When autoselecting a subtitle track,  select  a  non-forced  one
	      even  if the selected audio stream matches your preferred	subti-
	      tle language (default: yes). Disable this	if you'd like to  only
	      show subtitles for foreign audio or onscreen text.

   Playback Control
       --start=<relative time>
	      Seek to given time position.

	      The  general  format for times is	[+|-][[hh:]mm:]ss[.ms].	If the
	      time is prefixed with -, the time	is  considered	relative  from
	      the  end	of the file (as	signaled by the	demuxer/the file). A +
	      is usually ignored (but see below).

	      The following alternative	time specifications are	recognized:

	      pp% seeks	to percent position pp (0-100).

	      #c seeks to chapter number c. (Chapters start from 1.)

	      none resets any previously set option (useful for	libmpv).

	      If --rebase-start-time=no	is given, then prefixing times with  +
	      makes  the  time	relative to the	start of the file. A timestamp
	      without prefix is	considered an absolute time, i.e. should  seek
	      to  a  frame with	a timestamp as the file	contains it. As	a bug,
	      but also a hidden	feature, putting 1 or more spaces before the +
	      or  -  always interprets the time	as absolute, which can be used
	      to seek to negative timestamps (useful for debugging at most).


		 --start=+56, --start=00:56
			Seeks to the start time	+ 56 seconds.

		 --start=-56, --start=-00:56
			Seeks to the end time -	56 seconds.

			Seeks to 1 hour	10 min.

			Seeks to the middle of the file.

		 --start=30 --end=40
			Seeks to 30 seconds, plays 10 seconds, and exits.

		 --start=-3:20 --length=10
			Seeks to 3 minutes and 20 seconds before  the  end  of
			the file, plays	10 seconds, and	exits.

		 --start='#2' --end='#4'
			Plays chapters 2 and 3,	and exits.

       --end=<relative time>
	      Stop  at given time. Use --length	if the time should be relative
	      to --start. See --start for valid	option values and examples.

       --length=<relative time>
	      Stop after a given time relative to the start time.  See --start
	      for valid	option values and examples.

	      If both --end and	--length are provided, playback	will stop when
	      it reaches either	of the two endpoints.

	      Obscurity	 note:	this  does  not	 work	correctly   if	 --re-
	      base-start-time=no,  and the specified time is not an "absolute"
	      time, as defined in the --start option description.

	      Whether to move the file start time to 00:00:00 (default:	 yes).
	      This  is	less  awkward  for files which start at	a random time-
	      stamp, such as transport streams.	On the other  hand,  if	 there
	      are  timestamp  resets,  the  resulting  behavior	 can be	rather
	      weird. For this reason, and in case you are actually  interested
	      in the real timestamps, this behavior can	be disabled with no.

	      Slow down	or speed up playback by	the factor given as parameter.

	      If  --audio-pitch-correction  (on	 by  default) is used, playing
	      with a  speed  higher  than  normal  automatically  inserts  the
	      scaletempo audio filter.

	      Start the	player in paused state.

	      Play files in random order.

	      Set  which file on the internal playlist to start	playback with.
	      The index	is an integer, with 0  meaning	the  first  file.  The
	      value auto means that the	selection of the entry to play is left
	      to the playback resume mechanism (default). If an	entry with the
	      given index doesn't exist, the behavior is unspecified and might
	      change in	future mpv versions. The same applies if the  playlist
	      contains	further	 playlists (don't expect any reasonable	behav-
	      ior). Passing a playlist file to mpv should work with  this  op-
	      tion,  though.  E.g.  mpv	playlist.m3u --playlist-start=123 will
	      work as expected,	as long	as playlist.m3u	does not link to  fur-
	      ther playlists.

	      The value	no is a	deprecated alias for auto.

	      Play  files  according  to a playlist file. Supports some	common
	      formats. If no format is detected, it will be treated as list of
	      files, separated by newline characters. You may need this	option
	      to load plaintext	files as a playlist. Note  that	 XML  playlist
	      formats are not supported.

	      This  option forces --demuxer=playlist to	interpret the playlist
	      file.  Some playlist formats, notably CUE	and optical disc  for-
	      mats, need to use	different demuxers and will not	work with this
	      option. They still can be	played directly,  without  using  this

	      You can play playlists directly, without this option. Before mpv
	      version 0.31.0, this option  disabled  any  security  mechanisms
	      that  might be in	place, but since 0.31.0	it uses	the same secu-
	      rity mechanisms as playing a  playlist  file  directly.  If  you
	      trust  the  playlist  file,  you can disable any security	checks
	      with --load-unsafe-playlists. Because playlists can  load	 other
	      playlist	entries,  consider  applying  this  option only	to the
	      playlist itself and not its entries, using something along these
		 mpv --{ --playlist=filename --load-unsafe-playlists --}

		 The  way  older  versions  of	mpv  played playlist files via
		 --playlist  was  not  safe  against  maliciously  constructed
		 files.	 Such files may	trigger	harmful	actions. This has been
		 the case for all verions of mpv  prior	 to  0.31.0,  and  all
		 MPlayer  versions,  but  unfortunately	this fact was not well
		 documented earlier, and some  people  have  even  misguidedly
		 recommended  the use of --playlist with untrusted sources. Do
		 NOT use --playlist with random	internet sources or files  you
		 do not	trust if you are not sure your mpv is at least 0.31.0.

		 In  particular, playlists can contain entries using protocols
		 other than local files, such as special protocols like	 avde-
		 vice:// (which	are inherently unsafe).

	      Threshold	 for  merging almost consecutive ordered chapter parts
	      in milliseconds (default:	100). Some Matroska files with ordered
	      chapters have inaccurate chapter end timestamps, causing a small
	      gap between the end of one chapter and the start of the next one
	      when they	should match.  If the end of one playback part is less
	      than the given threshold away from the start  of	the  next  one
	      then keep	playing	video normally over the	chapter	change instead
	      of doing a seek.

	      Distance in seconds from the beginning of	a chapter within which
	      a	 backward  chapter  seek  will go to the previous chapter (de-
	      fault: 5.0). Past	this threshold,	a backward chapter  seek  will
	      go  to  the beginning of the current chapter instead. A negative
	      value means always go back to the	previous chapter.

	      Select when to  use  precise  seeks  that	 are  not  limited  to
	      keyframes.  Such	seeks require decoding video from the previous
	      keyframe up to the target	position and so	can take some time de-
	      pending on decoding performance. For some	video formats, precise
	      seeks are	disabled. This option selects the  default  choice  to
	      use  for	seeks;	it is possible to explicitly override that de-
	      fault in the definition of key bindings and in input commands.

	      no     Never use precise seeks.

		     Use precise seeks if the seek is to an absolute  position
		     in	the file, such as a chapter seek, but not for relative
		     seeks like	the default behavior of	arrow keys (default).

		     Like absolute, but	enable hr-seeks	in  audio-only	cases.
		     The  exact	 behavior  is  implementation specific and may
		     change with new releases.

	      yes    Use precise seeks whenever	possible.

	      always Same as yes (for compatibility).

	      This option exists to work around	failures to do	precise	 seeks
	      (as  in --hr-seek) caused	by bugs	or limitations in the demuxers
	      for some file formats. Some demuxers fail	to seek	to a  keyframe
	      before  the given	target position, going to a later position in-
	      stead. The value of this option  is  subtracted  from  the  time
	      stamp  given to the demuxer. Thus, if you	set this option	to 1.5
	      and try to do a precise seek to 60 seconds, the demuxer is  told
	      to seek to time 58.5, which hopefully reduces the	chance that it
	      erroneously goes to some time later than 60 seconds.  The	 down-
	      side of setting this option is that precise seeks	become slower,
	      as video between the earlier demuxer position and	the real  tar-
	      get may be unnecessarily decoded.

	      Allow  the  video	 decoder  to drop frames during	seek, if these
	      frames are before	the seek target. If this is  enabled,  precise
	      seeking  can  be faster, but if you're using video filters which
	      modify timestamps	or add new frames,  it	can  lead  to  precise
	      seeking  skipping	 the  target  frame. This e.g. can break frame
	      backstepping when	deinterlacing is enabled.

	      Default: yes

	      Controls how to seek in files. Note that if the index is missing
	      from  a  file,  it  will	be built on the	fly by default,	so you
	      don't need to change this. But it	might help  with  some	broken

		     use an index if the file has one, or build	it if missing

		     don't read	or use the file's index

		 This option only works	if the underlying media	supports seek-
		 ing (i.e. not with stdin, pipe, etc).

	      Load URLs	from playlists which are considered  unsafe  (default:
	      no).  This  includes special protocols and anything that doesn't
	      refer to normal files.  Local files and HTTP links on the	 other
	      hand are always considered safe.

	      In  addition,  if	 a  playlist  is loaded	while this is set, the
	      added playlist entries are not marked as originating  from  net-
	      work  or	potentially unsafe location. (Instead, the behavior is
	      as if the	playlist entries were provided directly	to mpv command
	      line or loadfile command.)

	      Follow  any  references in the file being	opened (default: yes).
	      Disabling	this is	helpful	if the file is	automatically  scanned
	      (e.g.  thumbnail generation). If the thumbnail scanner for exam-
	      ple encounters a playlist	file, which contains network URLs, and
	      the  scanner  should  not	 open these, enabling this option will
	      prevent it. This option also disables ordered chapters, mov ref-
	      erence  files,  opening  of archives, and	a number of other fea-

	      On older FFmpeg versions,	this will not work in some cases. Some
	      FFmpeg demuxers might not	respect	this option.

	      This  option  does  not prevent opening of paired	subtitle files
	      and such.	Use --autoload-files=no	to prevent this.

	      This option does not always work if you open non-files (for  ex-
	      ample using dvd://directory would	open a whole bunch of files in
	      the given	directory). Prefixing  the  filename  with  ./	if  it
	      doesn't start with a / will avoid	this.

       --loop-playlist=<N|inf|force|no>, --loop-playlist
	      Loops  playback  N  times.  A  value of 1	plays it one time (de-
	      fault), 2	two times, etc.	inf means forever. no is the same as 1
	      and  disables looping. If	several	files are specified on command
	      line, the	entire playlist	is looped. --loop-playlist is the same
	      as --loop-playlist=inf.

	      The  force  mode is like inf, but	does not skip playlist entries
	      which have been marked as	failing. This means the	 player	 might
	      waste  CPU time trying to	loop a file that doesn't exist.	But it
	      might be useful for playing webradios  under  very  bad  network

       --loop-file=<N|inf|no>, --loop=<N|inf|no>
	      Loop  a  single file N times. inf	means forever, no means	normal
	      playback.	For compatibility, --loop-file and --loop-file=yes are
	      also accepted, and are the same as --loop-file=inf.

	      The  difference to --loop-playlist is that this doesn't loop the
	      playlist,	just the file itself. If the playlist contains only  a
	      single  file, the	difference between the two option is that this
	      option performs a	seek on	loop, instead of reloading the file.

	      --loop is	an alias for this option.

       --ab-loop-a=<time>, --ab-loop-b=<time>
	      Set loop points. If playback passes the  b  timestamp,  it  will
	      seek  to	the a timestamp. Seeking past the b point doesn't loop
	      (this is intentional).

	      If a is after b, the behavior is as if the points	were given  in
	      the  right  order,  and the player will seek to b	after crossing
	      through a. This is different from	old  behavior,	where  looping
	      was  disabled  (and as a bug, looped back	to a on	the end	of the

	      If either	options	are set	to no (or unset), looping is disabled.
	      This  is	different  from	old behavior, where an unset a implied
	      the start	of the file, and an unset b the	end of the file.

	      The loop-points can be adjusted at runtime with the  correspond-
	      ing properties. See also ab-loop command.

	      Run A-B loops only N times, then ignore the A-B loop points (de-
	      fault: inf).  Every finished loop	iteration will decrement  this
	      option by	1 (unless it is	set to inf or 0). inf means that loop-
	      ing goes on forever. If this option is set to 0, A-B looping  is
	      ignored,	and  even  the ab-loop command will not	enable looping
	      again (the command will show (disabled) on the  OSD  message  if
	      both loop	points are set,	but ab-loop-count is 0).

       --ordered-chapters, --no-ordered-chapters
	      Enabled  by default.  Disable support for	Matroska ordered chap-
	      ters. mpv	will not load or search	for video segments from	 other
	      files,  and will also ignore any chapter order specified for the
	      main file.

	      Loads the	given file as playlist,	and tries  to  use  the	 files
	      contained	 in it as reference files when opening a Matroska file
	      that uses	ordered	chapters. This overrides the normal  mechanism
	      for  loading referenced files by scanning	the same directory the
	      main file	is located in.

	      Useful for loading ordered chapter files that are	not located on
	      the  local filesystem, or	if the referenced files	are in differ-
	      ent directories.

	      Note: a playlist can be as simple	 as  a	text  file  containing
	      filenames	separated by newlines.

	      Load chapters from this file, instead of using the chapter meta-
	      data found in the	main file.

	      This accepts a media file	(like mkv)  or	even  a	 pseudo-format
	      like  ffmetadata	and  uses  its chapters	to replace the current
	      file's chapters. This doesn't work with OGM or XML chapters  di-

	      Skip <sec> seconds after every frame.

		 Without --hr-seek, skipping will snap to keyframes.

	      Stop  playback if	either audio or	video fails to initialize (de-
	      fault: no).  With	no, playback will continue  in	video-only  or
	      audio-only  mode if one of them fails. This doesn't affect play-
	      back of audio-only or video-only files.

	      Control the playback direction (default: forward). Setting back-
	      ward  will  attempt  to play the file in reverse direction, with
	      decreasing playback time.	If this	is  set	 on  playback  starts,
	      playback will start from the end of the file. If this is changed
	      at during	playback, a hr-seek will be issued to change  the  di-

	      +	and - are aliases for forward and backward.

	      The  rest	 of  this  option description pertains to the backward

		 Backward playback is extremely	fragile.  It  may  not	always
		 work,	is  much slower	than forward playback, and breaks cer-
		 tain other features. How well it works	depends	mainly on  the
		 file  being  played. Generally, it will show good results (or
		 results at all) only if the stars align.

	      mpv, as well as most media formats, were	designed  for  forward
	      playback	only.  Backward	 playback is bolted on top of mpv, and
	      tries to make a medium effort to make  backward  playback	 work.
	      Depending	on your	use-case, another tool may work	much better.

	      Backward	playback is not	exactly	a 1st class feature. Implemen-
	      tation tradeoffs were made, that are bad for backward  playback,
	      but in turn do not cause disadvantages for normal	playback. Var-
	      ious possible optimizations are not implemented in order to keep
	      the   complexity	down.  Normally,  a  media  player  is	highly
	      pipelined	(future	data is	prepared in separate threads, so it is
	      available	 in  realtime when the next stage needs	it), but back-
	      ward playback will essentially stall  the	 pipeline  at  various
	      random points.

	      For  example,  for  intra-only  codecs  are  trivially  backward
	      playable,	and tools built	around them may	make efficient use  of
	      them  (consider  video  editors or camera	viewers). mpv won't be
	      efficient	in this	case, because it  uses	its  generic  backward
	      playback algorithm, that on top of it is not very	optimized.

	      If  you  just  want to quickly go	backward through the video and
	      just show	"keyframes", just use forward playback,	and hold  down
	      the left cursor key (which on CLI	with default config sends many
	      small relative seek commands).

	      The implementation consists of mostly 3 parts:

	      o	Backward demuxing. This	relies on the demuxer  cache,  so  the
		demuxer	cache should (or must, didn't test it) be enabled, and
		its size will affect performance. If the cache is too small or
		too large, quadratic runtime behavior may result.

	      o	Backward  decoding. The	decoder	library	used (libavcodec) does
		not support this. It is	emulated by feeding bits  of  data  in
		forward,  putting  the	result in a queue, returning the queue
		data to	the VO in reverse, and then starting over at  an  ear-
		lier position. This can	require	buffering an extreme amount of
		decoded	data, and also completely breaks pipelining.

	      o	Backward output. This is relatively simple,  because  the  de-
		coder  returns	the  frames in the needed order. However, this
		may cause various problems because filters see audio and video
		going backward.

	      Known problems:

	      o	It's  fragile. If anything doesn't work, random	non-useful be-
		havior may occur. In simple cases, the player will  just  play
		nonsense  and  artifacts.  In other cases, it may get stuck or
		heat the CPU. (Exceeding memory	usage significantly beyond the
		user-set limits	would be a bug,	though.)

	      o	Performance and	resource usage isn't good. In part this	is in-
		herent to backward playback of normal media  formats,  and  in
		parts due to implementation choices and	tradeoffs.

	      o	This  is  extremely reliant on good demuxer behavior. Although
		backward demuxing requires no special demuxer support,	it  is
		required  that	the  demuxer performs seeks reliably, fulfills
		some specific requirements about packet	metadata, and has  de-
		terministic behavior.

	      o	Starting  playback  exactly  from the end may or may not work,
		depending on seeking behavior and file duration	detection.

	      o	Some container formats,	audio, and video codecs	are  not  sup-
		ported due to their behavior. There is no list,	and the	player
		usually	does not detect	them. Certain live streams  (including
		TV  captures)  may  exhibit problems in	particular, as well as
		some lossy audio codecs. h264 intra-refresh is	known  not  to
		work  due  to problems with libavcodec.	WAV and	some other raw
		audio formats tend to have problems  -	there  are  hacks  for
		dealing	with them, which may or	may not	work.

	      o	Backward demuxing of subtitles is not supported. Subtitle dis-
		play still works for  some  external  text  subtitle  formats.
		(These	are  fully read	into memory, and only backward display
		is needed.) Text subtitles that	are  cached  in	 the  subtitle
		renderer also have a chance to be displayed correctly.

	      o	Some  features dealing with playback of	broken or hard to deal
		with files will	not work fully (such as	timestamp correction).

	      o	If demuxer low level seeks (i.e. seeking  the  actual  demuxer
		instead	 of  just  within  the demuxer cache) are performed by
		backward playback, the created seek ranges may not  join,  be-
		cause not enough overlap is achieved.

	      o	Trying	to use this with hardware video	decoding will probably
		exhaust	all your GPU memory and	then crash a thing or two.  Or
		it  will  fail	because	--hwdec-extra-frames will certainly be
		set too	low.

	      o	Stream recording is broken. --stream-record may	 keep  working
		if you backward	play within a cached region only.

	      o	Relative seeks may behave weird. Small seeks backward (towards
		smaller	time, i.e. seek	-1) may	not really seek	properly,  and
		audio  will  remain muted for a	while. Using hr-seek is	recom-
		mended,	which should have none of these	problems.

	      o	Some things are	just weird. For	example, while	seek  commands
		manipulate  playback  time  in the expected way	(provided they
		work correctly), the framestep commands	are transposed.	 Back-
		stepping will perform very expensive work to step forward by 1


	      o	Remove all --vf/--af filters you have  set.  Disable  hardware
		decoding. Disable idiotic nonsense like	SPDIF passthrough.

	      o	Increasing  --video-reversal-buffer  might  help  if  reversal
		queue overflow is reported, which may happen in	 high  bitrate
		video,	or  video with large GOP. Hardware decoding mostly ig-
		nores this, and	you need to increase --hwdec-extra-frames  in-
		stead (until you get playback without logged errors).

	      o	The  demuxer  cache  is	 essential for backward	demuxing. Make
		sure to	set --cache=yes. The cache size	might matter. If  it's
		too small, a queue overflow will be logged, and	backward play-
		back cannot continue, or it performs too many low level	seeks.
		If  it's too large, implementation tradeoffs may cause general
		performance issues. Use	--demuxer-max-bytes to potentially in-
		crease	the  amount of packets the demuxer layer can queue for
		reverse	demuxing (basically it's  the  --video-reversal-buffer
		equivalent for the demuxer layer).

	      o	Setting	 --vd-queue-enable=yes can help	a lot to make playback
		smooth (once it	works).

	      o	--demuxer-backward-playback-step also factors  into  how  many
		seeks  may  be	performed, and whether backward	demuxing could
		break due to queue overflow. If	it's set too high,  the	 back-
		step  operation	 needs	to search through more packets all the
		time, even if the cache	is large enough.

	      o	Setting	--demuxer-cache-wait may be useful to cache the	entire
		file  into  the	 demuxer  cache.  Set --demuxer-max-bytes to a
		large size to make sure	it can read the	 entire	 cache;	 --de-
		muxer-max-back-bytes  should  also  be	set to a large size to
		prevent	that tries to trim the cache.

	      o	If audio artifacts are audible,	even though the	 AO  does  not
		underrun,  increasing  --audio-backward-overlap	 might help in
		some cases.

       --video-reversal-buffer=<bytesize>, --audio-reversal-buffer=<bytesize>
	      For backward decoding.  Backward	decoding  decodes  forward  in
	      steps,  and then reverses	the decoder output. These options con-
	      trol the	approximate  maximum  amount  of  bytes	 that  can  be
	      buffered.	 The  main  use	of this	is to avoid unbounded resource
	      usage; during normal backward playback, it's not supposed	to hit
	      the  limit,  and	if  it	does, it will drop frames and complain
	      about it.

	      Use this option if you get reversal queue	overflow errors	during
	      backward	playback.  Increase  the size until the	warning	disap-
	      pears. Usually, the video	buffer will overflow first, especially
	      if it's high resolution video.

	      This does	not work correctly if video hardware decoding is used.
	      The video	frame size will	not include  the  referenced  GPU  and
	      driver  memory.  Some  hardware  decoders	may also be limited by

	      How large	the queue size needs to	be depends entirely on the way
	      the  media  was  encoded.	 Audio typically requires a very small
	      buffer, while video can require excessively large	buffers.

	      (Technically, this allows	the last frame to  exceed  the	limit.
	      Also,  this  does	not account for	other buffered frames, such as
	      inside the decoder or the	video output.)

	      This does	not affect demuxer cache behavior at all.

	      See --list-options for defaults and value	range. <bytesize>  op-
	      tions accept suffixes such as KiB	and MiB.

       --video-backward-overlap=<auto|number>,		--audio-backward-over-
	      Number of	overlapping keyframe ranges to use for backward	decod-
	      ing  (default:  auto)  ("keyframe"  to  be  understood as	in the
	      mpv/ffmpeg specific meaning).  Backward decoding works  by  for-
	      ward  decoding in	small steps. Some codecs cannot	restart	decod-
	      ing from any packet (even	if it's	marked as seek	point),	 which
	      becomes  noticeable  with	backward decoding (in theory this is a
	      problem with seeking too,	but --hr-seek-demuxer-offset  can  fix
	      it for seeking).	In particular, MDCT based audio	codecs are af-

	      The solution is to feed a	previous packet	to  the	 decoder  each
	      time, and	then discard the output. This option controls how many
	      packets to feed. The auto	choice is currently hardcoded to 0 for
	      video,  and  uses	 1  for	lossy audio, 0 for lossless audio. For
	      some specific lossy audio	codecs,	this is	set to 2.

	      --video-backward-overlap can  potentially	 handle	 intra-refresh
	      video,  depending	 on  the exact conditions. You may have	to use
	      the --vd-lavc-show-all option as well.

       --video-backward-batch=<number>,	--audio-backward-batch=<number>
	      Number of	keyframe ranges	to decode at once when backward	decod-
	      ing (default: 1 for video, 10 for	audio).	Another	pointless tun-
	      ing parameter nobody should use. This should affect  performance
	      only.  In	 theory, setting a number higher than 1	for audio will
	      reduce overhead due to less  frequent  backstep  operations  and
	      less redundant decoding work due to fewer	decoded	overlap	frames
	      (see --audio-backward-overlap). On the other hand, it requires a
	      larger  reversal buffer, and could make playback less smooth due
	      to breaking pipelining (e.g. by decoding a lot, and  then	 doing
	      nothing for a while).

	      It probably never	makes sense to set --video-backward-batch. But
	      in theory, it could help with intra-only video codecs by	reduc-
	      ing backstep operations.

	      Number  of seconds the demuxer should seek back to get new pack-
	      ets during backward playback (default: 60). This is  useful  for
	      tuning backward playback,	see --play-dir for details.

	      Setting  this to a very low value	or 0 may make the player think
	      seeking is broken, or may	make it	perform	multiple seeks.

	      Setting this to a	high value may lead to quadratic  runtime  be-

   Program Behavior
       --help, --h
	      Show short summary of options.

	      You  can	also pass a string to this option, which will list all
	      top-level	options	which contain the string  in  the  name,  e.g.
	      --h=scale	 for all options that contain the word scale. The spe-
	      cial string * lists all top-level	options.

       -v     Increment	verbosity level, one level for each -v	found  on  the
	      command line.

       --version, -V
	      Print version string and exit.

	      Do  not  load default configuration files. This prevents loading
	      of both the user-level and system-wide mpv.conf  and  input.conf
	      files.  Other  configuration  files are blocked as well, such as
	      resume playback files.

		 Files explicitly requested  by	 command  line	options,  like
		 --include or --use-filedir-conf, will still be	loaded.

	      See also:	--config-dir.

	      Prints all available options.

	      Print a list of the available properties.

	      Print a list of the supported protocols.

	      Opens  the given path for	writing, and print log messages	to it.
	      Existing files will be truncated.	The log	level is at  least  -v
	      -v,  but	can be raised via --msg-level (the option cannot lower
	      it below the forced minimum log level).

	      A	special	case is	the macOS bundle, it will create a log file at
	      ~/Library/Logs/mpv.log by	default.

	      Force  a	different configuration	directory. If this is set, the
	      given directory is used to load  configuration  files,  and  all
	      other  configuration  directories	 are  ignored.	This means the
	      global mpv configuration directory as well as per-user  directo-
	      ries  are	 ignored,  and overrides through environment variables
	      (MPV_HOME) are also ignored.

	      Note that	the --no-config	option takes precedence	over this  op-

	      Always  save  the	 current  playback position on quit. When this
	      file is played again later, the player  will  seek  to  the  old
	      playback	position on start. This	does not happen	if playback of
	      a	file is	stopped	in any other way than quitting.	 For  example,
	      going  to	 the next file in the playlist will not	save the posi-
	      tion, and	start playback at beginning the	next time the file  is

	      This  behavior  is  disabled by default, but is always available
	      when quitting the	player with Shift+Q.

	      The directory in which to	 store	the  "watch  later"  temporary

	      The default is a subdirectory named "watch_later"	underneath the
	      config directory (usually	~/.config/mpv/).

	      Write certain statistics to the given file. The  file  is	 trun-
	      cated on opening.	The file will contain raw samples, each	with a
	      timestamp. To  make  this	 file  into  a	readable,  the	script
	      TOOLS/  can be used (which currently	displays it as
	      a	graph).

	      This option is useful for	debugging only.

	      Makes mpv	wait idly instead of quitting when there is no file to
	      play.   Mostly useful in input mode, where mpv can be controlled
	      through input commands. (Default:	no)

	      once will	only idle at start and let the player close  once  the
	      first playlist has finished playing back.

	      Specify configuration file to be parsed after the	default	ones.

	      If  set to no, don't auto-load scripts from the scripts configu-
	      ration subdirectory (usually ~/.config/mpv/scripts/).  (Default:

       --script=<filename>, --scripts=file1.lua:file2.lua:...
	      Load a Lua script. The second option allows you to load multiple
	      scripts by separating them with the path separator (: on Unix, ;
	      on Windows).

	      --scripts	is a path list option. See List	Options	for details.

	      Set options for scripts. A script	can query an option by key. If
	      an option	is used	and what semantics the option  value  has  de-
	      pends  entirely on the loaded scripts. Values not	claimed	by any
	      scripts are ignored.

	      This is a	key/value list option. See List	Options	for details.

	      Pretend that all files passed to mpv  are	 concatenated  into  a
	      single, big file.	This uses timeline/EDL support internally.

	      Do not restore playback position from the	watch_later configura-
	      tion  subdirectory  (usually  ~/.config/mpv/watch_later/).   See
	      quit-watch-later input command.

	      Only restore the playback	position from the watch_later configu-
	      ration subdirectory (usually ~/.config/mpv/watch_later/) if  the
	      file's  modification  time is the	same as	at the time of saving.
	      This may prevent skipping	forward	in files with  the  same  name
	      which have different content.  (Default: no)

	      Use  the given profile(s), --profile=help	displays a list	of the
	      defined profiles.

	      Normally,	mpv will try to	keep all  settings  when  playing  the
	      next file	on the playlist, even if they were changed by the user
	      during playback. (This behavior is the  opposite	of  MPlayer's,
	      which tries to reset all settings	when starting next file.)

	      Default: Do not reset anything.

	      This  can	 be changed with this option. It accepts a list	of op-
	      tions, and mpv will reset	the value of these options on playback
	      start  to	the initial value. The initial value is	either the de-
	      fault value, or as set by	the config file	or command line.

	      In some cases, this might	not work  as  expected.	 For  example,
	      --volume	will only be reset if it is explicitly set in the con-
	      fig file or the command line.

	      The special name all resets as many options as possible.

	      This is a	string list option. See	List Options for details.


		 o --reset-on-next-file=pause Reset pause mode when  switching
		   to the next file.

		 o --reset-on-next-file=fullscreen,speed  Reset	fullscreen and
		   playback speed settings if they were	changed	 during	 play-

		 o --reset-on-next-file=all  Try  to  reset  all settings that
		   were	changed	during playback.

	      Prepend the watch	later config files with	the name of  the  file
	      they  refer  to. This is simply written as comment on the	top of
	      the file.

		 This option may expose	privacy-sensitive information  and  is
		 thus disabled by default.

	      Ignore path (i.e.	use filename only) when	using watch later fea-
	      ture.  (Default: disabled)

	      Show the description and content of a profile.  Lists  all  pro-
	      files if no parameter is provided.

	      Look  for	 a file-specific configuration file in the same	direc-
	      tory as the file that is being played. See File-specific Config-
	      uration Files.

		 May be	dangerous if playing from untrusted media.

       --ytdl, --no-ytdl
	      Enable  the  youtube-dl  hook-script.  It	will look at the input
	      URL, and will play the video located on the website. This	 works
	      with  many  streaming sites, not just the	one that the script is
	      named after. This	requires a recent version of youtube-dl	to  be
	      installed	on the system. (Enabled	by default.)

	      If the script can't do anything with an URL, it will do nothing.

	      This  accepts  a	set of options,	which can be passed to it with
	      the --script-opts	option (using ytdl_hook- as prefix):

		     If	'yes' will try parsing the URL with youtube-dl	first,
		     instead  of  the default where it's only after mpv	failed
		     to	open it. This mostly depends on	whether	most  of  your
		     URLs need youtube-dl parsing.

		     A	|-separated  list of URL patterns which	mpv should not
		     use with youtube-dl. The patterns are matched  after  the
		     http(s)://	part of	the URL.

		     ^	matches	 the  beginning	of the URL, $ matches its end,
		     and you  should  use  %  before  any  of  the  characters
		     ^$()%|,.[]*+-? to match that character.


			o --script-opts=ytdl_hook-exclude='^' will
			  exclude any URL that starts with

			o --script-opts=ytdl_hook-exclude='%.mkv$|%.mp4$' will
			  exclude any URL that ends with .mkv or .mp4.

		     See	more	    lua		patterns	 here:

		     If	 'yes'	will attempt to	add all	formats	found reported
		     by	youtube-dl (default: no). Each format is  added	 as  a
		     separate  track.  In addition, they are delay-loaded, and
		     actually opened only  when	 a  track  is  selected	 (this
		     should keep load times as low as without this option).

		     It	 adds  average	bitrate	 metadata, if available, which
		     means you can use --hls-bitrate to	decide which track  to
		     select. (HLS used to be the only format whose alternative
		     quality streams were exposed in a similar way,  thus  the
		     option name.)

		     Tracks  which  represent  formats	that  were selected by
		     youtube-dl	as default will	have  the  default  flag  set.
		     This means	mpv should generally still select formats cho-
		     sen with --ytdl-format by default.

		     Although this  mechanism  makes  it  possible  to	switch
		     streams  at  runtime,  it's not suitable for this purpose
		     for various technical reasons. (It's slow,	which can't be
		     really fixed.) In general,	this option is not useful, and
		     was only added to show that it's possible.

		     There are two cases that must be  considered  when	 doing
		     quality/bandwidth selection:

			1. Completely	separate   audio   and	video  streams
			   (DASH-like).	Each of	these streams  contain	either
			   only	audio or video,	so you can mix and combine au-
			   dio/video bandwidths	without	restriction. This  in-
			   tuitively  matches best with	the concept of select-
			   ing quality by track	(what all_formats is  supposed
			   to do).

			2. Separate  sets  of  muxed  audio and	video streams.
			   Each	version	of the media contains  both  an	 audio
			   and	video stream, and they are interleaved.	In or-
			   der not to waste bandwidth, you should only	select
			   one	of these versions (if, for example, you	select
			   an audio stream, then  video	 will  be  downloaded,
			   even	  if  you  selected  video  from  a  different

			   mpv will still represent them as  separate  tracks,
			   but	will  set  the title of	each track to muxed-N,
			   where N is replaced with the	youtube-dl  format  ID
			   of the originating stream.

		     Some sites	will mix 1. and	2., but	we assume that they do
		     so	for compatibility reasons, and there is	no  reason  to
		     use them at all.

		     If	 set  to  'yes', and all_formats is also set to	'yes',
		     this will try to represent	all youtube-dl	reported  for-
		     mats as tracks, even if mpv would normally	use the	direct
		     URL reported by it	(default: yes).

		     It	appears	this normally makes a difference if youtube-dl
		     works on a	master HLS playlist.

		     If	 this  is set to 'no', this specific kind of stream is
		     treated like all_formats is set to	'no', and  the	stream
		     selection	as  done  by youtube-dl	(via --ytdl-format) is

		     Make mpv use the master manifest URL for formats like HLS
		     and  DASH,	 if available, allowing	for video/audio	selec-
		     tion in runtime (default: no). It's  disabled  ("no")  by
		     default for performance reasons.

		     Configure	paths to youtube-dl's executable or a compati-
		     ble fork's. The paths should be separated by  :  on  Unix
		     and  ;  on	Windows. mpv looks in order for	the configured
		     paths in PATH and in mpv's	 config	 directory.   The  de-
		     faults  are  "yt-dlp",  "yt-dlp_x86" and "youtube-dl". On
		     Windows the suffix	extension ".exe" is always appended.

		 Why do	the option names mix _ and -?

			I have no idea.

	      Video format/quality that	is directly passed to youtube-dl.  The
	      possible values are specific to the website and the video, for a
	      given url	the available formats can be found  with  the  command
	      youtube-dl  --list-formats  URL.	See youtube-dl's documentation
	      for available aliases.  (Default:	bestvideo+bestaudio/best)

	      The ytdl value does not pass a --format option to	youtube-dl  at
	      all, and thus does not override its default. Note	that sometimes
	      youtube-dl returns a format that mpv cannot use,	and  in	 these
	      cases the	mpv default may	work better.

	      Pass  arbitrary  options	to  youtube-dl.	Parameter and argument
	      should be	passed as a key-value pair. Options  without  argument
	      must include =.

	      There  is	 no  sanity  checking so it's possible to break	things
	      (i.e.  passing invalid parameters	to youtube-dl).

	      A	proxy URL can be passed	for youtube-dl to use  it  in  parsing
	      the  website.   This  is	useful	for geo-restricted URLs. After
	      youtube-dl parsing, some URLs also require a proxy for playback,
	      so  this	can pass that proxy information	to mpv.	Take note that
	      SOCKS proxies aren't supported and https URLs  also  bypass  the
	      proxy. This is a limitation in FFmpeg.

	      This is a	key/value list option. See List	Options	for details.


		 o --ytdl-raw-options=username=user,password=pass

		 o --ytdl-raw-options=force-ipv6=

		 o --ytdl-raw-options=proxy=[]

		 o --ytdl-raw-options-append=proxy=

	      Enable the builtin script	that shows useful playback information
	      on a key binding (default: yes). By default, the i key  is  used
	      (I to make the overlay permanent).

	      Enable  the builtin script that shows a console on a key binding
	      and lets you enter commands (default: yes). By default,.	The  '
	      key is used to show the console, and ESC to hide it again. (This
	      is based on  a user script called	repl.lua.)

	      Enable the builtin script	 that  does  auto  profiles  (default:
	      auto). See Conditional auto profiles for details.	auto will load
	      the script, but immediately unload it if	there  are  no	condi-
	      tional profiles.

	      For  enabling  "pseudo  GUI mode", which means that the defaults
	      for some options are changed. This option	should not normally be
	      used  directly,  but  only  by  mpv  internally, or mpv-provided
	      scripts, config files, or	.desktop files.	See  PSEUDO  GUI  MODE
	      for details.

	      Specify  the  video  output backend to be	used. See VIDEO	OUTPUT
	      DRIVERS for details and descriptions of available	drivers.

	      Specify a	priority list of video decoders	to be used,  according
	      to  their	family and name. See --ad for further details. Both of
	      these options use	the same syntax	and semantics; the  only  dif-
	      ference is that they operate on different	codec lists.

		 See --vd=help for a full list of available decoders.

	      Specify  a  list	of video filters to apply to the video stream.
	      See VIDEO	FILTERS	for details and	descriptions of	the  available
	      filters.	 The  option variants --vf-add,	--vf-pre, --vf-del and
	      --vf-clr exist to	modify a previously specified  list,  but  you
	      should not need these for	typical	use.

	      Do not sleep when	outputting video frames. Useful	for benchmarks
	      when used	with --no-audio.

	      Skip displaying some frames to maintain A/V sync	on  slow  sys-
	      tems, or playing high framerate video on video outputs that have
	      an upper framerate limit.

	      The argument selects the drop methods, and can  be  one  of  the

	      <no>   Disable  any frame	dropping. Not recommended, for testing

	      <vo>   Drop late frames on video output  (default).  This	 still
		     decodes  and  filters all frames, but doesn't render them
		     on	the VO.	Drops are indicated  in	 the  terminal	status
		     line as Dropped: field.

		     In	 audio sync. mode, this	drops frames that are outdated
		     at	the time of display. If	the decoder is	too  slow,  in
		     theory  all  frames would have to be dropped (because all
		     frames are	too late) -  to	 avoid	this,  frame  dropping
		     stops  if the effective framerate is below	10 FPS.

		     In	 display-sync.	modes (see --video-sync), this affects
		     only how A/V drops	or repeats frames.  If	this  mode  is
		     disabled,	A/V  desync  will  in  theory not affect video
		     scheduling	anymore	(much like the display-resample-desync
		     mode).  However,  even  if	disabled, frames will still be
		     skipped (i.e. dropped) according  to  the	ratio  between
		     video and display frequencies.

		     This is the recommended mode, and the default.

		     Old,  decoder-based  framedrop mode. (This	is the same as
		     --framedrop=yes in	mpv 0.5.x and before.) This tells  the
		     decoder  to skip frames (unless they are needed to	decode
		     future frames). May help with slow	systems, but can  pro-
		     duce  unwatchable	choppy output, or even freeze the dis-
		     play completely.

		     This uses a heuristic which may not make  sense,  and  in
		     general  cannot  achieve  good  results,  because the de-
		     coder's frame dropping cannot be controlled in a predict-
		     able manner. Not recommended.

		     Even  if you want to use this, prefer decoder+vo for bet-
		     ter results.

		     The --vd-lavc-framedrop option controls  what  frames  to

		     Enable  both modes. Not recommended. Better than just de-
		     coder mode.

		 --vo=vdpau has	its own	code for the vo	framedrop mode.	Slight
		 differences to	other VOs are possible.

	      Enable  some things which	tend to	reduce video latency by	1 or 2
	      frames (default: no). Note that this  option  might  be  removed
	      without notice once the player's timing code does	not inherently
	      need to do these things anymore.

	      This does:

	      o	Use the	demuxer	reported FPS for frame dropping.  This	avoids
		the  player needing to decode 1	frame in advance, lowering to-
		tal latency in effect. This also means that if the demuxer re-
		ported	FPS  is	 wrong,	 or the	video filter chain changes FPS
		(e.g. deinterlacing), then it  could  drop  too	 many  or  not
		enough frames.

	      o	Disable	waiting	for the	first video frame. Normally the	player
		waits for the first video frame	to be  fully  rendered	before
		starting  playback  properly.  Some VOs	will lazily initialize
		stuff when rendering the first frame, so if this is not	 done,
		there  is  some	likeliness that	the VO has to drop some	frames
		if rendering the first frame takes longer than needed.

	      Set the display FPS used with the	--video-sync=display-*	modes.
	      By  default, a detected value is used. Keep in mind that setting
	      an incorrect value (even if slightly incorrect) can  ruin	 video
	      playback.	 On  multi-monitor systems, there is a chance that the
	      detected value is	from the wrong monitor.

	      Set this option only if you have reason to believe the automati-
	      cally determined value is	wrong.

	      Deprecated alias for --override-display-fps.

	      Specify  the  hardware video decoding API	that should be used if
	      possible.	 Whether hardware decoding is actually done depends on
	      the  video codec.	If hardware decoding is	not possible, mpv will
	      fall back	on software decoding.

	      Hardware decoding	is not enabled by default, because it is typi-
	      cally  an	additional source of errors. It	is worth using only if
	      your CPU is too slow to decode a specific	video.

		 Use the Ctrl+h	shortcut to toggle hardware decoding  at  run-
		 time. It toggles this option between auto and no.

		 Always	 enabling  HW  decoding	 by putting it into the	config
		 file is discouraged. If you use the  Ubuntu  package,	delete
		 /etc/mpv/mpv.conf, as the package tries to enable HW decoding
		 by default by setting hwdec=vaapi (which is less than	ideal,
		 and  may  even	 cause sub-optimal wrappers to be used). Or at
		 least change it to hwdec=auto-safe.

	      Use one of the auto modes	if you want to enable hardware	decod-
	      ing.   Explicitly	selecting the mode is mostly meant for testing
	      and debugging.  It's a bad idea to put explicit  selection  into
	      the config file if you want thing	to just	keep working after up-
	      dates and	so on.

		 Even if enabled, hardware decoding is still only white-listed
		 for some codecs. See --hwdec-codecs to	enable hardware	decod-
		 ing in	more cases.

		 Which method to choose?

		 o If you only want to enable hardware	decoding  at  runtime,
		   don't set the parameter, or put hwdec=no into your mpv.conf
		   (relevant on	distros	which force-enable it by default, such
		   as  on Ubuntu). Use the Ctrl+h default binding to enable it
		   at runtime.

		 o If you're not sure, but want	hardware decoding  always  en-
		   abled  by  default, put hwdec=auto-safe into	your mpv.conf,
		   and acknowledge that	this use case  is  not	"really"  sup-
		   ported and may cause	problems.

		 o If  you  want  to test available hardware decoding methods,
		   pass	--hwdec=auto --hwdec-codecs=all	and look at the	termi-
		   nal output.

		 o If  you're a	developer, or want to perform elaborate	tests,
		   you may need	any of the other possible option values.

	      <api> can	be one of the following:

	      no     always use	software decoding (default)

	      auto   forcibly enable any hw decoder found (see below)

	      yes    exactly the same as auto

		     enable any	whitelisted hw decoder (see below)

		     enable best hw decoder with copy-back (see	below)

	      vdpau  requires --vo=gpu with X11, or --vo=vdpau (Linux only)

		     copies video back into system RAM (Linux with  some  GPUs

	      vaapi  requires --vo=gpu or --vo=vaapi (Linux only)

		     copies  video  back into system RAM (Linux	with some GPUs

		     requires --vo=gpu (OS X 10.8 and up), or --vo=libmpv (iOS
		     9.0 and up)

		     copies  video  back into system RAM (OS X 10.8 or iOS 9.0
		     and up)

	      dxva2  requires --vo=gpu	with  --gpu-context=d3d11,  --gpu-con-
		     text=angle	or --gpu-context=dxinterop (Windows only)

		     copies video back to system RAM (Windows only)

		     requires  --vo=gpu	with --gpu-context=d3d11 or --gpu-con-
		     text=angle	(Windows 8+ only)

		     copies video back to system RAM (Windows 8+ only)

		     requires --vo=mediacodec_embed (Android only)

		     copies video back to system RAM (Android only)

	      mmal   requires --vo=gpu (Raspberry Pi only - default if	avail-

		     copies video back to system RAM (Raspberry	Pi only)

	      nvdec  requires --vo=gpu (Any platform CUDA is available)

		     copies  video  back  to  system RAM (Any platform CUDA is

	      cuda   requires --vo=gpu (Any platform CUDA is available)

		     copies video back to system RAM  (Any  platform  CUDA  is

		     copies  video  back to system RAM (Any platform supported
		     by	hardware)

	      rkmpp  requires --vo=gpu (some RockChip devices only)

	      auto tries to automatically enable hardware decoding  using  the
	      first  available	method.	This still depends what	VO you are us-
	      ing. For example,	if you are not using --vo=gpu  or  --vo=vdpau,
	      vdpau  decoding  will  never  be	enabled. Also note that	if the
	      first found method doesn't actually work,	it  will  always  fall
	      back  to	software  decoding,  instead of	trying the next	method
	      (might matter on some Linux systems).

	      auto-safe	is similar to auto, but	allows only whitelisted	 meth-
	      ods that are considered "safe". This is supposed to be a reason-
	      able way to enable hardware decdoding by	default	 in  a	config
	      file  (even  though you shouldn't	do that	anyway;	prefer runtime
	      enabling with Ctrl+h). Unlike auto, this will not	try to	enable
	      unknown  or  known-to-be-bad methods. In addition, this may dis-
	      able hardware decoding in	other situations when  it's  known  to
	      cause problems, but currently this mechanism is quite primitive.
	      (As an example for something that	still causes problems: certain
	      combinations  of	HEVC  and Intel	chips on Windows tend to cause
	      mpv to crash, most likely	due to driver bugs.)

	      auto-copy-safe  selects  the  union  of  methods	selected  with
	      auto-safe	and auto-copy.

	      auto-copy	 selects  only	modes that copy	the video data back to
	      system memory after decoding. This selects modes like vaapi-copy
	      (and  so	on).  If none of these work, hardware decoding is dis-
	      abled. This mode is usually guaranteed to	 incur	no  additional
	      quality  loss  compared  to  software  decoding (assuming	modern
	      codecs and an error free video stream), and will allow CPU  pro-
	      cessing  with video filters. This	mode works with	all video fil-
	      ters and VOs.

	      Because these copy the decoded video back	to system RAM, they're
	      often less efficient than	the direct modes, and may not help too
	      much over	software decoding.

		 Most non-copy methods only work with the OpenGL GPU  backend.
		 Currently,  only  the vaapi, nvdec and	cuda methods work with

	      The vaapi	mode, if used with --vo=gpu,  requires	Mesa  11,  and
	      most likely works	with Intel and AMD GPUs	only. It also requires
	      the opengl EGL backend.

	      nvdec and	nvdec-copy are the newest, and recommended  method  to
	      do hardware decoding on Nvidia GPUs.

	      cuda  and	 cuda-copy are an older	implementation of hardware de-
	      coding on	Nvidia	GPUs  that  uses  Nvidia's  bitstream  parsers
	      rather  than  FFmpeg's.	This can lead to feature deficiencies,
	      such as incorrect	playback of HDR	content, and  nvdec/nvdec-copy
	      should always be preferred unless	you specifically need Nvidia's
	      deinterlacing algorithms.	To use	this  deinterlacing  you  must
	      pass  the	 option:  vd-lavc-o=deint=[weave|bob|adaptive].	  Pass
	      weave (or	leave the option unset)	to not attempt any deinterlac-

		 Quality reduction with	hardware decoding

			In  theory,  hardware  decoding	 does not reduce video
			quality	(at least for the codecs h264 and HEVC).  How-
			ever,  due  to	restrictions  in video output APIs, as
			well as	bugs in	the actual  hardware  decoders,	 there
			can be some loss, or even blatantly incorrect results.

			In  some  cases, RGB conversion	is forced, which means
			the RGB	conversion is performed	by the hardware	decod-
			ing API, instead of the	shaders	used by	--vo=gpu. This
			means certain colorspaces may not  display  correctly,
			and  certain  filtering	 (such as debanding) cannot be
			applied	in an ideal way. This will also	usually	 force
			the  use  of low quality chroma	scalers	instead	of the
			one specified by --cscale. In  other  cases,  hardware
			decoding  can also reduce the bit depth	of the decoded
			image, which can introduce banding or  precision  loss
			for 10-bit files.

			vdpau  always  does  RGB conversion in hardware, which
			does not support newer colorspaces like	 BT.2020  cor-
			rectly.	 However,  vdpau doesn't support 10 bit	or HDR
			encodings, so these limitations	 are  unlikely	to  be

			vaapi and d3d11va are safe. Enabling deinterlacing (or
			simply their respective	post-processing	filters)  will
			possibly  at  least reduce color quality by converting
			the output to a	8 bit format.

			dxva2 is not safe. It appears to always	use BT.601 for
			forced	RGB conversion,	but actual behavior depends on
			the GPU	drivers. Some drivers  appear  to  convert  to
			limited	range RGB, which gives a faded appearance.  In
			addition to driver-specific  behavior,	global	system
			settings might affect this additionally. This can give
			incorrect results even with completely ordinary	 video

			rpi  always  uses  the hardware	overlay	renderer, even
			with --vo=gpu.

			cuda should usually be safe, but depending  on	how  a
			file/stream  has  been	mixed, it has been reported to
			corrupt	 the  timestamps  causing  glitched,  flashing
			frames.	It can also sometimes cause massive framedrops
			for unknown reasons. Caution  is  advised,  and	 nvdec
			should always be preferred.

			crystalhd  is  not  safe.  It always converts to 4:2:2
			YUV, which may	be  lossy,  depending  on  how	chroma
			sub-sampling  is  done during conversion. It also dis-
			cards the top left pixel of each frame for  some  rea-

			All other methods, in particular the copy-back methods
			(like dxva2-copy etc.) should hopefully	be  safe,  al-
			though they can	still cause random decoding issues. At
			the very least,	they shouldn't affect  the  colors  of
			the image.

			In particular, auto-copy will only select "safe" modes
			(although potentially slower than other	methods),  but
			there's	still no guarantee the chosen hardware decoder
			will actually work correctly.

			In general, it's very strongly advised to avoid	 hard-
			ware  decoding	unless	absolutely  necessary, i.e. if
			your CPU is insufficient to decode the file  in	 ques-
			tions.	If  you	 run  into  any	weird decoding issues,
			frame glitches or discoloration, and you have  --hwdec
			turned on, the first thing you should try is disabling

	      This option is for troubleshooting hwdec interop	issues.	 Since
	      it's a debugging option, its semantics may change	at any time.

	      This  is	useful	for the	gpu and	libmpv VOs for selecting which
	      hwdec interop context to use exactly. Effectively	it also	can be
	      used to block loading of certain backends.

	      If  set  to  auto	(default), the behavior	depends	on the VO: for
	      gpu, it does nothing, and	the interop context is loaded  on  de-
	      mand  (when the decoder probes for --hwdec support). For libmpv,
	      which has	has no on-demand loading, this is equivalent to	all.

	      The empty	string is equivalent to	auto.

	      If set to	all, it	attempts to load all interop  contexts	at  GL
	      context creation time.

	      Other  than that,	a specific backend can be set, and the list of
	      them can be queried with help (mpv CLI only).

	      Runtime changes to this are ignored (the current option value is
	      used whenever the	renderer is created).

	      The  old	aliases	--opengl-hwdec-interop and --hwdec-preload are
	      barely related to	this anymore, but will be somewhat  compatible
	      in some cases.

	      Number  of  GPU frames hardware decoding should preallocate (de-
	      fault: see --list-options	output). If this is too	low, frame al-
	      location	may  fail  during decoding, and	video frames might get
	      dropped and/or corrupted.	 Setting it too	high simply wastes GPU
	      memory and has no	advantages.

	      This value is used only for hardware decoding APIs which require
	      preallocating  surfaces  (known  examples	 include  d3d11va  and
	      vaapi).  For other APIs, frames are allocated as needed. The de-
	      tails depend on the libavcodec implementations of	 the  hardware

	      The required number of surfaces depends on dynamic runtime situ-
	      ations. The default is a fixed value that	is thought to be  suf-
	      ficient  for most	uses. But in certain situations, it may	not be

	      Set the internal pixel format  used  by  hardware	 decoding  via
	      --hwdec  (default	no). The special value no selects an implemen-
	      tation specific standard format.	Most  decoder  implementations
	      support only one format, and will	fail to	initialize if the for-
	      mat is not supported.

	      Some implementations might support multiple formats. In particu-
	      lar,  videotoolbox  is known to require uyvy422 for good perfor-
	      mance on some older hardware. d3d11va can	 always	 use  yuv420p,
	      which uses an opaque format, with	likely no advantages.

	      Choose  the  GPU device used for decoding	when using the cuda or
	      nvdec hwdecs with	the OpenGL GPU backend,	and with the cuda-copy
	      or nvdec-copy hwdecs in all cases.

	      For the OpenGL GPU backend, the default device used for decoding
	      is the one being used to provide gpu output (and in the vast ma-
	      jority of	cases, only one	GPU will be present).

	      For the copy hwdecs, the default device will be the first	device
	      enumerated by the	CUDA libraries - however that is done.

	      For the Vulkan GPU backend, decoding must	always happen  on  the
	      display device, and this option has no effect.

       --vaapi-device=<device file>
	      Choose the DRM device for	vaapi-copy. This should	be the path to
	      a	DRM device file. (Default: /dev/dri/renderD128)

	      Enables pan-and-scan functionality (cropping the sides of	e.g. a
	      16:9  video  to  make it fit a 4:3 display without black bands).
	      The range	controls how much of the image	is  cropped.  May  not
	      work with	all video output drivers.

	      This option has no effect	if --video-unscaled option is used.

	      Override	video  aspect ratio, in	case aspect information	is in-
	      correct or missing in the	file being played.

	      These values have	special	meaning:

	      0	     disable aspect ratio  handling,  pretend  the  video  has
		     square pixels

	      no     same as 0

	      -1     use the video stream or container aspect (default)

	      But  note	 that handling of these	special	values might change in
	      the future.


		 o --video-aspect-override=4:3	   or	  --video-aspect-over-

		 o --video-aspect-override=16:9	    or	  --video-aspect-over-

		 o --no-video-aspect-override or --video-aspect-override=no

	      This sets	the default video aspect determination method (if  the
	      aspect is	_not_ overridden by the	user with --video-aspect-over-
	      ride or others).

		     Strictly prefer the container aspect ratio. This  is  ap-
		     parently the default behavior with	VLC, at	least with Ma-
		     troska. Note that if the container	has  no	 aspect	 ratio
		     set, the behavior is the same as with bitstream.

		     Strictly  prefer  the  bitstream aspect ratio, unless the
		     bitstream aspect ratio is not set.	This is	apparently the
		     default behavior with XBMC/kodi, at least with Matroska.

	      The current default for mpv is container.

	      Normally you should not set this.	Try the	various	choices	if you
	      encounter	video that has the wrong  aspect  ratio	 in  mpv,  but
	      seems to be correct in other players.

	      Disable  scaling	of the video. If the window is larger than the
	      video, black bars	are added. Otherwise, the  video  is  cropped,
	      unless  the  option  is  set to downscale-big, in	which case the
	      video is fit to window. The video	still can be influenced	by the
	      other  --video-...  options.  This option	disables the effect of

	      Note that	the scaler algorithm may still be used,	 even  if  the
	      video  isn't scaled. For example,	this can influence chroma con-
	      version. The video will also still be scaled in one dimension if
	      the  source  uses	 non-square pixels (e.g. anamorphic widescreen

	      This option is disabled if the --no-keepaspect option is used.

       --video-pan-x=<value>, --video-pan-y=<value>
	      Moves the	displayed video	rectangle by the given value in	the  X
	      or  Y  direction.	 The  unit  is in fractions of the size	of the
	      scaled video (the	full size, even	if parts of the	video are  not
	      visible due to panscan or	other options).

	      For  example,  displaying	 a  1280x720  video  fullscreen	 on  a
	      1680x1050	screen with --video-pan-x=-0.1 would  move  the	 video
	      168  pixels  to  the left	(making	128 pixels of the source video

	      This option is disabled if the --no-keepaspect option is used.

	      Rotate the  video	 clockwise,  in	 degrees.  Currently  supports
	      90A<degree>  steps only.	If no is given,	the video is never ro-
	      tated, even if the file has  rotation  metadata.	(The  rotation
	      value is added to	the rotation metadata, which means the value 0
	      would rotate the video according to the rotation metadata.)

	      Adjust the video display scale factor by the  given  value.  The
	      parameter	 is  given  log	 2. For	example, --video-zoom=0	is un-
	      scaled, --video-zoom=1 is	twice the size,	--video-zoom=-2	is one
	      fourth of	the size, and so on.

	      This option is disabled if the --no-keepaspect option is used.

       --video-scale-x=<value>,	--video-scale-y=<value>
	      Multiply	the  video display size	with the given value (default:
	      1.0). If a non-default value is used,  this  will	 be  different
	      from  the	window size, so	video will be either cut off, or black
	      bars are added.

	      This  value  is  multiplied  with	  the	value	derived	  from
	      --video-zoom  and	the normal video aspect	aspect ratio. This op-
	      tion is disabled if the --no-keepaspect option is	used.

       --video-align-x=<-1-1>, --video-align-y=<-1-1>
	      Moves the	video rectangle	within the black  borders,  which  are
	      usually added to pad the video to	screen if video	and screen as-
	      pect ratios are different.  --video-align-y=-1  would  move  the
	      video  to	 the  top  of the screen (leaving a border only	on the
	      bottom), a value of 0 centers it (default), and  a  value	 of  1
	      would put	the video at the bottom	of the screen.

	      If  video	 and  screen  aspect match perfectly, these options do

	      This option is disabled if the --no-keepaspect option is used.

       --video-margin-ratio-left=<val>,	     --video-margin-ratio-right=<val>,
       --video-margin-ratio-top=<val>, --video-margin-ratio-bottom=<val>
	      Set  extra video margins on each border (default:	0). Each value
	      is a ratio of the	window size, using a range 0.0-1.0. For	 exam-
	      ple, setting the option --video-margin-ratio-right=0.2 at	a win-
	      dow size of 1000 pixels will add a  200  pixels  border  on  the
	      right side of the	window.

	      The  video  is  "boxed" by these margins.	The window size	is not
	      changed. In particular it	does not enlarge the window,  and  the
	      margins  will  cause the video to	be downscaled by default. This
	      may or may not change in the future.

	      The margins are applied after 90A<degree>	 video	rotation,  but
	      before any other video transformations.

	      This option is disabled if the --no-keepaspect option is used.

	      Subtitles	still may use the margins, depending on	--sub-use-mar-
	      gins and similar options.

	      These options were created for the OSC. Some odd decisions, such
	      as  making  the  margin values a ratio (instead of pixels), were
	      made for the sake	of the OSC. It's possible that	these  options
	      may  be replaced by ones that are	more generally useful. The be-
	      havior of	these options may change to fit	OSC requirements  bet-
	      ter, too.

       --correct-pts, --no-correct-pts
	      --no-correct-pts	switches  mpv  to a mode where video timing is
	      determined using a fixed framerate value (either using the --fps
	      option,  or  using file information). Sometimes, files with very
	      broken timestamps	can be played somewhat well in this mode. Note
	      that  video  filters,  subtitle  rendering,  seeking  (including
	      hr-seeks and backstepping), and  audio  synchronization  can  be
	      completely broken	in this	mode.

	      Override	video framerate. Useful	if the original	value is wrong
	      or missing.

		 Works in --no-correct-pts mode	only.

	      Enable or	disable	interlacing (default: no).   Interlaced	 video
	      shows  ugly comb-like artifacts, which are visible on fast move-
	      ment. Enabling this typically inserts the	yadif video filter  in
	      order  to	 deinterlace the video,	or lets	the video output apply
	      deinterlacing if supported.

	      This behaves exactly like	the deinterlace	input  property	 (usu-
	      ally mapped to d).

	      Keep  in	mind  that  this  will conflict	with manually inserted
	      deinterlacing filters, unless you	take care. (Since mpv  0.27.0,
	      even  the	hardware deinterlace filters will conflict. Also since
	      that version, --deinterlace=auto was removed, which used to mean
	      that  the	 default interlacing option of possibly	inserted video
	      filters was used.)

	      Note that	this will make video look worse	if it's	 not  actually

	      Play/convert only	first <number> video frames, then quit.

	      --frames=0 loads the file, but immediately quits before initial-
	      izing playback. (Might be	useful for scripts which just want  to
	      determine	some file properties.)

	      For  audio-only  playback,  any  value  greater than 0 will quit
	      playback immediately after initialization. The value 0 works  as
	      with video.

	      RGB color	levels used with YUV to	RGB conversion.	Normally, out-
	      put devices such as PC monitors use  full	 range	color  levels.
	      However,	some  TVs and video monitors expect studio RGB levels.
	      Providing	full range output to a device expecting	 studio	 level
	      input  results  in crushed blacks	and whites, the	reverse	in dim
	      gray blacks and dim whites.

	      Not all VOs support this option. Some will silently ignore it.

	      Available	color ranges are:

	      auto   automatic selection (equals to full range)	(default)

		     limited range (16-235 per component), studio levels

	      full   full range	(0-255 per component), PC levels

		 It is advisable to use	your graphics driver's color range op-
		 tion instead, if available.

	      Allow  hardware  decoding	 for  a	given list of codecs only. The
	      special value all	always allows all codecs.

	      You can get the list of allowed codecs with mpv  --vd=help.  Re-
	      move the prefix, e.g. instead of lavc:h264 use h264.

	      By  default, this	is set to h264,vc1,hevc,vp9,av1. Note that the
	      hardware acceleration special codecs  like  h264_vdpau  are  not
	      relevant	anymore,  and  in fact have been removed from Libav in
	      this form.

	      This is usually only needed with broken GPUs, where a  codec  is
	      reported as supported, but decoding causes more problems than it


		 mpv --hwdec=vdpau --vo=vdpau --hwdec-codecs=h264,mpeg2video
			Enable vdpau decoding for h264 and mpeg2 only.

	      Check hardware decoder profile (default: yes). If	no is set, the
	      highest  profile	of the hardware	decoder	is unconditionally se-
	      lected, and decoding is forced even if the profile of the	 video
	      is higher	than that.  The	result is most likely broken decoding,
	      but may also help	if the detected	or reported profiles are some-
	      how incorrect.

	      Fallback	to  software  decoding if the hardware-accelerated de-
	      coder fails (default: 3).	If this	is  a  number,	then  fallback
	      will  be	triggered  if  N  frames fail to decode	in a row. 1 is
	      equivalent to yes.

	      Setting this to a	higher number might break the  playback	 start
	      fallback:	 if  a	fallback  happens,  parts  of the file will be
	      skipped, approximately by	to the number of  packets  that	 could
	      not  be decoded. Values below an unspecified count will not have
	      this problem, because mpv	retains	the packets.

	      Enable direct rendering (default:	yes). If this is set  to  yes,
	      the video	will be	decoded	directly to GPU	video memory (or stag-
	      ing buffers).  This can speed up video upload, and may help with
	      large  resolutions  or  slow  hardware. This works only with the
	      following	VOs:

		 o gpu:	requires at least OpenGL 4.4 or	Vulkan.

	      (In particular, this can't be made work with opengl-cb, but  the
	      libmpv render API	has optional support.)

	      Using video filters of any kind that write to the	image data (or
	      output newly allocated frames) will silently disable the DR code

	      Only  use	 bit-exact algorithms in all decoding steps (for codec

       --vd-lavc-fast (MPEG-2, MPEG-4, and H.264 only)
	      Enable optimizations which do not	comply with the	format	speci-
	      fication	and potentially	cause problems,	like simpler dequanti-
	      zation, simpler motion compensation, assuming use	of the default
	      quantization  matrix,  assuming  YUV  4:2:0  and	skipping a few
	      checks to	detect damaged bitstreams.

	      Pass AVOptions to	libavcodec decoder. Note, a patch to make  the
	      o=  unneeded  and	 pass all unknown options through the AVOption
	      system is	welcome. A full	list of	AVOptions can be found in  the
	      FFmpeg manual.

	      Some  options  which  used  to be	direct options can be set with
	      this mechanism, like bug,	gray, idct, ec,	vismv,	skip_top  (was
	      st), skip_bottom (was sb), debug.

	      This is a	key/value list option. See List	Options	for details.



	      Show even	broken/corrupt frames (default:	no). If	this option is
	      set to no, libavcodec won't output frames	that were  either  de-
	      coded before an initial keyframe was decoded, or frames that are
	      recognized as corrupted.

       --vd-lavc-skiploopfilter=<skipvalue> (H.264 only)
	      Skips the	loop filter (AKA deblocking)  during  H.264  decoding.
	      Since the	filtered frame is supposed to be used as reference for
	      decoding dependent frames, this has a worse  effect  on  quality
	      than not doing deblocking	on e.g.	MPEG-2 video. But at least for
	      high bitrate HDTV, this provides a big speedup with little visi-
	      ble quality loss.

	      <skipvalue> can be one of	the following:

	      none   Never skip.

		     Skip  useless  processing	steps  (e.g. 0 size packets in

	      nonref Skip frames that are not referenced (i.e.	not  used  for
		     decoding other frames, the	error cannot "build up").

	      bidir  Skip B-Frames.

	      nonkey Skip all frames except keyframes.

	      all    Skip all frames.

       --vd-lavc-skipidct=<skipvalue> (MPEG-1/2	only)
	      Skips  the  IDCT step. This degrades quality a lot in almost all
	      cases (see skiploopfilter	for available skip values).

	      Skips decoding of	frames completely. Big speedup,	but jerky  mo-
	      tion  and	sometimes bad artifacts	(see skiploopfilter for	avail-
	      able skip	values).

	      Set framedropping	mode used with --framedrop (see	skiploopfilter
	      for available skip values).

	      Number  of threads to use	for decoding. Whether threading	is ac-
	      tually supported depends on codec	(default: 0). 0	means  autode-
	      tect number of cores on the machine and use that,	up to the max-
	      imum of 16. You can set more than	16 threads manually.

	      Assume the video was encoded by an old, buggy x264 version  (de-
	      fault:  no).   Normally, this is autodetected by libavcodec. But
	      if the bitstream contains	no x264	version	info (or it was	 some-
	      how  skipped), and the stream was	in fact	encoded	by an old x264
	      version (build 150 or earlier), and if  the  stream  uses	 4:4:4
	      chroma,  then  libavcodec	 will by default show corrupted	video.
	      This option sets the libavcodec x264_build option	to 150,	 which
	      means  that  if  the stream contains no version info, or was not
	      encoded by x264 at all, it assumes it was	 encoded  by  the  old
	      version.	Enabling  this	option is pretty safe if you want your
	      broken files to work, but	in theory this can  break  on  streams
	      not encoded by x264, or if a stream encoded by a newer x264 ver-
	      sion contains no version info.

	      Allow up to N in-flight frames. This  essentially	 controls  the
	      frame  latency. Increasing the swapchain depth can improve pipe-
	      lining and prevent missed	vsyncs,	but increases visible latency.
	      This option only mandates	an upper limit,	the implementation can
	      use a lower latency than requested internally. A	setting	 of  1
	      means  that  the	VO will	wait for every frame to	become visible
	      before starting to render	the next frame.	(Default: 3)

	      If this is enabled (default), playing  with  a  speed  different
	      from  normal  automatically inserts the scaletempo audio filter.
	      For details, see audio filter section.

	      Use the given audio device. This consists	of  the	 audio	output
	      name,  e.g.   alsa,  followed by /, followed by the audio	output
	      specific device name. The	default	value for this option is auto,
	      which  tries every audio output in preference order with the de-
	      fault device.

	      You can list audio devices with --audio-device=help.  This  out-
	      puts  the	 device	name in	quotes,	followed by a description. The
	      device name is what you have to pass to the  --audio-device  op-
	      tion. The	list of	audio devices can be retrieved by API by using
	      the audio-device-list property.

	      While the	option normally	takes one of the strings as  indicated
	      by the methods above, you	can also force the device for most AOs
	      by building it manually. For example name/foobar forces  the  AO
	      name  to	use  the  device foobar. However, the --ao option will
	      strictly force a specific	AO. To avoid confusion,	don't use --ao
	      and --audio-device together.

		 Example for ALSA

			MPlayer	 and  mplayer2 required	you to replace any ','
			with '.' and any ':' with '=' in the ALSA device name.
			For example, to	use the	device named dmix:default, you
			had to do:
		     -ao alsa:device=dmix=default

		 In mpv	you could instead use:

	      Enable exclusive output mode. In this mode, the system  is  usu-
	      ally locked out, and only	mpv will be able to output audio.

	      This only	works for some audio outputs, such as wasapi and core-
	      audio. Other audio outputs silently ignore  this	options.  They
	      either have no concept of	exclusive mode,	or the mpv side	of the
	      implementation is	missing.

	      If no audio device can be	opened,	behave	as  if	--ao=null  was
	      given.  This  is	useful in combination with --audio-device: in-
	      stead of causing an error	if the selected	device does not	exist,
	      the  client  API	user (or a Lua script) could let playback con-
	      tinue normally, and check	the current-ao	and  audio-device-list
	      properties to make high-level decisions about how	to continue.

	      Specify  the  audio  output drivers to be	used. See AUDIO	OUTPUT
	      DRIVERS for details and descriptions of available	drivers.

	      Specify a	list of	audio filters to apply to  the	audio  stream.
	      See  AUDIO FILTERS for details and descriptions of the available
	      filters.	The option variants --af-add, --af-pre,	 --af-del  and
	      --af-clr	exist  to  modify a previously specified list, but you
	      should not need these for	typical	use.

	      List of codecs for which compressed audio	passthrough should  be
	      used. This works for both	classic	S/PDIF and HDMI.

	      Possible	codecs	are  ac3, dts, dts-hd, eac3, truehd.  Multiple
	      codecs can be specified by separating them with ,. dts refers to
	      low  bitrate  DTS	 core, while dts-hd refers to DTS MA (receiver
	      and OS support varies). If both dts and dts-hd are specified, it
	      behaves equivalent to specifying dts-hd only.

	      In  earlier  mpv	versions you could use --ad to force the spdif
	      wrapper.	This does not work anymore.


			There is not much reason to use	 this.	HDMI  supports
			uncompressed  multichannel PCM,	and mpv	supports loss-
			less DTS-HD decoding  via  FFmpeg's  new  DCA  decoder
			(based on libdcadec).

	      Specify  a priority list of audio	decoders to be used, according
	      to their decoder name. When determining which  decoder  to  use,
	      the  first decoder that matches the audio	format is selected. If
	      that is unavailable, the next decoder is used. Finally, it tries
	      all  other decoders that are not explicitly selected or rejected
	      by the option.

	      -	at the end of the list suppresses fallback on other  available
	      decoders not on the --ad list. + in front	of an entry forces the
	      decoder. Both of these should not	normally be used, because they
	      break  normal  decoder auto-selection! Both of these methods are


			Prefer the  FFmpeg/Libav  mp3float  decoder  over  all
			other MP3 decoders.

			List all available decoders.


			Enabling compressed audio passthrough (AC3 and DTS via
			SPDIF/HDMI) with this  option  is  not	possible.  Use
			--audio-spdif instead.

	      Set the startup volume. 0	means silence, 100 means no volume re-
	      duction or amplification.	Negative values	can be passed for com-
	      patibility, but are treated as 0.

	      Since  mpv  0.18.1, this always controls the internal mixer (aka

	      Adjust volume gain according to replaygain values	stored in  the
	      file  metadata.  With  --replaygain=no (the default), perform no
	      adjustment.  With	--replaygain=track,  apply  track  gain.  With
	      --replaygain=album, apply	album gain if present and fall back to
	      track gain otherwise.

	      Pre-amplification	gain in	dB to apply to the selected replaygain
	      gain (default: 0).

	      Prevent  clipping	caused by replaygain by	automatically lowering
	      the gain (default). Use --replaygain-clip=no to disable this.

	      Gain in dB to apply if the file has no replay  gain  tags.  This
	      option  is always	applied	if the replaygain logic	is somehow in-
	      active. If this is applied, no other replaygain options are  ap-

	      Audio delay in seconds (positive or negative float value). Posi-
	      tive values delay	the  audio,  and  negative  values  delay  the

	      Set startup audio	mute status (default: no).

	      auto is a	deprecated possible value that is equivalent to	no.

	      See also:	--volume.

	      Deprecated/unfunctional. Before mpv 0.18.1, this used to control
	      whether to use the volume	controls of the	audio output driver or
	      the internal mpv volume filter.

	      The  current behavior is that softvol is always enabled, i.e. as
	      if this option is	set to yes. The	other behaviors	are not	avail-
	      able  anymore,  although auto almost matches current behavior in
	      most cases.

	      The no behavior is still partially available through the ao-vol-
	      ume  and	ao-mute	 properties. But there are no options to reset

	      Use this audio demuxer type when using --audio-file. Use	a  '+'
	      before  the  name	 to force it; this will	skip some checks. Give
	      the demuxer name as printed by --audio-demuxer=help.

	      Select the  Dynamic  Range  Compression  level  for  AC-3	 audio
	      streams.	 <level> is a float value ranging from 0 to 1, where 0
	      means no compression (which is the default)  and	1  means  full
	      compression  (make  loud	passages  more silent and vice versa).
	      Values up	to 6 are also accepted,	but are	 purely	 experimental.
	      This option only shows an	effect if the AC-3 stream contains the
	      required range compression information.

	      The standard mandates that DRC is	enabled	by  default,  but  mpv
	      (and  some other players)	ignore this for	the sake of better au-
	      dio quality.

	      Whether to request audio channel	downmixing  from  the  decoder
	      (default:	no).  Some decoders, like AC-3,	AAC and	DTS, can remix
	      audio on decoding. The requested number of  output  channels  is
	      set  with	 the --audio-channels option.  Useful for playing sur-
	      round audio on a stereo system.

	      Number of	threads	to use for decoding. Whether threading is  ac-
	      tually supported depends on codec. As of this writing, it's sup-
	      ported for some lossless codecs only. 0 means autodetect	number
	      of  cores	 on  the machine and use that, up to the maximum of 16
	      (default:	1).

	      Pass AVOptions to	libavcodec decoder. Note, a patch to make  the
	      o=  unneeded  and	 pass all unknown options through the AVOption
	      system is	welcome. A full	list of	AVOptions can be found in  the
	      FFmpeg manual.

	      This is a	key/value list option. See List	Options	for details.

       --ad-spdif-dtshd=<yes|no>, --dtshd, --no-dtshd
	      If DTS is	passed through,	use DTS-HD.


			This  and enabling passthrough via --ad	are deprecated
			in favor of using --audio-spdif=dts-hd.

	      Control which audio  channels  are  output  (e.g.	 surround  vs.
	      stereo). There are the following possibilities:


		       Use  the	system's preferred channel layout. If there is
		       none (such as when accessing a hardware device  instead
		       of  the system mixer), force stereo. Some audio outputs
		       might simply accept any layout  and  do	downmixing  on
		       their own.

		       This is the default.


		       Send  the  audio	device whatever	it accepts, preferring
		       the audio's original channel layout. Can	 cause	issues
		       with HDMI (see the warning below).


		       List of ,-separated channel layouts which should	be al-
		       lowed.  Technically, this only adjusts the filter chain
		       output  to  the	best  matching layout in the list, and
		       passes the result to the	audio API.  It's possible that
		       the audio API will select a different channel layout.

		       Using this mode is recommended for direct hardware out-
		       put, especially over HDMI (see HDMI warning below).


		       Force  a	plain stereo downmix. This is  a  special-case
		       of  the previous	item. (See paragraphs below for	impli-

	      If a list	of layouts is given, each item can be  either  an  ex-
	      plicit  channel  layout  name  (like  5.1), or a channel number.
	      Channel numbers refer to default layouts,	e.g. 2 channels	 refer
	      to stereo, 6 refers to 5.1.

	      See  --audio-channels=help  output  for defined default layouts.
	      This also	lists speaker names, which can be used to express  ar-
	      bitrary channel layouts (e.g. fl-fr-lfe is 2.1).

	      If  the  list of channel layouts has only	1 item,	the decoder is
	      asked to produce according output. This sometimes	 triggers  de-
	      coder-downmix,  which  might  be	different  from	the normal mpv
	      downmix. (Only some decoders support remixing audio, like	 AC-3,
	      AAC or DTS. You can use --ad-lavc-downmix=no to make the decoder
	      always output its	native layout.)	One consequence	is that	 --au-
	      dio-channels=stereo  triggers  decoder  downmix,	while  auto or
	      auto-safe	never will, even if they end up	selecting stereo. This
	      happens because the decision whether to use decoder downmix hap-
	      pens long	before the audio device	is opened.

	      If the channel layout of the media file (i.e. the	 decoder)  and
	      the  AO's	channel	layout don't match, mpv	will attempt to	insert
	      a	conversion filter.  You	may need to change the channel	layout
	      of  the  system mixer to achieve your desired output as mpv does
	      not have control over it.	Another	work-around for	this  on  some
	      AOs  is  to  use	--audio-exclusive=yes to circumvent the	system
	      mixer entirely.


			Using auto can cause  issues  when  using  audio  over
			HDMI. The OS will typically report all channel layouts
			that _can_ go over HDMI, even if the receiver does not
			support	 them. If a receiver gets an unsupported chan-
			nel layout, random things can happen, such as dropping
			the additional channels, or adding noise.

			You  are  recommended  to set an explicit whitelist of
			the layouts you	want. For example, most	A/V  receivers
			connected  via	HDMI  and  that	 can  do 7.1 would  be
			served by: --audio-channels=7.1,5.1,stereo

	      Setting this option to attachment	(default) will	display	 image
	      attachments  (e.g. album cover art) when playing audio files. It
	      will display the first image found, and  additional  images  are
	      available	as video tracks.

	      Setting  this  option  to	 no disables display of	video entirely
	      when playing audio files.

	      This option has no influence on files with normal	video tracks.

	      Play audio from an external file while viewing a video.

	      This is a	path list option. See List Options for details.

	      CLI/config file only alias for --audio-files-append. Each	use of
	      this  option will	add a new audio	track. The details are similar
	      to how --sub-file	works.

	      Select the sample	format used for	output from the	 audio	filter
	      layer  to	the sound card.	The values that	<format> can adopt are
	      listed below in the description of the format audio filter.

	      Select the output	sample rate to be used (of course sound	 cards
	      have  limits  on this). If the sample frequency selected is dif-
	      ferent from that of the current media,  the  lavrresample	 audio
	      filter  will  be inserted	into the audio filter layer to compen-
	      sate for the difference.

	      Try to play consecutive audio files with no silence  or  disrup-
	      tion at the point	of file	change.	Default: weak.

	      no     Disable gapless audio.

	      yes    The  audio	 device	 is opened using parameters chosen for
		     the first file played and is then kept open  for  gapless
		     playback.	This  means that if the	first file for example
		     has a low sample rate, then the following files  may  get
		     resampled	to  the	same low sample	rate, resulting	in re-
		     duced sound quality. If you play files with different pa-
		     rameters, consider	using options such as --audio-sampler-
		     ate and --audio-format  to	 explicitly  select  what  the
		     shared output format will be.

	      weak   Normally, the audio device	is kept	open (using the	format
		     it	was first initialized with). If	the audio  format  the
		     decoder  output  changes,	the audio device is closed and
		     reopened. This means that you will	normally  get  gapless
		     audio  with  files	 that were encoded using the same set-
		     tings, but	might not be gapless in	other cases.  The  ex-
		     act  conditions under which the audio device is kept open
		     is	an implementation detail, and can change from  version
		     to	 version.   Currently,	the device is kept even	if the
		     sample format changes, but	the sample  formats  are  con-
		     vertible.	If video is still going	on when	there is still
		     audio, trying to use gapless is also explicitly given up.

		 This feature is implemented in	a simple manner	and relies  on
		 audio output device buffering to continue playback while mov-
		 ing from one file to another. If playback  of	the  new  file
		 starts	slowly,	for example because it is played from a	remote
		 network location or because you have specified	cache settings
		 that  require	time  for  the	initial	 cache	fill, then the
		 buffered audio	may run	out before playback of	the  new  file
		 can start.

       --initial-audio-sync, --no-initial-audio-sync
	      When  starting a video file or after events such as seeking, mpv
	      will by default modify the audio stream to make  it  start  from
	      the  same	timestamp as video, by either inserting	silence	at the
	      start or cutting away the	first samples. Disabling  this	option
	      makes  the  player behave	like older mpv versions	did: video and
	      audio are	both started immediately even  if  their  start	 time-
	      stamps  differ,  and  then video timing is gradually adjusted if
	      necessary	to reach correct synchronization later.

       --volume-max=<100.0-1000.0>, --softvol-max=<...>
	      Set the maximum amplification level in percent (default: 130). A
	      value  of	 130  will  allow you to adjust	the volume up to about
	      double the normal	level.

	      --softvol-max is a deprecated alias and should not be used.

       --audio-file-auto=<no|exact|fuzzy|all>, --no-audio-file-auto
	      Load additional audio files matching the video filename. The pa-
	      rameter specifies	how external audio files are matched.

	      no     Don't automatically load external audio files (default).

	      exact  Load the media filename with audio	file extension.

	      fuzzy  Load all audio files containing media filename.

	      all    Load   all	  audio	  files	  in  the  current  and	 --au-
		     dio-file-paths directories.

	      Equivalent to --sub-file-paths option, but for auto-loaded audio

	      This is a	path list option. See List Options for details.

	      The application name the player reports to the audio API.	Can be
	      useful if	you want to force a different audio profile (e.g. with
	      PulseAudio),  or	to  set	 your  own application name when using

	      Set the audio output minimum buffer. The audio device might  ac-
	      tually  create a larger buffer if	it pleases. If the device cre-
	      ates a smaller buffer, additional	audio is buffered in an	 addi-
	      tional software buffer.

	      Making this larger will make soft-volume and other filters react
	      slower, introduce	additional issues on  playback	speed  change,
	      and  block  the player on	audio format changes. A	smaller	buffer
	      might lead to audio dropouts.

	      This option should be used for testing only.  If	a  non-default
	      value  helps  significantly,  the	 mpv developers	should be con-

	      Default: 0.2 (200	ms).

	      Cash-grab	consumer audio hardware	(such as A/V receivers)	 often
	      ignore  initial audio sent over HDMI. This can happen every time
	      audio over HDMI is stopped and resumed. In order	to  compensate
	      for  this, you can enable	this option to not to stop and restart
	      audio on seeks, and fill the gaps	with silence.  Likewise,  when
	      pausing  playback,  audio	 is not	stopped, and silence is	played
	      while paused. Note that if no audio track	is selected, the audio
	      device will still	be closed immediately.

	      Not all AOs support this.


			This  modifies	certain	 subtle	 player	behavior, like
			A/V-sync and underrun handling.	Enabling  this	option
			is strongly discouraged.

	      This  makes  sense  for  use with	--audio-stream-silence=yes. If
	      this option is given, the	player will wait for the given	amount
	      of  seconds after	opening	the audio device before	sending	actual
	      audio data to it.	Useful if your expensive hardware discards the
	      first  1	or  2  seconds	of  audio  data	 sent  to it. If --au-
	      dio-stream-silence=yes is	not set, this option will likely  just
	      waste time.

	  Changing  styling and	position does not work with all	subtitles. Im-
	  age-based subtitles (DVD, Bluray/PGS,	DVB) cannot changed for	funda-
	  mental  reasons.   Subtitles	in ASS format are normally not changed
	  intentionally,  but  overriding  them	  can	be   controlled	  with

	  Previously  some  options  working  on  text	subtitles  were	called
	  --sub-text-*,	they are now named --sub-*, and	those specifically for
	  ASS have been	renamed	from --ass-* to	--sub-ass-*.  They are now all
	  in this section.

	      Force subtitle demuxer type for  --sub-file.  Give  the  demuxer
	      name as printed by --sub-demuxer=help.

	      Delays subtitles by <sec>	seconds. Can be	negative.

       --sub-files=<file-list>,	--sub-file=<filename>
	      Add a subtitle file to the list of external subtitles.

	      If you use --sub-file only once, this subtitle file is displayed
	      by default.

	      If --sub-file is used multiple times, the	subtitle to use	can be
	      switched at runtime by cycling subtitle tracks. It's possible to
	      show two subtitles at once: use --sid to select the first	subti-
	      tle  index, and --secondary-sid to select	the second index. (The
	      index is printed on the terminal output after the	--sid= in  the
	      list of streams.)

	      --sub-files  is  a  path	list option (see List Options  for de-
	      tails), and can take multiple file names separated by  :	(Unix)
	      or  ;  (Windows),	while  --sub-file takes	a single filename, but
	      can be used multiple times to add	multiple  files.  Technically,
	      --sub-file  is a CLI/config file only alias for  --sub-files-ap-

	      Select a secondary subtitle stream. This is similar to --sid. If
	      a	 secondary subtitle is selected, it will be rendered as	topti-
	      tle (i.e.	on the top of the screen) alongside the	normal	subti-
	      tle, and provides	a way to render	two subtitles at once.

	      There  are  some caveats associated with this feature. For exam-
	      ple, bitmap subtitles will always	be rendered in their usual po-
	      sition,  so  selecting  a	 bitmap	subtitle as secondary subtitle
	      will result in overlapping subtitles.  Secondary	subtitles  are
	      never shown on the terminal if video is disabled.

		 Styling and interpretation of any formatting tags is disabled
		 for the secondary subtitle. Internally, the same mechanism as
		 --no-sub-ass is used to strip the styling.

		 If  the  main	subtitle stream	contains formatting tags which
		 display the subtitle at the top of the	screen,	it will	 over-
		 lap  with  the	secondary subtitle. To prevent this, you could
		 use --no-sub-ass to disable  styling  in  the	main  subtitle

	      Factor for the text subtitle font	size (default: 1).

		 This affects ASS subtitles as well, and may lead to incorrect
		 subtitle rendering. Use with care, or use --sub-font-size in-

	      Whether  to scale	subtitles with the window size (default: yes).
	      If this is disabled, changing the	window size won't  change  the
	      subtitle font size.

	      Like --sub-scale,	this can break ASS subtitles.

	      Make  the	 subtitle font size relative to	the window, instead of
	      the video.  This is useful if you	 always	 want  the  same  font
	      size, even if the	video doesn't cover the	window fully, e.g. be-
	      cause screen aspect and window aspect mismatch (and  the	player
	      adds black bars).

	      Default: yes.

	      This option is misnamed. The difference to the confusingly simi-
	      lar    sounding	 option	   --sub-scale-by-window    is	  that
	      --sub-scale-with-window still scales with	the approximate	window
	      size, while the other option disables this scaling.

	      Affects plain text subtitles only	(or ASS	if  --sub-ass-override
	      is set high enough).

	      Like  --sub-scale-with-window, but affects subtitles in ASS for-
	      mat only.	 Like --sub-scale, this	can break ASS subtitles.

	      Default: no.

	      Use fonts	embedded in Matroska container files and  ASS  scripts
	      (default:	 yes).	These  fonts  can be used for SSA/ASS subtitle

	      Specify the position of subtitles	on the screen.	The  value  is
	      the vertical position of the subtitle in % of the	screen height.
	      100 is the original position, which is often  not	 the  absolute
	      bottom  of  the  screen, but with	some margin between the	bottom
	      and the subtitle.	Values above 100  move	the  subtitle  further


			Text  subtitles	(as opposed to image subtitles)	may be
			cut off	if the value of	the option is above 100.  This
			is a libass restriction.

			This  affects  ASS  subtitles as well, and may lead to
			incorrect subtitle rendering in	addition to the	 prob-
			lem above.

			Using --sub-margin-y can achieve this in a better way.

	      Multiply the subtitle event timestamps with the given value. Can
	      be used to fix the playback speed	for frame-based	subtitle  for-
	      mats. Affects text subtitles only.


			--sub-speed=25/23.976	plays  frame  based  subtitles
			which have been	loaded assuming	a framerate of	23.976
			at 25 FPS.

	      Override some style or script info parameters.

	      This is a	string list option. See	List Options for details.


		 o --sub-ass-force-style=FontName=Arial,Default.Bold=1

		 o --sub-ass-force-style=PlayResY=768

		 Using this option may lead to incorrect subtitle rendering.

	      Set font hinting type. <type> can	be:

	      none   no	hinting	(default)

	      light  FreeType autohinter, light	mode

	      normal FreeType autohinter, normal mode

	      native font native hinter


			Enabling  hinting  can	lead to	mispositioned text (in
			situations it's	 supposed  to  match  up  video	 back-
			ground),  or  reduce the smoothness of animations with
			some badly authored ASS	scripts. It is recommended  to
			not use	this option, unless really needed.

	      Set line spacing value for SSA/ASS renderer.

	      Set the text layout engine used by libass.

	      simple uses  Fribidi  only,  fast, doesn't render	some languages

		     uses HarfBuzz, slower, wider language support

	      complex is the default. If libass	hasn't been  compiled  against
	      HarfBuzz,	libass silently	reverts	to simple.

	      Load all SSA/ASS styles found in the specified file and use them
	      for rendering text subtitles. The	syntax of the file is  exactly
	      like the [V4 Styles] / [V4+ Styles] section of SSA/ASS.

		 Using this option may lead to incorrect subtitle rendering.

	      Control  whether	user  style  overrides should be applied. Note
	      that all of these	overrides try to be somewhat smart about  fig-
	      uring out	whether	or not a subtitle is considered	a "sign".

	      no     Render  subtitles	as  specified by the subtitle scripts,
		     without overrides.

	      yes    Apply all the --sub-ass-* style override options.	Chang-
		     ing  the default for any of these options can lead	to in-
		     correct subtitle rendering	(default).

	      force  Like yes, but also	force all --sub-* options.  Can	 break
		     rendering easily.

	      scale  Like yes, but also	apply --sub-scale.

	      strip  Radically	strip  all ASS tags and	styles from the	subti-
		     tle.  This	 is  equivalent	 to   the   old	  --no-ass   /
		     --no-sub-ass options.

	      This  also  controls  some bitmap	subtitle overrides, as well as
	      HTML tags	in formats like	SRT, despite the name of the option.

	      Enables placing toptitles	and subtitles in  black	 borders  when
	      they are available, if the subtitles are in the ASS format.

	      Default: no.

	      Enables  placing	toptitles  and subtitles in black borders when
	      they are available, if the subtitles are in a plain text	format
	      (or ASS if --sub-ass-override is set high	enough).

	      Default: yes.

	      Renamed  from  --sub-ass-use-margins.  To	place ASS subtitles in
	      the  borders  too	 (like	the  old   option   did),   also   add

	      Stretch  SSA/ASS	subtitles  when	 playing anamorphic videos for
	      compatibility with traditional VSFilter  behavior.  This	switch
	      has no effect when the video is stored with square pixels.

	      The  renderer  historically  most	 commonly used for the SSA/ASS
	      subtitle formats,	VSFilter, had questionable behavior  that  re-
	      sulted  in subtitles being stretched too if the video was	stored
	      in anamorphic format that	required scaling  for  display.	  This
	      behavior	is usually undesirable and newer VSFilter versions may
	      behave differently. However, many	 existing  scripts  compensate
	      for  the	stretching  by modifying things	in the opposite	direc-
	      tion.  Thus, if such scripts  are	 displayed  "correctly",  they
	      will  not	 appear	as intended.  This switch enables emulation of
	      the old VSFilter behavior	(undesirable but expected by many  ex-
	      isting scripts).

	      Enabled by default.

	      Scale  \blur  tags by video resolution instead of	script resolu-
	      tion (enabled by default). This is bug in	 VSFilter,  which  ac-
	      cording  to some,	can't be fixed anymore in the name of compati-

	      Note that	this uses the actual video resolution for  calculating
	      the  offset scale	factor,	not what the video filter chain	or the
	      video output use.

	      Mangle colors like (xy-)vsfilter do (default:  basic).  Histori-
	      cally,  VSFilter	was not	color space aware. This	was no problem
	      as long as the color space used for SD video (BT.601) was	 used.
	      But  when	everything switched to HD (BT.709), VSFilter was still
	      converting RGB colors to BT.601, rendered	them  into  the	 video
	      frame,  and  handled  the	frame to the video output, which would
	      use BT.709 for conversion	to RGB.	The result were	mangled	subti-
	      tle  colors.  Later  on,	bad hacks were added on	top of the ASS
	      format to	control	how colors are to be mangled.

	      basic  Handle only BT.601->BT.709	 mangling,  if	the  subtitles
		     seem to indicate that this	is required (default).

	      full   Handle  the full YCbCr Matrix header with all video color
		     spaces supported by libass	and mpv. This  might  lead  to
		     bad  breakages in corner cases and	is not strictly	needed
		     for compatibility (hopefully), which is why this  is  not

		     Force  BT.601->BT.709  mangling,  regardless  of subtitle
		     headers or	video color space.

	      no     Disable color mangling completely.	All colors are RGB.

	      Choosing anything	other than no will make	the subtitle color de-
	      pend  on	the  video color space,	and it's for example in	theory
	      not possible to reuse a subtitle script with another video file.
	      The  --sub-ass-override option doesn't affect how	this option is

	      Stretch DVD subtitles when playing anamorphic videos for	better
	      looking  fonts on	badly mastered DVDs. This switch has no	effect
	      when the video is	stored with square pixels - which for DVD  in-
	      put cannot be the	case though.

	      Many studios tend	to use bitmap fonts designed for square	pixels
	      when authoring DVDs, causing the	fonts  to  look	 stretched  on
	      playback	on DVD players.	This option fixes them,	however	at the
	      price of possibly	misaligning some subtitles (e.g. sign transla-

	      Disabled by default.

	      Stretch  DVD  and	 other image subtitles to the screen, ignoring
	      the video	margins. This has a similar effect  as	--sub-use-mar-
	      gins  for	 text  subtitles,  except that the text	itself will be
	      stretched, not only just repositioned. (At least in  general  it
	      is  unavoidable,	as  an image bitmap can	in theory consist of a
	      single bitmap covering the whole screen, and  the	 player	 won't
	      know where exactly the text parts	are located.)

	      This option does not display subtitles correctly.	Use with care.

	      Disabled by default.

	      Override the image subtitle resolution with the video resolution
	      (default:	no). Normally, the subtitle canvas  is	fit  into  the
	      video  canvas  (e.g.  letterboxed). Setting this option uses the
	      video size as subtitle canvas size. Can be useful	to test	broken
	      subtitles,  which	 often	happen	when  the video	was trancoded,
	      while attempting to keep the old subtitles.

       --sub-ass, --no-sub-ass
	      Render ASS subtitles natively (enabled by	default).

		 This has been	deprecated  by	--sub-ass-override=strip.  You
		 also  may  need  --embeddedfonts=no to	get the	same behavior.
		 Also, using --sub-ass-override=style should give  better  re-
		 sults without breaking	subtitles too much.

	      If  --no-sub-ass	is  specified, all tags	and style declarations
	      are stripped and ignored on display. The subtitle	renderer  uses
	      the font style as	specified by the --sub-	options	instead.

		 Using --no-sub-ass may	lead to	incorrect or completely	broken
		 rendering of ASS/SSA subtitles. It can	sometimes be useful to
		 forcibly override the styling of ASS subtitles, but should be
		 avoided in general.

       --sub-auto=<no|exact|fuzzy|all>,	--no-sub-auto
	      Load additional subtitle files matching the video	filename.  The
	      parameter	specifies how external subtitle	files are matched. ex-
	      act is enabled by	default.

	      no     Don't automatically load external subtitle	files.

	      exact  Load the media filename with subtitle file	extension  and
		     possibly language suffixes	(default).

	      fuzzy  Load all subs containing media filename.

	      all    Load  all subs in the current and --sub-file-paths	direc-

	      You can use  this	 option	 to  specify  the  subtitle  codepage.
	      uchardet will be used to guess the charset. (If mpv was not com-
	      piled with uchardet, then	utf-8 is the effective default.)

	      The default value	for this option	is auto, which enables autode-

	      The  following  steps are	taken to determine the final codepage,
	      in order:

	      o	if the specific	codepage has a +, use that codepage

	      o	if the data looks like UTF-8, assume it	is UTF-8

	      o	if --sub-codepage is set to a specific codepage, use that

	      o	run uchardet, and if successful, use that

	      o	otherwise, use UTF-8-BROKEN


		 o --sub-codepage=latin2 Use Latin 2 if	input is not UTF-8.

		 o --sub-codepage=+cp1250 Always force recoding	to cp1250.

	      The pseudo codepage UTF-8-BROKEN is  used	 internally.  If  it's
	      set,  subtitles are interpreted as UTF-8 with "Latin 1" as fall-
	      back for bytes which are not valid  UTF-8	 sequences.  iconv  is
	      never involved in	this mode.

	      This  option  changed  in	mpv 0.23.0. Support for	the old	syntax
	      was fully	removed	in mpv 0.24.0.

		 This works for	text subtitle files only. Other	types of  sub-
		 titles	 (in particular	subtitles in mkv files)	are always as-
		 sumed to be UTF-8.

	      Adjust subtitle timing is	to remove minor	gaps or	 overlaps  be-
	      tween  subtitles	(if the	difference is smaller than 210 ms, the
	      gap or overlap is	removed).

	      Display only forced subtitles for	the DVD	 subtitle  stream  se-
	      lected  by  e.g.	--slang	(default: auto). When set to auto, en-
	      abled when the --subs-with-matching-audio	option	is  on	and  a
	      non-forced stream	is selected.  Enabling this will hide all sub-
	      titles in	streams	that don't make	a distinction  between	forced
	      and unforced events within a stream.

	      Specify the framerate of the subtitle file (default: video fps).
	      Affects text subtitles only.

		 <rate>	> video	fps speeds the subtitles  up  for  frame-based
		 subtitle files	and slows them down for	time-based ones.

	      See also:	--sub-speed.

	      Apply  Gaussian  blur  to	image subtitles	(default: 0). This can
	      help to make pixelated DVD/Vobsubs look  nicer.  A  value	 other
	      than  0  also  switches  to  software subtitle scaling. Might be

		 Never applied to text subtitles.

	      Convert image subtitles to grayscale. Can	help  to  make	yellow
	      DVD/Vobsubs look nicer.

		 Never applied to text subtitles.

	      Deprecated, use --sub-file-paths.

	      Specify  extra  directories to search for	subtitles matching the
	      video.  Multiple directories can be separated  by	 ":"  (";"  on
	      Windows).	 Paths can be relative or absolute. Relative paths are
	      interpreted relative to video file directory.  If	the file is  a
	      URL, only	absolute paths and sub configuration subdirectory will
	      be scanned.


			Assuming that /path/to/video/video.avi is  played  and
			--sub-file-paths=sub:subtitles	 is   specified,   mpv
			searches for subtitle files in these directories:

		 o /path/to/video/

		 o /path/to/video/sub/

		 o /path/to/video/subtitles/

		 o the	sub  configuration   subdirectory   (usually   ~/.con-

	      This is a	path list option. See List Options for details.

       --sub-visibility, --no-sub-visibility
	      Can  be  used  to	disable	display	of subtitles, but still	select
	      and decode them.

	      (Obscure,	rarely useful.)	Can be used to play broken  mkv	 files
	      with duplicate ReadOrder fields. ReadOrder is the	first field in
	      a	Matroska-style ASS subtitle packets. It	should be unique,  and
	      libass  uses  it for fast	elimination of duplicates. This	option
	      disables caching of subtitles across  seeks,  so	after  a  seek
	      libass  can't eliminate subtitle packets with the	same ReadOrder
	      as earlier packets.

	      This works for dvb_teletext subtitle streams, and	if FFmpeg  has
	      been compiled with support for it.

	      Specify font to use for subtitles	that do	not themselves specify
	      a	particular font. The default is	sans-serif.


		 o --sub-font='Bitstream Vera Sans'

		 o --sub-font='Comic Sans MS'

		 The --sub-font	option (and many other	style  related	--sub-
		 options)  are ignored when ASS-subtitles are rendered,	unless
		 the --no-sub-ass option is specified.

		 This used  to	support	 fontconfig  patterns.	Starting  with
		 libass	0.13.0,	this stopped working.

	      Specify the sub font size. The unit is the size in scaled	pixels
	      at a window height of 720. The actual pixel size is scaled  with
	      the  window  height:  if	the window height is larger or smaller
	      than 720,	the actual size	of the text increases or decreases  as

	      Default: 55.

	      See --sub-color. Color used for sub text background. You can use
	      --sub-shadow-offset to change its	size relative to the text.

	      Gaussian blur factor. 0 means no blur applied (default).

	      Format text on bold.

	      Format text on italic.

	      See --sub-color. Color used for the sub font border.

		 ignored when --sub-back-color is specified (or	more  exactly:
		 when that option is not set to	completely transparent).

	      Size   of	  the	sub   font   border   in  scaled  pixels  (see
	      --sub-font-size for details). A value of 0 disables borders.

	      Default: 3.

	      Specify the color	used for unstyled text subtitles.

	      The color	is specified in	the form r/g/b,	where each color  com-
	      ponent is	specified as number in the range 0.0 to	1.0. It's also
	      possible to specify the transparency by using r/g/b/a, where the
	      alpha  value 0 means fully transparent, and 1.0 means opaque. If
	      the alpha	component is not given,	the color is 100% opaque.

	      Passing a	single number to the option sets the sub to gray,  and
	      the form gray/a lets you specify alpha additionally.


		 o --sub-color=1.0/0.0/0.0 set sub to opaque red

		 o --sub-color=1.0/0.0/0.0/0.75	set sub	to opaque red with 75%

		 o --sub-color=0.5/0.75	set sub	to 50% gray with 75% alpha

	      Alternatively, the color can be specified	as a RGB  hex  triplet
	      in  the form #RRGGBB, where each 2-digit group expresses a color
	      value in the range 0 (00)	to 255 (FF). For example,  #FF0000  is
	      red.   This  is similar to web colors. Alpha is given with #AAR-


		 o --sub-color='#FF0000' set sub to opaque red

		 o --sub-color='#C0808080' set sub to 50% gray with 75%	alpha

	      Left and right screen margin for the subs	in scaled pixels  (see
	      --sub-font-size for details).

	      This  option  specifies  the distance of the sub to the left, as
	      well as at which distance	from the right border  long  sub  text
	      will be broken.

	      Default: 25.

	      Top  and bottom screen margin for	the subs in scaled pixels (see
	      --sub-font-size for details).

	      This option specifies the	vertical margins of unstyled text sub-
	      titles.	If  you	just want to raise the vertical	subtitle posi-
	      tion, use	--sub-pos.

	      Default: 22.

	      Control to which corner of the screen text subtitles  should  be
	      aligned to (default: center).

	      Never  applied  to  ASS  subtitles, except in --no-sub-ass mode.
	      Likewise,	this does not apply to image subtitles.

	      Vertical position	(default: bottom).  Details see	--sub-align-x.

	      Control how multi	line subs are justified	irrespective of	 where
	      they  are	 aligned  (default: auto which justifies as defined by
	      --sub-align-y).  Left justification is recommended to  make  the
	      subs easier to read as it	is easier for the eyes.

	      Applies  justification as	defined	by --sub-justify on ASS	subti-
	      tles if --sub-ass-override is not	set to no.  Default: no.

	      See --sub-color. Color used for sub text shadow.

	      Displacement of the  sub	text  shadow  in  scaled  pixels  (see
	      --sub-font-size for details). A value of 0 disables shadows.

	      Default: 0.

	      Horizontal    sub	  font	 spacing   in	scaled	 pixels	  (see
	      --sub-font-size for details). This value is added	to the	normal
	      letter spacing. Negative values are allowed.

	      Default: 0.

	      Applies  filter  removing	 subtitle  additions  for  the deaf or
	      hard-of-hearing (SDH).  This is intended for English, but	may in
	      part work	for other languages too.  The intention	is that	it can
	      be always	enabled	so may not remove all parts added.  It removes
	      speaker  labels  (like MAN:), upper case text in parentheses and
	      any text in brackets.

	      Default: no.

	      Do harder	SDH filtering (if enabled by --sub-filter-sdh).	  Will
	      also  remove  speaker  labels  and text within parentheses using
	      both lower and upper case	letters.

	      Default: no.

	      Set a list of regular expressions	to match  on  text  subtitles,
	      and  remove  any	lines  that  match (default: empty). This is a
	      string list option. See List Options for details.	Normally,  you
	      should  use --sub-filter-regex-append=<regex>, where each	option
	      use will append a	new  regular  expression,  without  having  to
	      fight escaping problems.

	      List  items  are	matched	 in  order.  If	 a  regular expression
	      matches, the process is stopped, and the subtitle	line  is  dis-
	      carded.  The text	matched	against	is, currently, always the Text
	      field of ASS events (if the subtitle format is different,	it  is
	      always converted). This may include formatting tags. Matching is
	      case-insensitive,	but how	this is	done depends on	the libc,  and
	      most  likely works in ASCII only.	It does	not work on bitmap/im-
	      age subtitles. Unavailable  on  inferior	OSes  (requires	 POSIX
	      regex support).


			--sub-filter-regex-append=opensubtitles\.org   filters
			some ads.

	      Technically, using a list	for matching is	redundant,  since  you
	      could  just  use	a  single  combined regular expression.	But it
	      helps with diagnosis, ease of use, and temporarily disabling  or
	      enabling individual filters.

		 This  is experimental.	The semantics most likely will change,
		 and if	you use	this, you should be prepared to	update the op-
		 tion  later.  Ideas include replacing the regexes with	a very
		 primitive and small subset of sed, or some method to  control

	      Log  dropped  lines  with	 warning log level, instead of verbose
	      (default:	no).  Helpful for testing.

	      Whether to enable	regex filtering	(default: yes).	Note  that  if
	      no  regexes  are	added  to the --sub-filter-regex list, setting
	      this option to yes has no	effect.	It's meant to  easily  disable
	      or enable	filtering temporarily.

	      For every	video stream, create a closed captions track (default:
	      no). The only purpose is to make the track available for	selec-
	      tion  at	the  start of playback,	instead	of creating it lazily.
	      This applies only	to ATSC	A53 Part 4 Closed Captions  (displayed
	      by mpv as	subtitle tracks	using the codec	eia_608). The CC track
	      is marked	"default" and selected according to the	normal	subti-
	      tle  track selection rules. You can then use --sid to explicitly
	      select the correct track too.

	      If the video stream contains no closed captions, or if no	 video
	      is  being	 decoded,  the CC track	will remain empty and will not
	      show any text.

	      Which libass font	provider backend to use	(default: auto).  auto
	      will  attempt  to	 use  the  native font provider: fontconfig on
	      Linux, CoreText  on  OSX,	 DirectWrite  on  Windows.  fontconfig
	      forces  fontconfig, if libass was	built with support (if not, it
	      behaves like none).

	      The none font provider effectively  disables  system  fonts.  It
	      will  still  attempt  to	use embedded fonts (unless --embedded-
	      fonts=no is set; this is the same	behavior  as  with  all	 other
	      font  providers),	 subfont.ttf  if  provided,  and fonts in  the
	      fonts sub-directory if provided. (The fallback  is  more	strict
	      than  that  of other font	providers, and if a font name does not
	      match, it	may prefer not to render any text that uses the	 miss-
	      ing font.)

	      Set  the window title. This is used for the video	window,	and if
	      possible,	also sets the audio stream title.

	      Properties are expanded. (See Property Expansion.)

		 There is a danger of this causing significant CPU usage,  de-
		 pending  on the properties used. Changing the window title is
		 often a slow operation, and if	the title changes every	frame,
		 playback can be ruined.

	      In  multi-monitor	 configurations	 (i.e.	a  single desktop that
	      spans across multiple displays), this  option  tells  mpv	 which
	      screen to	display	the video on.

		 Note (X11)

			This  option  does  not	 work properly with all	window
			managers. In these cases, you can try to use  --geome-
			try  to	position the window explicitly.	It's also pos-
			sible that the window manager provides native features
			to  control  which  screens application	windows	should

	      See also --fs-screen.

       --fullscreen, --fs
	      Fullscreen playback.

	      In multi-monitor configurations  (i.e.  a	 single	 desktop  that
	      spans  across  multiple  displays),  this	option tells mpv which
	      screen to	go fullscreen to.  If current is used mpv  will	 fall-
	      back on what the user provided with the screen option.

		 Note (X11)

			This  option  works properly only with window managers
			which understand the EWMH  _NET_WM_FULLSCREEN_MONITORS

		 Note (OS X)

			all  does  not	work on	OS X and will behave like cur-

	      See also --screen.

	      Do not terminate when playing or seeking beyond the end  of  the
	      file, and	there is not next file to be played (and --loop	is not
	      used).  Instead, pause the player. When trying  to  seek	beyond
	      end  of  the  file,  the player will attempt to seek to the last

	      Normally,	this will act like set pause yes on  EOF,  unless  the
	      --keep-open-pause=no option is set.

	      The following arguments can be given:

	      no     If	 the  current file ends, go to the next	file or	termi-
		     nate.  (Default.)

	      yes    Don't terminate if	the current file is the	last  playlist
		     entry.  Equivalent	to --keep-open without arguments.

	      always Like  yes,	 but  also  applies  to	 files before the last
		     playlist entry. This means	playback will never  automati-
		     cally advance to the next file.

		 This  option is not respected when using --frames. Explicitly
		 skipping to the next file if the binding uses force will ter-
		 minate	playback as well.

		 Also,	if  errors or unusual circumstances happen, the	player
		 can quit anyway.

	      Since mpv	0.6.0, this doesn't pause if there is a	next  file  in
	      the  playlist,  or  the  playlist	is looped. Approximately, this
	      will pause when the player would normally	exit, but in  practice
	      there  are  corner cases in which	this is	not the	case (e.g. mpv
	      --keep-open file.mkv /dev/null will play file.mkv	normally, then
	      fail  to	open  /dev/null, then exit). (In mpv 0.8.0, always was
	      introduced, which	restores the old behavior.)

	      If set to	no, instead of pausing	when  --keep-open  is  active,
	      just  stop  at end of file and continue playing forward when you
	      seek backwards until end where it	stops again. Default: yes.

	      If the current file is an	image, play the	image  for  the	 given
	      amount  of seconds (default: 1). inf means the file is kept open
	      forever (until the user stops playback manually).

	      Unlike --keep-open, the player is	not paused, but	simply contin-
	      ues  playback until the time has elapsed.	(It should not use any
	      resources	during "playback".)

	      This affects image files,	which are defined  as  having  only  1
	      video  frame  and	 no  audio.  The  player may recognize certain
	      non-images as images, for	example	if --length is used to	reduce
	      the length to 1 frame, or	if you seek to the last	frame.

	      This  option  does  not  affect  the framerate used for mf:// or
	      --merge-files. For that, use --mf-fps instead.

	      Setting --image-display-duration hides  the  OSC	and  does  not
	      track  playback  time  on	the command-line output, and also does
	      not duplicate the	image frame when encoding. To force the	player
	      into "dumb mode" and actually count out seconds, or to duplicate
	      the image	when encoding, you need	to  use	 --demuxer=lavf	 --de-
	      muxer-lavf-o=loop=1,  and	use --length or	--frames to stop after
	      a	particular time.

	      Create a video output window even	if there is no video. This can
	      be  useful  when	pretending that	mpv is a GUI application. Cur-
	      rently, the window always	has the	size 640x480, and  is  subject
	      to --geometry, --autofit,	and similar options.

		 The window is created only after initialization (to make sure
		 default window	placement still	works if  the  video  size  is
		 different  from the --force-window default window size). This
		 can be	a problem if initialization  doesn't  work  perfectly,
		 such  as  when	 opening  URLs with bad	network	connection, or
		 opening broken	video files. The immediate mode	can be used to
		 create	the window always on program start, but	this may cause
		 other issues.

       --taskbar-progress, --no-taskbar-progress
	      (Windows only) Enable/disable  playback  progress	 rendering  in
	      taskbar (Windows 7 and above).

	      Enabled by default.

	      (Windows only) Snap the player window to screen edges.

	      Makes the	player window stay on top of other windows.

	      On Windows, if combined with fullscreen mode, this causes	mpv to
	      be treated as exclusive  fullscreen  window  that	 bypasses  the
	      Desktop Window Manager.

	      (OS X only) Sets the level of an ontop window (default: window).

	      window On	top of all other windows.

	      system On	top of system elements like Taskbar, Menubar and Dock.

		     On	top of the Dekstop behind windows and Desktop icons.

	      level  A level as	integer.

       --focus-on-open,	--no-focus-on-open
	      (macOS only) Focus the video window on creation and makes	it the
	      front most window. This is on by default.

       --border, --no-border
	      Play video with window border and	decorations. Since this	is  on
	      by default, use --no-border to disable the standard window deco-

       --fit-border, --no-fit-border
	      (Windows only) Fit the whole window with border and  decorations
	      on  the screen. Since this is on by default, use --no-fit-border
	      to make mpv try to only  fit  client  area  with	video  on  the
	      screen. This behavior only applied to window/video with size ex-
	      ceeding size of the screen.

	      (X11 only) Show the video	window on all virtual desktops.

       --geometry=<[W[xH]][+-x+-y][/WS]>, --geometry=<x:y>
	      Adjust the initial window	position or size. W and	H set the win-
	      dow size in pixels. x and	y set the window position, measured in
	      pixels from the top-left corner of the screen  to	 the  top-left
	      corner of	the image being	displayed. If a	percentage sign	(%) is
	      given after the argument,	it turns the value into	 a  percentage
	      of  the  screen size in that direction.  Positions are specified
	      similar to the standard X11 --geometry option format,  in	 which
	      e.g.  +10-50  means "place 10 pixels from	the left border	and 50
	      pixels from the lower border" and	 "--20+-10"  means  "place  20
	      pixels  beyond the right and 10 pixels beyond the	top border". A
	      trailing / followed by an	integer	 denotes  on  which  workspace
	      (virtual desktop)	the window should appear (X11 only).

	      If  an external window is	specified using	the --wid option, this
	      option is	ignored.

	      The coordinates are relative to the screen given	with  --screen
	      for the video output drivers that	fully support --screen.

		 Generally only	supported by GUI VOs. Ignored for encoding.

		 Note (X11)

			This  option  does  not	 work properly with all	window


		 50:40	Places the window at x=50, y=40.

			Places the window in the middle	of the screen.

			Places the window at the bottom	right  corner  of  the

		 50%	Sets the window	width to half the screen width.	Window
			height is set so that the window has the video	aspect

			Forces	the window width and height to half the	screen
			width and height. Will show black borders  to  compen-
			sate  for  the	video  aspect ratio (with most VOs and
			without	--no-keepaspect).

			Sets the window	to half	the screen widths,  and	 posi-
			tions  it  10 pixels below/left	of the top left	corner
			of the screen, on the second workspace.

	      See also --autofit and --autofit-larger for fitting  the	window
	      into a given size	without	changing aspect	ratio.

	      Set  the initial window size to a	maximum	size specified by WxH,
	      without changing the window's aspect ratio. The size is measured
	      in  pixels, or if	a number is followed by	a percentage sign (%),
	      in percents of the screen	size.

	      This option never	changes	the aspect ratio of the	window.	If the
	      aspect  ratio  mismatches, the window's size is reduced until it
	      fits into	the specified size.

	      Window position is not taken into	account, nor is	it modified by
	      this  option (the	window manager still may place the window dif-
	      ferently depending on size). Use --geometry to change the	window
	      position.	Its effects are	applied	after this option.

	      See  --geometry for details how this is handled with multi-moni-
	      tor setups.

	      Use --autofit-larger instead if you just want to limit the maxi-
	      mum  size	 of  the  window,  rather than always forcing a	window

	      Use --geometry if	you want to force both window width and	height
	      to a specific size.

		 Generally only	supported by GUI VOs. Ignored for encoding.


		 70%	Make  the window width 70% of the screen size, keeping
			aspect ratio.

		 1000	Set the	window width to	1000  pixels,  keeping	aspect

			Make  the  window  as large as possible, without being
			wider than 70% of the screen width, or higher than 60%
			of the screen height.

	      This  option  behaves  exactly like --autofit, except the	window
	      size is only changed if the window  would	 be  larger  than  the
	      specified	size.


			If the video is	larger than 90%	of the screen width or
			80% of the screen height, make the window smaller  un-
			til  either  its  width	 is  90% of the	screen,	or its
			height is 80% of the screen.

	      This option behaves exactly like --autofit, except that it  sets
	      the  minimum  size  of the window	(just as --autofit-larger sets
	      the maximum).


			Make the window	at least 500 pixels wide and 500  pix-
			els  high  (depending  on  the video aspect ratio, the
			width or height	will be	larger than 500	 in  order  to
			keep the aspect	ratio the same).

	      Resize the video window to a multiple (or	fraction) of the video
	      size. This option	is applied before --autofit and	other  options
	      are applied (so they override this option).

	      For  example,  --window-scale=0.5	 would show the	window at half
	      the video	size.

	      Whether the video	window is minimized or not. Setting this  will
	      minimize,	or unminimize, the video window	if the current VO sup-
	      ports it.	Note that some VOs may support minimization while  not
	      supporting unminimization	(eg: Wayland).

	      Whether this option and --window-maximized work on program start
	      or at runtime, and whether they're (at runtime) updated  to  re-
	      flect the	actual window state, heavily depends on	the VO and the
	      windowing	system.	Some VOs simply	do not implement them or parts
	      of them, while other VOs may be restricted by the	windowing sys-
	      tems (especially Wayland).

	      Whether the video	window is maximized or not. Setting this  will
	      maximize,	or unmaximize, the video window	if the current VO sup-
	      ports it.	See --window-minimized for further remarks.

	      Make mouse cursor	automatically hide after given number of  mil-
	      liseconds.   no  will  disable cursor autohide. always means the
	      cursor will stay hidden.

	      If this option is	given, the cursor is always  visible  in  win-
	      dowed  mode.  In	fullscreen mode, the cursor is shown or	hidden
	      according	to --cursor-autohide.

       --no-fixed-vo, --fixed-vo
	      --no-fixed-vo enforces closing and reopening  the	 video	window
	      for multiple files (one (un)initialization for each file).

	      Change how some video outputs render the OSD and text subtitles.
	      This does	not change appearance of the subtitles	and  only  has
	      performance  implications. For VOs which support native ASS ren-
	      dering (like gpu,	vdpau, direct3d), this can be slightly	faster
	      or slower, depending on GPU drivers and hardware.	For other VOs,
	      this just	makes rendering	slower.

	      Forcefully move mpv's video output window	 to  default  location
	      whenever	there is a change in video parameters, video stream or
	      file. This used to be the	default	behavior. Currently  only  af-
	      fects X11	VOs.

       --no-keepaspect,	--keepaspect
	      --no-keepaspect  will  always  stretch the video to window size,
	      and will disable the window manager hints	that force the	window
	      aspect ratio.  (Ignored in fullscreen mode.)

       --no-keepaspect-window, --keepaspect-window
	      --keepaspect-window  (the	 default) will lock the	window size to
	      the video	aspect.	--no-keepaspect-window disables	this behavior,
	      and  will	 instead add black bars	if window aspect and video as-
	      pect mismatch. Whether this actually works  depends  on  the  VO
	      backend.	(Ignored in fullscreen mode.)

	      Set  the aspect ratio of your monitor or TV screen. A value of 0
	      disables a previous setting (e.g.	in the config file). Overrides
	      the --monitorpixelaspect setting if enabled.

	      See also --monitorpixelaspect and	--video-aspect-override.


		 o --monitoraspect=4:3	or --monitoraspect=1.3333

		 o --monitoraspect=16:9	or --monitoraspect=1.7777

       --hidpi-window-scale, --no-hidpi-window-scale
	      (OS X, Windows, X11, and Wayland only) Scale the window size ac-
	      cording to the backing scale factor (default: yes).  On  regular
	      HiDPI  resolutions the window opens with double the size but ap-
	      pears as having the same size as on non-HiDPI resolutions.  This
	      is the default OS	X behavior.

       --native-fs, --no-native-fs
	      (OS  X only) Uses	the native fullscreen mechanism	of the OS (de-
	      fault: yes).

	      Set the aspect of	a single pixel of your monitor	or  TV	screen
	      (default:	1). A value of 1 means square pixels (correct for (al-
	      most?) all  LCDs).  See  also  --monitoraspect  and  --video-as-

       --stop-screensaver, --no-stop-screensaver
	      Turns  off the screensaver (or screen blanker and	similar	mecha-
	      nisms) at	startup	and turns it on	again on exit (default:	 yes).
	      The screensaver is always	re-enabled when	the player is paused.

	      This  is	not supported on all video outputs or platforms. Some-
	      times it is implemented, but  does  not  work  (especially  with
	      Linux  "desktops").  Read	the Disabling Screensaver section very

	      This tells mpv to	attach to an existing window. If a VO  is  se-
	      lected  that  supports  this option, it will use that window for
	      video output. mpv	will scale the video to	the size of this  win-
	      dow,  and	 will add black	bars to	compensate if the aspect ratio
	      of the video is different.

	      On X11, the ID  is  interpreted  as  a  Window  on  X11.	Unlike
	      MPlayer/mplayer2,	 mpv  always  creates its own window, and sets
	      the wid window as	parent.	The window will	always be  resized  to
	      cover  the  parent window	fully. The value 0 is interpreted spe-
	      cially, and mpv will draw	directly on the	root window.

	      On win32,	the ID is interpreted as HWND. Pass it as  value  cast
	      to  intptr_t.  mpv  will	create its own window, and set the wid
	      window as	parent,	like with X11.

	      On OSX/Cocoa, the	ID is interpreted as NSView*. Pass it as value
	      cast  to intptr_t. mpv will create its own sub-view. Because OSX
	      does not support window embedding	 of  foreign  processes,  this
	      works  only  with	libmpv,	and will crash when used from the com-
	      mand line.

	      On Android, the ID is interpreted	as android.view.Surface.  Pass
	      it  as  a	value cast to intptr_t.	Use with --vo=mediacodec_embed
	      and --hwdec=mediacodec for direct	rendering using	MediaCodec, or
	      with --vo=gpu --gpu-context=android (with	or without --hwdec=me-

	      Don't move the window when clicking on it	and moving  the	 mouse

	      Set the window class name	for X11-based video output methods.

	      (X11 only) Control the use of NetWM protocol features.

	      This  may	or may not help	with broken window managers. This pro-
	      vides some functionality that was	implemented by the now removed
	      --fstype option.	Actually, it is	not known to the developers to
	      which degree this	option was needed, so feedback is welcome.

	      Specifically, yes	will force use of  NetWM  fullscreen  support,
	      even  if	not  advertised	 by the	WM. This can be	useful for WMs
	      that are broken on  purpose,  like  XMonad.  (XMonad  supposedly
	      doesn't advertise	fullscreen support, because Flash uses it. Ap-
	      parently,	applications which want	to use fullscreen  anyway  are
	      supposed	to either ignore the NetWM support hints, or provide a
	      workaround. Shame	on XMonad for deliberately breaking  X	proto-
	      cols (as if X isn't bad enough already).

	      By default, NetWM	support	is autodetected	(auto).

	      This option might	be removed in the future.

	      If  set  to  yes,	 then ask the compositor to unredirect the mpv
	      window (default: fs-only). This uses the _NET_WM_BYPASS_COMPOSI-
	      TOR hint.

	      fs-only  asks  the window	manager	to disable the compositor only
	      in fullscreen mode.

	      no sets _NET_WM_BYPASS_COMPOSITOR	to 0,  which  is  the  default
	      value  as	 declared by the EWMH specification, i.e. no change is

	      never asks the window manager to never disable the compositor.

   Disc	Devices
	      Specify the CD-ROM device	(default: /dev/cdrom).

	      Specify the DVD device or	.iso filename (default:	/dev/dvd). You
	      can  also	 specify  a  directory	that contains files previously
	      copied directly from a DVD (with e.g. vobcopy).


			mpv dvd:// --dvd-device=/path/to/dvd/

	      (Blu-ray only) Specify the Blu-ray disc location.	Must be	a  di-
	      rectory with Blu-ray structure.


			mpv bd:// --bluray-device=/path/to/bd/

	      These  options  can be used to tune the CD Audio reading feature
	      of mpv.

	      Set CD spin speed.

	      Set paranoia level. Values other than 0 seem to  break  playback
	      of anything but the first	track.

	      0	     disable checking (default)

	      1	     overlap checking only

	      2	     full data correction and verification

	      Set atomic read size.

	      Force minimum overlap search during verification to <value> sec-

	      Assume that the beginning	offset of track	1 as reported  in  the
	      TOC will be addressed as LBA 0. Some discs need this for getting
	      track boundaries correctly.

	      Add <value> sectors  to  the  values  reported  when  addressing
	      tracks.  May be negative.

	      (Never) accept imperfect data reconstruction.

	      Print  CD	 text.	This  is disabled by default, because it ruins
	      performance with CD-ROM drives for unknown reasons.

	      Try to limit DVD speed (default: 0, no change). DVD  base	 speed
	      is  1385	kB/s,  so  an  8x drive	can read at speeds up to 11080
	      kB/s. Slower speeds make the  drive  more	 quiet.	 For  watching
	      DVDs,  2700 kB/s should be quiet and fast	enough.	mpv resets the
	      speed to the drive default value on close.  Values of  at	 least
	      100  mean	 speed in kB/s.	Values less than 100 mean multiples of
	      1385 kB/s, i.e. --dvd-speed=8 selects 11080 kB/s.

		 You need write	access to the DVD device to change the speed.

	      Some DVDs	contain	scenes that can	be viewed  from	 multiple  an-
	      gles.  This option tells mpv which angle to use (default:	1).

	      Adjust the brightness of the video signal	(default: 0). Not sup-
	      ported by	all video output drivers.

	      Adjust the contrast of the video signal (default:	0).  Not  sup-
	      ported by	all video output drivers.

	      Adjust  the saturation of	the video signal (default: 0). You can
	      get grayscale output with	this  option.  Not  supported  by  all
	      video output drivers.

	      Adjust the gamma of the video signal (default: 0). Not supported
	      by all video output drivers.

	      Adjust the hue of	the video signal (default: 0). You can	get  a
	      colored negative of the image with this option. Not supported by
	      all video	output drivers.

	      Force demuxer type. Use a	'+' before the name to force it;  this
	      will skip	some checks. Give the demuxer name as printed by --de-

	      Maximum length in	seconds	to analyze the stream properties.

	      Whether to probe stream  information  (default:  auto).  Techni-
	      cally,	this	controls    whether    libavformat's	avfor-
	      mat_find_stream_info() function is called. Usually it's safer to
	      call it, but it can also make startup slower.

	      The  auto	 choice	 (the  default)	 tries	to skip	this for a few
	      know-safe	whitelisted formats, while calling it  for  everything

	      The nostreams choice only	calls it if and	only if	the file seems
	      to contain no streams after opening (helpful in cases when call-
	      ing  the	function  is  needed to	detect streams at all, such as
	      with FLV files).

	      Minimum required libavformat probe score.	Lower values will  re-
	      quire  less  data	to be loaded (makes streams start faster), but
	      makes file format	detection less reliable. Can be	used to	 force
	      auto-detected  libavformat demuxers, even	if libavformat consid-
	      ers the detection	not reliable enough. (Default: 26.)

	      Allow deriving the format	from  the  HTTP	 MIME  type  (default:
	      yes).  Set  this to no in	case playing things from HTTP mysteri-
	      ously fails, even	though the same	files work from	local disk.

	      This is default in order to reduce  latency  when	 opening  HTTP

	      Force a specific libavformat demuxer.

	      By  default, some	formats	will be	handled	differently from other
	      formats by explicitly checking for them. Most of	these  compen-
	      sate  for	weird or imperfect behavior from libavformat demuxers.
	      Passing no disables these. For debugging and testing only.

	      Pass AVOptions to	libavformat demuxer.

	      Note, a patch to make the	o= unneeded and	pass all  unknown  op-
	      tions  through  the  AVOption  system is welcome.	A full list of
	      AVOptions	can be found in	the FFmpeg manual. Note	that some  op-
	      tions may	conflict with mpv options.

	      This is a	key/value list option. See List	Options	for details.



	      Maximum  amount  of data to probe	during the detection phase. In
	      the case of MPEG-TS this value identifies	the maximum number  of
	      TS packets to scan.

	      Size  of	the  stream  read  buffer allocated for	libavformat in
	      bytes (default: 32768). Lowering the size	could  lower  latency.
	      Note that	libavformat might reallocate the buffer	internally, or
	      not fully	use all	of it.

	      Attempt to linearize timestamp resets in	demuxed	 streams  (de-
	      fault:  auto).   This  was tested	only for single	audio streams.
	      It's unknown whether it works correctly for  video  (but	likely
	      won't).  Note  that the implementation is	slightly incorrect ei-
	      ther way,	and will introduce a discontinuity by  about  1	 codec
	      frame size.

	      The auto mode enables this for OGG audio stream. This covers the
	      common and annoying case of OGG web radio	streams. Some of these
	      will  reset  timestamps  to 0 every time a new song begins. This
	      breaks the mpv seekable cache, which can't deal  with  timestamp
	      resets.  Note  that  FFmpeg/libavformat's	seeking	API can't deal
	      with this	either;	it's likely that if this  option  breaks  this
	      even  more, while	if it's	disabled, you can at least seek	within
	      the first	song in	the stream. Well, you won't get	anything  use-
	      ful either way if	the seek is outside of mpv's cache.

	      Propagate	FFmpeg-level options to	recursively opened connections
	      (default:	yes). This is needed because FFmpeg will  apply	 these
	      settings	to  nested  AVIO  contexts automatically. On the other
	      hand, this could break in	certain	situations - it's  the	FFmpeg
	      API, you just can't win.

	      This  affects  in	 particular  the --timeout option and anything
	      passed with --demuxer-lavf-o.

	      If this option is	deemed unnecessary at some point  in  the  fu-
	      ture, it will be removed without notice.

       --demuxer-mkv-subtitle-preroll=<yes|index|no>, --mkv-subtitle-preroll
	      Try  harder  to  show embedded soft subtitles when seeking some-
	      where. Normally, it can happen that the  subtitle	 at  the  seek
	      target  is  not shown due	to how some container file formats are
	      designed.	The subtitles appear only if seeking before or exactly
	      to  the  position	 a subtitle first appears. To make this	worse,
	      subtitles	are often timed	to appear a very small	amount	before
	      the  associated  video frame, so that seeking to the video frame
	      typically	does not demux the subtitle at that position.

	      Enabling this option makes the demuxer start reading data	a  bit
	      before the seek target, so that subtitles	appear correctly. Note
	      that this	makes seeking slower, and is not guaranteed to	always
	      work.  It	only works if the subtitle is close enough to the seek

	      Works with the internal Matroska demuxer	only.  Always  enabled
	      for absolute and hr-seeks, and this option changes behavior with
	      relative or imprecise seeks only.

	      You can use the  --demuxer-mkv-subtitle-preroll-secs  option  to
	      specify how much data the	demuxer	should pre-read	at most	in or-
	      der to find subtitle packets that	may overlap. Setting this to 0
	      will  effectively	disable	this preroll mechanism.	Setting	a very
	      large value can make seeking very	slow, and an  extremely	 large
	      value would completely reread the	entire file from start to seek
	      target on	every seek - seeking can become	slower towards the end
	      of  the  file.  The details are messy, and the value is actually
	      rounded down to the cluster with the previous video keyframe.

	      Some files, especially files muxed with newer mkvmerge versions,
	      have  information	 embedded  that	 can be	used to	determine what
	      subtitle packets overlap with a seek target. In these cases, mpv
	      will  reduce  the	amount of data read to a minimum. (Although it
	      will still read all data between the cluster that	 contains  the
	      first wanted subtitle packet, and	the seek target.) If the index
	      choice (which is the default) is specified, then prerolling will
	      be  done only if this information	is actually available. If this
	      method is	used, the maximum amount of data to skip can be	 addi-
	      tionally controlled by --demuxer-mkv-subtitle-preroll-secs-index
	      (it still	uses the value of the option without -index if that is

	      See   also  --hr-seek-demuxer-offset  option.  This  option  can
	      achieve a	similar	effect,	but only  if  hr-seek  is  active.  It
	      works with any demuxer, but makes	seeking	much slower, as	it has
	      to decode	audio and video	data instead of	just skipping over it.

	      --mkv-subtitle-preroll is	a deprecated alias.

	      See --demuxer-mkv-subtitle-preroll.

	      See --demuxer-mkv-subtitle-preroll.

	      Check the	start time of Matroska files (default: yes). This sim-
	      ply  reads  the  first  cluster timestamps and assumes it	is the
	      start time. Technically, this also reads	the  first  timestamp,
	      which  may  increase latency by one frame	(which may be relevant
	      for live streams).

	      When opening the file, seek to the end of	 it,  and  check  what
	      timestamp	the last video packet has, and report that as file du-
	      ration. This is strictly for compatibility with Haali  only.  In
	      this mode, it's possible that opening will be slower (especially
	      when playing over	http), or that behavior	with broken  files  is
	      much worse. So don't use this option.

	      The  yes	mode merely uses the index and reads a small number of
	      blocks from the end of the file. The  full  mode	actually  tra-
	      verses  the  entire  file	 and can make a	reliable estimate even
	      without an index present (such as	partial	files).

	      Number of	channels (or channel layout) if	--demuxer=rawaudio  is
	      used (default: stereo).

	      Sample  format  for  --demuxer=rawaudio  (default:  s16le).  Use
	      --demuxer-rawaudio-format=help to	get a list of all formats.

	      Sample rate for --demuxer=rawaudio (default: 44 kHz).

	      Rate in  frames  per  second  for	 --demuxer=rawvideo  (default:

       --demuxer-rawvideo-w=<value>, --demuxer-rawvideo-h=<value>
	      Image dimension in pixels	for --demuxer=rawvideo.


			Play a raw YUV sample:

		     mpv sample-720x576.yuv --demuxer=rawvideo \
		     --demuxer-rawvideo-w=720 --demuxer-rawvideo-h=576

	      Color  space  (fourcc)  in  hex or string	for --demuxer=rawvideo
	      (default:	YV12).

	      Color space by internal video format for --demuxer=rawvideo. Use
	      --demuxer-rawvideo-mp-format=help	 for  a	 list of possible for-

	      Set the video codec instead of selecting the rawvideo codec when
	      using  --demuxer=rawvideo.  This	uses  the same values as codec
	      names in --vd (but it does not accept decoder names).

	      Frame size in bytes when using --demuxer=rawvideo.

	      Specify the CUE sheet  codepage.	(See  --sub-codepage  for  de-

	      This  controls  how much the demuxer is allowed to buffer	ahead.
	      The demuxer will normally	try to read ahead as  much  as	neces-
	      sary, or as much is requested with --demuxer-readahead-secs. The
	      option can be used to restrict the maximum readahead. This  lim-
	      its  excessive  readahead	 in  case  of broken files or desynced
	      playback.	The demuxer will stop reading  additional  packets  as
	      soon  as	one of the limits is reached. (The limits still	can be
	      slightly overstepped due to technical reasons.)

	      Set these	limits higher if you get a packet queue	overflow warn-
	      ing,  and	 you  think  normal  playback would be possible	with a
	      larger packet queue.

	      See --list-options for defaults and value	range. <bytesize>  op-
	      tions accept suffixes such as KiB	and MiB.

	      This  controls how much past data	the demuxer is allowed to pre-
	      serve. This is useful only if the	cache is enabled.

	      Unlike the forward cache,	there is no control how	 many  seconds
	      are actually cached - it will simply use as much memory this op-
	      tion allows. Setting this	option to 0 will strictly disable  any
	      back  buffer,  but this will lead	to the situation that the for-
	      ward seek	range starts after the current playback	 position  (as
	      it removes past packets that are seek points).

	      If  the end of the file is reached, the remaining	unused forward
	      buffer space is "donated"	to the backbuffer  (unless  the	 back-
	      buffer  size  is	set to 0, or --demuxer-donate-buffer is	set to
	      no).  This still limits the total	cache usage to the sum of  the
	      forward  and backward cache, and effectively makes better	use of
	      the total	allowed	memory budget. (The opposite does not  happen:
	      free backward buffer is never "donated" to the forward buffer.)

	      Keep  in	mind  that other buffers in the	player (like decoders)
	      will cause the demuxer to	cache "future" frames in the back buf-
	      fer, which can skew the impression about how much	data the back-
	      buffer contains.

	      See --list-options for defaults and value	range.

	      Whether to let the back buffer use part of  the  forward	buffer
	      (default:	 yes).	 If  set  to  yes, the "donation" behavior de-
	      scribed in the option description	 for  --demuxer-max-back-bytes
	      is  enabled.  This means the back	buffer may use up memory up to
	      the sum of the forward and back buffer options, minus the	active
	      size  of	the forward buffer. If set to no, the options strictly
	      limit the	forward	and back buffer	sizes separately.

	      Note that	if the end of the file is reached, the	buffered  data
	      stays  the same, even if you seek	back within the	cache. This is
	      because the back buffer is only reduced when new data is read.

	      Debugging	option to control whether seeking can use the  demuxer
	      cache (default: auto). Normally you don't	ever need to set this;
	      the default auto does the	right thing and	enables	cache  seeking
	      it if --cache is set to yes (or is implied yes if	--cache=auto).

	      If  enabled, short seek offsets will not trigger a low level de-
	      muxer seek (which	means for  example  that  slow	network	 round
	      trips or FFmpeg seek bugs	can be avoided). If a seek cannot hap-
	      pen within the cached range, a low level seek will be triggered.
	      Seeking  outside of the cache will start a new cached range, but
	      can discard the old cache	range if the demuxer exhibits  certain
	      unsupported behavior.

	      The  special  value  auto	 means	yes  in	 the same situation as
	      --cache-secs is used (i.e. when the stream appears to be a  net-
	      work stream or the stream	cache is enabled).

	      Whether  to  keep	 retrying  making the demuxer thread read more
	      packets each time	the decoder dequeues a packet, even if the end
	      of the file was reached (default:	no). This does not really make
	      sense, but was the default behavior in mpv 0.32.0	 and  earlier.
	      This  option  will be silently removed after a while, and	exists
	      only to restore the old behavior for testing, in case  this  was
	      actually	needed somewhere. This does _not_ help with files that
	      are being	appended to (in	these cases use	appending://, or  dis-
	      able the cache).

	      Run the demuxer in a separate thread, and	let it prefetch	a cer-
	      tain amount of packets (default: yes). Having this enabled leads
	      to  smoother  playback,  enables	features like prefetching, and
	      prevents that stuck network freezes the  player.	On  the	 other
	      hand, it can add overhead, or the	background prefetching can hog
	      CPU resources.

	      Disabling	this option is not recommended.	Use it	for  debugging

	      Number of	seconds	the player should wait to shutdown the demuxer
	      (default:	0.1). The player will wait up to this much time	before
	      it  closes the stream layer forcefully. Forceful closing usually
	      means the	network	I/O is given no	chance to  close  its  connec-
	      tions  gracefully	 (of course the	OS can still close TCP connec-
	      tions properly), and might result	 in  annoying  messages	 being
	      logged, and in some cases, confused remote servers.

	      This  timeout  is	usually	only applied when loading has finished
	      properly.	If loading is aborted by the user, or in  some	corner
	      cases  like removing external tracks sourced from	network	during
	      playback,	forceful closing is always used.

	      If --demuxer-thread is enabled, this controls how	much  the  de-
	      muxer should buffer ahead	in seconds (default: 1). As long as no
	      packet has a timestamp  difference  higher  than	the  readahead
	      amount  relative to the last packet returned to the decoder, the
	      demuxer keeps reading.

	      Note that	enabling the cache (such as --cache=yes, or if the in-
	      put  is  considered a network stream, and	--cache=auto is	used),
	      this option is mostly ignored. (--cache-secs will	override this.
	      Technically, the maximum of both options is used.)

	      The main purpose of this option is to limit the readhead for lo-
	      cal playback, since a large readahead value is not overly	useful
	      in this case.

	      (This  value  tends to be	fuzzy, because many file formats don't
	      store linear timestamps.)

	      Prefetch next playlist entry while playback of the current entry
	      is  ending  (default: no). This merely opens the URL of the next
	      playlist entry as	soon as	the current URL	is fully read.

	      This does	not work with URLs resolved by the youtube-dl wrapper,
	      and it won't.

	      This  does not affect HLS	(.m3u8 URLs) - HLS prefetching depends
	      on the demuxer cache settings and	is on by default.

	      This can give subtly wrong results if per-file options are used,
	      or if options are	changed	in the time window between prefetching
	      start and	next file played.

	      This can occasionally make wrong prefetching decisions. For  ex-
	      ample,  it  can't	 predict  whether  you	go  backwards  in  the
	      playlist,	and assumes you	won't edit the playlist.

	      Highly experimental.

	      If the player thinks that	the media is not seekable (e.g.	 play-
	      ing  from	 a  pipe,  or  it's  an	http stream with a server that
	      doesn't support range requests), seeking will be disabled.  This
	      option  can  forcibly  enable  it.   For seeks within the	cache,
	      there's a	good chance of success.

	      Before starting playback,	read data until	either the end of  the
	      file  was	 reached, or the demuxer cache has reached maximum ca-
	      pacity. Only once	this is	done, playback starts. This intention-
	      ally  happens  before  the  initial seek triggered with --start.
	      This does	not change any	runtime	 behavior  after  the  initial
	      caching.	This  option  is  useless if the file cannot be	cached

	      When opening multi-volume	rar files, open	all volumes to	create
	      a	 full list of contained	files (default:	no). If	disabled, only
	      the archive entries whose	headers	are located within  the	 first
	      volume are listed	(and thus played when opening a	.rar file with
	      mpv). Doing so  speeds  up  opening,  and	 the  typical  idiotic
	      use-case	of  playing  uncompressed  multi-volume	rar files that
	      contain a	single media file is made faster.

	      Opening is still slow, because for unknown, idiotic, and	unnec-
	      essary  reasons libarchive opens all volumes anyway when playing
	      the main file, even though mpv iterated no archive entries yet.

	      Use system settings for keyrepeat	delay  and  rate,  instead  of
	      --input-ar-delay	and --input-ar-rate. (Whether this applies de-
	      pends on the VO backend and how it handles keyboard input.  Does
	      not apply	to terminal input.)

	      Delay  in	milliseconds before we start to	autorepeat a key (0 to

	      Number of	key presses to generate	per second on autorepeat.

	      Specify input configuration file other than the default location
	      in  the  mpv  configuration directory (usually ~/.config/mpv/in-

	      Disable mpv default (built-in) key bindings.

	      Prints all commands that can be bound to keys.

	      Time in milliseconds to recognize	two consecutive	button presses
	      as a double-click	(default: 300).

	      Prints all keys that can be bound	to commands.

	      Specify  the  size of the	FIFO that buffers key events (default:
	      7). If it	is too small, some events may be lost. The main	disad-
	      vantage  of setting it to	a very large value is that if you hold
	      down a key triggering some particularly slow  command  then  the
	      player  may  be  unresponsive  while it processes	all the	queued

	      Input test mode. Instead of executing commands on	 key  presses,
	      mpv will show the	keys and the bound commands on the OSD.	Has to
	      be used with a dummy video, and the  normal  ways	 to  quit  the
	      player  will  not	 work (key bindings that normally quit will be
	      shown on OSD only, just like any other binding). See INPUT.CONF.

       --input-terminal, --no-input-terminal
	      --no-input-terminal prevents the player from reading key	events
	      from  standard input. Useful when	reading	data from standard in-
	      put. This	is automatically enabled when -	is found on  the  com-
	      mand  line.  There are situations	where you have to set it manu-
	      ally, e.g. if you	open /dev/stdin	(or  the  equivalent  on  your
	      system),	use  stdin  in a playlist or intend to read from stdin
	      later on via the loadfile	or loadlist input commands.

	      Enable the IPC support and create	the listening  socket  at  the
	      given path.

	      On  Linux	and Unix, the given path is a regular filesystem path.
	      On Windows, named	pipes are used,	so the path refers to the pipe
	      namespace	(\\.\pipe\<name>). If the \\.\pipe\ prefix is missing,
	      mpv will add it automatically before creating the	pipe, so --in-
	      put-ipc-server=/tmp/mpv-socket		 and		 --in-
	      put-ipc-server=\\.\pipe\tmp\mpv-socket are equivalent for	IPC on

	      See JSON IPC for details.

	      Connect  a  single  IPC client to	the given FD. This is somewhat
	      similar to --input-ipc-server, except no socket is created,  and
	      instead  the  passed  FD is treated like a socket	connection re-
	      ceived from accept(). In practice, you could pass	 either	 a  FD
	      created  by  socketpair(),  or  a	pipe.  In both cases, you must
	      sure the FD is actually inherited	by mpv (do not set  the	 POSIX
	      CLOEXEC flag).

	      The player quits when the	connection is closed.

	      This is somewhat similar to the removed --input-file option, ex-
	      cept it supports only integer FDs, and cannot open actual	paths.



		 Does not and will not work on Windows.

		 Writing to the	input-ipc-server option	at runtime will	 start
		 another  instance  of	an  IPC	 client	 handler  for  the in-
		 put-ipc-client	option,	because	initialization is bundled, and
		 this  thing  is  stupid.  This	 is  a	bug.  Writing  to  in-
		 put-ipc-client	at runtime will	start another IPC client  han-
		 dler for the new value, without stopping the old one, even if
		 the FD	value is the same (but the string  is  different  e.g.
		 due to	whitespace). This is not a bug.

	      Enable/disable SDL2 Gamepad support. Disabled by default.

       --input-cursor, --no-input-cursor
	      Permit  mpv to receive pointer events reported by	the video out-
	      put driver. Necessary to use the OSC, or to select  the  buttons
	      in DVD menus.  Support depends on	the VO in use.

	      (OS  X  and Windows only)	Enable/disable media keys support. En-
	      abled by default (except for libmpv).

       --input-right-alt-gr, --no-input-right-alt-gr
	      (Cocoa and Windows only) Use the right Alt key as	Alt Gr to pro-
	      duce  special characters.	If disabled, count the right Alt as an
	      Alt modifier key.	Enabled	by default.

	      Disable all keyboard input on for	VOs which can't	participate in
	      proper  keyboard input dispatching. May not affect all VOs. Gen-
	      erally useful for	embedding only.

	      On X11, a	sub-window with	input enabled grabs all	keyboard input
	      as  long	as  it	is  1. a child of a focused window, and	2. the
	      mouse is inside of the sub-window. It can	steal  away  all  key-
	      board  input  from the application embedding the mpv window, and
	      on the other hand, the mpv window	will receive no	input  if  the
	      mouse  is	 outside of the	mpv window, even though	mpv has	focus.
	      Modern toolkits work around this weird X11 behavior, but naively
	      embedding	foreign	windows	breaks it.

	      The  only	way to handle this reasonably is using the XEmbed pro-
	      tocol, which was designed	to solve these problems. GTK  provides
	      GtkSocket,  which	 supports  XEmbed.  Qt doesn't seem to provide
	      anything working in newer	versions.

	      If the embedder supports XEmbed, input should work with  default
	      settings	and  with  this	 option	 disabled. Note	that input-de-
	      fault-bindings is	disabled by default in libmpv  as  well	 -  it
	      should be	enabled	if you want the	mpv default key	bindings.

	      (This option was renamed from --input-x11-keyboard.)

       --osc, --no-osc
	      Whether to load the on-screen-controller (default: yes).

       --no-osd-bar, --osd-bar
	      Disable display of the OSD bar.

	      You  can configure this on a per-command basis in	input.conf us-
	      ing osd- prefixes, see Input Command Prefixes. If	 you  want  to
	      disable the OSD completely, use --osd-level=0.

	      Set  what	 is  displayed on the OSD during seeks.	The default is

	      You can configure	this on	a per-command basis in input.conf  us-
	      ing osd- prefixes, see Input Command Prefixes.

	      Set the duration of the OSD messages in ms (default: 1000).

	      Specify font to use for OSD. The default is sans-serif.


		 o --osd-font='Bitstream Vera Sans'

		 o --osd-font='Comic Sans MS'

	      Specify the OSD font size. See --sub-font-size for details.

	      Default: 55.

	      Show  this string	as message on OSD with OSD level 1 (visible by
	      default).	 The message will be visible by	default, and  as  long
	      as  no  other message covers it, and the OSD level isn't changed
	      (see --osd-level).  Expands properties; see Property Expansion.

	      Similar to --osd-msg1, but for OSD level 2. If this is an	 empty
	      string (default),	then the playback time is shown.

	      Similar  to --osd-msg1, but for OSD level	3. If this is an empty
	      string (default),	then the playback  time,  duration,  and  some
	      more information is shown.

	      This is used for the show-progress command (by default mapped to
	      P), and when seeking if enabled with --osd-on-seek  or  by  osd-
	      prefixes in input.conf (see Input	Command	Prefixes).

	      --osd-status-msg	is  a legacy equivalent	(but with a minor dif-

	      Show a custom string during playback  instead  of	 the  standard
	      status   text.	This   overrides  the  status  text  used  for
	      --osd-level=3, when using	the show-progress command (by  default
	      mapped  to P), and when seeking if enabled with --osd-on-seek or
	      osd- prefixes in input.conf (see Input  Command  Prefixes).  Ex-
	      pands properties.	See Property Expansion.

	      This  option has been replaced with --osd-msg3. The only differ-
	      ence is that this	option implicitly includes ${osd-sym-cc}. This
	      option is	ignored	if --osd-msg3 is not empty.

	      Show  a  message	on OSD when playback starts. The string	is ex-
	      panded for  properties,  e.g.  --osd-playing-msg='file:  ${file-
	      name}'  will  show the message file: followed by a space and the
	      currently	played filename.

	      See Property Expansion.

	      Position of the OSD bar. -1 is far left, 0 is centered, 1	is far
	      right.  Fractional values	(like 0.5) are allowed.

	      Position	of the OSD bar.	-1 is top, 0 is	centered, 1 is bottom.
	      Fractional values	(like 0.5) are allowed.

	      Width of the OSD bar, in percentage of  the  screen  width  (de-
	      fault:  75).   A	value  of  50 means the	bar is half the	screen

	      Height of	the OSD	bar, in	percentage of the screen  height  (de-
	      fault: 3.125).

	      See --sub-color. Color used for OSD text background.

	      Gaussian blur factor. 0 means no blur applied (default).

	      Format text on bold.

	      Format text on italic.

	      See --sub-color. Color used for the OSD font border.

		 ignored  when --osd-back-color	is specified (or more exactly:
		 when that option is not set to	completely transparent).

	      Size  of	the  OSD   font	  border   in	scaled	 pixels	  (see
	      --sub-font-size for details). A value of 0 disables borders.

	      Default: 3.

	      Specify the color	used for OSD.  See --sub-color for details.

	      Show  OSD	times with fractions of	seconds	(in millisecond	preci-
	      sion). Useful to see the exact timestamp of a video frame.

	      Specifies	which mode the OSD should start	in.

	      0	     OSD completely disabled (subtitles	only)

	      1	     enabled (shows up only on user interaction)

	      2	     enabled + current time visible by default

	      3	     enabled + --osd-status-msg	(current time  and  status  by

	      Left  and	 right screen margin for the OSD in scaled pixels (see
	      --sub-font-size for details).

	      This option specifies the	distance of the	OSD to	the  left,  as
	      well  as	at  which distance from	the right border long OSD text
	      will be broken.

	      Default: 25.

	      Top and bottom screen margin for the OSD in scaled  pixels  (see
	      --sub-font-size for details).

	      This option specifies the	vertical margins of the	OSD.

	      Default: 22.

	      Control  to  which corner	of the screen OSD should be aligned to
	      (default:	left).

	      Vertical position	(default: top).	 Details see --osd-align-x.

	      OSD font size multiplier,	multiplied with	--osd-font-size	value.

	      Whether to scale the OSD with the	window size (default: yes). If
	      this is disabled,	--osd-font-size	and other OSD options that use
	      scaled pixels are	always in actual pixels. The  effect  is  that
	      changing the window size won't change the	OSD font size.

	      See --sub-color. Color used for OSD shadow.

	      Displacement   of	  the	OSD   shadow  in  scaled  pixels  (see
	      --sub-font-size for details). A value of 0 disables shadows.

	      Default: 0.

	      Horizontal  OSD/sub  font	 spacing   in	scaled	 pixels	  (see
	      --sub-font-size  for details). This value	is added to the	normal
	      letter spacing. Negative values are allowed.

	      Default: 0.

	      Enabled OSD rendering on the video window	(default:  yes).  This
	      can  be  used  in	situations where terminal OSD is preferred. If
	      you just want to disable all OSD rendering, use --osd-level=0.

	      It does not affect subtitles or overlays created by scripts  (in
	      particular, the OSC needs	to be disabled with --no-osc).

	      This  option  is	somewhat experimental and could	be replaced by
	      another mechanism	in the future.

	      See --sub-font-provider for details and  accepted	 values.  Note
	      that  unlike subtitles, OSD never	uses embedded fonts from media

	      Set the image file type used for saving screenshots.

	      Available	choices:

	      png    PNG

	      jpg    JPEG (default)

	      jpeg   JPEG (alias for jpg)

	      webp   WebP

	      Tag screenshots with the appropriate colorspace.

	      Note that	not all	formats	are supported.

	      Default: no.

	      If possible, write screenshots with a bit	depth similar  to  the
	      source  video  (default: yes). This is interesting in particular
	      for PNG, as this sometimes triggers writing  16  bit  PNGs  with
	      huge  file sizes.	This will also include an unused alpha channel
	      in the resulting files if	16 bit is used.

	      Specify the filename template used to save screenshots. The tem-
	      plate  specifies	the  filename  without file extension, and can
	      contain format specifiers, which will be substituted when	taking
	      a	screenshot.  By	default, the template is mpv-shot%n, which re-
	      sults in filenames like mpv-shot0012.png for example.

	      The template can start with a relative or	absolute path, in  or-
	      der  to specify a	directory location where screenshots should be

	      If the final screenshot filename points to an  already  existing
	      file,  the file will not be overwritten. The screenshot will ei-
	      ther not be saved, or if the template contains %n,  saved	 using
	      different, newly generated filename.

	      Allowed format specifiers:

		     A	sequence  number,  padded  with	zeros to length	X (de-
		     fault: 04). E.g.  passing the format %04n will yield 0012
		     on	 the 12th screenshot.  The number is incremented every
		     time a screenshot is taken	or if the file already exists.
		     The  length X must	be in the range	0-9. With the optional
		     # sign, mpv will use the lowest available number. For ex-
		     ample,   if   you	take  three  screenshots--0001,	 0002,
		     0003--and delete the first	two, the next two  screenshots
		     will not be 0004 and 0005,	but 0001 and 0002 again.

	      %f     Filename of the currently played video.

	      %F     Same  as  %f, but strip the file extension, including the

	      %x     Directory path of the  currently  played  video.  If  the
		     video  is	not on the filesystem (but e.g.	http://), this
		     expand to an empty	string.

		     Same as %x, but if	the video file is not on the  filesys-
		     tem, return the fallback string inside the	{...}.

	      %p     Current  playback time, in	the same format	as used	in the
		     OSD. The result is	a string of the	form  "HH:MM:SS".  For
		     example,  if  the video is	at the time position 5 minutes
		     and 34 seconds, %p	will be	replaced with "00:05:34".

	      %P     Similar to	%p, but	extended with  the  playback  time  in
		     milliseconds.   It	 is  formatted as "HH:MM:SS.mmm", with
		     "mmm" being the millisecond part of the playback time.

			This is	a simple  way  for  getting  unique  per-frame
			timestamps.  (Frame  numbers  would be more intuitive,
			but are	not  easily  implementable  because  container
			formats	  usually  use	time  stamps  for  identifying

	      %wX    Specify the current playback time using the format	string
		     X.	   %p	is   like   %wH:%wM:%wS,   and	 %P   is  like

		     Valid format specifiers:

			    %wH	   hour	(padded	with 0 to two digits)

			    %wh	   hour	(not padded)

			    %wM	   minutes (00-59)

			    %wm	   total minutes (includes hours, unlike %wM)

			    %wS	   seconds (00-59)

			    %ws	   total seconds (includes hours and minutes)

			    %wf	   like	%ws, but as float

			    %wT	   milliseconds	(000-999)

	      %tX    Specify the current local date/time using the  format  X.
		     This  format  specifier uses the UNIX strftime() function
		     internally, and inserts the result	 of  passing  "%X"  to
		     strftime.	For example, %tm will insert the number	of the
		     current month as number. You have	to  use	 multiple  %tX
		     specifiers	to build a full	date/time string.

	      %{prop[:fallback text]}
		     Insert  the  value	 of  the  input	 property 'prop'. E.g.
		     %{filename} is the	same as	%f. If the property  does  not
		     exist or is not available,	an error text is inserted, un-
		     less a fallback is	specified.

	      %%     Replaced with the % character itself.

	      Store screenshots	in this	directory. This	path  is  joined  with
	      the filename generated by	--screenshot-template. If the template
	      filename is already absolute, the	directory is ignored.

	      If the directory does not	exist, it  is  created	on  the	 first
	      screenshot. If it	is not a directory, an error is	generated when
	      trying to	write a	screenshot.

	      This option is not set by	default, and thus will	write  screen-
	      shots to the directory from which	mpv was	started. In pseudo-gui
	      mode (see	PSEUDO GUI MODE), this is set to the desktop.

	      Set the JPEG quality level. Higher means better quality. The de-
	      fault is 90.

	      Write  JPEG  files with the same chroma subsampling as the video
	      (default:	yes). If disabled, the libjpeg default is used.

	      Set the PNG compression level. Higher means better  compression.
	      This  will  affect  the file size	of the written screenshot file
	      and the time it takes to write a screenshot. Too	high  compres-
	      sion might occupy	enough CPU time	to interrupt playback. The de-
	      fault is 7.

	      Set the filter applied prior to PNG compression. 0 is none, 1 is
	      "sub",  2	 is  "up",  3  is  "average",  4  is "Paeth", and 5 is
	      "mixed". This affects the	 level	of  compression	 that  can  be
	      achieved.	For most images, "mixed" achieves the best compression
	      ratio, hence it is the default.

	      Write lossless WebP files. --screenshot-webp-quality is  ignored
	      if this is set. The default is no.

	      Set the WebP quality level. Higher means better quality. The de-
	      fault is 75.

	      Set the WebP compression level. Higher means better compression,
	      but takes	more CPU time. Note that this also affects the screen-
	      shot quality when	used with lossy	WebP files. The	default	is 4.

	      Whether to use software rendering	for screenshots	(default: no).

	      If set to	no, the	screenshot will	be rendered by the current  VO
	      if  possible (only vo_gpu	currently). The	advantage is that this
	      will (probably) always show up as	in the video  window,  because
	      the  same	 code  is  used	for rendering.	But since the renderer
	      needs to be reinitialized, this can be slow and interrupt	 play-
	      back.  (Unless  the window mode is used with the screenshot com-

	      If set to	yes, the software scaler is used to convert the	 video
	      to  RGB  (or  whatever  the target screenshot requires). In this
	      case, conversion will run	in a separate thread and will probably
	      not  interrupt playback. The software renderer may lack some ca-
	      pabilities, such as HDR rendering.

   Software Scaler
	      Specify  the  software  scaler  algorithm	 to   be   used	  with
	      --vf=scale.  This	 also  affects video output drivers which lack
	      hardware acceleration, e.g. x11. See also	--vf=scale.

	      To get a list of available scalers, run --sws-scaler=help.

	      Default: bicubic.

	      Software scaler Gaussian blur filter (luma). See --sws-scaler.

	      Software scaler Gaussian blur filter (chroma). See --sws-scaler.

	      Software scaler sharpen filter (luma). See --sws-scaler.

	      Software scaler sharpen filter (chroma). See --sws-scaler.

	      Software scaler chroma horizontal	shifting. See --sws-scaler.

	      Software scaler chroma vertical shifting.	See --sws-scaler.

	      Unknown functionality (default: no). Consult  libswscale	source
	      code.  The  primary  purpose  of	this, as far as	libswscale API
	      goes), is	to produce exactly the same output for the same	 input
	      on  all  platforms  (output has the same "bits" everywhere, thus
	      "bitexact"). Typically disables optimizations.

	      Allow optimizations that help with performance, but reduce qual-
	      ity (default: no).

	      VOs  like	 drm and x11 will benefit a lot	from using --sws-fast.
	      You may need  to	set  other  options,  like  --sws-scaler.  The
	      builtin  sws-fast	 profile  sets	this option and	some others to
	      gain performance for reduced quality. Also see --sws-allow-zimg.

	      Allow using zimg (if the component using	the  internal  swscale
	      wrapper explicitly allows	so) (default: yes). In this case, zimg
	      may be used, if the internal zimg	wrapper	supports the input and
	      output formats. It will silently or noisily fall back to libsws-
	      cale if one of these conditions does not apply.

	      If zimg is used, the other --sws-	options	are ignored,  and  the
	      --zimg- options are used instead.

	      If  the  internal	 component  using the swscale wrapper hooks up
	      logging correctly, a verbose priority log	message	will  indicate
	      whether zimg is being used.

	      Most things which	need software conversion can make use of this.

		 Do  note  that	 zimg  may be slower than libswscale. Usually,
		 it's faster on	x86 platforms, but slower on ARM (due to  lack
		 of ARM	specific optimizations). The mpv zimg wrapper uses un-
		 optimized repacking for some formats, for which  zimg	cannot
		 be blamed.

	      Zimg luma	scaler to use (default:	lanczos).

       --zimg-scaler-param-a=<default|float>,	    --zimg-scaler-param-b=<de-
	      Set scaler parameters. By	default, these are set to the  special
	      string  default,	which maps to a	scaler-specific	default	value.
	      Ignored if the scaler is not tunable.

		     --zimg-scaler-param-a is the number of taps.

		     a and b are the bicubic b and c parameters.

	      Same as --zimg-scaler, for for  chroma  interpolation  (default:

       --zimg-scaler-chroma-param-a, --zimg-scaler-chroma-param-b
	      Same   as	 --zimg-scaler-param-a	/  --zimg-scaler-param-b,  for

	      Dithering	(default: random).

	      Set the maximum number of	threads	to use for  scaling  (default:
	      auto).  auto uses	the number of logical cores on the current ma-
	      chine. Note that the scaler may use less threads (or even	just 1
	      thread)  depending  on  stuff.   Passing	a  value of 1 disables
	      threading	and always scales the image  in	 a  single  operation.
	      Higher  thread  counts  waste  resources,	 but make it typically

	      Note that	some zimg git versions had bugs	that will corrupt  the
	      output if	threads	are used.

	      Allow optimizations that help with performance, but reduce qual-
	      ity (default: yes). Currently, this may simplify	gamma  conver-
	      sion operations.

   Audio Resampler
       This  controls  the  default options of any resampling done by mpv (but
       not within libavfilter, within the system audio API resampler,  or  any
       other places).

       It also sets the	defaults for the lavrresample audio filter.

	      Length  of  the  filter with respect to the lower	sampling rate.
	      (default:	16)

	      Log2  of	the  number  of	 polyphase  entries.  (...,  10->1024,
	      11->2048,	12->4096, ...) (default: 10->1024)

	      Cutoff  frequency	 (0.0-1.0),  default set depending upon	filter

	      If set  then  filters  will  be  linearly	 interpolated  between
	      polyphase	entries. (default: no)

	      Enable/disable  normalization  if	surround audio is downmixed to
	      stereo (default: no). If this is	disabled,  downmix  can	 cause
	      clipping.	If it's	enabled, the output might be too quiet.	It de-
	      pends on the source audio.

	      Technically, this	changes	the normalize suboption	of the lavrre-
	      sample audio filter, which performs the downmixing.

	      If downmix happens outside of mpv	for some reason, or in the de-
	      coder (decoder downmixing),  or  in  the	audio  output  (system
	      mixer), this has no effect.

	      Limit  maximum size of audio frames filtered at once, in ms (de-
	      fault: 40).  The output size size	is limited in  order  to  make
	      resample	speed  changes	react  faster. This is necessary espe-
	      cially if	decoders or filters  output  very  large  frame	 sizes
	      (like  some  lossless  codecs or some DRC	filters).  This	option
	      does not affect the resampling algorithm in any way.

	      For testing/debugging only. Can be removed or changed any	time.

	      Set AVOptions on the SwrContext or AVAudioResampleContext. These
	      should be	documented by FFmpeg or	Libav.

	      This is a	key/value list option. See List	Options	for details.

	      Make  console  output  less verbose; in particular, prevents the
	      status line (i.e.	AV: 3.4	(00:00:03.37) /	5320.6 ...) from being
	      displayed.  Particularly useful on slow terminals	or broken ones
	      which do not properly handle carriage return (i.e. \r).

	      See also:	--really-quiet and --msg-level.

	      Display even less	output and status messages than	with --quiet.

       --no-terminal, --terminal
	      Disable any use of the terminal  and  stdin/stdout/stderr.  This
	      completely silences any message output.

	      Unlike --really-quiet, this disables input and terminal initial-
	      ization as well.

	      Disable colorful console output on terminals.

	      Control verbosity	directly  for  each  module.  The  all	module
	      changes  the verbosity of	all the	modules. The verbosity changes
	      from this	option are applied in order from left  to  right,  and
	      each item	can override a previous	one.

	      Run  mpv with --msg-level=all=trace to see all messages mpv out-
	      puts. You	can use	the module names printed in the	 output	 (pre-
	      fixed  to	each line in [...]) to limit the output	to interesting

	      This also	affects	--log-file, and	in certain  cases  libmpv  API

		 Some  messages	 are printed before the	command	line is	parsed
		 and are therefore not affected	 by  --msg-level.  To  control
		 these	messages,  you have to use the MPV_VERBOSE environment
		 variable; see ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES for details.

	      Available	levels:

		 no	complete silence

		 fatal	fatal messages only

		 error	error messages

		 warn	warning	messages

		 info	informational messages

		 status	status messages	(default)

		 v	verbose	messages

		 debug	debug messages

		 trace	very noisy debug messages


		     mpv --msg-level=ao/sndio=no

		 Completely silences the output	of ao_sndio,  which  uses  the
		 log prefix [ao/sndio].

		     mpv --msg-level=all=warn,ao/alsa=error

		 Only  show warnings or	worse, and let the ao_alsa output show
		 errors	only.

	      Control whether OSD messages are shown on	the  console  when  no
	      video output is available	(default: auto).

	      auto   use terminal OSD if no video output active

	      no     disable terminal OSD

	      force  use terminal OSD even if video output active

	      The  auto	 mode  also enables terminal OSD if --video-osd=no was

       --term-osd-bar, --no-term-osd-bar
	      Enable printing a	progress bar under the status line on the ter-
	      minal.  (Disabled	by default.)

	      Customize	 the --term-osd-bar feature. The string	is expected to
	      consist of 5 characters (start, left space, position  indicator,
	      right space, end). You can use Unicode characters, but note that
	      double- width characters will not	be treated correctly.

	      Default: [-+-].

	      Print out	a string after starting	playback. The  string  is  ex-
	      panded  for  properties,	e.g. --term-playing-msg='file: ${file-
	      name}' will print	the string file: followed by a space  and  the
	      currently	played filename.

	      See Property Expansion.

	      Print  out  a custom string during playback instead of the stan-
	      dard status line.	Expands	properties. See	Property Expansion.

	      Set the terminal title. Currently, this simply concatenates  the
	      escape  sequence	setting	 the  window  title  with the provided
	      (property	expanded) string. This will mess up  if	 the  expanded
	      string  contain  bytes  that  end	the escape sequence, or	if the
	      terminal does not	understand the sequence. The  latter  probably
	      includes the regrettable win32.

	      Expands properties. See Property Expansion.

	      Prepend module name to each console message.

	      Prepend  timing information to each console message. The time is
	      in seconds since the player process  was	started	 (technically,
	      slightly	later actually), using a monotonic time	source depend-
	      ing on the OS. This is CLOCK_MONOTONIC on	sane UNIX variants.

	      Decide whether to	use network cache settings (default: auto).

	      If enabled, use up to --cache-secs for the cache size (but still
	      limited  to --demuxer-max-bytes),	and make the cached data seek-
	      able (if possible).  If disabled,	--cache-pause and related  are
	      implicitly disabled.

	      The  auto	choice enables this depending on whether the stream is
	      thought to involve network accesses or other slow	media (this is
	      an imperfect heuristic).

	      Before mpv 0.30.0, this used to accept a number, which specified
	      the size of the cache  in	 kilobytes.  Use  e.g.	--cache	 --de-
	      muxer-max-bytes=123k instead.

	      Turn off input stream caching. See --cache.

	      Deprecated. Once this option is removed, there will be no	way to
	      limit  the  cache	 size  by  time	 (only	by  size  with	 --de-
	      muxer-max-bytes).	This option is considered useless, since there
	      is no good reason	to limit the cache by time,  and  the  default
	      value of this option is already something	very high.  The	inter-
	      action with the other cache options is also confusing.

	      How many seconds of audio/video to prefetch if the cache is  ac-
	      tive.  This overrides the	--demuxer-readahead-secs option	if and
	      only if the cache	is enabled and the value is  larger.  The  de-
	      fault  value  is	set  to	 something  very high, so the actually
	      achieved readahead will usually be limited by the	value  of  the
	      --demuxer-max-bytes  option. Setting this	option is usually only
	      useful for limiting readahead.

	      Write packet data	to a temporary file, instead of	 keeping  them
	      in  memory.   This  makes	sense only with	--cache. If the	normal
	      cache is disabled, this option is	ignored.

	      You need to set --cache-dir to use this.

	      The cache	file is	append-only. Even if  the  player  appears  to
	      prune  data, the file space freed	by it is not reused. The cache
	      file is deleted when playback is closed.

	      Note that	 packet	 metadata  is  still  kept  in	memory.	 --de-
	      muxer-max-bytes  and  related  options  are  applied to metadata
	      only. The	size of	this metadata  varies, but 50 MB per  hour  of
	      media is typical.	The cache statistics will report this metadats
	      size, instead of the size	of the cache  file.  If	 the  metadata
	      hits  the	size limits, the metadata is pruned (but not the cache

	      When the media is	closed,	the cache file	is  deleted.  A	 cache
	      file  is generally worthless after the media is closed, and it's
	      hard to retrieve any media data from it (it's not	 supported  by

	      If  the option is	enabled	at runtime, the	cache file is created,
	      but old data will	remain in the memory cache. If the  option  is
	      disabled at runtime, old data remains in the disk	cache, and the
	      cache file is not	closed until the media is closed. If  the  op-
	      tion  is disabled	and enabled again, it will continue to use the
	      cache file that was opened first.

	      Directory	where to create	temporary files	(default: none).

	      Currently, this is used for --cache-on-disk only.

	      Whether the player should	automatically  pause  when  the	 cache
	      runs out of data and stalls decoding/playback (default: yes). If
	      enabled, it will pause and unpause once more data	is  available,
	      aka "buffering".

	      Number  of  seconds the packet cache should have buffered	before
	      starting playback	again if "buffering" was entered (default: 1).
	      This  can	 be  used  to control how long the player rebuffers if
	      --cache-pause is enabled,	and  the  demuxer  underruns.  If  the
	      given  time  is higher than the maximum set with --cache-secs or
	      --demuxer-readahead-secs,	or prefetching ends  before  that  for
	      some  other  reason  (like  file end or maximum configured cache
	      size reached), playback resumes earlier.

	      Enter "buffering"	mode before starting playback  (default:  no).
	      This can be used to ensure playback starts smoothly, in exchange
	      for waiting some time to prefetch	network	data (as controlled by
	      --cache-pause-wait).  For	 example, some common behavior is that
	      playback starts, but network caches  immediately	underrun  when
	      trying to	decode more data as playback progresses.

	      Another thing that can happen is that the	network	prefetching is
	      so CPU demanding (due to demuxing	in the background) that	 play-
	      back  drops  frames  at first. In	these cases, it	helps enabling
	      this option, and setting --cache-secs and	--cache-pause-wait  to
	      roughly the same value.

	      This option also triggers	when playback is restarted after seek-

	      Whether or when to unlink	cache files (default: immediate). This
	      affects  cache  files  which are inherently temporary, and which
	      make no sense to remain on disk  after  the  player  terminates.
	      This is a	debugging option.

		     Unlink  cache  file  after	 they  were created. The cache
		     files won't be visible anymore, even  though  they're  in
		     use.  This	ensures	they are guaranteed to be removed from
		     disk when the player terminates, even if it crashes.

		     Delete cache files	after they are closed.

	      no     Don't delete cache	files. They will  consume  disk	 space
		     without having a use.

	      Currently, this is used for --cache-on-disk only.

	      Size  of the low level stream byte buffer	(default: 128KB). This
	      is used as buffer	between	demuxer	and low	level I/O (e.g.	 sock-
	      ets). Generally, this can	be very	small, and the main purpose is
	      similar to the internal buffer FILE in the  C  standard  library
	      will have.

	      Half  of	the  buffer  is	 always	used for guaranteed seek back,
	      which is important for unseekable	input.

	      There are	known cases where this can help	performance to	set  a
	      large buffer:

		 1. mp4	 files.	 libavformat  may  trigger many	small seeks in
		    both directions, depending on how the file was muxed.

		 2. Certain network filesystems, which do not  have  a	cache,
		    and	where small reads can be inefficient.

	      In other cases, setting this to a	large value can	reduce perfor-

	      Usually, read accesses are at half the buffer size, but  it  may
	      happen  that  accesses  are  done	 alternating  with smaller and
	      larger  sizes  (this  is	due  to	 the  internal	 ring	buffer

	      See  --list-options for defaults and value range.	<bytesize> op-
	      tions accept suffixes such as KiB	and MiB.

       --vd-queue-enable=<yes|no>, --ad-queue-enable
	      Enable running the video/audio decoder on	a separate thread (de-
	      fault:  no).   If	 enabled,  the	decoder	 is  run on a separate
	      thread, and a frame queue	is  put	 between  decoder  and	higher
	      level  playback logic. The size of the frame queue is defined by
	      the other	options	below.

	      This is probably quite pointless.	libavcodec already has	multi-
	      threaded decoding	(enabled by default), which makes this largely
	      unnecessary. It might help in some corner	cases with high	 band-
	      width  video  that  is slow to decode (in	these cases libavcodec
	      would block the playback logic, while using  a  decoding	thread
	      would  distribute	the decoding time evenly without affecting the
	      playback logic). In other	situations, it will simply make	 seek-
	      ing slower and use significantly more memory.

	      The  queue  size	is  restricted by the other --vd-queue-... op-
	      tions. The final queue size is the minimum as indicated  by  the
	      option  with  the	 lowest	 limit.	Each decoder/track has its own
	      queue that may use the full configured queue size.

	      Most queue options can be	changed	at runtime.  --vd-queue-enable
	      itself  (and  the	 audio	equivalent) update only	if decoding is
	      completely reinitialized.	However,  setting  --vd-queue-max-sam-
	      ples=1 should almost lead	to the same behavior as	--vd-queue-en-
	      able=no, so that value can be used for effectively  runtime  en-
	      abling/disabling the queue.

	      This  should  not	be used	with hardware decoding.	It is possible
	      to enable	this for audio,	but it makes even less sense.

       --vd-queue-max-bytes=<bytesize>,	--ad-queue-max-bytes
	      Maximum approximate allowed size of the queue. If	exceeded,  de-
	      coding  will  be	stopped.  The  maximum size can	be exceeded by
	      about 1 frame.

	      See --list-options for defaults and value	range. <bytesize>  op-
	      tions accept suffixes such as KiB	and MiB.

       --vd-queue-max-samples=<int>, --ad-queue-max-samples
	      Maximum  number  of  frames  (video)  or	samples	(audio)	of the
	      queue. The audio size may	be exceeded by about 1 frame.

	      See --list-options for defaults and value	range.

       --vd-queue-max-secs=<seconds>, --ad-queue-max-secs
	      Maximum number of	seconds	of media in  the  queue.  The  special
	      value 0 means no limit is	set. The queue size may	be exceeded by
	      about 2 frames. Timestamp	resets may lead	to random  queue  size

	      See --list-options for defaults and value	range.

	      Use <string> as user agent for HTTP streaming.

       --cookies, --no-cookies
	      Support cookies when making HTTP requests. Disabled by default.

	      Read  HTTP cookies from <filename>. The file is assumed to be in
	      Netscape format.

	      Set custom HTTP fields when accessing HTTP stream.

	      This is a	string list option. See	List Options for details.


		     mpv --http-header-fields='Field1: value1','Field2:	value2'	\

		 Will generate HTTP request:

		     GET / HTTP/1.0
		     Host: localhost:1234
		     User-Agent: MPlayer
		     Icy-MetaData: 1
		     Field1: value1
		     Field2: value2
		     Connection: close

	      URL of the HTTP/HTTPS proxy. If this is set, the http_proxy  en-
	      vironment	is ignored. The	no_proxy environment variable is still
	      respected. This option is	silently ignored if it does not	 start
	      with  http://. Proxies are not used for https URLs. Setting this
	      option does not try to make the ytdl script use the proxy.

	      Certificate authority database file for use with TLS.  (Silently
	      fails with older FFmpeg or Libav versions.)

	      Verify peer certificates when using TLS (e.g. with https://...).
	      (Silently	fails with older FFmpeg	or Libav versions.)

	      A	file containing	a certificate to use in	the handshake with the

	      A	file containing	the private key	for the	certificate.

	      Specify a	referrer path or URL for HTTP requests.

	      Specify  the  network  timeout in	seconds	(default: 60 seconds).
	      This affects at least HTTP. The special value 0  uses  the  FFm-
	      peg/Libav	defaults. If a protocol	is used	which does not support
	      timeouts,	this option is silently	ignored.

		 This breaks the RTSP protocol,	because	of inconsistent	FFmpeg
		 API  regarding	its internal timeout option. Not only does the
		 RTSP timeout option accept different units  (seconds  instead
		 of microseconds, causing mpv to pass it huge values), it will
		 also overflow FFmpeg internal calculations. The worst is that
		 merely	 setting the option will put RTSP into listening mode,
		 which breaks any client uses. At time of  this	 writing,  the
		 fix  was not made effective yet. For this reason, this	option
		 is ignored (or	should be ignored) on RTSP URLs. You can still
		 set the timeout option	directly with --demuxer-lavf-o.

	      Select  RTSP  transport  method (default:	tcp). This selects the
	      underlying network transport when	playing	rtsp://...  URLs.  The
	      value lavf leaves	the decision to	libavformat.

	      If HLS streams are played, this option controls what streams are
	      selected by default. The option allows the following parameters:

	      no     Don't do anything special.	Typically,  this  will	simply
		     pick the first audio/video	streams	it can find.

	      min    Pick the streams with the lowest bitrate.

	      max    Same, but highest bitrate.	(Default.)

	      Additionally,  if	 the  option  is a number, the stream with the
	      highest rate equal or below the option value is selected.

	      The bitrate as used is sent by the server, and there's no	 guar-
	      antee it's actually meaningful.

	      This  defines  the  program to tune to. Usually, you may specify
	      this by using a stream URI like "dvb://ZDF HD", but you can tune
	      to  a  different channel by writing to this property at runtime.
	      Also see dvbin-channel-switch-offset  for	 more  useful  channel
	      switching	functionality.

	      Specifies	using card number 0-15 (default: 0).

	      Instructs	mpv to read the	channels list from <filename>. The de-
	      fault is in the mpv  configuration  directory  (usually  ~/.con-
	      fig/mpv)	 with  the  filename  channels.conf.{sat,ter,cbl,atsc}
	      (based on	your card type)	or channels.conf  as  a	 last  resort.
	      For  DVB-S/2  cards,  a  VDR 1.7.x format	channel	list is	recom-
	      mended as	it allows tuning to DVB-S2 channels,  enabling	subti-
	      tles and decoding	the PMT	(which largely improves	the demuxing).
	      Classic mplayer format channel lists are still supported	(with-
	      out  these improvements),	and for	other card types, only limited
	      VDR format channel list support  is  implemented	(patches  wel-
	      come).   For  channels  with dynamic PID switching or incomplete
	      channels.conf, --dvbin-full-transponder or the  magic  PID  8192
	      are recommended.

	      Maximum  number  of  seconds  to wait when trying	to tune	a fre-
	      quency before giving up (default:	30).

	      Apply no filters on program PIDs,	only  tune  to	frequency  and
	      pass  full  transponder to demuxer.  The player frontend selects
	      the streams from the full	TS in this case, so the	program	 which
	      is  shown	initially may not match	the chosen channel.  Switching
	      between the programs is possible by cycling  the	program	 prop-
	      erty.   This  is	useful to record multiple programs on a	single
	      transponder, or to work around issues in the channels.conf.   It
	      is  also	recommended to use this	for channels which switch PIDs
	      on-the-fly, e.g. for regional news.

	      Default: no

	      This value is not	meant for setting via configuration, but  used
	      in  channel switching. An	input.conf can cycle this value	up and
	      down to perform channel switching. This number effectively gives
	      the  offset  to  the  initially  tuned to	channel	in the channel

	      An  example  input.conf  could  contain:	H  cycle   dvbin-chan-
	      nel-switch-offset	up, K cycle dvbin-channel-switch-offset	down

   ALSA	audio output options
	      Deprecated, use --audio-device (requires alsa/ prefix).

	      Enable ALSA resampling plugin. (This is disabled by default, be-
	      cause some drivers report	incorrect audio	delay in some cases.)

	      Set the mixer device used	with ao-volume (default: default).

	      Set the name of the mixer	element	(default: Master). This	is for
	      example PCM or Master.

	      Set  the	index  of the mixer channel (default: 0). Consider the
	      output of	"amixer	scontrols", then the index is the number  that
	      follows the name of the element.

	      Allow  output  of	 non-interleaved formats (if the audio decoder
	      uses this	format). Currently disabled by default,	 because  some
	      popular  ALSA  plugins  are  utterly broken with non-interleaved

	      Don't read or set	the channel map	of the ALSA device - only  re-
	      quest  the  required number of channels, and then	pass the audio
	      as-is to it. This	option most likely should not be used. It  can
	      be  useful  for debugging, or for	static setups with a specially
	      engineered ALSA configuration (in	this case  you	should	always
	      force  the  same	layout	with --audio-channels, or it will work
	      only for files which use the layout implicit to  your  ALSA  de-

	      Set  the	requested  buffer  time	 in microseconds. A value of 0
	      skips requesting anything	 from  the  ALSA  API.	This  and  the
	      --alsa-periods  option  uses  the	ALSA near functions to set the
	      requested	parameters. If doing so	results	in an empty configura-
	      tion set,	setting	these parameters is skipped.

	      Both options control the buffer size. A low buffer size can lead
	      to higher	CPU usage and audio dropouts, while a high buffer size
	      can  lead	 to higher latency in volume changes and other filter-

	      Number of	periods	requested from the ALSA	API.  See  --alsa-buf-
	      fer-time for further remarks.

   GPU renderer	options
       The  following video options are	currently all specific to --vo=gpu and
       --vo=libmpv only, which are the only VOs	that implement them.

	      The filter function to use when upscaling	video.

		     Bilinear hardware texture filtering  (fastest,  very  low
		     quality). This is the default for compatibility reasons.

		     Mid  quality  and	speed.	This is	the default when using

		     Lanczos scaling. Provides mid quality and	speed.	Gener-
		     ally  worse  than	spline36, but it results in a slightly
		     sharper image which is good for some content  types.  The
		     number  of	 taps can be controlled	with scale-radius, but
		     is	best left unchanged.

		     (This filter is an	alias for sinc-windowed	sinc)

		     Elliptic weighted average Lanczos scaling.	Also known  as
		     Jinc.  Relatively slow, but very good quality. The	radius
		     can be controlled with scale-radius. Increasing  the  ra-
		     dius makes	the filter sharper but adds more ringing.

		     (This filter is an	alias for jinc-windowed	jinc)

		     A	slightly  sharpened version of ewa_lanczos, preconfig-
		     ured to use an ideal radius and parameter.	If your	 hard-
		     ware  can run it, this is probably	what you should	use by

		     Mitchell-Netravali. The B and C  parameters  can  be  set
		     with  --scale-param1  and	--scale-param2.	This filter is
		     very good at downscaling (see --dscale).

		     A version of nearest neighbour that (naively) oversamples
		     pixels, so	that pixels overlapping	edges get linearly in-
		     terpolated	instead	of rounded. This  essentially  removes
		     the  small	 imperfections	and judder artifacts caused by
		     nearest-neighbour interpolation, in exchange  for	adding
		     some blur.	This filter is good at temporal	interpolation,
		     and also known as "smoothmotion" (see --tscale).

	      linear A --tscale	filter.

	      There are	some more filters, but most are	not as useful.	For  a
	      complete list, pass help as value, e.g.:

		 mpv --scale=help

	      As --scale, but for interpolating	chroma information. If the im-
	      age is not subsampled, this option is ignored entirely.

	      Like --scale, but	apply these filters on downscaling instead. If
	      this  option is unset, the filter	implied	by --scale will	be ap-

	      The filter used for interpolating	the  temporal  axis  (frames).
	      This  is only used if --interpolation is enabled.	The only valid
	      choices for --tscale  are	 separable  convolution	 filters  (use
	      --tscale=help to get a list). The	default	is mitchell.

	      Common --tscale choices include oversample, linear, catmull_rom,
	      mitchell,	gaussian, or bicubic. These are	listed	in  increasing
	      order   of   smoothness/blurriness,   with   bicubic  being  the
	      smoothest/blurriest  and	oversample  being  the	sharpest/least

       --scale-param1=<value>,			       --scale-param2=<value>,
       --cscale-param1=<value>,			      --cscale-param2=<value>,
       --dscale-param1=<value>,			      --dscale-param2=<value>,
       --tscale-param1=<value>,	--tscale-param2=<value>
	      Set filter parameters. By	default, these are set to the  special
	      string  default,	which maps to a	scaler-specific	default	value.
	      Ignored if the filter is not tunable.  Currently,	 this  affects
	      the following filter parameters:

		     Spline parameters (B and C). Defaults to 0.5 for both.

		     Scale  parameter  (t).  Increasing	 this makes the	result
		     blurrier.	Defaults to 1.

		     Minimum distance to an edge before	interpolation is used.
		     Setting  this to 0	will always interpolate	edges, whereas
		     setting it	to 0.5 will never interpolate,	thus  behaving
		     as	 if  the regular nearest neighbour algorithm was used.
		     Defaults to 0.0.

       --scale-blur=<value>,   --scale-wblur=<value>,	--cscale-blur=<value>,
       --cscale-wblur=<value>,	--dscale-blur=<value>, --dscale-wblur=<value>,
       --tscale-blur=<value>, --tscale-wblur=<value>
	      Kernel/window scaling factor (also known as a blur factor).  De-
	      creasing	this  makes the	result sharper,	increasing it makes it
	      blurrier (default	0). If set to 0, the kernel's  preferred  blur
	      factor  is  used.	Note that setting this too low (eg. 0.5) leads
	      to bad results. It's generally recommended to  stick  to	values
	      between 0.8 and 1.2.

       --scale-clamp=<0.0-1.0>,	--cscale-clamp,	--dscale-clamp,	--tscale-clamp
	      Specifies	 a weight bias to multiply into	negative coefficients.
	      Specifying --scale-clamp=1 has the effect	of  removing  negative
	      weights completely, thus effectively clamping the	value range to
	      [0-1]. Values between 0.0	and 1.0	can be specified to apply only
	      a	 moderate diminishment of negative weights. This is especially
	      useful for --tscale, where it reduces  excessive	ringing	 arti-
	      facts  in	 the  temporal	domain (which typically	manifest them-
	      selves as	short flashes or fringes of black, mostly around  mov-
	      ing edges) in exchange for potentially adding more blur. The de-
	      fault for	--tscale-clamp is 1.0, the others default to 0.0.

       --scale-cutoff=<value>,	   --cscale-cutoff=<value>,	 --dscale-cut-
	      Cut off the filter kernel	prematurely once the value range drops
	      below this threshold. Doing so allows more aggressive pruning of
	      skippable	 coefficients  by  disregarding	parts of the LUT which
	      are effectively zeroed out by the	window function. Only  affects
	      polar  (EWA)  filters.  The  default is 0.001 for	each, which is
	      perceptually transparent but provides a 10%-20% speedup, depend-
	      ing on the exact radius and filter kernel	chosen.

       --scale-taper=<value>,  --scale-wtaper=<value>, --dscale-taper=<value>,
       --dscale-wtaper=<value>,	    --cscale-taper=<value>,	 --cscale-wta-
       per=<value>, --tscale-taper=<value>, --tscale-wtaper=<value>
	      Kernel/window  taper factor. Increasing this flattens the	filter
	      function.	 Value range is	0 to 1.	A value	 of  0	(the  default)
	      means  no	 flattening,  a	value of 1 makes the filter completely
	      flat (equivalent to a box	function).   Values  in	 between  mean
	      that  some  portion  will	be flat	and the	actual filter function
	      will be squeezed into the	space in between.

       --scale-radius=<value>,	    --cscale-radius=<value>,	  --dscale-ra-
       dius=<value>, --tscale-radius=<value>
	      Set  radius  for tunable filters,	must be	a float	number between
	      0.5 and 16.0. Defaults to	the filter's preferred radius  if  not
	      specified. Doesn't work for every	scaler and VO combination.

	      Note  that  depending on filter implementation details and video
	      scaling ratio, the radius	that actually being used might be dif-
	      ferent (most likely being	increased a bit).

       --scale-antiring=<value>,   --cscale-antiring=<value>,  --dscale-antir-
       ing=<value>, --tscale-antiring=<value>
	      Set the antiringing strength. This tries to  eliminate  ringing,
	      but  can	introduce  other  artifacts  in	the process. Must be a
	      float number between 0.0 and 1.0.	The default value of 0.0  dis-
	      ables antiringing	entirely.

	      Note  that  this doesn't affect the special filters bilinear and
	      bicubic_fast, nor	does it	affect any polar (EWA) scalers.

       --scale-window=<window>,	   --cscale-window=<window>,	 --dscale-win-
       dow=<window>, --tscale-window=<window>
	      (Advanced	users only) Choose a custom windowing function for the
	      kernel.  Defaults	to the filter's	preferred window if unset. Use
	      --scale-window=help  to  get a list of supported windowing func-

       --scale-wparam=<window>,			     --cscale-wparam=<window>,
       --cscale-wparam=<window>, --tscale-wparam=<window>
	      (Advanced	 users	only)  Configure  the parameter	for the	window
	      function given by	--scale-window etc. By default,	these are  set
	      to  the  special string default, which maps to a window-specific
	      default value. Ignored if	the window is not tunable.  Currently,
	      this affects the following window	parameters:

	      kaiser Window parameter (alpha). Defaults	to 6.33.

		     Window parameter (alpha). Defaults	to 0.16.

		     Scale  parameter  (t).  Increasing	 this makes the	window
		     wider. Defaults to	1.

	      Set the size of the lookup texture for scaler kernels  (default:
	      6). The actual size of the texture is 2^N	for an option value of
	      N. So the	lookup texture with the	default	setting	uses  64  sam-

	      All weights are linearly interpolated from those samples,	so in-
	      creasing the size	of lookup table	might improve the accuracy  of

	      Disable  the  scaler  if the video image is not resized. In that
	      case, bilinear is	used instead of	whatever is set	with  --scale.
	      Bilinear will reproduce the source image perfectly if no scaling
	      is performed.  Enabled by	default. Note that this	 option	 never
	      affects --cscale.

	      When  using  convolution	based  filters,	extend the filter size
	      when downscaling.	Increases  quality,  but  reduces  performance
	      while downscaling.

	      This  will  perform  slightly sub-optimally for anamorphic video
	      (but still better	than without it) since it will extend the size
	      to match only the	milder of the scale factors between the	axes.

	      Note:  this  option  is  ignored when using bilinear downscaling
	      (the default).

	      Scale in linear light when downscaling. It should	only  be  used
	      with a --fbo-format that has at least 16 bit precision. This op-
	      tion has no effect on HDR	content.

	      Scale in linear light when upscaling. Like --linear-downscaling,
	      it  should only be used with a --fbo-format that has at least 16
	      bits precisions. This is	not  usually  recommended  except  for
	      testing/specific	purposes.  Users  are advised to either	enable
	      --sigmoid-upscaling or keep both options disabled	(i.e.  scaling
	      in gamma light).

	      When  upscaling, use a sigmoidal color transform to avoid	empha-
	      sizing ringing artifacts.	This is	incompatible with and replaces
	      --linear-upscaling. (Note	that sigmoidization also requires lin-
	      earization, so the LINEAR	rendering step fires in	both cases)

	      The center of the	sigmoid	curve  used  for  --sigmoid-upscaling,
	      must  be	a  float  between 0.0 and 1.0. Defaults	to 0.75	if not

	      The slope	of the sigmoid	curve  used  for  --sigmoid-upscaling,
	      must  be	a  float  between 1.0 and 20.0.	Defaults to 6.5	if not

	      Reduce stuttering	caused by mismatches in	the video fps and dis-
	      play refresh rate	(also known as judder).

		 This  requires	 setting the --video-sync option to one	of the
		 display- modes, or it will be silently	 disabled.   This  was
		 not required before mpv 0.14.0.

	      This  essentially	 attempts to interpolate the missing frames by
	      convoluting the video along the temporal axis. The  filter  used
	      can be controlled	using the --tscale setting.

	      Threshold	 below	which  frame ratio interpolation gets disabled
	      (default:	0.0001). This is calculated as abs(disphz/vfps - 1)  <
	      threshold,  where	vfps is	the speed-adjusted video FPS, and dis-
	      phz the display refresh rate. (The speed-adjusted	video  FPS  is
	      roughly  equal  to  the  normal video FPS, but with slowdown and
	      speedup applied.	This  matters  if  you	use  --video-sync=dis-
	      play-resample  to	 make  video  run synchronously	to the display
	      FPS, or if you change the	speed property.)

	      The default is intended to almost	always enable interpolation if
	      the  playback  rate  is even slightly different from the display
	      refresh rate. But	note that if you  use  e.g.  --video-sync=dis-
	      play-vdrop,  small deviations in the rate	can disable interpola-
	      tion and introduce a discontinuity every other minute.

	      Set this to -1 to	disable	this logic.

	      Enable use of PBOs. On some drivers this can  be	faster,	 espe-
	      cially  if  the  source  video size is huge (e.g.	so called "4K"
	      video). On other drivers it might	be slower or cause latency is-

	      Set dither target	depth to N. Default: no.

	      no     Disable any dithering done	by mpv.

	      auto   Automatic	selection.  If	output bit depth cannot	be de-
		     tected, 8 bits per	component are assumed.

	      8	     Dither to 8 bit output.

	      Note that	the depth of the connected video display device	cannot
	      be  detected.  Often, LCD	panels will do dithering on their own,
	      which conflicts with this	option and leads to ugly output.

	      Set the size of the dither matrix	(default: 6). The actual  size
	      of  the  matrix  is (2^N)	x (2^N)	for an option value of N, so a
	      value of 6 gives a size of 64x64.	The  matrix  is	 generated  at
	      startup time, and	a large	matrix can take	rather long to compute

	      Used in --dither=fruit mode only.

	      Select dithering	algorithm  (default:  fruit).  (Normally,  the
	      --dither-depth option controls whether dithering is enabled.)

	      The  error-diffusion  option requires compute shader support. It
	      also requires large amount of shared memory to run, the size  of
	      which  depends  on both the kernel (see --error-diffusion	option
	      below) and the height of video window. It	will fallback to fruit
	      dithering	if there is no enough shared memory to run the shader.

	      Enable  temporal dithering. (Only	active if dithering is enabled
	      in general.) This	changes	between	8 different dithering patterns
	      on each frame by changing	the orientation	of the tiled dithering
	      matrix. Unfortunately, this can lead to flicker on LCD displays,
	      since these have a high reaction time.

	      Determines  how  often  the  dithering  pattern  is updated when
	      --temporal-dither	is in use. 1 (the default) will	update on  ev-
	      ery video	frame, 2 on every other	frame, etc.

	      The  error diffusion kernel to use when --dither=error-diffusion
	      is set.

	      simple Propagate error to	only two adjacent pixels. Fastest  but
		     low quality.

		     Fast with reasonable quality. This	is the default.

		     Most notable error	diffusion kernel.

		     Looks  different from other kernels because only fraction
		     of	errors will be propagated during dithering. A  typical
		     use case of this kernel is	saving dithered	screenshot (in
		     window mode). This	kernel produces	slightly smaller file,
		     with still	reasonable dithering quality.

	      There are	other kernels (use --error-diffusion=help to list) but
	      most of them are much slower and demanding even larger amount of
	      shared memory.  Among these kernels, burkes achieves a good bal-
	      ance between performance and quality, and	probably  is  the  one
	      you want to try first.

	      Enables  GPU debugging. What this	means depends on the API type.
	      For OpenGL, it calls glGetError(), and requests a	debug context.
	      For Vulkan, it enables validation	layers.

	      Interval	in  displayed  frames  between	two buffer swaps. 1 is
	      equivalent to enable VSYNC, 0 to disable VSYNC. Defaults to 1 if
	      not specified.

	      Note  that  this depends on proper OpenGL	vsync support. On some
	      platforms	 and  drivers,	this  only  works  reliably  when   in
	      fullscreen  mode.	 It  may also require driver-specific hacks if
	      using multiple monitors, to ensure mpv syncs to the  right  one.
	      Compositing window managers can also lead	to bad results,	as can
	      missing  or  incorrect  display  FPS  information	 (see  --over-

       --vulkan-device=<device name>
	      The name of the Vulkan device to use for rendering and presenta-
	      tion. Use	--vulkan-device=help to	see the	list of	available  de-
	      vices and	their names. If	left unspecified, the first enumerated
	      hardware Vulkan device will be used.

	      Controls the presentation	mode of	the vulkan swapchain. This  is
	      similar to the --opengl-swapinterval option.

	      auto   Use  the preferred	swapchain mode for the vulkan context.

	      fifo   Non-tearing, vsync	blocked. Similar to "VSync on".

		     Tearing, vsync blocked. Late frames will tear instead  of

		     Non-tearing,   not	 vsync	blocked.  Similar  to  "triple

		     Tearing, not vsync	blocked. Similar to "VSync off".

	      Controls the number of VkQueues used for rendering  (limited  by
	      how  many	 your  device  supports). In theory, using more	queues
	      could enable some	 parallelism  between  frames  (when  using  a
	      --swapchain-depth	 higher	 than  1), but it can also slow	things
	      down on hardware	where  there's	no  true  parallelism  between
	      queues. (Default:	1)

	      Enables the use of async transfer	queues on supported vulkan de-
	      vices. Using them	allows transfer	operations  like  texture  up-
	      loads  and  blits	to happen concurrently with the	actual render-
	      ing, thus	improving overall throughput  and  power  consumption.
	      Enabled by default, and should be	relatively safe.

	      Enables  the use of async	compute	queues on supported vulkan de-
	      vices. Using this, in theory, allows out-of-order	scheduling  of
	      compute  shaders	with graphics shaders, thus enabling the hard-
	      ware to do more effective	work while waiting for	pipeline  bub-
	      bles  and	 memory	 operations.  Not beneficial on	all GPUs. It's
	      worth noting that	if async compute is enabled,  and  the	device
	      supports	more compute queues than graphics queues (bound	by the
	      restrictions set by --vulkan-queue-count), mpv  will  internally
	      try  and prefer the use of compute shaders over fragment shaders
	      wherever possible. Enabled by default, although Nvidia users may
	      want to disable it.

	      Disable  the use of VkEvents, for	debugging purposes or for com-
	      patibility with some older drivers / vulkan  portability	layers
	      that don't provide working VkEvent support.

	      The  index  of  the  display,  on	the selected Vulkan device, to
	      present  on  when	 using	the   displayvk	  GPU	context.   Use
	      --vulkan-display-display=help  to	see the	list of	available dis-
	      plays. If	left unspecified, the first enumerated display will be

	      The  index  of the display mode, of the selected Vulkan display,
	      to use when using	the displayvk GPU context.  Use	 --vulkan-dis-
	      play-mode=help  to  see the list of available modes. If left un-
	      specified, the first enumerated mode will	be used.

	      The index	of the	plane,	on  the	 selected  Vulkan  device,  to
	      present	on   when   using   the	 displayvk  GPU	 context.  Use
	      --vulkan-display-plane=help to see the list of available planes.
	      If left unspecified, the first enumerated	plane will be used.

	      Switches	the  D3D11 swap	chain fullscreen state to 'fullscreen'
	      when fullscreen video is requested.  Also	 known	as  "exclusive
	      fullscreen" or "D3D fullscreen" in other applications. Gives mpv
	      full control of rendering	on the swap chain's screen. Off	by de-

	      Use  WARP	 (Windows  Advanced  Rasterization  Platform) with the
	      D3D11 GPU	backend	(default: auto). This is  a  high  performance
	      software	renderer.  By default, it is only used when the	system
	      has no hardware adapters that support D3D11. While the  extended
	      GPU features will	work with WARP,	they can be very slow.

	      Select  a	 specific feature level	when using the D3D11 GPU back-
	      end. By default, the highest available feature  level  is	 used.
	      This  option  can	be used	to select a lower feature level, which
	      is mainly	useful for debugging.  Most extended GPU features will
	      not work at 9_x feature levels.

	      Enable flip-model	presentation, which avoids unnecessarily copy-
	      ing the backbuffer by sharing surfaces with  the	DWM  (default:
	      yes).  This  may cause performance issues	with older drivers. If
	      flip-model presentation is not supported (for example,  on  Win-
	      dows 7 without the platform update), mpv will automatically fall
	      back to the older	bitblt presentation model.

	      Schedule each frame to be	presented for this  number  of	VBlank
	      intervals.  (default: 1) Setting to 1 will enable	VSync, setting
	      to 0 will	disable	it.

       --d3d11-adapter=<adapter	name|help>
	      Select a specific	D3D11 adapter to utilize for D3D11  rendering.
	      Will  pick the default adapter if	unset. Alternatives are	listed
	      when the name "help" is given.

	      Checks for matches based on the start of the string, case	insen-
	      sitive.  Thus, if	the description	of the adapter starts with the
	      vendor name, that	can be utilized	as the selection parameter.

	      Hardware decoders	utilizing the  D3D11  rendering	 abstraction's
	      helper  functionality  to	 receive  a device, such as D3D11VA or
	      DXVA2's DXGI mode, will be affected by this choice.

	      Select a specific	D3D11 output format to utilize for D3D11  ren-
	      dering.	"auto" is the default, which will pick either rgba8 or
	      rgb10_a2 depending on the	configured desktop bit depth.  rgba16f
	      and  bgra8  are  left  out  of  the autodetection	logic, and are
	      available	for manual testing.

		 Desktop bit depth querying is	only  available	 from  an  API
		 available from	Windows	10. Thus on older systems it will only
		 automatically utilize the rgba8 output	format.

	      Select a specific	D3D11 output color space to utilize for	 D3D11
	      rendering.   "auto"  is the default, which will select the color
	      space of the desktop on which the	swap chain is located.

	      Values other than	"srgb" and "pq"	have had issues	in testing, so
	      they are mostly available	for manual testing.

		 Swap  chain  color space configuration	is only	available from
		 an API	available from Windows 10. Thus	on  older  systems  it
		 will not work.

	      By  default,  when using hardware	decoding with --gpu-api=d3d11,
	      the video	image will be copied  (GPU-to-GPU)  from  the  decoder
	      surface to a shader resource. Set	this option to avoid that copy
	      by sampling directly from	the decoder image. This	 may  increase
	      performance  and	reduce power usage, but	can cause the image to
	      be sampled incorrectly on	the bottom and right edges due to pad-
	      ding,  and may invoke driver bugs, since Direct3D	11 technically
	      does not allow sampling from  a  decoder	surface	 (though  most
	      drivers support it.)

	      Currently	only relevant for --gpu-api=d3d11.

	      Set the client app id for	Wayland-based video output methods. By
	      default, "mpv" is	used.

	      Disable vsync for	the wayland contexts (default: no). Useful for
	      benchmarking    the   wayland   context	when   combined	  with
	      video-sync=display-desync, --no-audio, and  --untimed=yes.  Only
	      works with --gpu-context=wayland and --gpu-context=waylandvk.

	      Defines  the  size  of  an edge border (default: 10) to initiate
	      client side resize events	 in  the  wayland  contexts  with  the
	      mouse.  This  is only active if there are	no server side decora-
	      tions from the compositor.

	      Defines the size of an edge border  (default:  64)  to  initiate
	      client  side  resizes  events in the wayland contexts with touch

	      Controls which compiler is used to  translate  GLSL  to  SPIR-V.
	      This  is	(currently)  only  relevant  for  --gpu-api=vulkan and
	      --gpu-api=d3d11.	The possible choices are currently only:

	      auto   Use the first available compiler. (Default)

		     Use libshaderc, which is an API wrapper  around  glslang.
		     This is generally the most	preferred, if available.

		 This option is	deprecated, since there	is only	one reasonable
		 value.	 It may	be removed in the future.

       --glsl-shader=<file>, --glsl-shaders=<file-list>
	      Custom GLSL hooks. These are a flexible way to add custom	 frag-
	      ment  shaders,  which can	be injected at almost arbitrary	points
	      in the rendering pipeline, and access all	previous  intermediate

	      Each  use	 of  the --glsl-shader option will add another file to
	      the internal list	of shaders, while --glsl-shaders takes a  list
	      of  files,  and overwrites the internal list with	it. The	latter
	      is a path	list option (see List Options for details).


			The syntax is not stable yet and may change any	time.

	      The general syntax of a user shader looks	like this:


		 vec4 hook() {
		    return something;



	      Each section of metadata,	along with the non-metadata lines  af-
	      ter it, defines a	single block. There are	currently two types of
	      blocks, HOOKs and	TEXTUREs.

	      A	TEXTURE	block can set the following options:

	      TEXTURE <name> (required)
		     The name of this texture. Hooks can then bind the texture
		     under this	name using BIND. This must be the first	option
		     of	the texture block.

	      SIZE <width> [<height>] [<depth>]	(required)
		     The dimensions of the texture. The	height and  depth  are
		     optional.	The  type of texture (1D, 2D or	3D) depends on
		     the number	of components specified.

	      FORMAT <name> (required)
		     The texture format	for  the  samples.  Supported  texture
		     formats  are  listed  in debug logging when the gpu VO is
		     initialized (look for Texture  formats:).	Usually,  this
		     follows  OpenGL  naming  conventions.  For	example, rgb16
		     provides 3	channels with normalized  16  bit  components.
		     One oddity	are float formats: for example,	rgba16f	has 16
		     bit internal precision, but the texture data is  provided
		     as	 32  bit  floats,  and the driver converts the data on
		     texture upload.

		     Although format names follow a common naming  convention,
		     not  all  of them are available on	all hardware, drivers,
		     GL	versions, and so on.

		     The min/magnification filter used when sampling from this

		     The  border  wrapping  mode  used when sampling from this

	      Following	the metadata is	a string of bytes in hexadecimal nota-
	      tion that	define the raw texture data, corresponding to the for-
	      mat specified by FORMAT, on a single line	with no	 extra	white-

	      A	HOOK block can set the following options:

	      HOOK <name> (required)
		     The  texture which	to hook	into. May occur	multiple times
		     within a metadata block, up to a predetermined limit. See
		     below for a list of hookable textures.

	      DESC <title>
		     User-friendly  description	 of the	pass. This is the name
		     used when representing this shader	in the list of	passes
		     for property vo-passes.

	      BIND <name>
		     Loads a texture (either coming from mpv or	from a TEXTURE
		     block) and	makes it available to the pass.	 When  binding
		     textures from mpv,	this will also set up macros to	facil-
		     itate accessing it	properly. See below for	a list.	By de-
		     fault, no textures	are bound. The special name HOOKED can
		     be	used to	refer to the texture that triggered this pass.

	      SAVE <name>
		     Gives the name of the texture to save the result of  this
		     pass  into.  By  default, this is set to the special name
		     HOOKED which has the effect  of  overwriting  the	hooked

	      WIDTH <szexpr>, HEIGHT <szexpr>
		     Specifies	the  size  of  the  resulting texture for this
		     pass. szexpr refers to an expression in RPN (reverse pol-
		     ish  notation), using the operators + - * / > < !,	float-
		     ing point literals, and references	to sizes  of  existing
		     texture (such as MAIN.width or CHROMA.height), OUTPUT, or
		     NATIVE_CROPPED (size of an	input  texture	cropped	 after
		     pan-and-scan,  video-align-x/y,  video-pan-x/y,  etc. and
		     possibly  prescaled).  By	default,  these	 are  set   to
		     HOOKED.w and HOOKED.h, espectively.

	      WHEN <szexpr>
		     Specifies	a  condition  that needs to be true (non-zero)
		     for the shader stage to be	evaluated.  If	it  fails,  it
		     will  silently be omitted.	(Note that a shader stage like
		     this which	has a dependency on an optional	hook point can
		     still  cause  that	hook point to be saved,	which has some
		     minor overhead)

	      OFFSET <ox oy | ALIGN>
		     Indicates a pixel shift (offset) introduced by this pass.
		     These  pixel  offsets  will  be accumulated and corrected
		     during the	next scaling pass (cscale or scale).  The  de-
		     fault  values  are	0 0 which correspond to	no shift. Note
		     that offsets are ignored when not overwriting the	hooked

		     A	special	 value	of  ALIGN will attempt to fix existing
		     offset of HOOKED by align it with reference. It  requires
		     HOOKED  to	 be  resizable (see below). It works transpar-
		     ently with	fragment shader. For compute shader, the  pre-
		     defined  texmap  macro  is	 required to handle coordinate

	      COMPONENTS <n>
		     Specifies how many	components of this pass's  output  are
		     relevant  and  should  be	stored in the texture, up to 4
		     (rgba). By	default, this value is equal to	the number  of
		     components	in HOOKED.

	      COMPUTE <bw> <bh>	[<tw> <th>]
		     Specifies that this shader	should be treated as a compute
		     shader, with the block size bw and	bh. The	compute	shader
		     will be dispatched	with however many blocks are necessary
		     to	completely tile	over the output.  Within  each	block,
		     there will	bw tw*th threads, forming a single work	group.
		     In	other words: tw	and th specify the  work  group	 size,
		     which  can	be different from the block size. So for exam-
		     ple, a compute shader with	bw, bh = 32 and	 tw,  th  =  8
		     running  on a 500x500 texture would dispatch 16x16	blocks
		     (rounded up), each	with 8x8 threads.

		     Compute shaders in	mpv are	treated	a bit  different  from
		     fragment  shaders.	 Instead  of defining a	vec4 hook that
		     produces an output	sample,	you directly define void  hook
		     which  writes  to	a  fixed  writeonly  image  unit named
		     out_image (this is	bound by  mpv)	using  imageStore.  To
		     help translate texture coordinates	in the absence of ver-
		     tices, mpv	provides a special  function  NAME_map(id)  to
		     map  from the texel space of the output image to the tex-
		     ture coordinates for all bound textures.  In  particular,
		     NAME_pos	is   equivalent	 to  NAME_map(gl_GlobalInvoca-
		     tionID), although using this only really makes  sense  if
		     (tw,th) ==	(bw,bh).

	      Each  bound  mpv texture (via BIND) will make available the fol-
	      lowing definitions to that shader	pass, where NAME is  the  name
	      of the bound texture:

	      vec4 NAME_tex(vec2 pos)
		     The  sampling  function to	use to access the texture at a
		     certain spot (in texture coordinate space,	range  [0,1]).
		     This  takes  care	of any necessary normalization conver-

	      vec4 NAME_texOff(vec2 offset)
		     Sample the	texture	at a certain offset  in	 pixels.  This
		     works like	NAME_tex but additionally takes	care of	neces-
		     sary rotations, so	that sampling at  e.g.	vec2(-1,0)  is
		     always one	pixel to the left.

	      vec2 NAME_pos
		     The  local	 texture  coordinate  of  that	texture, range

	      vec2 NAME_size
		     The (rotated) size	in pixels of the texture.

	      mat2 NAME_rot
		     The rotation matrix associated with  this	texture.  (Ro-
		     tates pixel space to texture coordinates)

	      vec2 NAME_pt
		     The (unrotated) size of a single pixel, range [0,1].

	      float NAME_mul
		     The coefficient that needs	to be multiplied into the tex-
		     ture contents in order  to	 normalize  it	to  the	 range

	      sampler NAME_raw
		     The  raw  bound texture itself. The use of	this should be
		     avoided unless absolutely necessary.

	      Normally,	users should use either	 NAME_tex  or  NAME_texOff  to
	      read from	the texture. For some shaders however ,	it can be bet-
	      ter for performance to do	 custom	 sampling  from	 NAME_raw,  in
	      which  case  care	 needs	to  be	taken  to respect NAME_mul and

	      In addition to these parameters, the following uniforms are also
	      globally available:

	      float random
		     A random number in	the range [0-1], different per frame.

	      int frame
		     A	simple	count of frames	rendered, increases by one per
		     frame and never resets (regardless	of seeks).

	      vec2 input_size
		     The size in pixels	of the input image  (possibly  cropped
		     and prescaled).

	      vec2 target_size
		     The size in pixels	of the visible part of the scaled (and
		     possibly cropped) image.

	      vec2 tex_offset
		     Texture offset introduced by user shaders or options like
		     panscan, video-align-x/y, video-pan-x/y.

	      Internally, vo_gpu may generate any number of the	following tex-
	      tures.  Whenever a texture is rendered and saved by vo_gpu,  all
	      of  the  passes  that have hooked	into it	will run, in the order
	      they were	added by the user. This	is a list of  the  legal  hook

	      RGB, LUMA, CHROMA, ALPHA,	XYZ (resizable)
		     Source  planes  (raw). Which of these fire	depends	on the
		     image format of the source.

		     Source planes (upscaled). These only fire	on  subsampled

	      NATIVE (resizable)
		     The combined image, in the	source colorspace, before con-
		     version to	RGB.

	      MAINPRESUB (resizable)
		     The  image,  after	 conversion   to   RGB,	  but	before
		     --blend-subtitles=video is	applied.

	      MAIN (resizable)
		     The  main	image,	after conversion to RGB	but before up-

	      LINEAR (fixed)
		     Linear light image, before	scaling. This only fires  when
		     --linear-upscaling, --linear-downscaling or --sigmoid-up-
		     scaling is	in effect.

	      SIGMOID (fixed)
		     Sigmoidized light,	before scaling.	This only  fires  when
		     --sigmoid-upscaling is in effect.

	      PREKERNEL	(fixed)
		     The image immediately before the scaler kernel runs.

	      POSTKERNEL (fixed)
		     The image immediately after the scaler kernel runs.

	      SCALED (fixed)
		     The final upscaled	image, before color management.

	      OUTPUT (fixed)
		     The final output image, after color management but	before
		     dithering and drawing to screen.

	      Only the textures	labelled with resizable	may be transformed  by
	      the  pass.  When	overwriting a texture marked fixed, the	WIDTH,
	      HEIGHT and OFFSET	must be	left at	their default values.

	      CLI/config file only alias for --glsl-shaders-append.

	      Enable the debanding algorithm. This greatly reduces the	amount
	      of  visible  banding, blocking and other quantization artifacts,
	      at the expense of	very slightly blurring some of the finest  de-
	      tails.  In  practice, it's virtually always an improvement - the
	      only reason to disable it	would be for performance.

	      The number of debanding steps to perform per sample.  Each  step
	      reduces a	bit more banding, but takes time to compute. Note that
	      the strength of each step	falls off very quickly,	so  high  num-
	      bers (>4)	are practically	useless.  (Default 1)

	      The  debanding  filter's	cut-off	 threshold. Higher numbers in-
	      crease the debanding strength dramatically but progressively di-
	      minish image details.  (Default 64)

	      The debanding filter's initial radius. The radius	increases lin-
	      early for	each iteration.	A higher radius	will find more	gradi-
	      ents, but	a lower	radius will smooth more	aggressively. (Default

	      If you increase the --deband-iterations, you should probably de-
	      crease this to compensate.

	      Add  some	 extra	noise  to  the image. This significantly helps
	      cover up remaining quantization artifacts.  Higher  numbers  add
	      more noise. (Default 48)

	      If  set  to a value other	than 0,	enable an unsharp masking fil-
	      ter. Positive values will	sharpen	the image (but add more	 ring-
	      ing  and aliasing). Negative values will blur the	image. If your
	      GPU is powerful enough, consider alternatives like the ewa_lanc-
	      zossharp scale filter, or	the --scale-blur option.

	      Call  glFinish()	before	swapping  buffers (default: disabled).
	      Slower, but might	improve	results	when doing framedropping.  Can
	      completely  ruin performance. The	details	depend entirely	on the
	      OpenGL driver.

	      Call glXWaitVideoSyncSGI after each buffer swap  (default:  dis-
	      abled).  This may	or may not help	with video timing accuracy and
	      frame drop. It's possible	that this makes	video  output  slower,
	      or has no	effect at all.

	      X11/GLX only.

	      Calls  DwmFlush  after  swapping	buffers	 on  Windows (default:
	      auto). It	also sets SwapInterval(0) to ignore the	OpenGL timing.
	      Values are: no (disabled), windowed (only	in windowed mode), yes
	      (also in full screen).

	      The value	auto will try to determine whether the	compositor  is
	      active, and calls	DwmFlush only if it seems to be.

	      This may help to get more	consistent frame intervals, especially
	      with high-fps clips - which might	also  reduce  dropped  frames.
	      Typically,  a  value  of	windowed  should be enough, since full
	      screen may bypass	the DWM.

	      Windows only.

	      Selects a	specific feature level when using  the	ANGLE  backend
	      with  D3D11.  By default,	the highest available feature level is
	      used. This option	can be used to select a	lower  feature	level,
	      which  is	 mainly	useful for debugging.  Note that OpenGL	ES 3.0
	      is only supported	at feature level 10_1  or  higher.   Most  ex-
	      tended  OpenGL  features	will  not work at lower	feature	levels
	      (similar to --gpu-dumb-mode).

	      Windows with ANGLE only.

	      Use WARP (Windows	Advanced Rasterization	Platform)  when	 using
	      the  ANGLE  backend  with	 D3D11 (default: auto).	This is	a high
	      performance software renderer. By	default, it is used  when  the
	      Direct3D	hardware  does	not  support Direct3D 11 feature level
	      9_3. While the extended OpenGL features  will  work  with	 WARP,
	      they can be very slow.

	      Windows with ANGLE only.

	      Use  ANGLE's  built  in EGL windowing functions to create	a swap
	      chain (default: auto). If	this is	set to no and the  D3D11  ren-
	      derer  is	 in  use, ANGLE's built	in swap	chain will not be used
	      and a custom swap	chain that is optimized	 for  video  rendering
	      will  be	created	 instead.  If set to auto, a custom swap chain
	      will be used for D3D11 and the built in swap chain will be  used
	      for  D3D9. This option is	mainly for debugging purposes, in case
	      the custom swap chain has	poor performance or does not work.

	      If   set	 to   yes,   the   --angle-max-frame-latency,	 --an-
	      gle-swapchain-length  and	 --angle-flip options will have	no ef-

	      Windows with ANGLE only.

	      Enable flip-model	presentation, which avoids unnecessarily copy-
	      ing  the	backbuffer  by sharing surfaces	with the DWM (default:
	      yes). This may cause performance issues with older  drivers.  If
	      flip-model  presentation	is not supported (for example, on Win-
	      dows 7 without the platform update), mpv will automatically fall
	      back to the older	bitblt presentation model.

	      If  set  to no, the --angle-swapchain-length option will have no

	      Windows with ANGLE only.

	      Forces a specific	renderer when using  the  ANGLE	 backend  (de-
	      fault: auto). In auto mode this will pick	D3D11 for systems that
	      support Direct3D 11 feature level	9_3 or higher, and D3D9	other-
	      wise.  This  option  is  mainly for debugging purposes. Normally
	      there is no reason to force a specific  renderer,	 though	 --an-
	      gle-renderer=d3d9	 may  give  slightly better performance	on old
	      hardware.	Note that the D3D9 renderer only  supports  OpenGL  ES
	      2.0, so most extended OpenGL features will not work if this ren-
	      derer is selected	(similar to --gpu-dumb-mode).

	      Windows with ANGLE only.

	      Deactivates the automatic	graphics switching and forces the ded-
	      icated GPU.  (default: no)

	      OS X only.

	      Use  the	Apple  Software	Renderer when using cocoa-cb (default:
	      auto). If	set to no the software renderer	is never used and  in-
	      stead  fails when	a the usual pixel format could not be created,
	      yes will always only use the software renderer,  and  auto  only
	      falls  back to the software renderer when	the usual pixel	format
	      couldn't be created.

	      OS X only.

	      Creates a	10bit capable pixel format for	the  context  creation
	      (default:	 yes).	 Instead  of  8bit integer framebuffer a 16bit
	      half-float framebuffer is	requested.

	      OS X only.

	      Sets the appearance of the title bar (default:  auto).  Not  all
	      combinations of appearances and --macos-title-bar-material mate-
	      rials make sense or are unique. Appearances that	are  not  sup-
	      ported  by  you  current	macOS version fall back	to the default
	      value.  macOS and	cocoa-cb only

	      <appearance> can be one of the following:

	      auto   Detects the system	settings and sets the  title  bar  ap-
		     pearance  appropriately.  On  macOS 10.14 it also detects
		     run time changes.

	      aqua   The standard macOS	Light appearance.

		     The standard macOS	Dark appearance. (macOS	10.14+)

		     Light vibrancy appearance with.

		     Dark vibrancy appearance with.

		     Light Accessibility appearance. (macOS 10.14+)

		     Dark Accessibility	appearance. (macOS 10.14+)

		     Light vibrancy Accessibility appearance.  (macOS 10.14+)

		     Dark vibrancy Accessibility appearance.  (macOS 10.14+)

	      Sets the material	of the title bar (default: titlebar). All dep-
	      recated  materials  should  not  be used on macOS	10.14+ because
	      their functionality is not guaranteed. Not all  combinations  of
	      materials	  and  --macos-title-bar-appearance  appearances  make
	      sense or are unique.  Materials that are not  supported  by  you
	      current macOS version fall back to the default value.  macOS and
	      cocoa-cb only

	      <material> can be	one of the following:

		     The standard macOS	titel bar material.

		     The standard macOS	selection material.

	      menu   The standard macOS	menu material. (macOS 10.11+)

		     The standard macOS	popover	material. (macOS 10.11+)

		     The standard macOS	sidebar	material. (macOS 10.11+)

		     The standard macOS	header view material.  (macOS 10.14+)

	      sheet  The standard macOS	sheet material.	(macOS 10.14+)

		     The standard macOS	window	background  material.	(macOS

		     The standard macOS	hudWindow material. (macOS 10.14+)

		     The standard macOS	full screen material.  (macOS 10.14+)

		     The standard macOS	tool tip material. (macOS 10.14+)

		     The  standard  macOS content background material.	(macOS

		     The standard  macOS  under	 window	 background  material.
		     (macOS 10.14+)

		     The standard macOS	under page background material.	 (dep-
		     recated in	macOS 10.14+)

	      dark   The standard macOS	dark material.	(deprecated  in	 macOS

	      light  The standard macOS	light material.	 (macOS	10.14+)

		     The  standard macOS mediumLight material.	(macOS 10.11+,
		     deprecated	in macOS 10.14+)

		     The standard macOS	 ultraDark  material.	(macOS	10.11+
		     deprecated	in macOS 10.14+)

	      Sets  the	 color of the title bar	(default: completely transpar-
	      ent).  Is	  influenced   by   --macos-title-bar-appearance   and
	      --macos-title-bar-material.  See --sub-color for color syntax.

	      Sets  the	 fullscreen  resize animation duration in ms (default:
	      default).	 The default value is slightly less than the  system's
	      animation	duration (500ms) to prevent some problems when the end
	      of an async animation happens at the same	time as	the end	of the
	      system  wide  fullscreen animation. Setting anything higher than
	      500ms will only prematurely cancel the  resize  animation	 after
	      the system wide animation	ended. The upper limit is still	set at
	      1000ms since it's	possible that Apple or the  user  changes  the
	      system  defaults.	 Anything  higher than 1000ms though seems too
	      long and shouldn't be set	anyway.	 OS X and cocoa-cb only

	      Changes the App activation policy. With accessory	the  mpv  icon
	      in the Dock can be hidden. (default: regular)

	      macOS only.

	      Set  dimensions of the rendering surface used by the Android gpu
	      context.	Needs to be set	by the embedding  application  if  the
	      dimensions  change  during  runtime  (i.e.  if the device	is ro-
	      tated), via the surfaceChanged callback.

	      Android with --gpu-context=android only.

	      Continue even if a software renderer is detected.

	      The value	auto (the default) selects the GPU  context.  You  can
	      also  pass  help	to get a complete list of compiled in backends
	      (sorted by autoprobe order).

	      auto   auto-select (default)

	      cocoa  Cocoa/OS X	(deprecated, use --vo=libmpv instead)

	      win    Win32/WGL

	      winvk  VK_KHR_win32_surface

	      angle  Direct3D11	through	the OpenGL ES translation layer	ANGLE.
		     This  supports almost everything the win backend does (if
		     the ANGLE build is	new enough).

	      dxinterop	(experimental)
		     Win32, using WGL for rendering and	Direct3D 9Ex for  pre-
		     sentation.	 Works	on  Nvidia  and	AMD. Newer Intel chips
		     with the latest drivers may also work.

	      d3d11  Win32, with native	Direct3D 11 rendering.

	      x11    X11/GLX

	      x11vk  VK_KHR_xlib_surface



	      drm    DRM/EGL

		     VK_KHR_display. This backend is roughly the Vukan equiva-
		     lent of DRM/EGL, allowing for direct rendering via	Vulkan
		     without a display manager.

	      x11egl X11/EGL

		     Android/EGL.  Requires   --wid   be   set	 to   an   an-

	      Controls which type of graphics APIs will	be accepted:

	      auto   Use any available API (default)

	      opengl Allow only	OpenGL (requires OpenGL	2.1+ or	GLES 2.0+)

	      vulkan Allow  only Vulkan	(requires a valid/working --spirv-com-

	      d3d11  Allow only	--gpu-context=d3d11

	      Controls which type of OpenGL context will be accepted:

	      auto   Allow all types of	OpenGL (default)

	      yes    Only allow	GLES

	      no     Only allow	desktop/core GL

	      Restricts	all OpenGL versions above a certain version.  Versions
	      are  encoded in hundreds,	i.e. OpenGL 4.5	-> 450.	As an example,
	      --opengl-restrict=300 would restrict OpenGL 3.0 and higher,  ef-
	      fectively	 only  allowing	 2.x contexts. Note that this only im-
	      poses a limit on context creation	APIs, the actual  OpenGL  con-
	      text may still have a higher OpenGL version. (Default: 0)

	      Selects  the internal format of textures used for	FBOs. The for-
	      mat can influence	performance and	quality	of the	video  output.
	      fmt can be one of: rgb8, rgb10, rgb10_a2,	rgb16, rgb16f, rgb32f,
	      rgba12, rgba16, rgba16f, rgba16hf, rgba32f.

	      Default: auto, which  first  attempts  to	 utilize  16bit	 float
	      (rgba16f,	 rgba16hf),  and falls back to rgba16 if those are not
	      available.  Finally, attempts to utilize rgb10_a2	 or  rgba8  if
	      all of the previous formats are not available.

	      Set  an  additional raw gamma factor (default: 1.0). If gamma is
	      adjusted in other	ways (like with	 the  --gamma  option  or  key
	      bindings	and  the gamma property), the value is multiplied with
	      the other	gamma value.

	      Recommended values based on the environmental brightness:

	      1.0    Pitch black or dimly lit room (default)

	      1.1    Moderately	lit room, home

	      1.2    Brightly illuminated room,	office

	      NOTE: This is based around the assumptions of typical movie con-
	      tent,  which  contains  an implicit end-to-end of	about 0.8 from
	      scene to display.	For bright environments	it can	be  useful  to
	      cancel that out.

	      Automatically  corrects  the  gamma  value  depending on ambient
	      lighting conditions (adding a gamma boost	for bright rooms).

	      With ambient illuminance of 16 lux, mpv will pick	the 1.0	 gamma
	      value  (no  boost), and slightly increase	the boost up until 1.2
	      for 256 lux.

	      NOTE: Only implemented on	OS X.

	      Specifies	the primaries of the display.  Video  colors  will  be
	      adapted  to this colorspace when ICC color management is not be-
	      ing used.	Valid values are:

	      auto   Disable any adaptation, except for	atypical color spaces.
		     Specifically,   wide/unusual   gamuts  get	 automatically
		     adapted to	BT.709,	while standard gamut (i.e. BT.601  and
		     BT.709) content is	not touched. (default)

		     ITU-R BT.470 M

		     ITU-R  BT.601  (525-line  SD  systems,  eg.  NTSC), SMPTE

		     ITU-R BT.601 (625-line SD systems,	eg. PAL/SECAM),	 ITU-R
		     BT.470 B/G

	      bt.709 ITU-R  BT.709 (HD), IEC 61966-2-4 (sRGB), SMPTE RP177 An-
		     nex B

		     ITU-R BT.2020 (UHD)

	      apple  Apple RGB

	      adobe  Adobe RGB (1998)

		     ProPhoto RGB (ROMM)

		     CIE 1931 RGB (not to be confused with CIE XYZ)

	      dci-p3 DCI-P3 (Digital Cinema Colorspace), SMPTE RP431-2

		     Panasonic V-Gamut (VARICAM) primaries

		     Sony S-Gamut (S-Log) primaries

	      Specifies	the transfer characteristics (gamma) of	 the  display.
	      Video  colors will be adjusted to	this curve when	ICC color man-
	      agement is not being used.  Valid	values are:

	      auto   Disable any adaptation, except  for  atypical  transfers.
		     Specifically,  HDR	 or  linear light source material gets
		     automatically converted to	gamma 2.2, while  SDR  content
		     is	not touched. (default)

		     ITU-R BT.1886 curve (assuming infinite contrast)

	      srgb   IEC 61966-2-4 (sRGB)

	      linear Linear light output

		     Pure power	curve (gamma 1.8), also	used for Apple RGB

		     Pure power	curve (gamma 2.0)

		     Pure power	curve (gamma 2.2)

		     Pure power	curve (gamma 2.4)

		     Pure power	curve (gamma 2.6)

		     Pure power	curve (gamma 2.8), also	used for BT.470-BG

		     ProPhoto RGB (ROMM)

	      pq     ITU-R  BT.2100 PQ (Perceptual quantizer) curve, aka SMPTE

	      hlg    ITU-R BT.2100 HLG	(Hybrid	 Log-gamma)  curve,  aka  ARIB

	      v-log  Panasonic V-Log (VARICAM) curve

	      s-log1 Sony S-Log1 curve

	      s-log2 Sony S-Log2 curve

		 When  using HDR output	formats, mpv will encode to the	speci-
		 fied curve but	it will	not set	any HDMI flags or  other  sig-
		 nalling  that might be	required for the target	device to cor-
		 rectly	display	the HDR	signal.	 The user should independently
		 guarantee this	before using these signal formats for display.

	      Specifies	the measured peak brightness of	the output display, in
	      cd/m^2 (AKA nits). The interpretation of this brightness depends
	      on the configured	--target-trc. In all cases, it imposes a limit
	      on the signal values that	will be	sent to	the  display.  If  the
	      source exceeds this brightness level, a tone mapping filter will
	      be  inserted.  For  HLG,	it  has	 the  additional   effect   of
	      parametrizing the	inverse	OOTF, in order to get colorimetrically
	      consistent results with the mastering display. For SDR, or  when
	      using  an	 ICC (profile (--icc-profile), setting this to a value
	      above 203	essentially causes the display to be treated as	if  it
	      were an HDR display in disguise. (See the	note below)

	      In  auto	mode  (the default), the chosen	peak is	an appropriate
	      value based on the TRC in	use. For SDR curves, it	uses 203.  For
	      HDR curves, it uses 203 *	the transfer function's	nominal	peak.

		 When  using  an  SDR  transfer	function, this is normally not
		 needed, and setting it	may lead to very  unexpected  results.
		 The  one  time	it is useful is	if you want to calibrate a HDR
		 display using traditional transfer functions and  calibration
		 equipment.  In	 such cases, you can set your HDR display to a
		 high brightness such as 800 cd/m^2, and then calibrate	it  to
		 a  standard  curve  like  gamma2.8. Setting this value	to 800
		 would then instruct mpv to essentially	treat  it  as  an  HDR
		 display  with	the given peak.	This may be a good alternative
		 in environments where PQ or HLG input to the display  is  not
		 possible,  and	makes it possible to use HDR displays with mpv
		 regardless of operating system	support	for HDMI HDR metadata.

		 In  such  a  configuration,  we  highly   recommend   setting
		 --tone-mapping	to mobius or even clip.

	      Specifies	 the  algorithm	 used for tone-mapping images onto the
	      target display. This is relevant for both	HDR->SDR conversion as
	      well  as gamut reduction (e.g. playing back BT.2020 content on a
	      standard gamut display).	Valid values are:

	      clip   Hard-clip any out-of-range	values.	Use this when you care
		     about  perfect  color accuracy for	in-range values	at the
		     cost of completely	distorting  out-of-range  values.  Not
		     generally recommended.

	      mobius Generalization  of	Reinhard to a MA<paragraph>bius	trans-
		     form with linear  section.	  Smoothly  maps  out-of-range
		     values  while  retaining contrast and colors for in-range
		     material as much as possible.  Use	 this  when  you  care
		     about  color accuracy more	than detail preservation. This
		     is	somewhere in between clip and reinhard,	 depending  on
		     the value of --tone-mapping-param.

		     Reinhard  tone  mapping algorithm.	Very simple continuous
		     curve.  Preserves overall image brightness	but uses  non-
		     linear  contrast,	which results in flattening of details
		     and degradation in	color accuracy.

	      hable  Similar to	reinhard but preserves both  dark  and	bright
		     details  better  (slightly	 sigmoidal),  at  the  cost of
		     slightly darkening	/ desaturating	everything.  Developed
		     by	 John  Hable for use in	video games. Use this when you
		     care about	detail preservation more than color/brightness
		     accuracy.	This  is  roughly  equivalent  to  --tone-map-
		     ping=reinhard --tone-mapping-param=0.24. If possible, you
		     should  also  enable  --hdr-compute-peak for the best re-

		     Perceptual	tone mapping curve (EETF) specified  in	 ITU-R
		     Report BT.2390.  This is the recommended curve to use for
		     typical HDR-mastered content.  (Default)

	      gamma  Fits a logarithmic	transfer between the tone curves.

	      linear Linearly stretches	the entire reference gamut to (a  lin-
		     ear multiple of) the display.

	      Set tone mapping parameters. By default, this is set to the spe-
	      cial string default, which maps to an algorithm-specific default
	      value.  Ignored  if  the	tone mapping algorithm is not tunable.
	      This affects the following tone mapping algorithms:

	      clip   Specifies an extra	linear coefficient  to	multiply  into
		     the signal	before clipping. Defaults to 1.0.

	      mobius Specifies	the  transition	 point	from  linear to	mobius
		     transform.	Every value below this point is	guaranteed  to
		     be	 mapped	 1:1.  The higher the value, the more accurate
		     the result	will be, at the	cost of	losing bright details.
		     Defaults  to  0.3,	 which	due to the steep initial slope
		     still preserves in-range colors fairly accurately.

		     Specifies the local contrast coefficient at  the  display
		     peak.  Defaults  to 0.5, which means that in-gamut	values
		     will be about half	as bright as when clipping.

	      gamma  Specifies the exponent of the function. Defaults to 1.8.

	      linear Specifies the scale factor	to use while  stretching.  De-
		     faults to 1.0.

	      Upper  limit  for	how much the tone mapping algorithm is allowed
	      to boost the average brightness by over-exposing the image.  The
	      default  value  of  1.0 allows no	additional brightness boost. A
	      value of 2.0 would allow over-exposing by	a factor of 2, and  so
	      on. Raising this setting can help	reveal details that would oth-
	      erwise be	hidden in dark scenes, but raising it  too  high  will
	      make dark	scenes appear unnaturally bright.

	      Compute  the HDR peak and	frame average brightness per-frame in-
	      stead of relying on tagged metadata. These values	 are  averaged
	      over local regions as well as over several frames	to prevent the
	      value from jittering around  too	much.  This  option  basically
	      gives  you  dynamic,  per-scene  tone mapping.  Requires compute
	      shaders, which is	a fairly recent	OpenGL feature,	and will prob-
	      ably  also  perform  horribly on some drivers, so	enable at your
	      own risk.	 The special value auto	(default) will enable HDR peak
	      computation  automatically if compute shaders and	SSBOs are sup-

	      The decay	rate used for the HDR peak  detection  algorithm  (de-
	      fault: 100.0).  This is only relevant when --hdr-compute-peak is
	      enabled. Higher values make the peak decay more slowly,  leading
	      to  more stable values at	the cost of more "eye adaptation"-like
	      effects	(although    this    is	   mitigated	somewhat    by
	      --hdr-scene-threshold).  A  value	 of  1.0 (the lowest possible)
	      disables all averaging, meaning each frame's value is  used  di-
	      rectly  as  measured,  but  doing	 this  is  not recommended for
	      "noisy" sources since it may lead	to excessive flicker. (In sig-
	      nal  theory  terms,  this	controls the time constant "tau" of an
	      IIR low pass filter)

       --hdr-scene-threshold-low=<0.0..100.0>,		   --hdr-scene-thresh-
	      The  lower and upper thresholds (in dB) for a brightness differ-
	      ence to be considered a scene change  (default:  5.5  low,  10.0
	      high). This is only relevant when	--hdr-compute-peak is enabled.
	      Normally,	small fluctuations in the frame	brightness are compen-
	      sated  for  by the peak averaging	mechanism, but for large jumps
	      in the brightness	this can result	in  the	 frame	remaining  too
	      bright  or  too dark for up to several seconds, depending	on the
	      value of --hdr-peak-decay-rate. To  counteract  this,  when  the
	      brightness between the running average and the current frame ex-
	      ceeds the	low threshold, mpv will	make the averaging filter more
	      aggressive,  up  to  the	limit  of the high threshold (at which
	      point the	filter becomes instant).

	      Apply desaturation for highlights	(default: 0.75). The parameter
	      controls	the strength of	the desaturation curve.	A value	of 0.0
	      completely disables it, while a value of 1.0 means  that	overly
	      bright  colors  will tend	towards	white. (This is	not always the
	      case, especially not for highlights that are near	 primary  col-

	      Values  in  between apply	progressively more/less	aggressive de-
	      saturation.  This	setting	helps  prevent	unnaturally  oversatu-
	      rated  colors  for  super-highlights, by (smoothly) turning them
	      into less	saturated (per channel tone  mapped)  colors  instead.
	      This  makes  images  feel	more natural, at the cost of chromatic
	      distortions for out-of-range colors. The default value  of  0.75
	      provides a good balance. Setting this to 0.0 preserves the chro-
	      matic accuracy of	the tone mapping process.

	      This setting controls the	exponent of  the  desaturation	curve,
	      which  controls how bright a color needs to be in	order to start
	      being desaturated. The default of	1.5 provides a reasonable bal-
	      ance.  Decreasing	this exponent makes the	curve more aggressive.

	      If  enabled,  mpv	will mark all clipped/out-of-gamut pixels that
	      exceed a given threshold (currently hard-coded to	101%). The af-
	      fected  pixels  will  be	inverted to make them stand out. Note:
	      This option applies after	the effects  of	 all  of  mpv's	 color
	      space transformation / tone mapping options, so it's a good idea
	      to combine this with --tone-mapping=clip and  use	 --target-prim
	      to  set the gamut	to simulate. For example, --target-prim=bt.709
	      would make mpv highlight all pixels that exceed the gamut	 of  a
	      standard	gamut  (sRGB)  display.	This option also does not work
	      well with	ICC profiles, since the	3DLUTs	are  always  generated
	      against  the  source color space and have	chromatically-accurate
	      clipping built in.

	      If  enabled  (default:  yes),  mpv  will	colorimetrically  clip
	      out-of-gamut  colors  by	desaturating  them  (preserving	luma),
	      rather than  hard-clipping  each	component  individually.  This
	      should  make playback of wide gamut content on typical (standard
	      gamut) monitors look much	more aesthetically pleasing  and  less

	      Load  the	 embedded ICC profile contained	in media files such as
	      PNG images.  (Default: yes). Note	that this  option  only	 works
	      when   also  using  a  display  ICC  profile  (--icc-profile  or
	      --icc-profile-auto), and also requires LittleCMS 2 support.

	      Load an ICC profile and use it to	transform video	RGB to	screen
	      output.	Needs  LittleCMS  2  support  compiled in. This	option
	      overrides	the --target-prim, --target-trc	and --icc-profile-auto

	      Automatically select the ICC display profile currently specified
	      by the display settings of the operating system.

	      NOTE: On Windows,	the default profile must be  an	 ICC  profile.
	      WCS profiles are not supported.

	      Applications  using  libmpv  with	the render API need to provide
	      the ICC profile via MPV_RENDER_PARAM_ICC_PROFILE.

	      Store and	load the 3D LUTs created from the ICC profile in  this
	      directory.   This	 can  be  used to speed	up loading, since Lit-
	      tleCMS 2 can take	a while	to create a 3D LUT.  Note  that	 these
	      files  contain  uncompressed  LUTs.  Their  size	depends	on the
	      --icc-3dlut-size,	and can	be very	big.

	      NOTE: This is not	cleaned	automatically, so  old,	 unused	 cache
	      files may	stick around indefinitely.

	      Specifies	the ICC	intent used for	the color transformation (when
	      using --icc-profile).

	      0	     perceptual

	      1	     relative colorimetric (default)

	      2	     saturation

	      3	     absolute colorimetric

	      Size of the 3D LUT generated from	the ICC	profile	in each	dimen-
	      sion.  Default is	64x64x64. Sizes	may range from 2 to 512.

	      Specifies	 an upper limit	on the target device's contrast	ratio.
	      This is detected automatically from the profile if possible, but
	      for  some	 profiles it might be missing, causing the contrast to
	      be assumed as infinite. As a result,  video  may	appear	darker
	      than intended. This only affects BT.1886 content.	The default of
	      0	means no limit if the detected contrast	is less	 than  100000,
	      and limits to 1000 otherwise. Use	--icc-contrast=inf to preserve
	      the infinite contrast (most likely when using OLED displays).

	      Blend subtitles directly onto upscaled video frames, before  in-
	      terpolation and/or color management (default: no). Enabling this
	      causes subtitles to be affected by --icc-profile,	--target-prim,
	      --target-trc,	 --interpolation,      --gamma-factor	   and
	      --glsl-shaders. It also increases	subtitle performance when  us-
	      ing --interpolation.

	      The  downside of enabling	this is	that it	restricts subtitles to
	      the visible portion of the video,	so you	can't  have  subtitles
	      exist in the black margins below a video (for example).

	      If  video	 is selected, the behavior is similar to yes, but subs
	      are drawn	at the video's native  resolution,  and	 scaled	 along
	      with the video.

		 This  changes	the way	subtitle colors	are handled. Normally,
		 subtitle colors are assumed to	be in sRGB and	color  managed
		 as  such.  Enabling  this  makes them treated as being	in the
		 video's color space instead. This is good if you want	things
		 like  softsubbed ASS signs to match the video colors, but may
		 cause SRT subtitles or	similar	to look	slightly off.

	      Decides what to do if the	input has an alpha component.

		     Blend the frame against a 16x16  gray/white  tiles	 back-
		     ground (default).

	      blend  Blend  the	 frame	against	 the background	color (--back-
		     ground, normally black).

	      yes    Try to create a framebuffer with  alpha  component.  This
		     only  makes sense if the video contains alpha information
		     (which is extremely rare).	May not	be  supported  on  all
		     platforms.	 If  alpha  framebuffers  are  unavailable, it
		     silently falls back on a normal framebuffer. Note that if
		     you set the --fbo-format option to	a non-default value, a
		     format with alpha must be specified, or this won't	 work.
		     Whether this really works depends on the windowing	system
		     and desktop environment.

	      no     Ignore alpha component.

	      Force use	of rectangle textures  (default:  no).	Normally  this
	      shouldn't	 have  any  advantages over normal textures. Note that
	      hardware decoding	overrides this	flag.  Could  be  removed  any

	      Color used to draw parts of the mpv window not covered by	video.
	      See the --sub-color option for how colors	are defined.

       --gpu-tex-pad-x,	--gpu-tex-pad-y
	      Enlarge the video	source textures	by this	many pixels.  For  de-
	      bugging  only  (normally	textures are sized exactly, but	due to
	      hardware decoding	interop	we may have to	deal  with  additional
	      padding,	which  can be tested with these	options). Could	be re-
	      moved any	time.

	      Call glFlush() after rendering a frame and before	attempting  to
	      display it (default: auto). Can fix stuttering in	some cases, in
	      other  cases  probably  causes  it.  The	auto  mode  will  call
	      glFlush()	 only if the renderer is going to wait for a while af-
	      ter rendering, instead of	flipping GL front and backbuffers  im-
	      mediately	(i.e. it doesn't call it in display-sync mode).

	      On OSX this is always deactivated	because	it only	causes perfor-
	      mance problems and other regressions.

	      This mode	is extremely restricted, and  will  disable  most  ex-
	      tended  features.	 That includes high quality scalers and	custom

	      It is intended for hardware that does not	support	FBOs  (includ-
	      ing GLES,	which supports it insufficiently), or to get some more
	      performance out of bad or	old hardware.

	      This mode	is forced automatically	if needed, and this option  is
	      mostly  useful for debugging. The	default	of auto	will enable it
	      automatically if nothing uses features which require FBOs.

	      This option might	be silently removed in the future.

	      Store and	load compiled GLSL shaders  in	this  directory.  Nor-
	      mally,  shader  compilation is very fast,	so this	is usually not
	      needed. It mostly	matters	for GPU	APIs that  require  internally
	      recompiling  shaders  to	other  languages, for example anything
	      based on ANGLE or	Vulkan.	Enabling this can improve startup per-
	      formance on these	platforms.

	      NOTE:  This  is  not cleaned automatically, so old, unused cache
	      files may	stick around indefinitely.

	      Set the list of tags that	should be displayed on	the  terminal.
	      Tags  that  are  in  the list, but are not present in the	played
	      file, will not be	shown.	If a value ends	with *,	all  tags  are
	      matched  by  prefix  (though there is no general globbing). Just
	      passing *	essentially filtering.

	      The default includes a  common  list  of	tags,  call  mpv  with
	      --list-options to	see it.

	      This is a	string list option. See	List Options for details.

	      Maximum A-V sync correction per frame (in	seconds)

	      Gradually	 adjusts  the  A/V  sync based on audio	delay measure-
	      ments.  Specifying --autosync=0, the default, will  cause	 frame
	      timing  to be based entirely on audio delay measurements.	Speci-
	      fying --autosync=1 will do the same, but will subtly change  the
	      A/V  correction  algorithm. An uneven video framerate in a video
	      which plays fine with --no-audio can often be helped by  setting
	      this  to	an integer value greater than 1. The higher the	value,
	      the closer the timing will be to --no-audio.  Try	 --autosync=30
	      to smooth	out problems with sound	drivers	which do not implement
	      a	perfect	audio delay measurement. With this value, if large A/V
	      sync  offsets occur, they	will only take about 1 or 2 seconds to
	      settle out. This delay in	reaction time to  sudden  A/V  offsets
	      should  be  the  only side effect	of turning this	option on, for
	      all sound	drivers.

	      Control how long before video  display  target  time  the	 frame
	      should  be rendered (default: 0.050). If a video frame should be
	      displayed	at a certain time, the VO  will	 start	rendering  the
	      frame  earlier,  and then	will perform a blocking	wait until the
	      display time, and	only then "swap" the  frame  to	 display.  The
	      rendering	 cannot	 start before the previous frame is displayed,
	      so this value is implicitly limited by the video framerate. With
	      normal  video  frame  rates,  the	default	value will ensure that
	      rendering	is always immediately started after the	previous frame
	      was  displayed.  On the other hand, setting a too	high value can
	      reduce responsiveness with low FPS value.

	      For client API users using the render  API  (or  the  deprecated
	      opengl-cb	API), this option is interesting, because you can stop
	      the render API  from  limiting  your  FPS	 (see  mpv_render_con-
	      text_render() documentation).

	      This  applies  only to audio timing modes	(e.g. --video-sync=au-
	      dio). In other modes  (--video-sync=display-...),	 video	timing
	      relies on	vsync blocking,	and this option	is not used.

	      How the player synchronizes audio	and video.

	      If  you  use  this  option,  you	usually	want to	set it to dis-
	      play-resample to enable a	timing mode that tries to not skip  or
	      repeat  frames  when  for	 example playing 24fps video on	a 24Hz

	      The modes	starting with display- try to output video frames com-
	      pletely synchronously to the display, using the detected display
	      vertical refresh rate as a hint how fast	frames	will  be  dis-
	      played  on  average.  These modes	change video speed slightly to
	      match the	display. See --video-sync-...  options for  fine  tun-
	      ing.  The	robustness of this mode	is further reduced by making a
	      some idealized assumptions, which	may not	always apply in	 real-
	      ity.   Behavior  can depend on the VO and	the system's video and
	      audio drivers.  Media files must use  constant  framerate.  Sec-
	      tion-wise	 VFR  might  work  as well with	some container formats
	      (but not e.g. mkv).

	      Under some circumstances,	the player  automatically  reverts  to
	      audio mode for some time or permanently. This can	happen on very
	      low framerate video, or if the framerate cannot be detected.

	      Also in display-sync modes it can	happen that  interruptions  to
	      video  playback (such as toggling	fullscreen mode, or simply re-
	      sizing the window) will skip the video frames that  should  have
	      been  displayed,	while  audio  mode will	display	them after the
	      renderer has resumed (typically resulting	in a short A/V	desync
	      and the video "catching up").

	      Before  mpv 0.30.0, there	was a fallback to audio	mode on	severe
	      A/V desync. This was changed for the sake	 of  not  sporadically
	      stopping.	 Now,  display-desync  does  what  it promises and may
	      desync with audio	by an arbitrary	amount,	until it  is  manually
	      fixed with a seek.

	      These  modes also	require	a vsync	blocked	presentation mode. For
	      OpenGL, this translates to --opengl-swapinterval=1. For  Vulkan,
	      it translates to --vulkan-swap-mode=fifo (or fifo-relaxed).

	      The  modes with desync in	their names do not attempt to keep au-
	      dio/video	in sync. They will slowly (or quickly)	desync,	 until
	      e.g.  the	 next seek happens. These modes	are meant for testing,
	      not serious use.

	      audio  Time video	frames to audio. This is the most robust mode,
		     because  the player doesn't have to assume	anything about
		     how the display behaves. The disadvantage is that it  can
		     lead  to  occasional  frame drops or repeats. If audio is
		     disabled, this uses the system clock. This	is the default

		     Resample  audio  to  match	the video. This	mode will also
		     try to adjust audio speed to compensate for other	drift.
		     (This  means  it will play	the audio at a different speed
		     every once	in a while to reduce the A/V difference.)

		     Resample audio to match the video.	Drop video  frames  to
		     compensate	for drift.

		     Like the previous mode, but no A/V	compensation.

		     Drop  or  repeat  video  frames  to  compensate desyncing
		     video. (Although it should	have the same effects  as  au-
		     dio, the implementation is	very different.)

		     Drop  or repeat audio data	to compensate desyncing	video.
		     See --video-sync-adrop-size. This mode will cause	severe
		     audio  artifacts  if the real monitor refresh rate	is too
		     different from the	reported or  forced  rate.  Since  mpv
		     0.33.0, this acts on entire audio frames, instead of sin-
		     gle samples.

		     Sync video	to display, and	let audio play on its own.

	      desync Sync video	according to system clock, and let audio  play
		     on	its own.

	      Maximum  multiple	for which to try to fit	the video's FPS	to the
	      display's	FPS (default: 5).

	      For example, if this is set to 1,	the video FPS is forced	to  an
	      integer multiple of the display FPS, as long as the speed	change
	      does not exceed the value	set by --video-sync-max-video-change.

	      This is mostly for testing,  and	the  option  may  be  randomly
	      changed in the future without notice.

	      Maximum  speed  difference  in  percent that is applied to video
	      with --video-sync=display-... (default: 1).  Display  sync  mode
	      will  be	disabled  if  the monitor and video refresh way	do not
	      match within the given range. It tries multiples as well:	 play-
	      ing  30  fps video on a 60 Hz screen will	duplicate every	second
	      frame. Playing 24	fps video on a 60 Hz screen will play video in
	      a	2-3-2-3-... pattern.

	      The default settings are not loose enough	to speed up 23.976 fps
	      video to 25 fps. We consider the pitch change too	extreme	to al-
	      low this behavior	by default. Set	this option to a value of 5 to
	      enable it.

	      Note that	in the --video-sync=display-resample mode, audio speed
	      will  additionally be changed by a small amount if necessary for
	      A/V sync.	See --video-sync-max-audio-change.

	      Maximum additional speed difference in percent that  is  applied
	      to  audio	 with  --video-sync=display-...	(default: 0.125). Nor-
	      mally, the player	plays the audio	at the speed of	the video. But
	      if  the difference between audio and video position is too high,
	      e.g. due to drift	or other timing	errors,	 it  will  attempt  to
	      speed  up	 or slow down audio by this additional factor. Too low
	      values could lead	to video frame dropping	or  repeating  if  the
	      A/V  desync cannot be compensated, too high values could lead to
	      chaotic frame dropping due to the	audio "overshooting" and skip-
	      ping multiple video frames before	the sync logic can react.

	      Framerate	 used  when  decoding  from multiple PNG or JPEG files
	      with mf:// (default: 1).

	      Input file type for mf://	(available: jpeg, png, tga,  sgi).  By
	      default, this is guessed from the	file extension.

	      Instead  of playing a file, read its byte	stream and write it to
	      the given	destination file. The destination is overwritten.  Can
	      be useful	to test	network-related	behavior.

	      Set  AVOptions  on  streams  opened with libavformat. Unknown or
	      misspelled options are silently ignored. (They are mentioned  in
	      the  terminal  output  in	 verbose mode, i.e. --v. In general we
	      can't print errors, because other	 options  such	as  e.g.  user
	      agent  are not available with all	protocols, and printing	errors
	      for unknown options would	end up being too noisy.)

	      This is a	key/value list option. See List	Options	for details.

	      (Windows only.)  Set the MMCSS profile for  the  video  renderer
	      thread (default: Playback).

	      (Windows	only.)	 Set process priority for mpv according	to the
	      predefined priorities available under Windows.

	      Possible	values	of  <prio>:  idle|belownormal|normal|abovenor-

		 Using realtime	priority can cause system lockup.

	      Force  the  contents  of the media-title property	to this	value.
	      Useful for scripts which want to set a title, without overriding
	      the user's setting in --title.

	      Load  a  file  and add all of its	tracks.	This is	useful to play
	      different	files together (for example audio from one file, video
	      from  another), or for advanced --lavfi-complex used (like play-
	      ing two video files at the same time).

	      Unlike --sub-files and --audio-files, this includes all  tracks,
	      and  does	 not  cause default stream selection over the "proper"
	      file. This makes it slightly less	intrusive. (In mpv 0.28.0  and
	      before, this was not quite strictly enforced.)

	      This is a	path list option. See List Options for details.

	      CLI/config file only alias for --external-files-append. Each use
	      of this option will add a	new external file.

	      Use an external file as cover  art  while	 playing  audio.  This
	      makes it appear on the track list	and subject to automatic track
	      selection. Options like  --audio-display	control	 whether  such
	      tracks are supposed to be	selected.

	      (The  difference to loading a file with --external-files is that
	      video tracks will	be marked as being pictures, which affects the
	      auto-selection  method.  If the passed file is a video, only the
	      first frame will be decoded and displayed.  Enabling  the	 cover
	      art  track during	playback may show a random frame if the	source
	      file is a	video. Normally	you're not supposed to pass videos  to
	      this option, so this paragraph describes the behavior coinciden-
	      tally resulting from implementation details.)

	      This is a	path list option. See List Options for details.

	      CLI/config file only alias  for  --cover-art-files-append.  Each
	      use of this option will add a new	external file.

	      Whether  to  load	 _external_  cover art automatically (default:
	      fuzzy). Similar to --sub-auto  and  --audio-file-auto.  However,
	      it's  currently limited to picking up a whitelist	of "album art"
	      filenames	(such as  cover.jpg),  so  currently  only  the	 fuzzy
	      choice  is available. In addition, if a video already has	tracks
	      (which are not marked as cover art), external cover art will not
	      be loaded.

	      See  --cover-art-files  for details about	what constitutes cover

	      See --audio-display how to control display of  cover  art	 (this
	      can be used to disable cover art that is part of the file).

	      Automatically load/select	external files (default: yes).

	      If  set  to no, then do not automatically	load external files as
	      specified	by --sub-auto and --audio-file-auto. If	external files
	      are  forcibly  added  (like  with	--sub-files), they will	not be

	      This does	not affect playlist expansion, redirection,  or	 other
	      loading of referenced files like with ordered chapters.

	      Deprecated, use --stream-record, or the dump-cache command.

	      Record  the  current stream to the given target file. The	target
	      file will	always be overwritten without asking.

	      This was deprecated because it isn't very	nice to	use. For  one,
	      seeking  while this is enabled will be directly reflected	in the
	      output, which was	not useful and annoying.

	      Write received/read data from the	demuxer	to  the	 given	output
	      file. The	output file will always	be overwritten without asking.
	      The output format	is determined by the extension of  the	output

	      Switching	 streams  or  seeking during recording might result in
	      recording	being stopped and/or broken files. Use with care.

	      Seeking outside of the demuxer cache will	result in  "skips"  in
	      the  output  file,  but seeking within  the demuxer cache	should
	      not affect recording. One	exception is when you  seek  back  far
	      enough  to  exceed the forward buffering size, in	which case the
	      cache stops actively reading. This will return in	 dropped  data
	      if it's a	live stream.

	      If  this	is set at runtime, the old file	is closed, and the new
	      file is opened. Note that	this will write	only data that is  ap-
	      pended at	the end	of the cache, and the already cached data can-
	      not be written. You can try the dump-cache command as an	alter-

	      External files (--audio-file etc.) are ignored by	this, it works
	      on the "main" file only. Using this  with	 files	using  ordered
	      chapters or EDL files will also not work correctly in general.

	      There  are  some	glitches  with	this  because it uses FFmpeg's
	      libavformat for writing the output file. For example, it's typi-
	      cal  that	 it will only work if the output format	is the same as
	      the input	format.	This is	the case even if  it  works  with  the
	      ffmpeg  tool.  One  reason  for  this is that ffmpeg and its li-
	      braries contain certain hacks and	workarounds for	these  issues,
	      that are unavailable to outside users.

	      This  replaces  --record-file.  It is similar to the ancient/re-
	      moved --stream-capture/-capture options, and provides better be-
	      havior in	most cases (i.e. actually works).

	      Set  a "complex" libavfilter filter, which means a single	filter
	      graph can	take  input  from  multiple  source  audio  and	 video
	      tracks.  The  graph can result in	a single audio or video	output
	      (or both).

	      Currently, the filter graph labels are used to select  the  par-
	      ticipating  input	 tracks	 and audio/video output. The following
	      rules apply:

	      o	A label	of the form aidN selects audio track N as input	 (e.g.

	      o	A label	of the form vidN selects video track N as input.

	      o	A label	named ao will be connected to the audio	output.

	      o	A label	named vo will be connected to the video	output.

	      Each label can be	used only once.	If you want to use e.g.	an au-
	      dio stream for multiple filters, you need	to use the asplit fil-
	      ter.  Multiple  video or audio outputs are not possible, but you
	      can use filters to merge them into one.

	      It's not possible	to change the tracks connected to  the	filter
	      at runtime, unless you explicitly	change the lavfi-complex prop-
	      erty and set new track assignments. When the graph  is  changed,
	      the  track  selection is changed according to the	used labels as

	      Other tracks, as long as they're not connected  to  the  filter,
	      and the corresponding output is not connected to the filter, can
	      still be freely changed with the normal methods.

	      Note that	the normal filter chains (--af,	--vf) are applied  be-
	      tween the	complex	graphs (e.g. ao	label) and the actual output.


		 o --lavfi-complex='[aid1]  [aid2] amix	[ao]' Play audio track
		   1 and 2 at the same time.

		 o --lavfi-complex='[vid1] [vid2]  vstack  [vo]'  Stack	 video
		   track  1  and  2  and play them at the same time. Note that
		   both	tracks need to have the	same width, or filter initial-
		   ization will	fail (you can add scale	filters	before the vs-
		   tack	filter to fix the size).  To load a video  track  from
		   another file, you can use --external-file=other.mkv.

		 o --lavfi-complex='[aid1]  asplit [t1]	[ao] ; [t1] showvolume
		   [t2]	; [vid1] [t2] overlay [vo]' Play audio	track  1,  and
		   overlay  the	 measured  volume  for each speaker over video
		   track 1.

		 o null://   --lavfi-complex='life   [vo]'    A	   libavfilter
		   source-only filter (Conways'	Life Game).

	      See  the	FFmpeg	libavfilter  documentation  for	details	on the
	      available	filters.

	      Codepage for various input metadata (default: utf-8).  This  af-
	      fects  how  file tags, chapter titles, etc. are interpreted. You
	      can for example set this to auto to enable autodetection of  the
	      codepage.	 (This	is not the default because non-UTF-8 codepages
	      are an obscure fringe use-case.)

	      See --sub-codepage option	on how	codepages  are	specified  and
	      further details regarding	autodetection and codepage conversion.
	      (The underlying code is the same.)

	      Conversion is not	applied	to metadata that is  updated  at  run-

	      Run  an  internal	 unit  test.  There are	multiple, and the name
	      specifies	which.

	      The special value	all-simple runs	all tests which	 do  not  need
	      further  setup  (other  arguments	and such). Some	tests may need
	      additional arguments to do anything useful.

	      On success, the player binary exits with exit status  0,	other-
	      wise  it	returns	 with  an  undefined non-0 exit	status (it may
	      crash or abort itself on test failures).

	      This is only enabled if built with  --enable-tests,  and	should
	      normally be enabled and used by developers only.

       Audio  output  drivers are interfaces to	different audio	output facili-
       ties. The syntax	is:

	      Specify a	priority list of audio output drivers to be used.

       If the list has a trailing ',', mpv will	fall back on drivers not  con-
       tained in the list.

	  See  --ao=help  for  a list of compiled-in audio output drivers. The
	  driver --ao=alsa is preferred. --ao=pulse is	preferred  on  systems
	  where	PulseAudio is used. On BSD systems, --ao=oss is	preferred.

       Available audio output drivers are:

       alsa (Linux only)
	      ALSA audio output	driver

	      See ALSA audio output options for	options	specific to this AO.

		 To   get   multichannel/surround   audio,  use	 --audio-chan-
		 nels=auto. The	default	for this option	 is  auto-safe,	 which
		 makes	this  audio output explicitly reject multichannel out-
		 put, as there is no way to detect whether a  certain  channel
		 layout	is actually supported.

		 You  can also try using the upmix plugin.  This setup enables
		 multichannel audio on the default device with	automatic  up-
		 mixing	with shared access, so playing stereo and multichannel
		 audio at the same time	will work as expected.

       oss    OSS audio	output driver

       jack   JACK (Jack Audio Connection Kit) audio output driver.

	      The following global options are supported by this audio output:

		     Connects to the ports with	the given name (default: phys-
		     ical ports).

		     Client name that is passed	to JACK	(default: mpv).	Useful
		     if	you want to have certain connections established auto-

		     Automatically  start  jackd  if  necessary	(default: dis-
		     abled). Note that this tends to be	 unreliable  and  will
		     flood stdout with server messages.

		     Automatically  create  connections	 to  output ports (de-
		     fault: enabled).  When enabled,  the  maximum  number  of
		     output  channels  will be limited to the number of	avail-
		     able output ports.

		     Select the	standard channel  layout  (default:  waveext).
		     JACK  itself  has	no notion of channel layouts (i.e. as-
		     signing which speaker a given channel is supposed to  map
		     to) - it just takes whatever the application outputs, and
		     reroutes it to whatever the user defines. This means  the
		     user  and	the  application are in	charge of dealing with
		     the channel layout. waveext  uses	WAVE_FORMAT_EXTENSIBLE
		     order, which, even	though it was defined by Microsoft, is
		     the standard on many systems.  The	value any  makes  JACK
		     accept  whatever  comes  from the audio filter chain, re-
		     gardless of channel layout	and without  reordering.  This
		     mode  is  probably	not very useful, other than for	debug-
		     ging or when used with fixed setups.

       coreaudio (Mac OS X only)
	      Native Mac OS X audio output driver  using  AudioUnits  and  the
	      CoreAudio	sound server.

	      Automatically redirects to coreaudio_exclusive when playing com-
	      pressed formats.

	      The following global options are supported by this audio output:

		     Change the	physical format	to  one	 similar  to  the  re-
		     quested  audio  format (default: no). This	has the	advan-
		     tage that multichannel audio output will  actually	 work.
		     The  disadvantage	is that	it will	change the system-wide
		     audio settings. This is equivalent	to changing the	Format
		     setting  in  the  Audio  Devices dialog in	the Audio MIDI
		     Setup utility. Note that this does	 not  affect  the  se-
		     lected speaker setup.

		     Try  to  pass through AC3/DTS data	as PCM.	This is	useful
		     for drivers which do not report AC3 support. It  converts
		     the AC3 data to float, and	assumes	the driver will	do the
		     inverse conversion, which means a	typical	 A/V  receiver
		     will  pick	it up as compressed IEC	framed AC3 stream, ig-
		     noring that it's marked as	PCM. This disables normal  AC3
		     passthrough (even if the device reports it	as supported).
		     Use with extreme care.

       coreaudio_exclusive (Mac	OS X only)
	      Native Mac OS X audio output driver using	direct	device	access
	      and exclusive mode (bypasses the sound server).

       openal OpenAL audio output driver. This is broken and does not work.

		     Specify  the number of audio buffers to use. Lower	values
		     are better	for lower CPU usage. Default: 4.

		     Specify the number	of complete samples to	use  for  each
		     buffer. Higher values are better for lower	CPU usage. De-
		     fault: 8192.

		     Enable OpenAL Soft's direct channel extension when	avail-
		     able  to avoid tinting the	sound with ambisonics or HRTF.
		     Channels are dropped when when they are not available  as
		     downmixing	will be	disabled. Default: no.

       pulse  PulseAudio audio output driver

	      The following global options are supported by this audio output:

		     Specify  the  host	 to use. An empty <host> string	uses a
		     local connection, "localhost" uses	network	transfer (most
		     likely not	what you want).

		     Set the audio buffer size in milliseconds.	A higher value
		     buffers more data,	and has	a lower	probability of	buffer
		     underruns.	 A  smaller value makes	the audio stream react
		     faster, e.g. to playback speed changes.

		     Enable hacks to workaround	PulseAudio  timing  bugs  (de-
		     fault:  no).  If  enabled,	 mpv will do elaborate latency
		     calculations  on  its  own.  If  disabled,	 it  will  use
		     PulseAudio	automatically updated timing information. Dis-
		     abling this might help with e.g. networked	audio or  some
		     plugins,  while  enabling	it  might help in some unknown
		     situations	(it used to be required	to get	good  behavior
		     on	old PulseAudio versions).

		     If	you have stuttering video when using pulse, try	to en-
		     able this option. (Or try to update PulseAudio.)

		     Allow mpv to use PulseAudio even if the sink is suspended
		     (default: no).  Can be useful if PulseAudio is running as
		     a bridge to jack and mpv has its sink-input  set  to  the
		     one jack is using.

       sdl    SDL  1.2+	 audio output driver. Should work on any platform sup-
	      ported by	SDL 1.2, but may require the SDL_AUDIODRIVER  environ-
	      ment variable to be set appropriately for	your system.

		 This driver is	for compatibility with extremely foreign envi-
		 ronments, such	as systems where none of the other drivers are

	      The following global options are supported by this audio output:

		     Sets  the audio buffer length in seconds. Is used only as
		     a hint by the sound system. Playing a file	with  -v  will
		     show  the	requested  and	obtained  exact	buffer size. A
		     value of 0	selects	the sound system default.

       null   Produces no audio	output but maintains video playback speed. You
	      can use --ao=null	--ao-null-untimed for benchmarking.

	      The following global options are supported by this audio output:

		     Do	 not  simulate	timing of a perfect audio device. This
		     means audio decoding will go as fast as possible, instead
		     of	timing it to the system	clock.

		     Simulated buffer length in	seconds.

		     Simulated chunk size in samples.

		     Simulated	audio playback speed as	a multiplier. Usually,
		     a real audio device will not go exactly as	 fast  as  the
		     system clock. It will deviate just	a little, and this op-
		     tion helps	to simulate this.

		     Simulated device latency. This is additional to EOF.

		     Simulate broken audio drivers, which always add the fixed
		     device latency to the reported audio playback position.

		     Simulate broken audio drivers, which don't	report latency

		     If	not empty, this	is a , separated list of channel  lay-
		     outs the AO allows. This can be used to test channel lay-
		     out selection.

		     Force the audio output format the AO will accept. If  un-
		     set accepts any.

       pcm    Raw PCM/WAVE file	writer audio output

	      The following global options are supported by this audio output:

		     Include  or  do not include the WAVE header (default: in-
		     cluded). When not included, raw PCM will be generated.

		     Write the sound to	<filename> instead of the default  au-
		     diodump.wav.  If  no-waveheader is	specified, the default
		     is	audiodump.pcm.

		     Append to the file, instead of overwriting	it. Always use
		     this with the no-waveheader option	- with waveheader it's
		     broken, because it	will write a WAVE  header  every  time
		     the file is opened.

       wasapi Audio output to the Windows Audio	Session	API.

       Video  output  drivers are interfaces to	different video	output facili-
       ties. The syntax	is:

	      Specify a	priority list of video output drivers to be used.

       If the list has a trailing ,, mpv will fall back	on  drivers  not  con-
       tained in the list.

	  See --vo=help	for a list of compiled-in video	output drivers.

	  The recommended output driver	is --vo=gpu, which is the default. All
	  other	drivers	are for	compatibility or special purposes. If the  de-
	  fault	 does not work,	it will	fallback to other drivers (in the same
	  order	as listed by --vo=help).

       Available video output drivers are:

       xv (X11 only)
	      Uses the XVideo extension	to  enable  hardware-accelerated  dis-
	      play.  This is the most compatible VO on X, but may be low-qual-
	      ity, and has issues with OSD and subtitle	display.

		 This driver is	for compatibility with old systems.

	      The following global options are supported by this video output:

		     Select a specific XVideo adapter (check xvinfo results).

		     Select a specific XVideo port.

		     Select the	source from which the color key	is taken  (de-
		     fault: cur).

		     cur    The	 default  takes	the color key currently	set in

		     use    Use	but do not set the color key from mpv (use the
			    --colorkey option to change	it).

		     set    Same as use	but also sets the supplied color key.

		     Sets the color key	drawing	method (default: man).

		     none   Disables color-keying.

		     man    Draw  the  color  key manually (reduces flicker in
			    some cases).

		     bg	    Set	the color key as window	background.

		     auto   Let	Xv draw	the color key.

		     Changes the color key to an RGB  value  of	 your  choice.
		     0x000000 is black and 0xffffff is white.

		     Number  of	 image	buffers	 to use	for the	internal ring-
		     buffer (default: 2).  Increasing this will	use more  mem-
		     ory,  but	might  help  with  the X server	not responding
		     quickly enough if video FPS is close to  or  higher  than
		     the display refresh rate.

       x11 (X11	only)
	      Shared  memory video output driver without hardware acceleration
	      that works whenever X11 is present.

	      Since mpv	0.30.0,	you may	need to	use --profile=sw-fast  to  get
	      decent performance.

		 This is a fallback only, and should not be normally used.

       vdpau (X11 only)
	      Uses  the	 VDPAU interface to display and	optionally also	decode
	      video.  Hardware decoding	is used	with --hwdec=vdpau.

		 Earlier versions of  mpv  (and	 MPlayer,  mplayer2)  provided
		 sub-options   to  tune	 vdpau	post-processing,  like	deint,
		 sharpen,  denoise,  chroma-deint,  pullup,  hqscaling.	 These
		 sub-options  are  deprecated,	and you	should use the vdpaupp
		 video filter instead.

	      The following global options are supported by this video output:

		     (Deprecated. See note about vdpaupp.)

		     For positive values, apply	a sharpening algorithm to  the
		     video, for	negative values	a blurring algorithm (default:

		     (Deprecated. See note about vdpaupp.)

		     Apply a noise reduction algorithm to the video  (default:
		     0;	no noise reduction).

		     (Deprecated. See note about vdpaupp.)

		     Makes  temporal  deinterlacers  operate  both on luma and
		     chroma (default).	Use no-chroma-deint to solely use luma
		     and  speed	 up  advanced  deinterlacing. Useful with slow
		     video memory.

		     (Deprecated. See note about vdpaupp.)

		     Try to apply inverse telecine, needs motion adaptive tem-
		     poral deinterlacing.

		     (Deprecated. See note about vdpaupp.)

		     0	    Use	default	VDPAU scaling (default).

		     1-9    Apply  high	 quality  VDPAU	scaling	(needs capable

		     Override autodetected display  refresh  rate  value  (the
		     value  is	needed	for  framedrop to allow	video playback
		     rates  higher  than  display  refresh   rate,   and   for
		     vsync-aware  frame	 timing	 adjustments). Default 0 means
		     use autodetected value. A positive	value  is  interpreted
		     as	 a  refresh  rate in Hz	and overrides the autodetected
		     value. A negative value disables  all  timing  adjustment
		     and framedrop logic.

		     NVIDIA's  current	VDPAU  implementation behaves somewhat
		     differently under a compositing window manager  and  does
		     not give accurate frame timing information. With this op-
		     tion enabled, the player tries to detect whether  a  com-
		     positing  window  manager	is active. If one is detected,
		     the player	disables timing	adjustments as if the user had
		     specified fps=-1 (as they would be	based on incorrect in-
		     put). This	means timing is	somewhat  less	accurate  than
		     without  compositing, but with the	composited mode	behav-
		     ior of the	NVIDIA driver, there is	no hard	playback speed
		     limit  even  without  the	disabled logic.	Enabled	by de-
		     fault, use	--vo-vdpau-composite-detect=no to disable.

	      --vo-vdpau-queuetime-windowed=<number> and queuetime-fs=<number>
		     Use VDPAU's presentation queue functionality to queue fu-
		     ture  video  frame	changes	at most	this many milliseconds
		     in	advance	(default: 50).	See below for  additional  in-

		     Allocate  this  many  output  surfaces  to	 display video
		     frames (default: 3). See below  for  additional  informa-

		     Set  the VDPAU presentation queue background color, which
		     in	practice is the	colorkey used  if  VDPAU  operates  in
		     overlay  mode (default: #020507, some shade of black). If
		     the alpha component of this value is 0, the default VDPAU
		     colorkey will be used instead (which is usually green).

		     Never  accept  RGBA  input.  This means mpv will insert a
		     filter to convert to a YUV	format before  the  VO.	 Some-
		     times  useful  to	force availability of certain YUV-only
		     features, like video equalizer or deinterlacing.

	      Using the	VDPAU frame queuing functionality  controlled  by  the
	      queuetime	 options  makes	mpv's frame flip timing	less sensitive
	      to system	CPU load and allows mpv	to  start  decoding  the  next
	      frame(s) slightly	earlier, which can reduce jitter caused	by in-
	      dividual slow-to-decode frames.  However,	 the  NVIDIA  graphics
	      drivers  can  make  other	 window	 behavior such as window moves
	      choppy if	VDPAU is using the blit	queue (mainly happens  if  you
	      have  the	 composite  extension enabled) and this	feature	is ac-
	      tive. If this happens on your system and it bothers you then you
	      can  set	the  queuetime value to	0 to disable this feature. The
	      settings to use in windowed and fullscreen mode are separate be-
	      cause  there  should be no reason	to disable this	for fullscreen
	      mode (as the driver issue	should not affect the video itself).

	      You can queue more frames	ahead by increasing the	queuetime val-
	      ues  and the output_surfaces count (to ensure enough surfaces to
	      buffer video for a certain time ahead you	need at	least as  many
	      surfaces	as  the	 video has frames during that time, plus two).
	      This could help make video smoother  in  some  cases.  The  main
	      downsides	 are increased video RAM requirements for the surfaces
	      and laggier display response to user commands  (display  changes
	      only  become visible some	time after they're queued). The	graph-
	      ics driver implementation	may also have limits on	the length  of
	      maximum queuing time or number of	queued surfaces	that work well
	      or at all.

       direct3d	(Windows only)
	      Video output driver that uses the	Direct3D interface.

		 This driver is	for compatibility with systems that don't pro-
		 vide  proper OpenGL drivers, and where	ANGLE does not perform

	      The following global options are supported by this video output:

		     Normally texture sizes are	always	aligned	 to  16.  With
		     this  option  enabled, the	video texture will always have
		     exactly the same size as the video	itself.

	      Debug options. These might be incorrect, might be	removed	in the
	      future,  might  crash,  might cause slow downs, etc. Contact the
	      developers if you	actually need any of these for performance  or
	      proper operation.

		     Always  force  textures to	power of 2, even if the	device
		     reports non-power-of-2 texture sizes as supported.

		     Only affects operation  with  shaders/texturing  enabled,
		     and (E)OSD.  Possible values:

		     default (default)
			    ture for locking. If the driver  supports  D3DDEV-
			    used directly.

			    Use	D3DPOOL_DEFAULT. (Like default,	but never  use
			    a shadow-texture.)

			    ture for locking. (Like default, but always	 force
			    the	shadow-texture.)


			    ture for locking.

		     Use D3DSWAPEFFECT_DISCARD,	which might be faster.	 Might
		     be	slower too, as it must(?) clear	every frame.

		     Always resize the backbuffer to window size.

       gpu    General  purpose,	 customizable,	GPU-accelerated	 video	output
	      driver. It supports extended scaling methods,  dithering,	 color
	      management, custom shaders, HDR, and more.

	      See GPU renderer options for options specific to this VO.

	      By default, it tries to use fast and fail-safe settings. Use the
	      gpu-hq profile to	use this driver	 with  defaults	 set  to  high
	      quality  rendering.  The	profile	 can  be  applied  with	--pro-
	      file=gpu-hq and its contents  can	 be  viewed  with  --show-pro-

	      This  VO	abstracts over several possible	graphics APIs and win-
	      dowing contexts, which can be influenced using the --gpu-api and
	      --gpu-context options.

	      Hardware	decoding  over OpenGL-interop is supported to some de-
	      gree. Note that in this mode, some  corner  case	might  not  be
	      gracefully handled, and color space conversion and chroma	upsam-
	      pling is generally in the	hand of	the hardware decoder APIs.

	      gpu makes	use of FBOs by default.	Sometimes you can achieve bet-
	      ter  quality  or performance by changing the --fbo-format	option
	      to rgb16f, rgb32f	or rgb.	Known problems include Mesa/Intel  not
	      accepting	 rgb16,	 Mesa  sometimes not being compiled with float
	      texture support, and some	OS X setups being very slow with rgb16
	      but fast with rgb32f. If you have	problems, you can also try en-
	      abling the --gpu-dumb-mode=yes option.

       sdl    SDL 2.0+ Render video output driver, depending on	system with or
	      without hardware acceleration. Should work on all	platforms sup-
	      ported by	SDL 2.0.  For tuning, refer to your copy of  the  file

		 This driver is	for compatibility with systems that don't pro-
		 vide proper graphics drivers.

	      The following global options are supported by this video output:

		     Continue even if a	software renderer is detected.

		     Instruct SDL to switch the	monitor	video mode when	 going

       vaapi  Intel  VA	 API video output driver with support for hardware de-
	      coding. Note that	there is absolutely no	reason	to  use	 this,
	      other  than  compatibility.  This	is low quality,	and has	issues
	      with OSD.

		 This driver is	for compatibility with crappy systems. You can
		 use vaapi hardware decoding with --vo=gpu too.

	      The following global options are supported by this video output:


			    Driver default (mpv	default	as well).

		     fast   Fast, but low quality.

		     hq	    Unspecified	driver dependent high-quality scaling,

		     nla    non-linear anamorphic scaling

		     Select deinterlacing  algorithm.  Note  that  by  default
		     deinterlacing  is	initially  always off, and needs to be
		     enabled with the d	key (default  key  binding  for	 cycle

		     This  option  doesn't  apply if libva supports video post
		     processing	 (vpp).	  In  this  case,  the	 default   for
		     deint-mode	is no, and enabling deinterlacing via user in-
		     teraction using the methods mentioned above actually  in-
		     serts the vavpp video filter. If vpp is not actually sup-
		     ported with the libva backend in use, you	can  use  this
		     option to forcibly	enable VO based	deinterlacing.

		     no	    Don't   allow  deinterlacing  (default  for	 newer

			    Show only first field.

		     bob    bob	deinterlacing (default for older libva).

		     If	enabled, then the OSD is rendered at video  resolution
		     and  scaled  to  display  resolution. By default, this is
		     disabled, and the OSD is rendered at  display  resolution
		     if	the driver supports it.

       null   Produces no video	output.	Useful for benchmarking.

	      Usually, it's better to disable video with --no-video instead.

	      The following global options are supported by this video output:

		     Simulate  display	FPS. This artificially limits how many
		     frames the	VO accepts per second.

       caca   Color ASCII art video output driver that works on	 a  text  con-

		 This driver is	a joke.

       tct    Color  Unicode art video output driver that works	on a text con-
	      sole.  By	default	depends	on support of  true  color  by	modern
	      terminals	 to  display  the  images  at  full  color  range, but
	      256-colors outout	is also	supported (see below). On  Windows  it
	      requires an ansi terminal	such as	mintty.

	      Since  mpv  0.30.0, you may need to use --profile=sw-fast	to get
	      decent performance.

	      Note: the	TCT image output is not	synchronized with other	termi-
	      nal  output  from	 mpv, which can	lead to	broken images. The op-
	      tions --no-terminal or --really-quiet can	help with that.

		     Select how	to write the pixels to the terminal.

			    Uses unicode LOWER HALF BLOCK character to achieve
			    higher vertical resolution.	(Default.)

		     plain  Uses  spaces.  Causes  vertical resolution to drop
			    twofolds, but in theory works in more places.

	      --vo-tct-width=<width> --vo-tct-height=<height>
		     Assume the	terminal has  the  specified  character	 width
		     and/or  height.   These  default to 80x25 if the terminal
		     size cannot be determined.

	      --vo-tct-256=<yes|no> (default: no)
		     Use 256 colors - for terminals which don't	 support  true

       sixel  Graphical	output for the terminal, using sixels. Tested with ml-
	      term and xterm.

	      Note: the	Sixel image output is not synchronized with other ter-
	      minal  output from mpv, which can	lead to	broken images. The op-
	      tion --really-quiet can help with	that, and is recommended.

	      You may need to use --profile=sw-fast to get decent performance.

	      Note: at the time	of writing, xterm does not enable sixel	by de-
	      fault  -	launching it as	xterm -ti 340 is one way to enable it.
	      Also, xterm does not display images bigger than 1000x1000	pixels
	      by default.

	      To  render  and  align sixel images correctly, mpv needs to know
	      the terminal size	both in	cells and in  pixels.  By  default  it
	      tries  to	use values which the terminal reports, however,	due to
	      differences between terminals this  is  an  error-prone  process
	      which cannot be automated	with certainty - some terminals	report
	      the size in pixels including the padding	-  e.g.	 xterm,	 while
	      others  report the actual	usable number of pixels	- like mlterm.
	      Additionally, they may behave differently	when maximized	or  in
	      fullscreen,  and	mpv  cannot  detect  this state	using standard

	      Sixel size and alignment options:

	      --vo-sixel-cols=<columns>, --vo-sixel-rows=<rows>	(default: 0)
		     Specify the terminal size in character  cells,  otherwise
		     (0)  read	it  from  the terminal,	or fall	back to	80x25.
		     Note that mpv doesn't use the the last row	with sixel be-
		     cause this	seems to result	in scrolling.

	      --vo-sixel-width=<width>,	 --vo-sixel-height=<height>  (default:
		     Specify the available size	in pixels, otherwise (0)  read
		     it	from the terminal, or fall back	to 320x240. Other than
		     excluding the last	 line,	the  height  is	 also  further
		     rounded  down  to	a multiple of 6	(sixel unit height) to
		     avoid overflowing below the designated size.

	      --vo-sixel-left=<col>, --vo-sixel-top=<row> (default: 0)
		     Specify the position in character cells where  the	 image
		     starts  (1	 is  the  first	column or row).	If 0 (default)
		     then try to automatically determine it according  to  the
		     other values and the image	aspect ratio and zoom.

	      --vo-sixel-pad-x=<pad_x>,	--vo-sixel-pad-y=<pad_y> (default: -1)
		     Used only when mpv	reads the size in pixels from the ter-
		     minal.  Specify the number	 of  padding  pixels  (on  one
		     side)  which  are included	at the size which the terminal
		     reports. If -1 (default) then the	number	of  pixels  is
		     rounded down to a multiple	of number of cells (per	axis),
		     to	take into account padding at the report	 -  this  only
		     works  correctly  when  the  overall  padding per axis is
		     smaller than the number of	cells.

	      --vo-sixel-exit-clear=<yes|no> (default: yes)
		     Whether or	not to clear the terminal on quit. When	set to
		     no	 -  the	 last  sixel image stays on screen after quit,
		     with the cursor following it.

	      Sixel image quality options:

		     Selects the dither	algorithm which	libsixel should	apply.
		     Can be one	of the below list as per libsixel's documenta-

		     auto (Default)
			    Let	libsixel choose	the dithering method.

		     none   Don't diffuse

			    Diffuse with Bill Atkinson's method.

		     fs	    Diffuse with Floyd-Steinberg method

		     jajuni Diffuse with Jarvis, Judice	& Ninke	method

		     stucki Diffuse with Stucki's method

		     burkes Diffuse with Burkes' method

			    Positionally stable	arithmetic dither

		     xor    Positionally stable	arithmetic xor based dither

	      --vo-sixel-fixedpalette=<yes|no> (default: yes)
		     Use libsixel's built-in static palette using the XTERM256
		     profile  for  dither.  Fixed  palette uses	256 colors for
		     dithering.	Note that using	no (at the  time  of  writing)
		     will slow down xterm.

	      --vo-sixel-reqcolors=<colors> (default: 256)
		     Has  no effect with fixed palette.	Set up libsixel	to use
		     required number of	colors for dynamic palette. This value
		     depends  on the terminal emulator as well.	Xterm supports
		     256 colors. Can set this to a lower value for faster per-

	      --vo-sixel-threshold=<threshold> (default: -1)
		     Has  no  effect with fixed	palette. Defines the threshold
		     to	change the palette - as	percentage of  the  number  of
		     colors,  e.g.  20 will change the palette when the	number
		     of	colors changed by 20%. It's a simple measure to	reduce
		     the  number of palette changes, because it	can be slow in
		     some terminals (xterm). The default (-1)  will  choose  a
		     palette on	every frame and	will have better quality.

       image  Output  each  frame into an image	file in	the current directory.
	      Each file	takes the frame	number padded with  leading  zeros  as

	      The following global options are supported by this video output:

		     Select the	image file format.

		     jpg    JPEG files,	extension .jpg.	(Default.)

		     jpeg   JPEG files,	extension .jpeg.

		     png    PNG	files.

		     webp   WebP files.

		     PNG  compression  factor  (speed  vs. file	size tradeoff)
		     (default: 7)

		     Filter applied prior to PNG compression (0	=  none;  1  =
		     sub; 2 = up; 3 = average; 4 = Paeth; 5 = mixed) (default:

		     JPEG quality factor (default: 90)

		     JPEG optimization factor (default:	100)

		     Enable writing lossless WebP files	(default: no)

		     WebP quality (default: 75)

		     WebP compression factor (default: 4)

		     Specify the directory to save the	image  files  to  (de-
		     fault: ./).

       libmpv For use with libmpv direct embedding. As a special case, on OS X
	      it is used like a	normal VO  within  mpv	(cocoa-cb).  Otherwise
	      useless in any other contexts.  (See <mpv/render.h>.)

	      This also	supports many of the options the gpu VO	has, depending
	      on the backend.

       rpi (Raspberry Pi)
	      Native video output on the Raspberry Pi using the	MMAL API.

	      This is deprecated. Use --vo=gpu instead,	which is  the  default
	      and  provides the	same functionality. The	rpi VO will be removed
	      in mpv 0.23.0. Its functionality was folded into --vo=gpu, which
	      now  uses	 RPI  hardware	decoding  by treating it as a hardware
	      overlay (without applying	GL filtering). Also to be  changed  in
	      0.23.0:  the --fs	flag will be reset to "no" by default (like on
	      the other	platforms).

	      The following deprecated global options are  supported  by  this
	      video output:

		     Select  the  display  number  on  which the video overlay
		     should be shown (default: 0).

		     Select the	dispmanx layer	on  which  the	video  overlay
		     should  be	 shown (default: -10). Note that mpv will also
		     use the 2 layers above the	selected layer,	to handle  the
		     window  background	 and  OSD. Actual video	rendering will
		     happen on the layer above the selected layer.

		     Whether to	render a black	background  behind  the	 video
		     (default:	no).  Normally it's better to kill the console
		     framebuffer instead, which	gives better performance.

		     Enabled by	default. If disabled with no, no OSD layer  is
		     created.  This also means there will be no	subtitles ren-

       drm (Direct Rendering Manager)
	      Video output driver using	Kernel Mode Setting / Direct Rendering
	      Manager.	 Should	 be  used  when	 one  doesn't  want to install
	      full-blown graphical environment (e.g. no	X). Does  not  support
	      hardware	acceleration  (if you need this, check the drm backend
	      for gpu VO).

	      Since mpv	0.30.0,	you may	need to	use --profile=sw-fast  to  get
	      decent performance.

	      The following global options are supported by this video output:

		     Select  the connector to use (usually this	is a monitor.)
		     If	<name> is empty	or auto, mpv renders the output	on the
		     first  available  connector.  Use --drm-connector=help to
		     get a list	of available connectors. When  using  multiple
		     graphic  cards,  use  the <gpu_number> argument to	disam-
		     biguate.  (default: empty)

		     Mode to use (resolution and frame rate).	Possible  val-

			    Use	 the  preferred	mode for the screen on the se-
			    lected connector. (default)

			    Use	the mode with the highest resolution available
			    on the selected connector.

		     N	    Select mode	by index.

			    Specify  mode by width, height, and	optionally re-
			    fresh rate.	 In case several modes match,  selects
			    the	 mode  that  comes  first  in the EDID list of

		     Use --drm-mode=help to get	a list of available modes  for
		     all active	connectors.

		     Toggle  use  of atomic modesetting. Mostly	useful for de-

		     no	    Use	legacy modesetting.

		     auto   Use	atomic modesetting,  falling  back  to	legacy
			    modesetting	if not available. (default)

		     Note:   Only  affects  gpu-context=drm.  vo=drm  supports
		     legacy modesetting	only.

		     Select the	DRM plane to which video and OSD is drawn  to,
		     under normal circumstances. The plane can be specified as
		     primary, which will pick  the  first  applicable  primary
		     plane;  overlay,  which  will  pick  the first applicable
		     overlay plane; or by index. The index is zero based,  and
		     related to	the CRTC.  (default: primary)

		     When  using  this	option with the	drmprime-drm hwdec in-
		     terop, only the OSD is rendered to	this plane.

		     Select the	DRM plane to  use  for	video  with  the  drm-
		     prime-drm	hwdec interop (used by e.g. the	rkmpp hwdec on
		     RockChip SoCs, and	v4l2 hwdec:s on	various	other  SoC:s).
		     The  plane	 is  unused otherwise. This option accepts the
		     same values as --drm-draw-plane. (default:	overlay)

		     To	be able	to successfully	play 4K	video on various  SoCs
		     you might need to set --drm-draw-plane=overlay --drm-drm-
		     prime-video-plane=primary	and  setting   --drm-draw-sur-
		     face-size=1920x1080, to render the	OSD at a lower resolu-
		     tion (the video when handled by the hwdec will be on  the
		     drmprime-video plane and at full 4K resolution)

		     Select  the  DRM  format to use (default: xrgb8888). This
		     allows you	to choose the  bit  depth  of  the  DRM	 mode.
		     xrgb8888  is your usual 24	bit per	pixel/8	bits per chan-
		     nel  packed  RGB  format  with   8	  bits	 of   padding.
		     xrgb2101010  is  a	 packed	 30 bits per pixel/10 bits per
		     channel packed RGB	format with 2 bits of padding.

		     There are cases when xrgb2101010 will work	with  the  drm
		     VO,  but not with the drm backend for the gpu VO. This is
		     because with the gpu VO, in addition to requiring support
		     in	 your  DRM driver, requires support for	xrgb2101010 in
		     your EGL driver

		     Sets the size of the surface used on the draw plane.  The
		     surface will then be upscaled to the current screen reso-
		     lution. This option can be	useful when used together with
		     the drmprime-drm hwdec interop at high resolutions, as it
		     allows scaling the	draw plane (which in  this  case  only
		     handles the OSD) down to a	size the GPU can handle.

		     When used without the drmprime-drm	hwdec interop this op-
		     tion will just cause the video to get rendered at a  dif-
		     ferent resolution and then	scaled to screen size.

		     Note:  this option	is only	available with DRM atomic sup-
		     port.  (default: display resolution)

       mediacodec_embed	(Android)
	      Renders	IMGFMT_MEDIACODEC   frames   directly	to   an	   an-
	      droid.view.Surface.   Requires  --hwdec=mediacodec  for hardware
	      decoding,	    along     with	--vo=mediacodec_embed	   and

	      Since  this video	output driver uses native decoding and render-
	      ing  routines,  many  of	mpv's  features	 (subtitle  rendering,
	      OSD/OSC, video filters, etc) are not available with this driver.

	      To  use hardware decoding	with --vo=gpu instead, use --hwdec=me-
	      diacodec-copy along with --gpu-context=android.

       wlshm (Wayland only)
	      Shared memory video output driver	without	hardware  acceleration
	      that works whenever Wayland is present.

	      Since  mpv  0.30.0, you may need to use --profile=sw-fast	to get
	      decent performance.

		 This is a fallback only, and should not be normally used.

       Audio filters allow you to modify the audio stream and its  properties.
       The syntax is:

	      Setup a chain of audio filters. See --vf (VIDEO FILTERS) for the
	      full syntax.

	  To get a full	list of	available audio	filters, see --af=help.

	  Also,	keep in	mind that most actual filters are  available  via  the
	  lavfi	 wrapper, which	gives you access to most of libavfilter's fil-
	  ters.	This includes all filters that have been ported	 from  MPlayer
	  to libavfilter.

	  The  --vf  description describes how libavfilter can be used and how
	  to workaround	deprecated mpv filters.

       See --vf	group of options for  info  on	how  --af-defaults,  --af-add,
       --af-pre, --af-del, --af-clr, and possibly others work.

       Available filters are:

	      Encode  multi-channel audio to AC-3 at runtime using libavcodec.
	      Supports 16-bit native-endian input format, maximum 6  channels.
	      The  output is big-endian	when outputting	a raw AC-3 stream, na-
	      tive-endian when outputting to S/PDIF. If	the input sample  rate
	      is  not  48  kHz,	44.1 kHz or 32 kHz, it will be resampled to 48

		     Output raw	AC-3  stream  if  no,  output  to  S/PDIF  for
		     pass-through if yes (default).

		     The bitrate use for the AC-3 stream. Set it to 384	to get
		     384 kbps.

		     The default is 640. Some receivers	might not be  able  to
		     handle this.

		     Valid  values: 32,	40, 48,	56, 64,	80, 96,	112, 128, 160,
		     192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512,	576, 640.

		     The special value auto selects a default bitrate based on
		     the input channel number:

		     1ch    96

		     2ch    192

		     3ch    224

		     4ch    384

		     5ch    448

		     6ch    448

		     If	 the  input  channel  number is	less than <minch>, the
		     filter will detach	itself (default: 3).

		     Select  the  libavcodec  encoder  used.  Currently,  this
		     should  be	 an AC-3 encoder, and using another codec will
		     fail horribly.

	      Does not do any format conversion	itself.	Rather,	it  may	 cause
	      the  filter system to insert necessary conversion	filters	before
	      or after this filter if needed. It is primarily useful for  con-
	      trolling	the  audio format going	into other filters. To specify
	      the format for audio output,  see	 --audio-format,  --audio-sam-
	      plerate,	and  --audio-channels.	This filter is able to force a
	      particular format, whereas --audio-* may be overridden by	the ao
	      based on output compatibility.

	      All  parameters  are  optional.  The first 3 parameters restrict
	      what the filter accepts as input.	They will therefore cause con-
	      version filters to be inserted before this one.  The out-	param-
	      eters tell the filters or	audio outputs  following  this	filter
	      how  to  interpret the data without actually doing a conversion.
	      Setting these will probably just break things unless you	really
	      know  you	 want this for some reason, such as testing or dealing
	      with broken media.

		     Force conversion to  this	format.	 Use  --af=format=for-
		     mat=help to get a list of valid formats.

		     Force  conversion	to a specific sample rate. The rate is
		     an	integer, 48000 for example.

		     Force mixing to a	specific  channel  layout.  See	 --au-
		     dio-channels option for possible values.



	      NOTE:  this filter used to be named force. The old format	filter
	      used to do conversion itself, unlike this	 one  which  lets  the
	      filter system handle the conversion.

	      Scales  audio tempo without altering pitch, optionally synced to
	      playback speed (default).

	      This works by playing 'stride' ms	of audio at normal speed  then
	      consuming	 'stride*scale'	 ms  of	 input	audio.	It  pieces the
	      strides together by blending 'overlap'%  of  stride  with	 audio
	      following	 the  previous	stride.	It optionally performs a short
	      statistical analysis on the next 'search'	ms of audio to	deter-
	      mine the best overlap position.

		     Nominal  amount to	scale tempo. Scales this amount	in ad-
		     dition to speed. (default:	1.0)

		     Length in milliseconds to output each stride. Too high of
		     a value will cause	noticeable skips at high scale amounts
		     and an echo at low	scale amounts. Very  low  values  will
		     alter  pitch.  Increasing improves	performance. (default:

		     Percentage	of stride to overlap. Decreasing improves per-
		     formance.	(default: .20)

		     Length  in	 milliseconds to search	for best overlap posi-
		     tion. Decreasing improves performance  greatly.  On  slow
		     systems,  you  will  probably  want to set	this very low.
		     (default: 14)

		     Set response to speed change.

		     tempo  Scale tempo	in sync	with speed (default).

		     pitch  Reverses effect of filter.	Scales	pitch  without
			    altering  tempo.   Add  this to your input.conf to
			    step by musical semi-tones:

			       [ multiply speed	0.9438743126816935
			       ] multiply speed	1.059463094352953

			       Loses sync with video.

		     both   Scale both tempo and pitch.

		     none   Ignore speed changes.


		 mpv --af=scaletempo --speed=1.2 media.ogg
			Would play media at 1.2x normal	speed, with  audio  at
			normal pitch. Changing playback	speed would change au-
			dio tempo to match.

		 mpv  --af=scaletempo=scale=1.2:speed=none   --speed=1.2   me-
			Would  play  media at 1.2x normal speed, with audio at
			normal pitch, but changing playback speed  would  have
			no effect on audio tempo.

		 mpv --af=scaletempo=stride=30:overlap=.50:search=10 media.ogg
			Would tweak the	quality	and performance	parameters.

		 mpv --af=scaletempo=scale=1.2:speed=pitch audio.ogg
			Would  play  media at 1.2x normal speed, with audio at
			normal pitch.  Changing	playback  speed	 would	change
			pitch, leaving audio tempo at 1.2x.

	      Scales  audio  tempo  without  altering pitch.  The algorithm is
	      ported from chromium and	uses  the  Waveform  Similarity	 Over-
	      lap-and-add  (WSOLA) method.  It seems to	achieve	a higher audio
	      quality than scaletempo and rubberband.

	      By default, the search-interval and window-size parameters  have
	      the same values as in chromium.

		     Mute  audio  if the playback speed	is below <speed>. (de-
		     fault: 0.25)

		     Mute audio	if the playback	speed  is  above  <speed>  and
		     <speed> !=	0. (default: 4.0)

		     Length  in	 milliseconds to search	for best overlap posi-
		     tion. (default: 30)

		     Length in milliseconds  of	 the  overlap-and-add  window.
		     (default: 20)

	      High  quality  pitch  correction with librubberband. This	can be
	      used in place of scaletempo, and will be used  to	 adjust	 audio
	      pitch  when  playing at speed different from normal. It can also
	      be used to adjust	audio pitch without changing playback speed.

		     Sets the pitch scaling factor. Frequencies	are multiplied
		     by	this value.

	      This filter has a	number of additional sub-options. You can list
	      them with	mpv --af=rubberband=help. This will also show the  de-
	      fault  values  for  each	option.	The options are	not documented
	      here, because they are merely passed to librubberband.  Look  at
	      the  librubberband documentation to learn	what each option does:
	      (The  mapping  of	the mpv	rubberband filter sub-option names and
	      values to	those of librubberband follows a simple	pattern:  "Op-
	      tion" + Name + Value.)

	      This filter supports the following af-command commands:

		     Set  the  <pitch-scale> argument dynamically. This	can be
		     used to change the	playback pitch at runtime.  Note  that
		     speed  is	controlled  using the standard speed property,
		     not af-command.

	      multiply-pitch <factor>
		     Multiply the current value	of <pitch-scale>  dynamically.
		     For example: 0.5 to go down by an octave, 1.5 to go up by
		     a perfect fifth.  If  you	want  to  go  up  or  down  by
		     semi-tones, use 1.059463094352953 and 0.9438743126816935

	      Filter audio using FFmpeg's libavfilter.

		     Libavfilter  graph.  See lavfi video filter for details -
		     the graph syntax is the same.

			Don't forget to	quote libavfilter graphs as  described
			in the lavfi video filter section.


		     Determine	PTS  based  on	sample count (default: no). If
		     this is enabled, the player  won't	 rely  on  libavfilter
		     passing  through PTS accurately.  Instead,	it pass	a sam-
		     ple count as PTS to libavfilter, and compute the PTS used
		     by	 mpv  based on that and	the input PTS. This helps with
		     filters which output a  recomputed	 PTS  instead  of  the
		     original  PTS (including filters which require the	PTS to
		     start at 0). mpv normally expects filters	to  not	 touch
		     the  PTS  (or only	to the extent of changing frame	bound-
		     aries), so	this is	not the	default, but it	will be	needed
		     to	 use broken filters. In	practice, these	broken filters
		     will either cause slow A/V	desync over  time  (with  some
		     files), or	break playback completely if you seek or start
		     playback from the middle of a file.

       drop   This filter drops	or repeats audio frames	to adapt  to  playback
	      speed.  It  always operates on full audio	frames,	because	it was
	      made to handle SPDIF (compressed	audio  passthrough).  This  is
	      used  automatically  if the --video-sync=display-adrop option is
	      used. Do not use this filter (or the given option); they are ex-
	      tremely low quality.

       Video  filters allow you	to modify the video stream and its properties.
       All of the information described	in this	section	applies	to audio  fil-
       ters as well (generally using the prefix	--af instead of	--vf).

       The exact syntax	is:

	      Setup  a	chain  of  video  filters. This	consists on the	filter
	      name, and	an option list of parameters after =.  The  parameters
	      are separated by : (not ,, as that starts	a new filter entry).

	      Before  the  filter  name, a label can be	specified with @name:,
	      where name is an arbitrary user-given name, which	identifies the
	      filter.  This is only needed if you want to toggle the filter at

	      A	! before the filter name means the filter is disabled  by  de-
	      fault.  It will be skipped on filter creation. This is also use-
	      ful for runtime filter toggling.

	      See the vf command (and toggle sub-command) for further explana-
	      tions and	examples.

	      The general filter entry syntax is:
		 ["@"<label-name>":"] ["!"] <filter-name> [ "="	<filter-param-
		 eter-list> ]

	      or for the special "toggle" syntax (see vf command):

	      and the filter-parameter-list:
		 <filter-parameter> | <filter-parameter>  ","  <filter-parame-

	      and filter-parameter:
		 ( <param-name>	"=" <param-value> ) | <param-value>

	      param-value  can	further	 be  quoted in [ / ] in	case the value
	      contains characters like , or =. This is used in particular with
	      the  lavfi  filter,  which  uses	a  very	 similar syntax	as mpv
	      (MPlayer historically) to	specify	filters	and their parameters.

       Filters can be manipulated at run time. You can use  @  labels  as  de-
       scribed	above  in  combination with the	vf command (see	COMMAND	INTER-
       FACE) to	get more control over this. Initially disabled filters with  !
       are useful for this as well.

       You can also set	defaults for each filter. The defaults are applied be-
       fore the	normal filter parameters. This is deprecated and never	worked
       for the libavfilter bridge.

	      Set defaults for each filter. (Deprecated. --af-defaults is dep-
	      recated as well.)

	  To get a full	list of	available video	 filters,  see	--vf=help  and	.

	  Also,	 keep  in  mind	that most actual filters are available via the
	  lavfi	wrapper, which gives you access	to most	of libavfilter's  fil-
	  ters.	 This  includes	all filters that have been ported from MPlayer
	  to libavfilter.

	  Most builtin filters are deprecated in  some	ways,  unless  they're
	  only	available  in  mpv  (such  as  filters	which  deal  with  mpv
	  specifics, or	which are implemented in mpv only).

	  If a filter is not builtin, the lavfi-bridge will  be	 automatically
	  tried. This bridge does not support help output, and does not	verify
	  parameters before the	filter is actually used. Although the mpv syn-
	  tax  is  rather  similar to libavfilter's, it's not the same.	(Which
	  means	not everything accepted	by vf_lavfi's graph option will	be ac-
	  cepted by --vf.)

	  You  can  also prefix	the filter name	with lavfi- to force the wrap-
	  per.	This is	helpful	if the filter name collides with a  deprecated
	  mpv  builtin	filter.	 For  example  --vf=lavfi-scale=args would use
	  libavfilter's	scale filter over mpv's	deprecated builtin one.

       Video filters are managed in lists. There are a few commands to	manage
       the filter list.

	      Appends the filter given as arguments to the filter list.

	      Appends the filter given as arguments to the filter list.	(Pass-
	      ing multiple filters is currently	 still	possible,  but	depre-

	      Prepends	the  filters  given  as	 arguments to the filter list.
	      (Passing multiple	filters	is currently still possible, but  dep-

	      Deletes the filter from the list.	The filter can be either given
	      the way it was added (filter name	and its	full  argument	list),
	      or by label (prefixed with @). Matching of filters works as fol-
	      lows: if either of the compared filters has a  label  set,  only
	      the  labels  are	compared. If none of the filters have a	label,
	      the filter name, arguments, and  argument	 order	are  compared.
	      (Passing	multiple filters is currently still possible, but dep-

	      Add the given filter to the list if it was not present  yet,  or
	      remove  it  from the list	if it was present. Matching of filters
	      works as described in --vf-remove.

	      Sort of like --vf-remove,	but also accepts an index number.  In-
	      dex  numbers start at 0, negative	numbers	address	the end	of the
	      list (-1 is the last). Deprecated.

	      Completely empties the filter list.

       With filters that support it, you can access parameters by their	name.

	      Prints the parameter names and parameter value ranges for	a par-
	      ticular filter.

       Available mpv-only filters are:

	      Applies  video parameter overrides, with optional	conversion. By
	      default, this overrides the video's parameters  without  conver-
	      sion  (except for	the fmt	parameter), but	can be made to perform
	      an appropriate conversion	with convert=yes  for  parameters  for
	      which conversion is supported.

	      <fmt>  Image  format  name,  e.g.	 rgb15,	bgr24, 420p, etc. (de-
		     fault: don't change).

		     This filter always	performs conversion to the given  for-

			For   a	 list  of  available  formats,	use  --vf=for-

		     Force conversion of color parameters (default: no).

		     If	this is	disabled (the default),	 the  only  conversion
		     that  is possibly performed is format conversion if <fmt>
		     is	set. All other	parameters  (like  <colormatrix>)  are
		     forced  without conversion. This mode is typically	useful
		     when files	have been incorrectly tagged.

		     If	this is	enabled, libswscale or zimg is used if any  of
		     the parameters mismatch. zimg is used of the input/output
		     image formats are supported by mpv's zimg wrapper,	and if
		     --sws-allow-zimg=yes is used. Both	libraries may not sup-
		     port all kinds of conversions. This typically results  in
		     silent  incorrect	conversion.  zimg  has in many cases a
		     better chance of performing the conversion	correctly.

		     In	both cases, the	color parameters are set on the	output
		     stage  of	the  image format conversion (if fmt was set).
		     The difference is that with convert=no, the color parame-
		     ters are not passed on to the converter.

		     If	 input	and output video parameters are	the same, con-
		     version is	always skipped.


			mpv test.mkv --vf=format:colormatrix=ycgco
			       Results in incorrect colors  (if	 test.mkv  was
			       tagged correctly).

			mpv test.mkv --vf=format:colormatrix=ycgco:convert=yes
			       Results in true conversion to  ycgco,  assuming
			       the  renderer  supports	it  (--vo=gpu normally
			       does). You can add --vo=xv to force a VO	 which
			       definitely  does	 not  support it, which	should
			       show incorrect colors as	confirmation.

			       Using --sws-allow-zimg=no (or disabling zimg at
			       build  time)  will use libswscale, which	cannot
			       perform this conversion as of this writing.

		     Controls the YUV to RGB color space conversion when play-
		     ing  video. There are various standards. Normally,	BT.601
		     should be used for	SD video, and  BT.709  for  HD	video.
		     (This  is	done  by default.) Using incorrect color space
		     results in	slightly under or over saturated  and  shifted

		     These  options  are not always supported. Different video
		     outputs provide varying degrees of	support. The  gpu  and
		     vdpau  video  output  drivers usually offer full support.
		     The xv output can set the color space if the system video
		     driver  supports it, but not input	and output levels. The
		     scale video filter	can configure color  space  and	 input
		     levels,  but  only	 if  the  output format	is RGB (if the
		     video output driver supports RGB output,  you  can	 force
		     this with -vf scale,format=rgba).

		     If	this option is set to auto (which is the default), the
		     video's color space flag will be used. If	that  flag  is
		     unset,  the  color	 space will be selected	automatically.
		     This is done using	a simple heuristic  that  attempts  to
		     distinguish  SD and HD video. If the video	is larger than
		     1279x576 pixels, BT.709  (HD)  will  be  used;  otherwise
		     BT.601 (SD) is selected.

		     Available color spaces are:

		     auto   automatic selection	(default)

		     bt.601 ITU-R BT.601 (SD)

		     bt.709 ITU-R BT.709 (HD)

			    ITU-R BT.2020 non-constant luminance system

			    ITU-R BT.2020 constant luminance system


		     YUV  color	 levels	 used with YUV to RGB conversion. This
		     option is only necessary when playing broken files	 which
		     do	 not follow standard color levels or which are flagged
		     wrong. If the video does not specify its color range,  it
		     is	assumed	to be limited range.

		     The same limitations as with <colormatrix>	apply.

		     Available color ranges are:

		     auto   automatic  selection (normally limited range) (de-

			    limited range (16-235 for luma, 16-240 for chroma)

		     full   full range (0-255 for both luma and	chroma)

		     RGB primaries the source file was encoded with.  Normally
		     this  should  be set in the file header, but when playing
		     broken or mistagged files this can	be  used  to  override
		     the setting.

		     This  option  only	affects	video output drivers that per-
		     form color	management, for	 example  gpu  with  the  tar-
		     get-prim or icc-profile suboptions	set.

		     If	this option is set to auto (which is the default), the
		     video's primaries flag will be used. If that flag is  un-
		     set,  the color space will	be selected automatically, us-
		     ing the following heuristics: If the <colormatrix>	is set
		     or	 determined  as	 BT.2020  or BT.709, the corresponding
		     primaries are used. Otherwise, if the video height	is ex-
		     actly  576	(PAL), BT.601-625 is used. If it's exactly 480
		     or	486 (NTSC), BT.601-525 is used.	If the	video  resolu-
		     tion is anything else, BT.709 is used.

		     Available primaries are:

		     auto   automatic selection	(default)

			    ITU-R BT.601 (SD) 525-line systems (NTSC, SMPTE-C)

			    ITU-R BT.601 (SD) 625-line systems (PAL, SECAM)

		     bt.709 ITU-R BT.709 (HD) (same primaries as sRGB)

			    ITU-R BT.2020 (UHD)

		     apple  Apple RGB

		     adobe  Adobe RGB (1998)

			    ProPhoto RGB (ROMM)

			    CIE	1931 RGB

		     dci-p3 DCI-P3 (Digital Cinema)

			    Panasonic V-Gamut primaries

		     Gamma function the	source file was	encoded	with. Normally
		     this should be set	in the file header, but	 when  playing
		     broken  or	 mistagged  files this can be used to override
		     the setting.

		     This option only affects video output drivers  that  per-
		     form color	management.

		     If	this option is set to auto (which is the default), the
		     gamma will	be set to BT.1886 for YCbCr content, sRGB  for
		     RGB content and Linear for	XYZ content.

		     Available gamma functions are:

		     auto   automatic selection	(default)

			    ITU-R     BT.1886	  (EOTF	   corresponding    to

		     srgb   IEC	61966-2-4 (sRGB)

		     linear Linear light

			    Pure power curve (gamma 1.8)

			    Pure power curve (gamma 2.0)

			    Pure power curve (gamma 2.2)

			    Pure power curve (gamma 2.4)

			    Pure power curve (gamma 2.6)

			    Pure power curve (gamma 2.8)

			    ProPhoto RGB (ROMM)	curve

		     pq	    ITU-R BT.2100 PQ (Perceptual quantizer) curve

		     hlg    ITU-R BT.2100 HLG (Hybrid Log-gamma) curve

		     v-log  Panasonic V-Log transfer curve

		     s-log1 Sony S-Log1	transfer curve

		     s-log2 Sony S-Log2	transfer curve

		     Reference peak illumination for the video file,  relative
		     to	the signal's reference white level. This is mostly in-
		     teresting for HDR,	but it can also	be used	tone  map  SDR
		     content  to  simulate  a different	exposure. Normally in-
		     ferred from tags such as MaxCLL or	mastering metadata.

		     The default of 0.0	will default to	the  source's  nominal
		     peak luminance.

			Light  type of the scene. This is mostly correctly in-
			ferred based on	the gamma function, but	it can be use-
			ful  to	 override this when viewing raw	camera footage
			(e.g. V-Log), which is normally	scene-referred instead
			of display-referred.

			Available light	types are:

		     auto   Automatic selection	(default)

			    Display-referred light (most content)

		     hlg    Scene-referred  using  the HLG OOTF	(e.g. HLG con-

			    Scene-referred using the BT709+BT1886 interaction

			    Scene-referred using a pure	power OOTF (gamma=1.2)

		     Set the stereo mode the video is assumed  to  be  encoded
		     in.  Use --vf format:stereo-in=help to list all available
		     modes. Check with the stereo3d  filter  documentation  to
		     see what the names	mean.

		     Set  the  stereo  mode  the video should be displayed as.
		     Takes the same values as the stereo-in option.

		     Set the rotation the video	is assumed to be encoded  with
		     in	degrees.  The special value -1 uses the	input format.

	      <w>, <h>
		     If	 not  0, perform conversion to the given size. Ignored
		     if	convert=yes is not set.

	      <dw>, <dh>
		     Set the display size. Note	that setting the display  size
		     such  that	the video is scaled in both directions instead
		     of	just changing the aspect ratio	is  an	implementation
		     detail, and might change later.

	      <dar>  Set  the display aspect ratio of the video	frame. This is
		     a float, but values such as  [16:9]  can  be  passed  too
		     ([...]  for quoting to prevent the	option parser from in-
		     terpreting	the : character).

		     Force a specific scaler backend, if applicable. This is a
		     debug option and could go away any	time.

		     Set the kind of alpha the video uses. Undefined effect if
		     the image format has no alpha channel (could  be  ignored
		     or	 cause	an  error,  depending  on  how	mpv  internals
		     evolve). Setting this may or may not cause	downstream im-
		     age  processing  to treat alpha differently, depending on
		     support. With convert and zimg used,  this	 will  convert
		     the  alpha.   libswscale and other	FFmpeg components com-
		     pletely ignore this.

	      Filter video using FFmpeg's libavfilter.

		     The libavfilter graph string. The filter must have	a sin-
		     gle video input pad and a single video output pad.

		     See	for syntax and
		     available filters.

			If you want to use the full filter  syntax  with  this
			option,	you have to quote the filter graph in order to
			prevent	mpv's syntax and the filter graph syntax  from
			clashing. To prevent a quoting and escaping mess, con-
			sider using --lavfi-complex if you  know  which	 video
			track  you  want to use	from the input file. (There is
			only one video track for nearly	all video  files  any-


			       gradfun	filter	with nonsense parameters, fol-
			       lowed by	a vflip	filter.	(This demonstrates how
			       libavfilter takes a graph and not just a	single
			       filter.)	The filter graph string	is quoted with
			       [ and ].	This requires no additional quoting or
			       escaping	with some shells  (like	 bash),	 while
			       others  (like  zsh) require additional "	quotes
			       around the option string.

			       Same as before, but uses	quoting	that should be
			       safe  with  all shells. The outer ' quotes make
			       sure that the  shell  does  not	remove	the  "
			       quotes needed by	mpv.

			       Same as before, but uses	named  parameters  for

		     If	 libavfilter  inserts filters for pixel	format conver-
		     sion, this	option gives the flags which should be	passed
		     to	 libswscale.  This  option  is	numeric	 and  takes  a
		     bit-wise combination of SWS_ flags.


	      <o>    Set  AVFilterGraph	options. These should be documented by


			       forces a	specific threading configuration.

	      Moves subtitle rendering to an arbitrary	point  in  the	filter
	      chain,  or  force	 subtitle rendering in the video filter	as op-
	      posed to using video output OSD support.

		     Adds a black band at the bottom of	the frame. The SSA/ASS
		     renderer  can  place subtitles there (with	--sub-use-mar-

		     Black band	on the top for toptitles  (with	--sub-use-mar-


			Moves  sub  rendering  before the eq filter. This will
			put both subtitle colors and video under the influence
			of the video equalizer settings.

	      Loads a VapourSynth filter script. This is intended for streamed
	      processing: mpv actually provides	a source  filter,  instead  of
	      using a native VapourSynth video source. The mpv source will an-
	      swer frame requests only within a	small window  of  frames  (the
	      size  of	this window is controlled with the buffered-frames pa-
	      rameter),	and requests outside of	that will  return  errors.  As
	      such,  you  can't	use the	full power of VapourSynth, but you can
	      use certain filters.

		 Do not	use this filter, unless	you have expert	 knowledge  in
		 VapourSynth,  and know	how to fix bugs	in the mpv VapourSynth
		 wrapper code.

	      If you just want to play video generated	by  VapourSynth	 (i.e.
	      using  a	native	VapourSynth  video source), it's better	to use
	      vspipe and a pipe	or FIFO	to feed	the video to mpv. The same ap-
	      plies  if	 the  filter  script requires random frame access (see
	      buffered-frames parameter).

	      file   Filename of the script source. Currently, this is	always
		     a python script (.vpy in VapourSynth convention).

		     The variable video_in is set to the mpv video source, and
		     it	is expected that the script reads video	from it. (Oth-
		     erwise,  mpv  will	 decode	no video, and the video	packet
		     queue will	overflow, eventually  leading  to  only	 audio
		     playing, or worse.)

		     The  filter  graph	created	by the script is also expected
		     to	pass through timestamps	 using	the  _DurationNum  and
		     _DurationDen frame	properties.

		     See  the end of the option	list for a full	list of	script
		     variables defined by mpv.


			    import vapoursynth as vs
			    core = vs.get_core()
			    core.std.AddBorders(video_in, 10, 10, 20, 20).set_output()

			The script will	be reloaded on	every  seek.  This  is
			done to	reset the filter properly on discontinuities.

		     Maximum  number  of  decoded  video frames	that should be
		     buffered before the filter	(default: 4).  This  specifies
		     the  maximum  number  of frames the script	can request in
		     backward direction.

		     E.g. if buffered-frames=5,	and the	script just  requested
		     frame  15,	 it can	still request frame 10,	but frame 9 is
		     not available anymore.  If	it requests frame 30, mpv will
		     decode 15 more frames, and	keep only frames 25-30.

		     The  only	reason	why this buffer	exists is to serve the
		     random access requests the	VapourSynth filter can make.

		     The VapourSynth API has a getFrameAsync  function,	 which
		     takes  an	absolute frame number. Source filters must re-
		     spond to all requests. For	example, a source  filter  can
		     request  frame  2432,  and	 then frame 3.	Source filters
		     typically implement this by pre-indexing the entire file.

		     mpv on the	other hand is stream oriented,	and  does  not
		     allow  filters  to	 seek. (And it would not make sense to
		     allow it, because it would	ruin performance.) Filters get
		     frames sequentially in playback direction,	and cannot re-
		     quest them	out of order.

		     To	compensate for this mismatch, mpv allows the filter to
		     access  frames  within  a certain window. buffered-frames
		     controls the size of this window. Most  VapourSynth  fil-
		     ters  happen  to  work  with  this,  because mpv requests
		     frames sequentially increasing from it, and most  filters
		     only require frames "close" to the	requested frame.

		     If	 the  filter  requests a frame that has	a higher frame
		     number than the highest buffered frame, new  frames  will
		     be	 decoded  until	the requested frame number is reached.
		     Excessive frames will be flushed out  in  a  FIFO	manner
		     (there are	only at	most buffered-frames in	this buffer).

		     If	 the  filter  requests	a frame	that has a lower frame
		     number than the lowest buffered frame, the	request	cannot
		     be	 satisfied,  and  an  error is returned	to the filter.
		     This kind of  error  is  not  supposed  to	 happen	 in  a
		     "proper"  VapourSynth  environment.  What exactly happens
		     depends on	the filters involved.

		     Increasing	this  buffer  will  not	 improve  performance.
		     Rather,  it  will waste memory, and slow down seeks (when
		     enough frames to fill the buffer need to  be  decoded  at
		     once).  It	 is only needed	to prevent the error described
		     in	the previous paragraph.

		     How many frames a filter requires depends on  filter  im-
		     plementation  details,  and  mpv has no way of knowing. A
		     scale filter might	need only 1  frame,  an	 interpolation
		     filter  may require a small number	of frames, and the Re-
		     verse filter will require an infinite number of frames.

		     If	 you  want  reliable  operation	 to  the  full	extend
		     VapourSynth is capable, use vspipe.

		     The  actual number	of buffered frames also	depends	on the
		     value of the concurrent-frames  option.  Currently,  both
		     option  values  are  multiplied  to  get the final	buffer

		     Number of frames that should be  requested	 in  parallel.
		     The  level	 of  concurrency depends on the	filter and how
		     quickly mpv can decode video to  feed  the	 filter.  This
		     value  should  probably  be proportional to the number of
		     cores on your machine. Most time, making it  higher  than
		     the number	of cores can actually make it slower.

		     Technically,  mpv will call the VapourSynth getFrameAsync
		     function in a loop,  until	 there	are  concurrent-frames
		     frames  that  have	 not  been returned by the filter yet.
		     This also assumes that the	rest of	the mpv	 filter	 chain
		     reads  the	 output	 of  the  vapoursynth  filter  quickly
		     enough. (For example, if you pause	the player,  filtering
		     will  stop	 very  soon,  because  the filtered frames are
		     waiting in	a queue.)

		     Actual concurrency	depends	on many	other factors.

		     By	default, this uses the special value auto, which  sets
		     the option	to the number of detected logical CPU cores.

	      The following .vpy script	variables are defined by mpv:

		     The  mpv video source as vapoursynth clip.	Note that this
		     has an incorrect (very high) length set,  which  confuses
		     many  filters. This is necessary, because the true	number
		     of	frames is unknown. You can use the Trim	filter on  the
		     clip to reduce the	length.

	      video_in_dw, video_in_dh
		     Display  size  of	the video. Can be different from video
		     size if the video does not	use square pixels (e.g.	DVD).

		     FPS value as reported by file headers. This value can  be
		     wrong  or	completely broken (e.g.	0 or NaN). Even	if the
		     value is correct, if another filter changes the real  FPS
		     (by  dropping  or	inserting  frames),  the value of this
		     variable will not be useful. Note that the	--fps  command
		     line option overrides this	value.

		     Useful for	some filters which insist on having a FPS.

		     Refresh rate of the current display. Note that this value
		     can be 0.

       vavpp  VA-API video post	processing. Requires  the  system  to  support
	      VA-API,  i.e. Linux/BSD only. Works with --vo=vaapi and --vo=gpu
	      only.  Currently deinterlaces. This filter is automatically  in-
	      serted if	deinterlacing is requested (either using the d key, by
	      default mapped to	the command cycle deinterlace, or the  --dein-
	      terlace option).

		     Select the	deinterlacing algorithm.

		     no	    Don't perform deinterlacing.

		     auto   Select  the	 best  quality deinterlacing algorithm
			    (default). This goes by the	order of  the  options
			    as	documented, with motion-compensated being con-
			    sidered best quality.

			    Show only first field.

		     bob    bob	deinterlacing.

		     weave, motion-adaptive, motion-compensated
			    Advanced deinterlacing algorithms.	Whether	 these
			    actually work depends on the GPU hardware, the GPU
			    drivers, driver bugs, and mpv bugs.


		     no	    Deinterlace	all frames (default).

		     yes    Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.


		     no	    Use	the API	as it was interpreted  by  older  Mesa
			    drivers.  While this interpretation	was more obvi-
			    ous	and inuitive, it was apparently	wrong, and not
			    shared by Intel driver developers.

		     yes    Use	 Intel	interpretation	of surface forward and
			    backwards references (default). This is what Intel
			    drivers  and  newer	 Mesa  drivers expect. Matters
			    only for the advanced deinterlacing	algorithms.

	      VDPAU video post processing. Works with --vo=vdpau and  --vo=gpu
	      only.  This filter is automatically inserted if deinterlacing is
	      requested	(either	using the d key, by default mapped to the com-
	      mand  cycle  deinterlace,	or the --deinterlace option). When en-
	      abling deinterlacing, it is always preferred over	software dein-
	      terlacer	filters	 if  the  vdpau	VO is used, and	also if	gpu is
	      used and hardware	decoding was activated at least	once (i.e. vd-
	      pau was loaded).

		     For  positive values, apply a sharpening algorithm	to the
		     video, for	negative values	a blurring algorithm (default:

		     Apply  a noise reduction algorithm	to the video (default:
		     0;	no noise reduction).

		     Whether deinterlacing is enabled (default:	 no).  If  en-
		     abled, it will use	the mode selected with deint-mode.

		     Select deinterlacing mode (default: temporal).

		     Note  that	 there's currently a mechanism that allows the
		     vdpau VO to change	the deint-mode	of  auto-inserted  vd-
		     paupp  filters.  To avoid confusion, it's recommended not
		     to	use the	--vo=vdpau suboptions related to filtering.

			    Show only first field.

		     bob    Bob	deinterlacing.

			    Motion-adaptive temporal deinterlacing.  May  lead
			    to A/V desync with slow video hardware and/or high

			    Motion-adaptive   temporal	 deinterlacing	  with
			    edge-guided	  spatial  interpolation.  Needs  fast
			    video hardware.

		     Makes temporal deinterlacers operate  both	 on  luma  and
		     chroma (default).	Use no-chroma-deint to solely use luma
		     and speed up advanced  deinterlacing.  Useful  with  slow
		     video memory.

	      pullup Try to apply inverse telecine, needs motion adaptive tem-
		     poral deinterlacing.

		     If	yes, only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced (de-
		     fault: no).


		     0	    Use	default	VDPAU scaling (default).

		     1-9    Apply  high	 quality  VDPAU	scaling	(needs capable

	      Direct3D 11 video	 post  processing.  Currently  requires	 D3D11
	      hardware decoding	for use.

		     Whether deinterlacing is enabled (default:	no).

		     If	yes, only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced (de-
		     fault: no).

		     Tries to select a video processor with the	given process-
		     ing  capability.	If a video processor supports multiple
		     capabilities, it is not clear which algorithm is actually
		     selected.	none  always  falls  back.  On most if not all
		     hardware, this option will	probably do nothing, because a
		     video processor usually supports all modes	or none.

	      Compute  video  frame fingerprints and provide them as metadata.
	      Actually,	it currently barely deserved to	be called fingerprint,
	      because  it  does	 not  compute "proper" fingerprints, only tiny
	      downscaled images	(but which can be used to compute image	hashes
	      or for similarity	matching).

	      The  main	purpose	of this	filter is to support the skip-logo.lua
	      script.  If this script is dropped, or mpv ever gains a  way  to
	      load  user-defined filters (other	than VapourSynth), this	filter
	      will be removed. Due to the "special" nature of this filter,  it
	      will be removed without warning.

	      The  intended  way  to read from the filter is using vf-metadata
	      (also see	clear-on-query filter parameter).  The	property  will
	      return a list of key/value pairs as follows:

		 fp0.pts = 1.2345
		 fp0.hex = 1234abcdef...bcde
		 fp1.pts = 1.4567
		 fp1.hex = abcdef1234...6789
		 fpN.pts = ...
		 fpN.hex = ...
		 type =	gray-hex-16x16

	      Each  fp<N>  entry  is  for a frame. The pts entry specifies the
	      timestamp	of the frame (within the filter	chain; in simple cases
	      this is the same as the display timestamp). The hex field	is the
	      hex encoded fingerprint, whose size and meaning  depend  on  the
	      type  filter  option.   The type field has the same value	as the
	      option the filter	was created with.

	      This returns the frames that were	filtered since the last	 query
	      of  the  property. If clear-on-query=no was set, a query doesn't
	      reset the	list of	frames.	In both	cases, a maximum of 10	frames
	      is  returned.  If	 there	are more frames, the oldest frames are
	      discarded. Frames	are returned in	filter order.

	      (This doesn't return a structured	list for the per-frame details
	      because the internals of the vf-metadata mechanism suck. The re-
	      turned format may	change in the future.)

	      This filter uses zimg for	speed and  profit.  However,  it  will
	      fallback	to  libswscale in a number of situations: lesser pixel
	      formats, unaligned data pointers or strides, or if zimg fails to
	      initialize  for unknown reasons. In these	cases, the filter will
	      use more CPU. Also, it will output different  fingerprints,  be-
	      cause libswscale cannot perform the full range expansion we nor-
	      mally request from zimg. As a consequence,  the  filter  may  be
	      slower and not work correctly in random situations.

		     What fingerprint to compute. Available types are:

			    grayscale, 8 bit, 8x8 size

			    grayscale, 8 bit, 16x16 size (default)

		     Both types	simply remove all colors, downscale the	image,
		     concatenate all pixel values to a byte array, and convert
		     the array to a hex	string.

		     Clear  the	 list of frame fingerprints if the vf-metadata
		     property for this filter is queried (default: yes).  This
		     requires  some  care  by the user.	Some types of accesses
		     might query the filter multiple  times,  which  leads  to
		     lost frames.

		     Print  computed  fingerprints  the	the terminal (default:
		     no). This is mostly for testing and such. Scripts	should
		     use  vf-metadata to read information from this filter in-

	      Convert video to RGB using the  OpenGL  renderer	normally  used
	      with  --vo=gpu.  This  requires that the EGL implementation sup-
	      ports off-screen rendering on the	default	display. (This is  the
	      case with	Mesa.)


	      w=<pixels>, h=<pixels>
		     Size  of  the output in pixels (default: 0). If not posi-
		     tive, this	will use the size of the first filtered	 input

		 This  is highly experimental. Performance is bad, and it will
		 not work everywhere in	the first place. Some features are not

		 This  does  not do OSD	rendering. If you see OSD, then	it has
		 been rendered by the VO backend. (Subtitles are  rendered  by
		 the gpu filter, if possible.)

		 If  you use this with encoding	mode, keep in mind that	encod-
		 ing mode will convert the RGB filter's	output back to yuv420p
		 in software, using the	configured software scaler. Using zimg
		 might improve this, but in any	case it	might go against  your
		 goals when using this filter.

		 Do not	use this with --vo=gpu.	It will	apply filtering	twice,
		 since most --vo=gpu options are  unconditionally  applied  to
		 the gpu filter. There is no mechanism in mpv to prevent this.

       You can encode files from one format/codec to another using this	facil-

	      Enables encoding mode and	specifies the output file name.

	      Specifies	the output format (overrides autodetection by the file
	      name extension of	the file specified by -o). See --of=help for a
	      full list	of supported formats.

	      Specifies	 the  output  format  options  for  libavformat.   See
	      --ofopts=help for	a full list of supported options.

	      This is a	key/value list option. See List	Options	for details.

		     Appends  the  option  given as an argument	to the options
		     list. (Passing multiple options is	currently still	possi-
		     ble, but deprecated.)

		     Completely	empties	the options list.

	      Specifies	the output audio codec.	See --oac=help for a full list
	      of supported codecs.

	      Shifts audio data	by the given time (in seconds)	by  adding/re-
	      moving samples at	the start. Deprecated.

	      Specifies	 the  output  audio codec options for libavcodec.  See
	      --oacopts=help for a full	list of	supported options.


		 --oac=libmp3lame --oacopts=b=128000
			selects	128 kbps MP3 encoding.

	      This is a	key/value list option. See List	Options	for details.

		     Appends the option	given as an argument  to  the  options
		     list. (Passing multiple options is	currently still	possi-
		     ble, but deprecated.)

		     Completely	empties	the options list.

	      Force the	audio stream to	become the first stream	in the output.
	      By default, the order is unspecified. Deprecated.

	      Specifies	the output video codec.	See --ovc=help for a full list
	      of supported codecs.

	      Shifts video data	by the given time (in seconds) by shifting the
	      pts values. Deprecated.

	      Specifies	 the  output  video codec options for libavcodec.  See
	      --ovcopts=help for a full	list of	supported options.


		 "--ovc=mpeg4 --ovcopts=qscale=5"
			selects	constant quantizer scale 5 for	MPEG-4	encod-

		 "--ovc=libx264	--ovcopts=crf=23"
			selects	VBR quality factor 23 for H.264	encoding.

	      This is a	key/value list option. See List	Options	for details.

		     Appends  the  option  given as an argument	to the options
		     list. (Passing multiple options is	currently still	possi-
		     ble, but deprecated.)

		     Completely	empties	the options list.

	      Force the	video stream to	become the first stream	in the output.
	      By default, the order is unspecified. Deprecated.

	      Copies input pts to the output video (not	supported by some out-
	      put  container formats, e.g. AVI). In this mode, discontinuities
	      are not fixed and	all pts	are passed through as-is.  Never  seek
	      backwards	or use multiple	input files in this mode!

	      Turns  off  copying of metadata from input files to output files
	      when encoding (which is enabled by default).

	      Specifies	metadata to include in	the  output  file.   Supported
	      keys  vary  between  output formats. For example,	Matroska (MKV)
	      and FLAC allow almost arbitrary keys, while support in  MP4  and
	      MP3 is more limited.

	      This is a	key/value list option. See List	Options	for details.


		 --oset-metadata=title=	Output title",comment="Another tag""
			adds a title and a comment to the output file.

	      Specifies	 metadata to exclude from the output file when copying
	      from the input file.

	      This is a	string list option. See	List Options for details.


			excludes copying of the	the comment and	genre tags  to
			the output file.

       The  mpv	 core can be controlled	with commands and properties. A	number
       of ways to interact  with  the  player  use  them:  key	bindings  (in-
       put.conf),  OSD	(showing  information  with properties), JSON IPC, the
       client API (libmpv), and	the classic slave mode.

       The input.conf file consists of a list of key bindings, for example:

	  s screenshot	    # take a screenshot	with the s key
	  LEFT seek 15	    # map the left-arrow key to	seeking	forward	by 15 seconds

       Each line maps a	key to an input	command. Keys are specified with their
       literal	value  (upper case if combined with Shift), or a name for spe-
       cial keys. For example, a maps to the a key without shift, and  A  maps
       to a with shift.

       The  file  is  located  in the mpv configuration	directory (normally at
       ~/.config/mpv/input.conf	depending on platform).	The  default  bindings
       are defined here:

       A list of special keys can be obtained with
	  mpv --input-keylist

       In general, keys	can be combined	with Shift, Ctrl and Alt:

	  ctrl+q quit

       mpv  can	be started in input test mode, which displays key bindings and
       the commands they're bound to on	the OSD, instead of executing the com-

	  mpv --input-test --force-window --idle

       (Only  closing the window will make mpv exit, pressing normal keys will
       merely display the binding, even	if mapped to quit.)

       Also see	Key names.

   input.conf syntax
       [Shift+][Ctrl+][Alt+][Meta+]<key> [{<section>}] <command> ( ; <command>

       Note  that  by default, the right Alt key can be	used to	create special
       characters, and thus does  not  register	 as  a	modifier.  The	option
       --no-input-right-alt-gr changes this behavior.

       Newlines	 always	 start	a  new binding.	# starts a comment (outside of
       quoted string arguments). To bind commands to the # key,	SHARP  can  be

       <key>  is  either the literal character the key produces	(ASCII or Uni-
       code character),	or a symbolic name (as printed by --input-keylist).

       <section> (braced with {	and }) is the input section for	this command.

       <command> is the	command	itself.	It consists of the  command  name  and
       multiple	 (or none) commands, all separated by whitespace. String argu-
       ments need to be	quoted with ". Details see Flat	command	syntax.

       You can bind multiple commands to one key. For example:
       a show-text "command 1" ; show-text "command 2"

       It's also possible to bind a command to a sequence of keys:
       a-b-c show-text "command	run after a, b,	c have been pressed"

       (This is	not shown in the general command syntax.)

       If a or a-b or b	are already bound, this	will  run  the	first  command
       that  matches, and the multi-key	command	will never be called. Interme-
       diate keys can be remapped to ignore in order to	avoid this issue.  The
       maximum number of (non-modifier)	keys for combinations is currently 4.

   Key names
       All mouse and keyboard input is to converted to mpv-specific key	names.
       Key names are either special symbolic identifiers representing a	physi-
       cal  key, or a text key names, which are	unicode	code points encoded as
       UTF-8. These are	what keyboard input would normally produce, for	 exam-
       ple a for the A key. As a consequence, mpv uses input translated	by the
       current OS keyboard layout, rather than physical	scan codes.

       Currently there is the hardcoded	assumption that	every text key can  be
       represented as a	single unicode code point (in NFKC form).

       All  key	 names	can  be	 combined with the modifiers Shift, Ctrl, Alt,
       Meta. They must be prefixed to the actual key name, where each modifier
       is followed by a	+ (for example ctrl+q).

       Symbolic	key names and modifier names are case-insensitive. Unicode key
       names are case-sensitive	because	input bindings typically  respect  the
       shift key.

       Another	type  of  key  names  are hexadecimal key names, that serve as
       fallback	for special keys that are neither unicode, nor have a  special
       mpv defined name.  They will break as soon as mpv adds proper names for
       them, but can enable you	to use a key at	all if that does not happen.

       All symbolic names are listed by	 --input-keylist.  --input-test	 is  a
       special mode that prints	all input on the OSD.

       Comments	on some	symbolic names:

       KP*    Keypad names. Behavior varies by backend (whether	they implement
	      this, and	on how they treat numlock), but	typically,  mpv	 tries
	      to  map  keys on the keypad to separate names, even if they pro-
	      duce the same text as normal keys.

       MOUSE_BTN*, MBTN*
	      Various mouse buttons.

	      Depending	on backend, the	mouse wheel might also be  represented
	      as  a  button.  In addition, MOUSE_BTN3 to MOUSE_BTN6 are	depre-
	      cated aliases for	WHEEL_UP, WHEEL_DOWN, WHEEL_LEFT, WHEEL_RIGHT.

	      MBTN* are	aliases	for MOUSE_BTN*.

	      Mouse wheels (typically).

       AXIS_* Deprecated aliases for WHEEL_*.

       *_DBL  Mouse button double clicks.

	      Emitted by mouse move events. Enter/leave	happens	when the mouse
	      enters or	leave the mpv window (or the current mouse region, us-
	      ing the deprecated mouse region input section mechanism).

	      Pseudo key emitted when closing the mpv window using the OS win-
	      dow  manager  (for  example, by clicking the close button	in the
	      window title bar).

	      Keys emitted by the SDL gamepad backend.

	      Pseudo-key that matches any unmapped key.	(You  should  probably
	      avoid  this if possible, because it might	change behavior	or get
	      removed in the future.)

	      Pseudo-key that matches any key that produces text. (You	should
	      probably	avoid this if possible,	because	it might change	behav-
	      ior or get removed in the	future.)

   Flat	command	syntax
       This is the syntax used in input.conf, and referred to "input.conf syn-
       tax" in a number	of other places.

       <command>  ::= [<prefixes>] <command_name> (<argument>)*
       <argument> ::= (<string>	| " <quoted_string> ")

       command_name  is	 an  unquoted string with the command name itself. See
       List of Input Commands for a list.

       Arguments are separated by whitespace. This applies even	to string  ar-
       guments.	 For this reason, string arguments should be quoted with ". If
       a string	argument contains spaces or certain special characters,	 quot-
       ing and possibly	escaping is mandatory, or the command cannot be	parsed

       Inside quotes, C-style escaping can be used. JSON escapes according  to
       RFC  8259,  minus  surrogate pair escapes, should be a safe subset that
       can be used.

   Commands specified as arrays
       This applies to certain APIs, such as mp.commandv()  or	mp.command_na-
       tive()  (with  array  parameters) in Lua	scripting, or mpv_command() or
       mpv_command_node() (with	MPV_FORMAT_NODE_ARRAY) in the C	libmpv	client

       The command as well as all arguments are	passed as a single array. Sim-
       ilar to the Flat	command	syntax,	you can	first pass prefixes as strings
       (each  as  separate  array  item), then the command name	as string, and
       then each argument as string or a native	value.

       Since these APIs	pass arguments as separate strings or  native  values,
       they  do	not expect quotes, and do support escaping. Technically, there
       is the input.conf parser, which first splits the	 command  string  into
       arguments, and then invokes argument parsers for	each argument. The in-
       put.conf	parser normally	handles	quotes and escaping. The array command
       APIs  mentioned above pass strings directly to the argument parsers, or
       can sidestep them by the	ability	to pass	non-string values.

       Sometimes commands have string arguments, that  in  turn	 are  actually
       parsed by other components (e.g.	filter strings with vf add) - in these
       cases, you you would have to double-escape in input.conf, but not  with
       the array APIs.

       For  complex  commands,	consider  using	Named arguments	instead, which
       should give slightly more compatibility.	Some commands do  not  support
       named arguments and inherently take an array, though.

   Named arguments
       This  applies to	certain	APIs, such as mp.command_native() (with	tables
       that have string	keys) in Lua scripting,	 or  mpv_command_node()	 (with
       MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP) in the C libmpv client API.

       The  name of the	command	is provided with a name	string field. The name
       of each command is defined in each command description in the  List  of
       Input  Commands.	 --input-cmdlist  also	lists them. See	the subprocess
       command for an example.

       Some commands do	not support named arguments (e.g.  run	command).  You
       need to use APIs	that pass arguments as arrays.

       Named  arguments	 are  not  supported  in the "flat" input.conf syntax,
       which means you cannot use them for key bindings	in input.conf at all.

   List	of Input Commands
       Commands	with parameters	have the parameter name	enclosed  in  <	 /  >.
       Don't  add those	to the actual command. Optional	arguments are enclosed
       in [ / ]. If you	don't pass them, they will be set to a default value.

       Remember	to quote string	arguments in input.conf	(see Flat command syn-

       ignore Use this to "block" keys that should be unbound, and do nothing.
	      Useful for disabling default  bindings,  without	disabling  all
	      bindings with --no-input-default-bindings.

       seek <target> [<flags>]
	      Change  the  playback  position. By default, seeks by a relative
	      amount of	seconds.

	      The second argument consists of flags controlling	the seek mode:

	      relative (default)
		     Seek relative to current position (a negative value seeks

		     Seek  to  a  given	time (a	negative value starts from the
		     end of the	file).

		     Seek to a given percent position.

		     Seek relative to current position in percent.

		     Always restart playback at	keyframe boundaries (fast).

	      exact  Always do exact/hr/precise	seeks (slow).

	      Multiple flags can be combined, e.g.: absolute+keyframes.

	      By default, keyframes is used  for  relative,  relative-percent,
	      and  absolute-percent  seeks,  while  exact is used for absolute

	      Before mpv 0.9, the keyframes and	exact flags had	to  be	passed
	      as  3rd  parameter (essentially using a space instead of +). The
	      3rd parameter is still parsed, but is considered deprecated.

       revert-seek [<flags>]
	      Undoes the seek command, and some	other commands that seek  (but
	      not  necessarily	all  of	 them).	Calling	this command once will
	      jump to the playback position before the seek. Calling it	a sec-
	      ond  time	undoes the revert-seek command itself. This only works
	      within a single file.

	      The first	argument is optional, and can change the behavior:

	      mark   Mark the current  time  position.	The  next  normal  re-
		     vert-seek command will seek back to this point, no	matter
		     how many seeks happened since last	time.

		     If	set, mark the current position,	and do not change  the
		     mark  position  before  the next revert-seek command that
		     has mark or mark-permanent	set (or	playback of  the  cur-
		     rent file ends). Until this happens, revert-seek will al-
		     ways seek to the marked point. This flag cannot  be  com-
		     bined with	mark.

	      Using it without any arguments gives you the default behavior.

	      Play  one	 frame,	then pause. Does nothing with audio-only play-

	      Go back by one frame, then pause.	Note that  this	 can  be  very
	      slow  (it	tries to be precise, not fast),	and sometimes fails to
	      behave as	expected. How well this	works depends on whether  pre-
	      cise  seeking  works  correctly  (e.g.   see  the	 --hr-seek-de-
	      muxer-offset option). Video filters or other video post-process-
	      ing  that	 modifies timing of frames (e.g. deinterlacing)	should
	      usually work, but	might make backstepping	silently behave	incor-
	      rectly  in  corner  cases.  Using	 --hr-seek-framedrop=no	should
	      help, although it	might make precise seeking slower.

	      This does	not work with audio-only playback.

       set <name> <value>
	      Set the given property or	option to the given value.

       add <name> [<value>]
	      Add the given value to the property or option.  On  overflow  or
	      underflow,  clamp	 the  property	to  the	maximum. If <value> is
	      omitted, assume 1.

       cycle <name> [<value>]
	      Cycle the	given property or option. The second argument  can  be
	      up  or  down  to	set  the cycle direction. On overflow, set the
	      property back to the minimum, on underflow set it	to  the	 maxi-
	      mum. If up or down is omitted, assume up.

       multiply	<name> <value>
	      Similar  to  add,	but multiplies the property or option with the
	      numeric value.

       screenshot <flags>
	      Take a screenshot.

	      Multiple flags are available (some can be	combined with +):

	      <subtitles> (default)
		     Save the video image, in  its  original  resolution,  and
		     with subtitles.  Some video outputs may still include the
		     OSD in the	output under certain circumstances.

		     Like subtitles, but typically without OSD	or  subtitles.
		     The exact behavior	depends	on the selected	video output.

		     Save  the	contents  of the mpv window. Typically scaled,
		     with OSD and subtitles. The exact behavior	depends	on the
		     selected  video  output,  and if no support is available,
		     this will act like	video.

		     Take a screenshot each frame. Issue this command again to
		     stop  taking  screenshots.	 Note  that you	should disable
		     frame-dropping when using this mode - or  you  might  re-
		     ceive duplicate images in cases when a frame was dropped.
		     This flag can be combined	with  the  other  flags,  e.g.

	      Older  mpv  versions  required  passing single and each-frame as
	      second argument (and did not have	flags).	This syntax  is	 still
	      understood, but deprecated and might be removed in the future.

	      If  you  combine	this command with another one using ;, you can
	      use the async flag to make encoding/writing the image file asyn-
	      chronous.	 For  normal standalone	commands, this is always asyn-
	      chronous,	and the	flag has no  effect.  (This  behavior  changed
	      with mpv 0.29.0.)

       screenshot-to-file <filename> <flags>
	      Take a screenshot	and save it to a given file. The format	of the
	      file will	be guessed by the extension  (and  --screenshot-format
	      is  ignored  - the behavior when the extension is	missing	or un-
	      known is arbitrary).

	      The second argument is like the first argument to	screenshot and
	      supports subtitles, video, window.

	      If the file already exists, it's overwritten.

	      Like  all	 input	command	parameters, the	filename is subject to
	      property expansion as described in Property Expansion.

       playlist-next <flags>
	      Go to the	next entry on the playlist.

	      First argument:

	      weak (default)
		     If	the last file on the playlist is currently played,  do

	      force  Terminate	playback  if  there  are  no more files	on the

       playlist-prev <flags>
	      Go to the	previous entry on the playlist.

	      First argument:

	      weak (default)
		     If	the first file on the playlist is currently played, do

	      force  Terminate playback	if the first file is being played.

       playlist-play-index <integer|current|none>
	      Start  (or restart) playback of the given	playlist index.	In ad-
	      dition to	the 0-based playlist entry index, it supports the fol-
	      lowing values:

		     The  current  playlist entry (as in playlist-current-pos)
		     will be played again (unload and reload). If none is set,
		     playback  is  stopped.   (In  corner cases, playlist-cur-
		     rent-pos can point	to a playlist entry even  if  playback
		     is	currently inactive,

	      <none> Playback  is  stopped.  If	idle mode (--idle) is enabled,
		     the player	will enter idle	mode, otherwise	it will	exit.

	      This comm	and is similar to loadfile in that it only manipulates
	      the  state  of what to play next,	without	waiting	until the cur-
	      rent file	is unloaded, and the next one is loaded.

	      Setting playlist-pos or similar properties can  have  a  similar
	      effect to	this command. However, it's more explicit, and guaran-
	      tees that	playback is restarted if for example the new  playlist
	      entry is the same	as the previous	one.

       loadfile	<url> [<flags> [<options>]]
	      Load  the	 given	file  or URL and play it. Technically, this is
	      just a playlist manipulation command (which either replaces  the
	      playlist or appends an entry to it). Actual file loading happens
	      independently. For example, a loadfile command that replaces the
	      current  file  with a new	one returns before the current file is
	      stopped, and the new file	even begins loading.

	      Second argument:

	      <replace>	(default)
		     Stop playback of the current file,	and play the new  file

		     Append the	file to	the playlist.

		     Append  the  file,	 and  if nothing is currently playing,
		     start playback.  (Always starts with the added file, even
		     if	 the  playlist	was not	empty before running this com-

	      The third	argument is a list of options and values which	should
	      be   set	 while	the  file  is  playing.	 It  is	 of  the  form
	      opt1=value1,opt2=value2,...  When	using the client API, this can
	      be  a  MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP  (or a	Lua table), however the	values
	      themselves must be strings currently. These options are set dur-
	      ing playback, and	restored to the	previous value at end of play-
	      back (see	Per-File Options).

       loadlist	<url> [<flags>]
	      Load the given playlist file or URL (like	--playlist).

	      Second argument:

	      <replace>	(default)
		     Stop playback and replace the internal playlist with  the
		     new one.

		     Append  the new playlist at the end of the	current	inter-
		     nal playlist.

	      Clear the	playlist, except the currently played file.

       playlist-remove <index>
	      Remove the playlist entry	at the given index. Index values start
	      counting	with  0. The special value current removes the current
	      entry. Note that removing	the current entry also stops  playback
	      and starts playing the next entry.

       playlist-move <index1> <index2>
	      Move the playlist	entry at index1, so that it takes the place of
	      the entry	index2.	(Paradoxically,	the moved playlist entry  will
	      not have the index value index2 after moving if index1 was lower
	      than index2, because index2 refers to the	target entry, not  the
	      index the	entry will have	after moving.)

	      Shuffle  the  playlist. This is similar to what is done on start
	      if the --shuffle option is used.

	      Attempt to revert	the previous  playlist-shuffle	command.  This
	      works only once (multiple	successive playlist-unshuffle commands
	      do nothing).  May	not work correctly if new recursive  playlists
	      have been	opened since a playlist-shuffle	command.

       run <command> [<arg1> [<arg2> [...]]]
	      Run  the	given  command.	Unlike in MPlayer/mplayer2 and earlier
	      versions of mpv (0.2.x and older), this doesn't call the	shell.
	      Instead,	the command is run directly, with each argument	passed
	      separately. Each argument	is expanded like  in  Property	Expan-

	      This  command  has a variable number of arguments, and cannot be
	      used with	named arguments.

	      The program is run in a detached way. mpv	doesn't	wait until the
	      command  is completed, but continues playback right after	spawn-
	      ing it.

	      To get the old behavior, use /bin/sh and -c as the first two ar-


			run "/bin/sh" "-c" "echo ${title} > /tmp/playing"

			This  is  not  a particularly good example, because it
			doesn't	handle escaping, and a specially prepared file
			might  allow  an  attacker  to execute arbitrary shell
			commands. It is	recommended to	write  a  small	 shell
			script,	and call that with run.

	      Similar  to  run,	but gives more control about process execution
	      to the caller, and does does not detach the process.

	      You can avoid blocking until the process terminates  by  running
	      this   command   asynchronously.	 (For  example	mp.command_na-
	      tive_async() in Lua scripting.)

	      This has the following named arguments. The order	of them	is not
	      guaranteed, so you should	always call them with named arguments,
	      see Named	arguments.

		     Array of strings with the command as first	argument,  and
		     subsequent	command	line arguments following. This is just
		     like the run command argument list.

		     The first array entry is either an	absolute path  to  the
		     executable,  or  a	 filename  with	no path	components, in
		     which case	the PATH environment variable. On  Unix,  this
		     is	equivalent to posix_spawnp and execvp behavior.

	      playback_only (MPV_FORMAT_FLAG)
		     Boolean  indicating  whether the process should be	killed
		     when playback terminates (optional,  default:  true).  If
		     enabled,  stopping	 playback  will	automatically kill the
		     process, and you can't start it outside of	playback.

	      capture_size (MPV_FORMAT_INT64)
		     Integer setting the maximum number	of stdout plus	stderr
		     bytes  that can be	captured (optional, default: 64MB). If
		     the number	of bytes exceeds this, capturing  is  stopped.
		     The limit is per captured stream.

	      capture_stdout (MPV_FORMAT_FLAG)
		     Capture all data the process outputs to stdout and	return
		     it	once the process ends (optional, default: no).

	      capture_stderr (MPV_FORMAT_FLAG)
		     Same as capture_stdout, but for stderr.

	      detach (MPV_FORMAT_FLAG)
		     Whether to	run the	process	in  detached  mode  (optional,
		     default:  no).  In	this mode, the process is run in a new
		     process session, and the command does not	wait  for  the
		     process  to terminate. If neither capture_stdout nor cap-
		     ture_stderr have been set to true,	 the  command  returns
		     immediately  after	the new	process	has been started, oth-
		     erwise the	command	will read as long  as  the  pipes  are

		     Set  a  list of environment variables for the new process
		     (default: empty).	If an empty list is passed, the	 envi-
		     ronment  of  the mpv process is used instead. (Unlike the
		     underlying	OS mechanisms, the mpv command cannot start  a
		     process with empty	environment. Fortunately, that is com-
		     pletely useless.) The format of the list is as in the ex-
		     ecle()  syscall.  Each string item	defines	an environment
		     variable as in NANME=VALUE.

		     On	Lua, you may use utils.get_env_list() to retrieve  the
		     current  environment if you e.g. simply want to add a new

	      stdin_data (MPV_FORMAT_STRING)
		     Feed the given string to the new  process'	 stdin.	 Since
		     this  is a	string,	you cannot pass	arbitrary binary data.
		     If	the process terminates or closes the pipe  before  all
		     data  is  written,	 the  remaining	 data is silently dis-
		     carded. Probably does not work on win32.

	      passthrough_stdin	(MPV_FORMAT_FLAG)
		     If	enabled, wire the new process' stdin  to  mpv's	 stdin
		     (default:	no).  Before mpv 0.33.0, this argument did not
		     exist, but	the behavior was as if this was	set to true.

	      The  command  returns  the   following   result	(as   MPV_FOR-

	      status (MPV_FORMAT_INT64)
		     The  raw  exit status of the process. It will be negative
		     on	error. The meaning of negative	values	is  undefined,
		     other  than  meaning error	(and does not correspond to OS
		     low level exit status values).

		     On	Windows, it can	happen that a negative return value is
		     returned  even  if	 the process exits gracefully, because
		     the win32 UINT exit code is assigned to an	 int  variable
		     before being set as int64_t field in the result map. This
		     might be fixed later.

	      stdout (MPV_FORMAT_BYTE_ARRAY)
		     Captured stdout stream, limited to	capture_size.

	      stderr (MPV_FORMAT_BYTE_ARRAY)
		     Same as stdout, but for stderr.

	      error_string (MPV_FORMAT_STRING)
		     Empty string if the process exited	gracefully. The	string
		     killed  if	 the process was terminated in an unusual way.
		     The string	init if	the process could not be started.

		     On	Windows, killed	is only	returned when the process  has
		     been killed by mpv	as a result of playback_only being set
		     to	true.

	      killed_by_us (MPV_FORMAT_FLAG)
		     Whether the process has been killed by mpv,  for  example
		     as	 a result of playback_only being set to	true, aborting
		     the command (e.g. by mp.abort_async_command()), or	if the
		     player is about to	exit.

	      Note  that the command itself will always	return success as long
	      as the parameters	are correct.  Whether  the  process  could  be
	      spawned  or  whether  it was somehow killed or returned an error
	      status has to be queried from the	result value.

	      This command can be asynchronously aborted via API.

	      In all cases, the	subprocess will	be terminated on player	 exit.
	      Also  see	Asynchronous command details. Only the run command can
	      start processes in a truly detached way.


			Don't forget to	set the	 playback_only	field  if  you
			want the command run while the player is in idle mode,
			or if you don't	want that end of  playback  kills  the


		     local r = mp.command_native({
			 name =	"subprocess",
			 playback_only = false,
			 capture_stdout	= true,
			 args =	{"cat",	"/proc/cpuinfo"},
		     if	r.status == 0 then
			 print("result:	" .. r.stdout)

		 This  is a fairly useless Lua example,	which demonstrates how
		 to run	a process in a blocking	 manner,  and  retrieving  its
		 stdout	output.

       quit [<code>]
	      Exit  the	 player. If an argument	is given, it's used as process
	      exit code.

       quit-watch-later	[<code>]
	      Exit player, and store current playback position.	 Playing  that
	      file later will seek to the previous position on start. The (op-
	      tional) argument is exactly as in	the quit command.

       sub-add <url> [<flags> [<title> [<lang>]]]
	      Load the given subtitle file or stream. By default,  it  is  se-
	      lected as	current	subtitle  after	loading.

	      The flags	argument is one	of the following values:

		 Select	the subtitle immediately (default).

		 Don't	select	the  subtitle. (Or in some special situations,
		 let the default stream	selection mechanism decide.)

		 Select	the subtitle. If a subtitle with the same filename was
		 already added,	that one is selected, instead of loading a du-
		 plicate entry.	 (In this case,	 title/language	 are  ignored,
		 and  if  the  was  changed since it was loaded, these changes
		 won't be reflected.)

	      The title	argument sets the track	title in the UI.

	      The lang argument	sets the track language, and can  also	influ-
	      ence stream selection with flags set to auto.

       sub-remove [<id>]
	      Remove  the given	subtitle track.	If the id argument is missing,
	      remove the current track.	 (Works	 on  external  subtitle	 files

       sub-reload [<id>]
	      Reload the given subtitle	tracks.	If the id argument is missing,
	      reload the current track.	 (Works	 on  external  subtitle	 files

	      This works by unloading and re-adding the	subtitle track.

       sub-step	<skip>
	      Change  subtitle	timing such, that the subtitle event after the
	      next <skip> subtitle events is displayed.	<skip> can be negative
	      to step backwards.

       sub-seek	<skip>
	      Seek  to	the  next (skip	set to 1) or the previous (skip	set to
	      -1) subtitle.  This is similar to	sub-step, except that it seeks
	      video and	audio instead of adjusting the subtitle	delay.

	      For  embedded  subtitles	(like  with Matroska), this works only
	      with subtitle events that	have already been  displayed,  or  are
	      within a short prefetch range.

       print-text <text>
	      Print  text  to  stdout.	The string can contain properties (see
	      Property Expansion). Take	care to	put the	argument in quotes.

       show-text <text>	[<duration>|-1 [<level>]]
	      Show text	on the OSD. The	string can contain  properties,	 which
	      are  expanded  as	 described  in Property	Expansion. This	can be
	      used to show playback time, filename, and	so on.

		     The time in ms to show the	message	for.  By  default,  it
		     uses the same value as --osd-duration.

		     The   minimum   OSD  level	 to  show  the	text  at  (see

       expand-text <string>
	      Property-expand the argument and	return	the  expanded  string.
	      This  can	 be  used only through the client API or from a	script
	      using mp.command_native. (see Property Expansion).

       expand-path <string>
	      Expand a path's double-tilde placeholders	into  a	 platform-spe-
	      cific  path.   As	expand-text, this can only be used through the
	      client API or from a script using	mp.command_native.



			This line of Lua would show the	location of the	user's
			mpv configuration directory on the OSD.

	      Show the progress	bar, the elapsed time and the  total  duration
	      of the file on the OSD.

	      Write  the  resume config	file that the quit-watch-later command
	      writes, but continue playback normally.

       delete-watch-later-config [<filename>]
	      Delete any existing resume  config  file	that  was  written  by
	      quit-watch-later	or  write-watch-later-config. If a filename is
	      specified, then the deleted config is for	that file;  otherwise,
	      it  is  the  same	one as would be	written	by quit-watch-later or
	      write-watch-later-config in the current circumstance.

       stop [<flags>]
	      Stop playback and	clear playlist.	With default settings, this is
	      essentially  like	 quit. Useful for the client API: playback can
	      be stopped without terminating the player.

	      The first	argument  is  optional,	 and  supports	the  following

		     Do	not clear the playlist.

       mouse <x> <y> [<button> [<mode>]]
	      Send a mouse event with given coordinate (<x>, <y>).

	      Second argument:

		     The button	number of clicked mouse	button.	This should be
		     one of 0-19.  If <button> is omitted, only	 the  position
		     will be updated.

	      Third argument:

	      <single> (default)
		     The mouse event represents	regular	single click.

		     The mouse event represents	double-click.

       keypress	<name>
	      Send  a  key event through mpv's input handler, triggering what-
	      ever behavior is configured to  that  key.  name	uses  the  in-
	      put.conf	naming	scheme	for keys and modifiers.	Useful for the
	      client API: key events can be sent to libmpv  to	handle	inter-

       keydown <name>
	      Similar  to  keypress,  but sets the KEYDOWN flag	so that	if the
	      key is bound to a	repeatable command, it will be run  repeatedly
	      with mpv's key repeat timing until the keyup command is called.

       keyup [<name>]
	      Set the KEYUP flag, stopping any repeated	behavior that had been
	      triggered. name is optional. If name is not given	or is an empty
	      string,  KEYUP  will  be	set on all keys. Otherwise, KEYUP will
	      only be set on the key specified by name.

       keybind <name> <command>
	      Binds a key to an	input command. command must be a complete com-
	      mand  containing	all the	desired	arguments and flags. Both name
	      and command use the input.conf naming scheme. This is  primarily
	      useful for the client API.

       audio-add <url> [<flags>	[<title> [<lang>]]]
	      Load the given audio file. See sub-add command.

       audio-remove [<id>]
	      Remove the given audio track. See	sub-remove command.

       audio-reload [<id>]
	      Reload the given audio tracks. See sub-reload command.

       video-add <url> [<flags>	[<title> [<lang>]]]
	      Load the given video file. See sub-add command.

       video-remove [<id>]
	      Remove the given video track. See	sub-remove command.

       video-reload [<id>]
	      Reload the given video tracks. See sub-reload command.

       rescan-external-files [<mode>]
	      Rescan  external	files  according to the	current	--sub-auto and
	      --audio-file-auto	settings. This can be used to auto-load	exter-
	      nal files	after the file was loaded.

	      The mode argument	is one of the following:

	      <reselect> (default)
		     Select the	default	audio and subtitle streams, which typ-
		     ically selects external files with	 the  highest  prefer-
		     ence.  (The  implementation  is not perfect, and could be
		     improved on request.)

		     Do	not change current track selections.

   Input Commands that are Possibly Subject to Change
       af <operation> <value>
	      Change audio filter chain. See vf	command.

       vf <operation> <value>
	      Change video filter chain.

	      The semantics are	exactly	the same as with option	 parsing  (see
	      VIDEO FILTERS). As such the text below is	a redundant and	incom-
	      plete summary.

	      The first	argument decides what happens:

	      <set>  Overwrite the previous filter chain with the new one.

	      <add>  Append the	new filter chain to the	previous one.

		     Check if the given	filter (with the exact parameters)  is
		     already  in the video chain. If it	is, remove the filter.
		     If	it isn't, add the filter.   (If	 several  filters  are
		     passed to the command, this is done for each filter.)

		     A	special	variant	is combining this with labels, and us-
		     ing @name without filter name and	parameters  as	filter
		     entry. This toggles the enable/disable flag.

		     Like  toggle, but always remove the given filter from the

	      <del>  Remove the	given filters from the video chain. Unlike  in
		     the  other	 cases,	 the second parameter is a comma sepa-
		     rated list	of filter names	or integer  indexes.  0	 would
		     denote  the first filter. Negative	indexes	start from the
		     last filter, and -1 denotes the last filter.  Deprecated,
		     use remove.

	      <clr>  Remove  all  filters.  Note  that like the	other sub-com-
		     mands, this does not control automatically	inserted  fil-

	      The  argument  is	 always	needed.	E.g. in	case of	clr use	vf clr

	      You can assign labels to filter by prefixing  them  with	@name:
	      (where  name  is a user-chosen arbitrary identifier). Labels can
	      be used to refer to filters by name in all of the	 filter	 chain
	      modification  commands.	For  add,  using an already used label
	      will replace the existing	filter.

	      The vf command shows the list of requested filters  on  the  OSD
	      after  changing  the filter chain. This is roughly equivalent to
	      show-text	${vf}. Note that auto-inserted filters for format con-
	      version  are  not	 shown on the list, only what was requested by
	      the user.

	      Normally,	the commands will check	whether	 the  video  chain  is
	      recreated	 successfully, and will	undo the operation on failure.
	      If the command is	run before video is configured (can happen  if
	      the command is run immediately after opening a file and before a
	      video frame is decoded), this check can't	be run.	 Then  it  can
	      happen that creating the video chain fails.

		 Example for input.conf

		 o a vf	set flip turn video upside-down	on the a key

		 o b vf	set "" remove all video	filters	on b

		 o c vf	toggle gradfun toggle debanding	on c

		 Example how to	toggle disabled	filters	at runtime

		 o Add	something  like	 vf-add=@deband:!gradfun  to mpv.conf.
		   The @deband:	is the label, an  arbitrary,  user-given  name
		   for	this  filter  entry. The ! before the filter name dis-
		   ables the filter by default.	Everything after this  is  the
		   normal  filter name and possibly filter parameters, like in
		   the normal --vf syntax.

		 o Add a vf toggle @deband to  input.conf.  This  toggles  the
		   "disabled"  flag  for the filter with the label deband when
		   the a key is	hit.

       cycle-values [<"!reverse">] <property> <value1> [<value2> [...]]
	      Cycle through a list of values. Each invocation of  the  command
	      will  set	 the given property to the next	value in the list. The
	      command will use the current value of the	 property/option,  and
	      use  it to determine the current position	in the list of values.
	      Once it has found	it, it will set	the next  value	 in  the  list
	      (wrapping	around to the first item if needed).

	      This  command  has a variable number of arguments, and cannot be
	      used with	named arguments.

	      The special argument !reverse can	be used	 to  cycle  the	 value
	      list  in	reverse.  The only advantage is	that you don't need to
	      reverse the value	list yourself when adding a second key binding
	      for cycling backwards.

       enable-section <name> [<flags>]
	      This command is deprecated, except for mpv-internal uses.

	      Enable all key bindings in the named input section.

	      The enabled input	sections form a	stack. Bindings	in sections on
	      the top of the stack are preferred to lower sections. This  com-
	      mand  puts  the  section on top of the stack. If the section was
	      already on the stack, it is implicitly  removed  beforehand.  (A
	      section cannot be	on the stack more than once.)

	      The flags	parameter can be a combination (separated by +)	of the
	      following	flags:

		     All sections enabled before the newly enabled section are
		     disabled.	 They will be re-enabled as soon as all	exclu-
		     sive sections above them are removed. In other words, the
		     new section shadows all previous sections.

		     This feature can't	be used	through	the public API.


       disable-section <name>
	      This command is deprecated, except for mpv-internal uses.

	      Disable the named	input section. Undoes enable-section.

       define-section <name> <contents>	[<flags>]
	      This command is deprecated, except for mpv-internal uses.

	      Create  a	named input section, or	replace	the contents of	an al-
	      ready existing input section. The	contents  parameter  uses  the
	      same  syntax  as the input.conf file (except that	using the sec-
	      tion syntax in it	is not allowed), including the need  to	 sepa-
	      rate bindings with a newline character.

	      If the contents parameter	is an empty string, the	section	is re-

	      The section with the name	default	is the normal input section.

	      In general, input	sections have  to  be  enabled	with  the  en-
	      able-section command, or they are	ignored.

	      The last parameter has the following meaning:

	      <default>	(also used if parameter	omitted)
		     Use  a  key  binding  defined by this section only	if the
		     user hasn't already bound this key	to a command.

		     Always bind a key.	(The input section that	was  made  ac-
		     tive most recently	wins if	there are ambiguities.)

	      This  command can	be used	to dispatch arbitrary keys to a	script
	      or a client API user. If the input section defines  script-bind-
	      ing  commands, it	is also	possible to get	separate events	on key
	      up/down, and  relatively	detailed  information  about  the  key
	      state.  The  special  key	name unmapped can be used to match any
	      unmapped key.

       overlay-add <id>	<x> <y>	<file> <offset>	<fmt> <w> <h> <stride>
	      Add an OSD overlay sourced from raw data.	This might  be	useful
	      for  scripts and applications controlling	mpv, and which want to
	      display things on	top of the video window.

	      Overlays are usually displayed in	screen	resolution,  but  with
	      some  VOs, the resolution	is reduced to that of the video's. You
	      can read the osd-width and osd-height properties.	At least  with
	      --vo-xv  and  anamorphic	video (such as DVD), osd-par should be
	      read as well, and	the overlay should be aspect-compensated.

	      This has the following named arguments. The order	of them	is not
	      guaranteed, so you should	always call them with named arguments,
	      see Named	arguments.

	      id is an integer between 0 and 63	identifying the	 overlay  ele-
	      ment. The	ID can be used to add multiple overlay parts, update a
	      part by using this command with an already existing  ID,	or  to
	      remove  a	part with overlay-remove. Using	a previously unused ID
	      will add a new overlay, while reusing an ID will update it.

	      x	and y specify the position where the OSD should	be displayed.

	      file specifies the file the raw image data is read from. It  can
	      be  either  a numeric UNIX file descriptor prefixed with @ (e.g.
	      @4), or a	filename. The file will	be  mapped  into  memory  with
	      mmap(), copied, and unmapped before the command returns (changed
	      in mpv 0.18.1).

	      It is also possible to pass a raw	memory address for use as bit-
	      map  memory by passing a memory address as integer prefixed with
	      an & character.  Passing the wrong thing	here  will  crash  the
	      player.  This mode might be useful for use with libmpv. The off-
	      set parameter is simply added to the memory address  (since  mpv
	      0.8.0, ignored before).

	      offset is	the byte offset	of the first pixel in the source file.
	      (The current implementation always mmap's	the  whole  file  from
	      position	0  to the end of the image, so large offsets should be
	      avoided. Before mpv 0.8.0, the offset was	 actually  passed  di-
	      rectly to	mmap, but it was changed to make using it easier.)

	      fmt  is  a  string identifying the image format. Currently, only
	      bgra is defined. This format has 4 bytes per pixels, with	8 bits
	      per  component.	The least significant 8	bits are blue, and the
	      most significant 8 bits are alpha	(in little endian, the	compo-
	      nents  are  B-G-R-A,  with B as first byte). This	uses premulti-
	      plied alpha: every color component is  already  multiplied  with
	      the alpha	component. This	means the numeric value	of each	compo-
	      nent is equal to or smaller than the alpha component. (Violating
	      this rule	will lead to different results with different VOs: nu-
	      meric overflows resulting	from blending broken alpha  values  is
	      considered something that	shouldn't happen, and consequently im-
	      plementations don't ensure that you get predictable behavior  in
	      this case.)

	      w, h, and	stride specify the size	of the overlay.	w is the visi-
	      ble width	of the overlay,	while stride gives the width in	 bytes
	      in  memory.  In  the  simple  case,  and	with  the bgra format,
	      stride==4*w.  In general,	the total amount of memory accessed is
	      stride * h.  (Technically, the minimum size would	be stride * (h
	      -	1) + w * 4, but	for simplicity,	the  player  will  access  all
	      stride * h bytes.)

		 Before	 mpv  0.18.1,  you had to do manual "double buffering"
		 when updating an overlay by replacing	it  with  a  different
		 memory	 buffer. Since mpv 0.18.1, the memory is simply	copied
		 and doesn't reference any of the memory indicated by the com-
		 mand's	 arguments  after the commend returns.	If you want to
		 use this command before mpv 0.18.1, reads the old docs	to see
		 how to	handle this correctly.

       overlay-remove <id>
	      Remove  an  overlay added	with overlay-add and the same ID. Does
	      nothing if no overlay with this ID exists.

	      Add/update/remove	an OSD overlay.

	      (Although	this sounds similar to overlay-add, osd-overlay	is for
	      text  overlays,  while  overlay-add  is for bitmaps. Maybe over-
	      lay-add will be merged into osd-overlay to remove	this oddity.)

	      You can use this to add text overlays in ASS format. ASS has ad-
	      vanced positioning and rendering tags, which can be used to ren-
	      der almost any kind of vector graphics.

	      This command accepts the following parameters:

	      id     Arbitrary integer that identifies the  overlay.  Multiple
		     overlays  can  be added by	calling	this command with dif-
		     ferent id parameters. Calling this	command	with the  same
		     id	replaces the previously	set overlay.

		     There  is	a  separate  namespace	for each libmpv	client
		     (i.e. IPC connection, script), so IDs can be made up  and
		     assigned  by  the API user	without	conflicting with other
		     API users.

		     If	the libmpv client is destroyed,	all  overlays  associ-
		     ated  with	it are also deleted. In	particular, connecting
		     via --input-ipc-server, adding an	overlay,  and  discon-
		     necting will remove the overlay immediately again.

	      format String  that  gives  the type of the overlay. Accepts the
		     following values (HTML rendering of this is broken,  view
		     the generated manpage instead, or the raw RST source):

			    The	 data  parameter  is  a	 string. The string is
			    split on the  newline  character.  Every  line  is
			    turned into	the Text part of a Dialogue ASS	event.
			    Timing is unused (but behavior of timing dependent
			    ASS	tags may change	in future mpv versions).

			    Note  that	it's better to put multiple lines into
			    data, instead of adding multiple OSD overlays.

			    This provides 2 ASS	Styles.	OSD contains the  text
			    style as defined by	the current --osd-... options.
			    Default is similar,	and contains  style  that  OSD
			    would have if all options were set to the default.

			    In	addition,  the res_x and res_y options specify
			    the	value of the ASS PlayResX and PlayResY	header
			    fields. If res_y is	set to 0, PlayResY is initial-
			    ized to an arbitrary default value (but note  that
			    the	 default  for this command is 720, not 0).  If
			    res_x is set to 0, PlayResX	is set based on	 res_y
			    such  that	a virtual ASS pixel has	a square pixel
			    aspect ratio.

		     none   Special value that causes the overlay  to  be  re-
			    moved.  Most  parameters  other than id and	format
			    are	mostly ignored.

	      data   String defining the overlay  contents  according  to  the
		     format parameter.

	      res_x, res_y
		     Used  if  format  is  set	to ass-events (see description
		     there).  Optional,	defaults to 0/720.

	      z	     The Z order of the	overlay. Optional, defaults to 0.

		     Note that Z order between different overlays of different
		     formats is	static,	and cannot be changed (currently, this
		     means that	bitmap overlays	added by overlay-add  are  al-
		     ways on top of the	ASS overlays added by osd-overlay). In
		     addition, the builtin OSD components are always below any
		     of	 the  custom OSD. (This	includes subtitles of any kind
		     as	well as	text rendered by show-text.)

		     It's possible that	 future	 mpv  versions	will  randomly
		     change  how  Z  order  between  different OSD formats and
		     builtin OSD is handled.

	      hidden If	set to true, do	not display this (default: false).

		     If	set to true, attempt to	 determine  bounds  and	 write
		     them to the command's result value	as x0, x1, y0, y1 rec-
		     tangle (default: false). If the rectangle is  empty,  not
		     known, or somehow degenerate, it is not set. x1/y1	is the
		     coordinate	of the bottom exclusive	corner of the  rectan-

		     The result	value may depend on the	VO window size,	and is
		     based on the last known window size at the	 time  of  the
		     call.  This  means	the results may	be different from what
		     is	actually rendered.

		     For ass-events, the result	 rectangle  is	recomputed  to
		     PlayRes  coordinates (res_x/res_y). If window size	is not
		     known, a fallback is chosen.

		     You should	be aware that this mechanism is	 very  ineffi-
		     cient,  as	 it renders the	full result, and then uses the
		     bounding box of the rendered bitmap list (even if	hidden
		     is	 set). It will flush various caches.  Its results also
		     depend on the used	libass version.

		     This feature is experimental, and may change in some  way

		 Always	 use named arguments (mpv_command_node()). Lua scripts
		 should	use the	mp.create_osd_overlay()	helper instead of  in-
		 voking	this command directly.

       script-message [<arg1> [<arg2> [...]]]
	      Send a message to	all clients, and pass it the following list of
	      arguments.  What this  message  means,  how  many	 arguments  it
	      takes,  and  what	the arguments mean is fully up to the receiver
	      and the sender. Every client receives the	message, so be careful
	      about name clashes (or use script-message-to).

	      This  command  has a variable number of arguments, and cannot be
	      used with	named arguments.

       script-message-to <target> [<arg1> [<arg2> [...]]]
	      Same as script-message, but send it only	to  the	 client	 named
	      <target>.	 Each client (scripts etc.) has	a unique name. For ex-
	      ample, Lua scripts can get their name via	mp.get_script_name().

	      This command has a variable number of arguments, and  cannot  be
	      used with	named arguments.

       script-binding <name>
	      Invoke  a	script-provided	key binding. This can be used to remap
	      key bindings provided by external	Lua scripts.

	      The argument is the name of the binding.

	      It can optionally	be prefixed with the name of the script, using
	      /	as separator, e.g. script-binding scriptname/bindingname.

	      For completeness,	here is	how this command works internally. The
	      details could change  any	 time.	On  any	 matching  key	event,
	      script-message-to	 or  script-message  is	 called	 (depending on
	      whether the script name is included), with the  following	 argu-

	      1. The string key-binding.

	      2. The name of the binding (as established above).

	      3. The key state as string (see below).

	      4. The key name (since mpv 0.15.0).

	      5. The text the key would	produce, or empty string if not	appli-

	      The 5th argument is only set if no modifiers are present	(using
	      the  shift key with a letter is normally not emitted as having a
	      modifier,	and results in upper case text instead,	but some back-
	      ends may mess up).

	      The key state consists of	2 characters:

	      1. One  of d (key	was pressed down), u (was released), r (key is
		 still down, and was repeated; only if key repeat  is  enabled
		 for  this  binding),  p  (key was pressed; happens if up/down
		 can't be tracked).

	      2. Whether the event originates from the mouse, either m	(mouse
		 button) or - (something else).

	      Future  versions can add more arguments and more key state char-
	      acters to	support	more input peculiarities.

	      Cycle through A-B	loop states. The first command will set	the  A
	      point  (the ab-loop-a property); the second the B	point, and the
	      third will clear both points.

	      Drop audio/video/demuxer buffers,	and restart from fresh.	 Might
	      help  with  unseekable streams that are going out	of sync.  This
	      command might be changed or removed in the future.

       screenshot-raw [<flags>]
	      Return a screenshot in memory. This can be used only through the
	      client API. The MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP returned by this command has
	      the w, h,	stride fields set  to  obvious	contents.  The	format
	      field  is	 set  to  bgr0 by default. This	format is organized as
	      B8G8R8X8 (where B	is the LSB). The contents of the padding X are
	      undefined.  The data field is of type MPV_FORMAT_BYTE_ARRAY with
	      the actual image data. The image is freed	as soon	as the	result
	      mpv_node	is  freed. As usual with client	API semantics, you are
	      not allowed to write to the image	data.

	      The stride is the	number of bytes	from a pixel at	 (x0,  y0)  to
	      the  pixel at (x0, y0 + 1). This can be larger than w * 4	if the
	      image was	cropped, or if there is	padding. This  number  can  be
	      negative	as  well.   You	 access	 a pixel with byte_index = y *
	      stride + x * 4 (assuming the bgr0	format).

	      The flags	argument is like the first argument to screenshot  and
	      supports subtitles, video, window.

       vf-command <label> <command> <argument>
	      Send  a command to the filter with the given <label>. Use	all to
	      send it to all filters at	once. The command and argument	string
	      is  filter  specific.  Currently,	this only works	with the lavfi
	      filter - see the libavfilter documentation for which commands  a
	      filter supports.

	      Note  that  the <label> is a mpv filter label, not a libavfilter
	      filter name.

       af-command <label> <command> <argument>
	      Same as vf-command, but for audio	filters.

       apply-profile <name> [<mode>]
	      Apply the	contents of a named profile. This is like  using  pro-
	      file=name	in a config file, except you can map it	to a key bind-
	      ing to change it at runtime.

	      The mode argument:

		     Apply the profile.	Default	if the argument	is omitted.

		     Restore options set by a previous	apply-profile  command
		     for  this	profile.  Only	works  if the profile has pro-
		     file-restore set to a relevant mode. Prints a warning  if
		     nothing could be done. See	Runtime	profiles for details.

       load-script <filename>
	      Load  a  script,	similar	 to  the --script option. Whether this
	      waits for	the script to finish  initialization  or  not  changed
	      multiple times, and the future behavior is left undefined.

	      On success, returns a mpv_node with a client_id field set	to the
	      return value of the mpv_client_id() API call of the  newly  cre-
	      ated script handle.

       change-list <name> <operation> <value>
	      This  command changes list options as described in List Options.
	      The <name> parameter is the normal option	 name,	while  <opera-
	      tion> is the suffix or action used on the	option.

	      Some  operations	take  no value,	but the	command	still requires
	      the value	parameter. In these cases, the value must be an	 empty


			change-list glsl-shaders append	file.glsl

			Add  a	filename to the	glsl-shaders list. The command
			line equivalent	is --glsl-shaders-append=file.glsl  or
			alternatively --glsl-shader=file.glsl.

       dump-cache <start> <end>	<filename>
	      Dump  the	 current  cache	 to the	given filename.	The <filename>
	      file is overwritten if it	already	exists.	<start>	and <end> give
	      the  time	 range	of  what  to dump. If no data is cached	at the
	      given time range,	nothing	may be dumped (creating	a file with no

	      Dumping  a  larger  part of the cache will freeze	the player. No
	      effort was made to fix this, as this feature  was	 meant	mostly
	      for creating small excerpts.

	      See  --stream-record  for	 various  caveats that mostly apply to
	      this command too,	as both	use the	same underlying	code for writ-
	      ing the output file.

	      If  <filename>  is  an  empty  string,  an ongoing dump-cache is

	      If <end> is no, then continuous dumping is enabled. Then,	 after
	      dumping the existing parts of the	cache, anything	read from net-
	      work is appended to the cache as well. This behaves  similar  to
	      --stream-record (although	it does	not conflict with that option,
	      and they can be both active at the same time).

	      If the <end> time	is after the cache,  the  command  will	 _not_
	      wait and write newly received data to it.

	      The  end of the resulting	file may be slightly damaged or	incom-
	      plete at the end.	(Not enough effort was made to ensure that the
	      end lines	up properly.)

	      Note  that this command will finish only once dumping ends. That
	      means it works similar to	the screenshot command,	just  that  it
	      can  block  much longer. If continuous dumping is	used, the com-
	      mand will	not finish until playback is stopped,  an  error  hap-
	      pens,  another  dump-cache  command  is  run,  or	 an  API  like
	      mp.abort_async_command was called	to explicitly  stop  the  com-
	      mand. See	Synchronous vs.	Asynchronous.

		 This was mostly created for network streams. For local	files,
		 there may be much better methods to create excerpts and such.
		 There	are  tons of much more user-friendly Lua scripts, that
		 will reencode parts of	a file by spawning a separate instance
		 of ffmpeg. With network streams, this is not that easily pos-
		 sible,	as the stream would have to be downloaded again.  Even
		 if  --stream-record is	used to	record the stream to the local
		 filesystem, there may be problems, because the	recorded  file
		 is still written to.

	      This  command  is	 experimental,	and  all  details about	it may
	      change in	the future.

       ab-loop-dump-cache <filename>
	      Essentially calls	dump-cache with	the current AB-loop points  as
	      arguments.  Like	dump-cache,  this  will	 overwrite the file at
	      <filename>. Likewise, if the B point is set to no, it will enter
	      continuous dumping after the existing cache was dumped.

	      The  author  reserves the	right to remove	this command if	enough
	      motivation is found to move this functionality to	a trivial  Lua

	      Re-adjust	 the  A/B  loop	points to the start and	end within the
	      cache the	ab-loop-dump-cache command will	(probably) dump. Basi-
	      cally,  it aligns	the times on keyframes.	The guess might	be off
	      especially at the	end (due to granularity	issues due  to	remux-
	      ing).  If	 the  cache shrinks in the meantime, the points	set by
	      the command will not be the effective parameters either.

	      This  command  has  an   even   more   uncertain	 future	  than
	      ab-loop-dump-cache  and  might  disappear	without	replacement if
	      the author decides it's useless.

       Undocumented commands: ao-reload	(experimental/internal).

   List	of events
       This  is	 a  partial  list  of  events.	This  section  describes  what
       mpv_event_to_node()  returns,  and which	is what	scripting APIs and the
       JSON IPC	sees. Note that	the C API has  separate	 C-level  declarations
       with mpv_event, which may be slightly different.

       Note  that  events  are asynchronous: the player	core continues running
       while events are	delivered to scripts and other clients.	In some	cases,
       you can hooks to	enforce	synchronous execution.

       All events can have the following fields:

       event  Name as the event	(as returned by	mpv_event_name()).

       id     The  reply_userdata field	(opaque	user value). If	reply_userdata
	      is 0, the	field is not added.

       error  Set to an	error string (as returned by mpv_error_string()). This
	      field  is	 missing  if no	error happened,	or the event type does
	      not report error.	 Most events leave this	unset.

       This list uses the event	name field value, and  the  C  API  symbol  in

       start-file (MPV_EVENT_START_FILE)
	      Happens  right  before  a	 new  file is loaded. When you receive
	      this, the	player is loading the file (or possibly	 already  done
	      with it).

	      This has the following fields:

		     Playlist entry ID of the file being loaded	now.

       end-file	(MPV_EVENT_END_FILE)
	      Happens  after  a	 file was unloaded. Typically, the player will
	      load the next file right away, or	quit  if  this	was  the  last

	      The event	has the	following fields:

	      reason Has one of	these values:

		     eof    The	file has ended.	This can (but doesn't have to)
			    include incomplete files or	broken network connec-
			    tions under	circumstances.

		     stop   Playback was ended by a command.

		     quit   Playback was ended by sending the quit command.

		     error  An error happened. In this case, an	error field is
			    present with the error string.

			    Happens with playlists and	similar.  Details  see

			    Unknown.  Normally	doesn't	happen,	unless the Lua
			    API	is out of sync with the	C API.	(Likewise,  it
			    could  happen that your script gets	reason strings
			    that did not exist yet at the time your script was

		     Playlist  entry  ID  of the file that was being played or
		     attempted to be played. This has the same	value  as  the
		     playlist_entry_id	field  in the corresponding start-file

		     Set to mpv	error string describing	the approximate	reason
		     why  playback  failed.  Unset  if no error	known. (In Lua
		     scripting,	this value was set  on	the  error  field  di-
		     rectly.  This is deprecated since mpv 0.33.0.  In the fu-
		     ture, this	error field will be unset  for	this  specific

		     If	loading	ended, because the playlist entry to be	played
		     was for example a playlist, and the current playlist  en-
		     try  is replaced with a number of other entries. This may
		     happen at least with MPV_END_FILE_REASON_REDIRECT	(other
		     event  types  may use this	for similar but	different pur-
		     poses in the future). In  this  case,  playlist_insert_id
		     will  be  set  to	the playlist entry ID of the first in-
		     serted entry, and playlist_insert_num_entries to the  to-
		     tal  number  of  inserted	playlist entries. Note this in
		     this specific case, the ID	of the last inserted entry  is
		     playlist_insert_id+num-1.	 Beware	that depending on cir-
		     cumstances, you may observe the new playlist entries  be-
		     fore  seeing the event (e.g. reading the "playlist" prop-
		     erty or getting a property	change notification before re-
		     ceiving  the  event).   If	 this  is 0 in the C API, this
		     field isn't added.

		     See  playlist_insert_id.  Only  present  if  playlist_in-
		     sert_id is	present.

       file-loaded (MPV_EVENT_FILE_LOADED)
	      Happens after a file was loaded and begins playback.

       seek (MPV_EVENT_SEEK)
	      Happens  on  seeking.  (This might include cases when the	player
	      seeks internally,	even without user interaction.	This  includes
	      e.g.  segment  changes  when  playing  ordered chapters Matroska

       playback-restart	(MPV_EVENT_PLAYBACK_RESTART)
	      Start of playback	after seek or after file was loaded.

       shutdown	(MPV_EVENT_SHUTDOWN)
	      Sent when	the player quits, and  the  script  should  terminate.
	      Normally	handled	 automatically.	See Details on the script ini-
	      tialization and lifecycle.

       log-message (MPV_EVENT_LOG_MESSAGE)
	      Receives messages	enabled	with mpv_request_log_messages()	 (Lua:

	      This contains, in	addition to the	default	event fields, the fol-
	      lowing fields:

	      prefix The module	prefix,	identifies the sender of the  message.
		     This  is  what  the  terminal player puts in front	of the
		     message text when using the --v option, and is also  what
		     is	used for --msg-level.

	      level  The  log  level  as  string. See msg.log for possible log
		     level names.  Note	that later versions of mpv  might  add
		     new levels	or remove (undocumented) existing ones.

	      text   The log message. The text will end	with a newline charac-
		     ter. Sometimes it can contain multiple lines.

	      Keep in mind that	these messages are meant to be hints  for  hu-
	      mans.  You  should not parse them, and prefix/level/text of mes-
	      sages might change any time.

       hook   The event	has the	following fields:

		     ID	to pass	 to  mpv_hook_continue().  The	Lua  scripting
		     wrapper   provides	  a   better   API  around  this  with

       get-property-reply (MPV_EVENT_GET_PROPERTY_REPLY)
	      See C API.

       set-property-reply (MPV_EVENT_SET_PROPERTY_REPLY)
	      See C API.

       command-reply (MPV_EVENT_COMMAND_REPLY)
	      This is one of the commands for which the	`error field is	 mean-

	      JSON  IPC	 and  Lua  and possibly	other backends treat this spe-
	      cially and may not pass the actual event to the user. See	C API.

	      The event	has the	following fields:

	      result The result	(on success) of	any mpv_node type, if any.

       client-message (MPV_EVENT_CLIENT_MESSAGE)
	      Lua and possibly other backends treat this specially and may not
	      pass the actual event to the user.

	      The event	has the	following fields:

	      args   Array of strings with the message data.

       video-reconfig (MPV_EVENT_VIDEO_RECONFIG)
	      Happens on video output or filter	reconfig.

       audio-reconfig (MPV_EVENT_AUDIO_RECONFIG)
	      Happens on audio output or filter	reconfig.

       property-change (MPV_EVENT_PROPERTY_CHANGE)
	      Happens when a property that is being observed changes value.

	      The event	has the	following fields:

	      name   The name of the property.

	      data   The new value of the property.

       The  following  events also happen, but are deprecated: tracks-changed,
       track-switched, pause,  unpause,	 metadata-update,  idle,  tick,	 chap-
       ter-change. Use mpv_observe_property() (Lua: mp.observe_property()) in-

       Hooks are synchronous events between player core	and a script or	 simi-
       lar.  This  applies  to	client API (including the Lua scripting	inter-
       face). Normally,	events are supposed to be asynchronous,	and  the  hook
       API  provides  an awkward and obscure way to handle events that require
       stricter	coordination. There are	no API stability guarantees made.  Not
       following the protocol exactly can make the player freeze randomly. Ba-
       sically,	nobody should use this API.

       The C API is described in the header files. The Lua API is described in
       the Lua section.

       Before a	hook is	actually invoked on an API clients, it will attempt to
       return new values for all observed properties that were changed	before
       the  hook.  This	 may  make it easier for an application	to set defined
       "barriers" between property change notifications	by registering	hooks.
       (That means these hooks will have an effect, even if you	do nothing and
       make them continue immediately.)

       The following hooks are currently defined:

	      Called when a file is to be opened, before anything is  actually
	      done.    For   example,	you   could   read   and   write   the
	      stream-open-filename property to redirect	an  URL	 to  something
	      else (consider support for streaming sites which rarely give the
	      user a direct media URL),	or you could set per-file options with
	      by  setting  the	property file-local-options/<option name>. The
	      player will wait until all hooks are run.

	      Ordered after start-file and before playback-restart.

	      Called after after a file	has been opened, but failed  to.  This
	      can be used to provide a fallback	in case	native demuxers	failed
	      to recognize the file, instead of	always running before the  na-
	      tive  demuxers  like  on_load.  Demux  will  only	 be retried if
	      stream-open-filename was changed.	If it fails again,  this  hook
	      is _not_ called again, and loading definitely fails.

	      Ordered after on_load, and before	playback-restart and end-file.

	      Called  after  a file has	been opened, and before	tracks are se-
	      lected and decoders are created. This has	some usefulness	if  an
	      API  users  wants	to select tracks manually, based on the	set of
	      available	tracks.	It's also useful to initialize --lavfi-complex
	      in  a  specific way by API, without having to "probe" the	avail-
	      able streams at first.

	      Note that	this does not yet apply	default	track selection. Which
	      operations  exactly can be done and not be done, and what	infor-
	      mation is	available and what is not yet available	 yet,  is  all
	      subject to change.

	      Ordered after on_load_fail etc. and before playback-restart.

	      Run  before  closing  a file, and	before actually	uninitializing
	      everything. It's not possible to resume playback in this state.

	      Ordered before end-file. Will also  happen  in  the  error  case
	      (then after on_load_fail).

	      Run  before  a  start-file event is sent.	(If any	client changes
	      the current playlist entry, or  sends  a	quit  command  to  the
	      player,  the  corresponding event	will not actually happen after
	      the hook returns.)  Useful to drain property  changes  before  a
	      new file is loaded.

	      Run  after  an  end-file event. Useful to	drain property changes
	      after a file has finished.

   Input Command Prefixes
       These prefixes are placed between key name and the actual command. Mul-
       tiple prefixes can be specified.	They are separated by whitespace.

	      Use  the	default	behavior for this command. This	is the default
	      for input.conf commands. Some libmpv/scripting/IPC APIs  do  not
	      use this as default, but use no-osd instead.

       no-osd Do not use any OSD for this command.

	      If  possible,  show  a bar with this command. Seek commands will
	      show the progress	bar, property changing commands	may  show  the
	      newly set	value.

	      If possible, show	an OSD message with this command. Seek command
	      show the current playback	time, property changing	commands  show
	      the newly	set value as text.

	      Combine osd-bar and osd-msg.

       raw    Do  not  expand  properties  in string arguments.	(Like "${prop-
	      erty-name}".)  This is the default for some libmpv/scripting/IPC

	      All  string  arguments are expanded as described in Property Ex-
	      pansion.	This is	the default for	input.conf commands.

	      For some commands, keeping a key pressed doesn't run the command
	      repeatedly.  This	prefix forces enabling key repeat in any case.

       async  Allow asynchronous execution (if possible). Note that only a few
	      commands will support this (usually  this	 is  explicitly	 docu-
	      mented).	Some  commands are asynchronous	by default (or rather,
	      their effects might manifest after completion of	the  command).
	      The  semantics  of  this flag might change in the	future.	Set it
	      only if you don't	rely on	the  effects  of  this	command	 being
	      fully  realized  when  it	returns. See Synchronous vs. Asynchro-

       sync   Allow synchronous	execution (if possible).  Normally,  all  com-
	      mands  are  synchronous by default, but some are asynchronous by
	      default for compatibility	with older behavior.

       All of the osd prefixes are still overridden by the global  --osd-level

   Synchronous vs. Asynchronous
       The async and sync prefix matter	only for how the issuer	of the command
       waits on	the completion of the command. Normally	it does	not affect how
       the command behaves by itself. There are	the following cases:

       o Normal	 input.conf  commands are always run asynchronously. Slow run-
	 ning commands are queued up or	run in parallel.

       o "Multi" input.conf commands (1	key binding, concatenated with ;) will
	 be executed in	order, except for commands that	are async (either pre-
	 fixed with async, or async by default for some	commands).  The	 async
	 commands  are	run  in	a detached manner, possibly in parallel	to the
	 remaining sync	commands in the	list.

       o Normal	Lua and	libmpv commands	(e.g.  mpv_command())  are  run	 in  a
	 blocking  manner,  unless the async prefix is used, or	the command is
	 async by default. This	means in the sync case the caller will	block,
	 even if the core continues playback. Async mode runs the command in a
	 detached manner.

       o Async libmpv command API (e.g.	mpv_command_async()) never blocks  the
	 caller,  and  always notify their completion with a message. The sync
	 and async prefixes make no difference.

       o Lua also provides APIs	for running async commands, which behave simi-
	 lar to	the C counterparts.

       o In all	cases, async mode can still run	commands in a synchronous man-
	 ner, even in detached mode. This can for example happen in cases when
	 a  command  does  not have an	asynchronous implementation. The async
	 libmpv	API still never	blocks the caller in these cases.

       Before mpv 0.29.0, the async prefix was only used  by  screenshot  com-
       mands,  and  made  them	run the	file saving code in a detached manner.
       This is the default now,	and async changes behavior only	 in  the  ways
       mentioned above.

       Currently the following commands	have different waiting characteristics
       with sync vs. async: sub-add, audio-add,	sub-reload, audio-reload, res-
       can-external-files,    screenshot,    screenshot-to-file,   dump-cache,

   Asynchronous	command	details
       On the API level, every asynchronous command is bound  to  the  context
       which  started  it.  For	 example,  an  asynchronous command started by
       mpv_command_async is bound to the mpv_handle passed  to	the  function.
       Only    this    mpv_handle   receives   the   completion	  notification
       (MPV_EVENT_COMMAND_REPLY), and only this	handle can abort a still  run-
       ning  command  directly.	If the mpv_handle is destroyed,	any still run-
       ning async. commands started by it are terminated.

       The scripting APIs and JSON IPC give each script/connection its own im-
       plicit mpv_handle.

       If the player is	closed,	the core may abort all pending async. commands
       on its own (like	a forced mpv_abort_async_command() call	for each pend-
       ing  command  on	behalf of the API user). This happens at the same time
       MPV_EVENT_SHUTDOWN is sent, and there is	no way to prevent this.

   Input Sections
       Input sections group a set of bindings, and enable or disable  them  at
       once.  In input.conf, each key binding is assigned to an	input section,
       rather than actually having explicit text sections.

       See also: enable-section	and disable-section commands.

       Predefined bindings:

	      Bindings without input section are implicitly assigned  to  this
	      section. It is enabled by	default	during normal playback.

       encode Section  which  is active	in encoding mode. It is	enabled	exclu-
	      sively, so that bindings in the default sections are ignored.

       Properties are used to set mpv options during runtime, or to query  ar-
       bitrary	information.  They  can	 be manipulated	with the set/add/cycle
       commands, and retrieved with show-text,	or  anything  else  that  uses
       property	expansion. (See	Property Expansion.)

       The property name is annotated with RW to indicate whether the property
       is generally writable.

       If an option is referenced, the property	will normally take/return  ex-
       actly  the  same	 values	 as the	option.	In these cases,	properties are
       merely a	way to change an option	at runtime.

   Property list
	  Most options can be set as runtime via properties as well. Just  re-
	  move	the  leading --	from the option	name. These are	not documented
	  below, see OPTIONS instead. Only properties which do	not  exist  as
	  option  with	the  same  name, or which have very different behavior
	  from the options are documented below.

	  Properties marked as (RW) are	writeable, while those that aren't are

       audio-speed-correction, video-speed-correction
	      Factor  multiplied  with	speed  at which	the player attempts to
	      play the file. Usually it's exactly 1. (Display sync  mode  will
	      make this	useful.)

	      OSD  formatting  will  display it	in the form of +1.23456%, with
	      the number being (raw - 1) * 100	for  the  given	 raw  property

	      Whether --video-sync=display is actually active.

	      Currently	 played	 file,	with path stripped. If this is an URL,
	      try to undo percent encoding as well. (The result	is not	neces-
	      sarily  correct,	but looks better for display purposes. Use the
	      path property to get an unmodified filename.)

	      This has a sub-property:

		     Like the filename property, but if	the text contains a .,
		     strip all text after the last .. Usually this removes the
		     file extension.

	      Length in	bytes of the source file/stream. (This is the same  as
	      ${stream-end}.  For segmented/multi-part files, this will	return
	      the size of the main or manifest file, whatever it is.)

	      Total number of frames in	current	file.

		 This is only an estimate. (It's computed from two  unreliable
		 quantities: fps and stream length.)

	      Number of	current	frame in current stream.

		 This  is only an estimate. (It's computed from	two unreliable
		 quantities: fps and possibly rounded timestamps.)

       path   Full path	of the currently played	file. Usually this is  exactly
	      the same string you pass on the mpv command line or the loadfile
	      command, even if it's a relative path. If	you expect an absolute
	      path, you	will have to determine it yourself, for	example	by us-
	      ing the working-directory	property.

	      The full path to the currently played media. This	 is  different
	      from path	only in	special	cases. In particular, if --ytdl=yes is
	      used, and	the URL	is detected by	youtube-dl,  then  the	script
	      will  set	 this  property	to the actual media URL. This property
	      should be	set only during	the  on_load  or  on_load_fail	hooks,
	      otherwise	 it will have no effect	(or may	do something implemen-
	      tation defined in	the future). The property is reset if playback
	      of the current media ends.

	      If the currently played file has a title tag, use	that.

	      Otherwise, return	the filename property.

	      Symbolic	name  of  the  file  format.  In some cases, this is a
	      comma-separated	list   of   format   names,   e.g.   mp4    is
	      mov,mp4,m4a,3gp,3g2,mj2 (the list	may grow in the	future for any

	      Name of the current demuxer. (This is useless.)

	      (Renamed from demuxer.)

	      Filename (full path) of the  stream  layer  filename.  (This  is
	      probably useless and is almost never different from path.)

	      Raw  byte	 position  in source stream. Technically, this returns
	      the position of the most recent packet passed to a decoder.

	      Raw end position in bytes	in source stream.

	      Duration of the current file in seconds. If the duration is  un-
	      known,  the property is unavailable. Note	that the file duration
	      is not always exactly known, so this is an estimate.

	      This replaces the	length property, which	was  deprecated	 after
	      the mpv 0.9 release. (The	semantics are the same.)

       avsync Last  A/V	 synchronization  difference.  Unavailable if audio or
	      video is disabled.

	      Total A-V	sync correction	done. Unavailable if audio or video is

	      Video frames dropped by decoder, because video is	too far	behind
	      audio (when using	--framedrop=decoder). Sometimes, this  may  be
	      incremented  in  other  situations,  e.g.	when video packets are
	      damaged, or the decoder doesn't follow the usual rules. Unavail-
	      able if video is disabled.

	      drop-frame-count is a deprecated alias.

	      Frames dropped by	VO (when using --framedrop=vo).

	      vo-drop-frame-count is a deprecated alias.

	      Number  of  video	 frames	 that were not timed correctly in dis-
	      play-sync	mode for the sake of keeping A/V sync. This  does  not
	      include  external	 circumstances,	 such as video rendering being
	      too slow or the graphics driver somehow  skipping	 a  vsync.  It
	      does  not	include	rounding errors	either (which can happen espe-
	      cially with bad source timestamps). For example, using the  dis-
	      play-desync mode should never change this	value from 0.

	      For  how	many  vsyncs  a	frame is displayed on average. This is
	      available	if display-sync	is active only.	For 30 FPS video on  a
	      60 Hz screen, this will be 2. This is the	moving average of what
	      actually has been	scheduled, so 24 FPS on	60 Hz will  never  re-
	      main exactly on 2.5, but jitter depending	on the last frame dis-

	      Estimated	number of frames delayed due to	external circumstances
	      in  display-sync	mode.  Note  that in general, mpv has to guess
	      that this	is happening, and the guess can	be inaccurate.

       percent-pos (RW)
	      Position in current file (0-100).	The advantage over using  this
	      instead  of  calculating	it  out	of other properties is that it
	      properly falls back to estimating	the playback position from the
	      byte position, if	the file duration is not known.

       time-pos	(RW)
	      Position in current file in seconds.

	      Deprecated.  Always returns 0. Before mpv	0.14, this used	to re-
	      turn the start time of the file  (could  affect  e.g.  transport
	      streams).	See --rebase-start-time	option.

	      Remaining	 length	of the file in seconds.	Note that the file du-
	      ration is	not always exactly known, so this is an	estimate.

	      Current audio playback position in current file in seconds.  Un-
	      like  time-pos, this updates more	often than once	per frame. For
	      audio-only files,	it is mostly equivalent	to time-pos, while for
	      video-only files this property is	not available.

	      time-remaining scaled by the current speed.

       playback-time (RW)
	      Position	in  current file in seconds. Unlike time-pos, the time
	      is clamped to the	range of the file. (Inaccurate file  durations
	      etc.  could  make	it go out of range. Useful on attempts to seek
	      outside of the file, as the seek target time is  considered  the
	      current position during seeking.)

       chapter (RW)
	      Current chapter number. The number of the	first chapter is 0.

       edition (RW)
	      Current MKV edition number. Setting this property	to a different
	      value will restart playback. The number of the first edition  is

	      Before  mpv  0.31.0,  this showed	the actual edition selected at
	      runtime, if you didn't set the option or property	manually. With
	      mpv  0.31.0 and later, this strictly returns the user-set	option
	      or property value, and the current-edition property was added to
	      return  the  runtime  selected edition (this matters with	--edi-
	      tion=auto, the default).

	      Currently	selected edition. This property	is unavailable	if  no
	      file  is	loaded,	 or  the file has no editions. (Matroska files
	      make a difference	between	having no editions and a  single  edi-
	      tion, which will be reflected by the property, although in prac-
	      tice it does not matter.)

	      Number of	chapters.

	      Number of	MKV editions.

	      List of editions,	current	entry marked. Currently, the raw prop-
	      erty value is useless.

	      This  has	a number of sub-properties. Replace N with the 0-based
	      edition index.

		     Number of editions. If there are no editions, this	can be
		     0 or 1 (1 if there's a useless dummy edition).

	      edition-list/N/id	(RW)
		     Edition  ID as integer. Use this to set the edition prop-
		     erty.  Currently, this is the same	as the edition index.

		     Whether this is the default edition.

		     Edition title as stored in	the file.  Not	always	avail-

	      When  querying  the  property with the client API	using MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

		     MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP (for each edition)
			 "id"		     MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "title"	     MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "default"	     MPV_FORMAT_FLAG

	      Metadata key/value pairs.

	      If  the  property	is accessed with Lua's mp.get_property_native,
	      this returns a table with	metadata keys mapping to metadata val-
	      ues.  If	it  is	accessed  with	the client API,	this returns a
	      MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP, with	tag keys mapping to tag	values.

	      For OSD, it returns a formatted list. Trying  to	retrieve  this
	      property as a raw	string doesn't work.

	      This has a number	of sub-properties:

		     Value of metadata entry <key>.

		     Number of metadata	entries.

		     Key  name	of the Nth metadata entry. (The	first entry is

		     Value of the Nth metadata entry.

		     Old version of metadata/by-key/<key>. Use is discouraged,
		     because the metadata key string could conflict with other

	      The layout of this property might	be subject to change.  Sugges-
	      tions are	welcome	how exactly this property should work.

	      When  querying  the  property with the client API	using MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

		     (key and string value for each metadata entry)

	      Like  metadata,  but  includes  only fields listed in the	--dis-
	      play-tags	option.	This is	the same set of	tags that  is  printed
	      to the terminal.

	      Metadata of current chapter. Works similar to metadata property.
	      It also allows the same access methods (using sub-properties).

	      Per-chapter metadata is very rare.  Usually,  only  the  chapter
	      name (title) is set.

	      For  accessing  other  information,  like	chapter	start, see the
	      chapter-list property.

	      Metadata added by	video filters. Accessed	by the	filter	label,
	      which, if	not explicitly specified using the @filter-label: syn-
	      tax, will	be <filter-name>NN.

	      Works similar to metadata	property. It allows  the  same	access
	      methods (using sub-properties).

	      An  example of this kind of metadata are the cropping parameters
	      added by --vf=lavfi=cropdetect.

	      Equivalent to vf-metadata/<filter-label>,	but for	audio filters.

	      Returns yes/true if no file is loaded, but the player is staying
	      around because of	the --idle option.

	      (Renamed from idle.)

	      Whether  the playback core is paused. This can differ from pause
	      in special situations, such as when the player pauses itself due
	      to low network cache.

	      This also	returns	yes/true if playback is	restarting or if noth-
	      ing is playing at	all. In	other words,  it's  only  no/false  if
	      there's actually video playing. (Behavior	since mpv 0.7.0.)

	      Current  I/O  read  speed	 between the cache and the lower layer
	      (like network).  This gives the number bytes per seconds over  a
	      1	 second	window (using the type MPV_FORMAT_INT64	for the	client

	      This is the same as demuxer-cache-state/raw-input-rate.

	      Approximate duration of video buffered in	the demuxer,  in  sec-
	      onds.  The guess is very unreliable, and often the property will
	      not be available at all, even if data is buffered.

	      Approximate time of video	buffered in the	demuxer,  in  seconds.
	      Same as demuxer-cache-duration but returns the last timestamp of
	      buffered data in demuxer.

	      Whether the demuxer is idle, which means that the	demuxer	 cache
	      is  filled to the	requested amount, and is currently not reading
	      more data.

	      Each entry in seekable-ranges represents a region	in the demuxer
	      cache  that  can	be seeked to, with a start and end fields con-
	      taining the respective timestamps. If there are multiple	demux-
	      ers  active,  this only returns information about	the "main" de-
	      muxer, but might be changed in future to return unified informa-
	      tion  about all demuxers.	The ranges are in arbitrary order. Of-
	      ten, ranges will overlap for a bit,  before  being  joined.   In
	      broken corner cases, ranges may overlap all over the place.

	      The  end	of  a seek range is usually smaller than the value re-
	      turned by	the demuxer-cache-time property, because that property
	      returns the guessed buffering amount, while the seek ranges rep-
	      resent the buffered data that can	actually be  used  for	cached

	      bof-cached  indicates  whether  the  seek	 range with the	lowest
	      timestamp	points to the beginning	of the stream (BOF). This  im-
	      plies  you  cannot  seek before this position at all. eof-cached
	      indicates	whether	the seek  range	 with  the  highest  timestamp
	      points  to  the  end of the stream (EOF).	If both	bof-cached and
	      eof-cached are true, and there's only 1 cache range, the	entire
	      stream is	cached.

	      fw-bytes is the number of	bytes of packets buffered in the range
	      starting from the	current	decoding position. This	is a rough es-
	      timate  (may  not	 account  correctly for	various	overhead), and
	      stops at the demuxer position (it	ignores	seek ranges after it).

	      file-cache-bytes is the number  of  bytes	 stored	 in  the  file
	      cache.  This  includes  all  overhead,  and possibly unused data
	      (like pruned data). This member is missing  if  the  file	 cache
	      wasn't enabled with --cache-on-disk=yes.

	      cache-end	is demuxer-cache-time. Missing if unavailable.

	      reader-pts  is  the  approximate	timestamp  of the start	of the
	      buffered range. Missing if unavailable.

	      cache-duration is	demuxer-cache-duration.	 Missing  if  unavail-

	      raw-input-rate  is the estimated input rate of the network layer
	      (or any other byte-oriented input	layer) in  bytes  per  second.
	      May be inaccurate	or missing.

	      When  querying  the  property with the client API	using MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

		     "seekable-ranges"	 MPV_FORMAT_NODE_ARRAY
			     "start"		 MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
			     "end"		 MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
		     "bof-cached"	 MPV_FORMAT_FLAG
		     "eof-cached"	 MPV_FORMAT_FLAG
		     "fw-bytes"		 MPV_FORMAT_INT64
		     "file-cache-bytes"	 MPV_FORMAT_INT64
		     "cache-end"	 MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
		     "reader-pts"	 MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
		     "cache-duration"	 MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
		     "raw-input-rate"	 MPV_FORMAT_INT64

	      Other fields (might be changed or	removed	in the future):

	      eof    Whether the reader	thread has hit the end of the file.

		     Whether  the  reader thread could not satisfy a decoder's
		     request for a new packet.

	      idle   Whether the thread	is currently not reading.

		     Sum of packet bytes (plus some  overhead  estimation)  of
		     the   entire  packet  queue,  including  cached  seekable

	      Whether the stream demuxed via the main demuxer is  most	likely
	      played  via  network.  What  constitutes "network" is not	always
	      clear, might be used for other types of untrusted	streams, could
	      be wrong in certain cases, and its definition might be changing.
	      Also, external files (like separate audio	files or  streams)  do
	      not influence the	value of this property (currently).

	      The start	time reported by the demuxer in	fractional seconds.

	      Whether playback is paused because of waiting for	the cache.

	      The percentage (0-100) of	the cache fill status until the	player
	      will unpause (related to paused-for-cache).

	      Whether the end of playback was reached. Note that this is  usu-
	      ally interesting only if --keep-open is enabled, since otherwise
	      the player will immediately play the next	file (or exit or enter
	      idle  mode),  and	 in  these cases the eof-reached property will
	      logically	be cleared immediately after it's set.

	      Whether the player is currently seeking, or otherwise trying  to
	      restart  playback. (It's possible	that it	returns	yes/true while
	      a	file is	loaded.	This is	because	the same  underlying  code  is
	      used for seeking and resyncing.)

	      Whether the audio	mixer is active.

	      This  option  is relatively useless. Before mpv 0.18.1, it could
	      be used to infer behavior	of the volume property.

       ao-volume (RW)
	      System volume. This property is available	only if	mpv audio out-
	      put  is currently	active,	and only if the	underlying implementa-
	      tion supports volume control. What this option does  depends  on
	      the  API.	 For example, on ALSA this usually changes system-wide
	      audio, while with	PulseAudio this	controls per-application  vol-

       ao-mute (RW)
	      Similar  to ao-volume, but controls the mute state. May be unim-
	      plemented	even if	ao-volume works.

	      Audio codec selected for decoding.

	      Audio codec.

	      Audio format as output by	the audio decoder.  This has a	number
	      of sub-properties:

		     The  sample format	as string. This	uses the same names as
		     used in other places of mpv.


		     The channel layout	as a string. This is similar  to  what
		     the --audio-channels accepts.

		     As	 channels,  but	instead	of the possibly	cryptic	actual
		     layout sent to the	audio device, return a hopefully  more
		     human     readable	    form.      (Usually	   only	   au-
		     dio-out-params/hr-channels	makes sense.)

		     Number of audio channels. This is redundant to the	 chan-
		     nels field	described above.

	      When  querying  the  property with the client API	using MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

		     "format"		 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
		     "samplerate"	 MPV_FORMAT_INT64
		     "channels"		 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
		     "channel-count"	 MPV_FORMAT_INT64
		     "hr-channels"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING

	      Same  as audio-params, but the format of the data	written	to the
	      audio API.

	      Redirects	to video-params/colormatrix. This parameter  (as  well
	      as similar ones) can be overridden with the format video filter.

	      See colormatrix.

	      See colormatrix.

       hwdec (RW)
	      Reflects the --hwdec option.

	      Writing to it may	change the currently used hardware decoder, if
	      possible.	 (Internally, the player may reinitialize the decoder,
	      and  will	perform	a seek to refresh the video properly.) You can
	      watch the	other hwdec properties to see whether  this  was  suc-

	      Unlike  in  mpv  0.9.x and before, this does not return the cur-
	      rently active hardware decoder. Since mpv	0.18.0,	 hwdec-current
	      is available for this purpose.

	      The current hardware decoding in use. If decoding	is active, re-
	      turn one of  the	values	used  by  the  hwdec  option/property.
	      no/false	indicates  software decoding. If no decoder is loaded,
	      the property is unavailable.

	      This returns the currently loaded	hardware  decoding/output  in-
	      terop  driver.   This  is	known only once	the VO has opened (and
	      possibly later). With some VOs (like gpu), this might  be	 never
	      known  in	advance, but only when the decoder attempted to	create
	      the hw decoder successfully. (Using --gpu-hwdec-interop can load
	      it  eagerly.) If there are multiple drivers loaded, they will be
	      separated	by ,.

	      If no VO is active or no interop driver is known,	this  property
	      is unavailable.

	      This  does  not  necessarily use the same	values as hwdec. There
	      can be multiple interop drivers for the same  hardware  decoder,
	      depending	on platform and	VO.

	      Video format as string.

	      Video codec selected for decoding.

       width, height
	      Video size. This uses the	size of	the video as decoded, or if no
	      video frame has been decoded yet,	the (possibly incorrect)  con-
	      tainer indicated size.

	      Video  parameters, as output by the decoder (with	overrides like
	      aspect etc. applied). This has a number of sub-properties:

		     The pixel format as string. This uses the same  names  as
		     used in other places of mpv.

		     The  underlying  pixel format as string. This is relevant
		     for some cases of hardware	decoding and unavailable  oth-

		     Average bits-per-pixel as integer.	Subsampled planar for-
		     mats use a	different resolution, which is the reason this
		     value  can	sometimes be odd or confusing. Can be unavail-
		     able with some formats.

	      video-params/w, video-params/h
		     Video size	as integers, with  no  aspect  correction  ap-

	      video-params/dw, video-params/dh
		     Video size	as integers, scaled for	correct	aspect ratio.

		     Display aspect ratio as float.

		     Pixel aspect ratio.

		     The  colormatrix  in use as string. (Exact	values subject
		     to	change.)

		     The colorlevels  as  string.  (Exact  values  subject  to

		     The  primaries in use as string. (Exact values subject to

		     The gamma function	in use as string. (Exact  values  sub-
		     ject to change.)

		     The video file's tagged signal peak as float.

		     The  light	type in	use as a string. (Exact	values subject
		     to	change.)

		     Chroma location  as  string.  (Exact  values  subject  to

		     Intended display rotation in degrees (clockwise).

		     Source  file  stereo  3D mode. (See the format video fil-
		     ter's stereo-in option.)

		     Alpha type. If the	format has no alpha channel, this will
		     be	 unavailable  (but in future releases, it could	change
		     to	no). If	alpha is present, this is set to  straight  or

	      When  querying  the  property with the client API	using MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

		     "pixelformat"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
		     "hw-pixelformat"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
		     "w"		 MPV_FORMAT_INT64
		     "h"		 MPV_FORMAT_INT64
		     "dw"		 MPV_FORMAT_INT64
		     "dh"		 MPV_FORMAT_INT64
		     "aspect"		 MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
		     "par"		 MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
		     "colormatrix"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
		     "colorlevels"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
		     "primaries"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
		     "gamma"		 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
		     "sig-peak"		 MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
		     "light"		 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
		     "chroma-location"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
		     "rotate"		 MPV_FORMAT_INT64
		     "stereo-in"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
		     "average-bpp"	 MPV_FORMAT_INT64
		     "alpha"		 MPV_FORMAT_STRING

       dwidth, dheight
	      Video display size. This is the video size after filters and as-
	      pect scaling have	been applied. The actual video window size can
	      still be different from this, e.g. if the	user resized the video
	      window manually.

	      These  have  the	same   values	as   video-out-params/dw   and

	      Exactly like video-params, but no	overrides applied.

	      Same as video-params, but	after video filters have been applied.
	      If there are no video filters in use, this will contain the same
	      values  as video-params. Note that this is still not necessarily
	      what the video window uses, since	the user can change the	window
	      size,  and  all real VOs do their	own scaling independently from
	      the filter chain.

	      Has the same sub-properties as video-params.

	      Approximate information of the current frame. Note that  if  any
	      of  these	are used on OSD, the information might be off by a few
	      frames due to OSD	redrawing and  frame  display  being  somewhat
	      disconnected, and	you might have to pause	and force a redraw.

	      This has a number	of sub-properties:

		     The type of the picture. It can be	"I" (intra), "P" (pre-
		     dicted), "B" (bi-dir predicted) or	unavailable.

		     Whether the content of the	frame is interlaced.

		     If	the content is interlaced, whether the	top  field  is
		     displayed first.

		     Whether the frame must be delayed when decoding.

	      Container	 FPS. This can easily contain bogus values. For	videos
	      that use modern container	formats	or video codecs, this will of-
	      ten be incorrect.

	      (Renamed from fps.)

	      Estimated/measured  FPS of the video filter chain	output.	(If no
	      filters are used,	this corresponds to decoder output.) This uses
	      the average of the 10 past frame durations to calculate the FPS.
	      It will be inaccurate if frame-dropping  is  involved  (such  as
	      when framedrop is	explicitly enabled, or after precise seeking).
	      Files with imprecise timestamps (such as Matroska) might lead to
	      unstable results.

       window-scale (RW)
	      Window  size multiplier. Setting this will resize	the video win-
	      dow to the values	contained in  dwidth  and  dheight  multiplied
	      with  the	value set with this property. Setting 1	will resize to
	      original video size (or to be exact, the size the	video  filters
	      output). 2 will set the double size, 0.5 halves the size.

	      See  current-window-scale	 for the value derived from the	actual
	      window size.

	      Since mpv	0.31.0,	this always returns the	previously  set	 value
	      (or  the default value), instead of the value implied by the ac-
	      tual window size.	 Before	mpv 0.31.0, this  returned  what  cur-
	      rent-window-scale	returns	now, after the window was created.

	      The  window-scale	value calculated from the current window size.
	      This has the same	value as window-scale if the window  size  was
	      not  changed  since  setting the option, and the window size was
	      not restricted in	other ways. The	property is unavailable	if  no
	      video is active.

	      Whether  the window has focus. Currently works only on X11, Way-
	      land and macOS.

	      Names of the displays that the mpv window	covers.	On X11,	 these
	      are  the	xrandr	names (LVDS1, HDMI1, DP1, VGA1,	etc.). On Win-
	      dows, these are the GDI names (\.DISPLAY1, \.DISPLAY2, etc.) and
	      the  first display in the	list will be the one that Windows con-
	      siders associated	with the window	(as determined by the Monitor-
	      FromWindow API.) On macOS	these are the Display Product Names as
	      used in the System Information and only one display name is  re-
	      turned since a window can	only be	on one screen.

	      The  refresh rate	of the current display.	Currently, this	is the
	      lowest FPS of any	display	covered	by the video, as retrieved  by
	      the  underlying  system APIs (e.g. xrandr	on X11). It is not the
	      measured FPS. It's not necessarily available on  all  platforms.
	      Note  that any of	the listed facts may change any	time without a

	      Writing to this property is deprecated. It has the  same	effect
	      as writing to override-display-fps. Since	mpv 0.31.0, this prop-
	      erty is unavailable if no	display	FPS was	reported (e.g.	if  no
	      video  is	 active),  while  in  older  versions, it returned the
	      --display-fps option value.

	      The actual rate at which display refreshes seem to  occur,  mea-
	      sured  by	 system	 time. Only available if display-sync mode (as
	      selected by --video-sync)	is active.

	      Estimated	deviation factor of the	vsync duration.

	      The HiDPI	scale factor as	reported by the	windowing backend.  If
	      no  VO  is  active,  or  if the VO does not report a value, this
	      property is unavailable.	It may be saner	to report an  absolute
	      DPI,  however,  this  is the way HiDPI support is	implemented on
	      most OS APIs. See	also --hidpi-window-scale.

       video-aspect (RW)
	      Deprecated. This is tied to --video-aspect-override, but	always
	      reports the current video	aspect if video	is active.

	      The  read	 and  write  components	of this	option can be split up
	      into video-params/aspect and video-aspect-override respectively.

       osd-width, osd-height
	      Last known OSD width (can	be 0). This is needed if you  want  to
	      use  the	overlay-add command. It	gives you the actual OSD size,
	      which can	be different from the window size in some cases.

	      Alias to osd-dimensions/w	and osd-dimensions/h.

	      Last known OSD display pixel aspect (can be 0).

	      Alias to osd-dimensions/osd-par.

	      Last known OSD dimensions.

	      Has the following	sub-properties (which can be read as  MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE or Lua table with mp.get_property_native):

		     Size  of  the VO window in	OSD render units (usually pix-
		     els, but may be scaled pixels with	VOs like xv).

		     Size of the VO window in OSD render units,

		     Pixel aspect ratio	of the OSD (usually 1).

		     Display aspect ratio of the VO  window.  (Computing  from
		     the properties above.)

	      osd-dimensions/mt, osd-dimensions/mb, osd-dimensions/ml, osd-di-
		     OSD to video margins (top,	bottom,	left, right). This de-
		     scribes the area into which the video is rendered.

	      Any  of these properties may be unavailable or set to dummy val-
	      ues if the VO window is not created or visible.

	      Read-only	- last known mouse position, normalizd to  OSD	dimen-

	      Has  the following sub-properties	(which can be read as MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE or Lua table with mp.get_property_native):

	      mouse-pos/x, mouse-pos/y
		     Last known	coordinates of the mouse pointer.

		     Boolean - whether the mouse pointer hovers	the video win-
		     dow. The coordinates should be ignored when this value is
		     false, because the	video backends update them  only  when
		     the pointer hovers	the window.

	      The  current subtitle text regardless of sub visibility. Format-
	      ting is stripped.	If the subtitle	is not text-based (i.e.	DVD/BD
	      subtitles), an empty string is returned.

	      This  property  is  experimental and might be removed in the fu-

	      Like sub-text, but return	the text in ASS	format.	Text subtitles
	      in other formats are converted. For native ASS subtitles,	events
	      that do not contain any text (but	vector drawings	etc.) are  not
	      filtered out. If multiple	events match with the current playback
	      time, they are concatenated with line breaks. Contains only  the
	      "Text" part of the events.

	      This  property  is not enough to render ASS subtitles correctly,
	      because ASS header and per-event metadata	are not	returned.  You
	      likely  need  to	do further filtering on	the returned string to
	      make it useful.

	      This property is experimental and	might be removed  in  the  fu-

	      The  current subtitle start time (in seconds). If	there's	multi-
	      ple current subtitles, returns the first start time. If no  cur-
	      rent subtitle is present null is returned	instead.

	      The  current subtitle end	time (in seconds). If there's multiple
	      current subtitles, return	the last end time. If no current  sub-
	      title  is	 present, or if	it's present but has unknown or	incor-
	      rect duration, null is returned instead.

       playlist-pos (RW)
	      Current position on playlist. The	first entry is on position  0.
	      Writing to this property may start playback at the new position.

	      In  some	cases,	this  is not necessarily the currently playing
	      file. See	explanation of current and playing flags in playlist.

	      If there the playlist is empty, or if it's non-empty, but	no en-
	      try is "current",	this property returns -1. Likewise, writing -1
	      will put the player into idle mode (or  exit  playback  if  idle
	      mode is not enabled). If an out of range index is	written	to the
	      property,	this behaves as	if writing -1.	 (Before  mpv  0.33.0,
	      instead  of  returning  -1,  this	property was unavailable if no
	      playlist entry was current.)

	      Writing the current value	back to	the  property  is  subject  to
	      change.  Currently, it will restart playback of the playlist en-
	      try. But in the future, writing the current value	 will  be  ig-
	      nored. Use the playlist-play-index command to get	guaranteed be-

       playlist-pos-1 (RW)
	      Same as playlist-pos, but	1-based.

       playlist-current-pos (RW)
	      Index of the "current" item on playlist. This usually,  but  not
	      necessarily,  the	 currently  playing  item  (see	playlist-play-
	      ing-pos).	Depending on the exact internal	state of  the  player,
	      it  may refer to the playlist item to play next, or the playlist
	      item used	to determine what to play next.

	      For reading, this	is exactly the same as playlist-pos.

	      For writing, this	only sets the position of the "current"	 item,
	      without stopping playback	of the current file (or	starting play-
	      back, if this is done in idle mode). Use -1 to remove  the  cur-
	      rent flag.

	      This property is only vaguely useful. If set during playback, it
	      will typically cause the playlist	entry after it	to  be	played
	      next.   Another	possibly  odd  observable  state  is  that  if
	      playlist-next is run during playback, this property  is  set  to
	      the  playlist  entry  to	play  next (unlike the previous	case).
	      There is an internal  flag  that	decides	 whether  the  current
	      playlist	entry  or the next one should be played, and this flag
	      is currently inaccessible	for API	users. (Whether	this  behavior
	      will kept	is possibly subject to change.)

	      Index  of	 the  "playing"	 item  on playlist. A playlist item is
	      "playing"	if it's	being loaded, actually playing,	or  being  un-
	      loaded.  This  property  is  set during the MPV_EVENT_START_FILE
	      (start-file) and the MPV_EVENT_START_END (end-file) events. Out-
	      side  of	that, it returns -1. If	the playlist entry was somehow
	      removed during playback, but playback hasn't stopped yet,	or  is
	      in  progress  of	being  stopped,	it also	returns	-1.  (This can
	      happen at	least during state transitions.)

	      In  the  "playing"  state,  this	is   usually   the   same   as
	      playlist-pos,  except  during state changes, or if playlist-cur-
	      rent-pos was written explicitly.

	      Number of	total playlist entries.

	      Playlist,	current	entry  marked.	Currently,  the	 raw  property
	      value is useless.

	      This  has	a number of sub-properties. Replace N with the 0-based
	      playlist entry index.

		     Number of playlist	entries	(same as playlist-count).

		     Filename of the Nth entry.

		     yes/true if the playlist-playing-pos property  points  to
		     this entry, no/false or unavailable otherwise.

		     yes/true  if  the playlist-current-pos property points to
		     this entry, no/false or unavailable otherwise.

		     Name of the Nth entry. Only  available  if	 the  playlist
		     file  contains such fields, and only if mpv's parser sup-
		     ports it for the given playlist format.

		     Unique ID for this	entry. This is	an  automatically  as-
		     signed integer ID that is unique for the entire life time
		     of	the current mpv	core instance. Other commands, events,
		     etc. use this as playlist_entry_id	fields.

	      When  querying  the  property with the client API	using MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

		     MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP (for each playlist entry)
			 "filename"  MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "current"   MPV_FORMAT_FLAG (might be missing;	since mpv 0.7.0)
			 "playing"   MPV_FORMAT_FLAG (same)
			 "title"     MPV_FORMAT_STRING (optional)
			 "id"	     MPV_FORMAT_INT64

	      List of audio/video/sub tracks, current entry marked. Currently,
	      the raw property value is	useless.

	      This has a number	of sub-properties. Replace N with the  0-based
	      track index.

		     Total number of tracks.

		     The  ID as	it's used for -sid/--aid/--vid.	This is	unique
		     within tracks of the  same	 type  (sub/audio/video),  but
		     otherwise not.

		     String  describing	 the  media type. One of audio,	video,

		     Track ID as used in the source file.  Not	always	avail-
		     able.  (It	 is missing if the format has no native	ID, if
		     the track is a pseudo-track that does not exist  in  this
		     way  in  the  actual file,	or if the format is handled by
		     libavformat, and the format was not whitelisted as	having
		     track IDs.)

		     Track  title  as  it  is  stored  in the file. Not	always

		     Track language as identified  by  the  file.  Not	always

		     yes/true if this is a video track that consists of	a sin-
		     gle picture, no/false or unavailable otherwise.  This  is
		     used  for	video tracks that are really attached pictures
		     in	audio files.

		     yes/true if the track has the default  flag  set  in  the
		     file, no/false or unavailable otherwise.

		     yes/true  if  the	track  has  the	forced flag set	in the
		     file, no/false or unavailable otherwise.

		     The codec name used by this track,	for example h264.  Un-
		     available in some rare cases.

		     yes/true  if  the	track is an external file, no/false or
		     unavailable otherwise. This is set	for separate  subtitle

		     The  filename  if the track is from an external file, un-
		     available otherwise.

		     yes/true if the track is currently	decoded,  no/false  or
		     unavailable otherwise.

		     It	 indicates  the	selection order	of tracks for the same
		     type.  If a track is not selected,	or is selected by  the
		     --lavfi-complex,	it  is	not  available.	 For  subtitle
		     tracks, 0 represents the sid, and 1 represents  the  sec-

		     The stream	index as usually used by the FFmpeg utilities.
		     Note that this can	be  potentially	 wrong	if  a  demuxer
		     other  than libavformat (--demuxer=lavf) is used. For mkv
		     files, the	index will usually match even if  the  default
		     (builtin)	demuxer	 is used, but there is no hard guaran-

		     If	this track is being decoded,  the  human-readable  de-
		     coder name,

	      track-list/N/demux-w, track-list/N/demux-h
		     Video  size  hint as indicated by the container. (Not al-
		     ways accurate.)

		     Number of audio channels as indicated by  the  container.
		     (Not  always accurate - in	particular, the	track could be
		     decoded as	a different number of channels.)

		     Channel layout as indicated by the	container. (Not	always

		     Audio sample rate as indicated by the container. (Not al-
		     ways accurate.)

		     Video FPS as indicated by the container. (Not always  ac-

		     Audio  average  bitrate,  in bits per second. (Not	always

		     Video clockwise rotation metadata,	in degrees.

		     Pixel aspect ratio.

	      track-list/N/audio-channels (deprecated)
		     Deprecated	alias for track-list/N/demux-channel-count.

	      track-list/N/replaygain-track-peak,	  track-list/N/replay-
		     Per-track	replaygain  values.  Only  available for audio
		     tracks  with  corresponding  information  stored  in  the
		     source file.

	      track-list/N/replaygain-album-peak,  track-list/N/replaygain-al-
		     Per-album replaygain values. If the  file	has  per-track
		     but  no  per-album	information, the per-album values will
		     be	copied from the	per-track values currently. It's  pos-
		     sible that	future mpv versions will make these properties
		     unavailable instead in this case.

	      When querying the	property with the client  API  using  MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

		     MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP (for each track)
			 "id"		     MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "type"		     MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "src-id"	     MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "title"	     MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "lang"		     MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "albumart"	     MPV_FORMAT_FLAG
			 "default"	     MPV_FORMAT_FLAG
			 "forced"	     MPV_FORMAT_FLAG
			 "selected"	     MPV_FORMAT_FLAG
			 "main-selection"    MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "external"	     MPV_FORMAT_FLAG
			 "external-filename" MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "codec"	     MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "ff-index"	     MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "decoder-desc"	     MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "demux-w"	     MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "demux-h"	     MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "demux-channel-count" MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "demux-channels"    MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "demux-samplerate"  MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "demux-fps"	     MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
			 "demux-bitrate"     MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "demux-rotation"    MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "demux-par"	     MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
			 "audio-channels"    MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "replaygain-track-peak" MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
			 "replaygain-track-gain" MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
			 "replaygain-album-peak" MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE
			 "replaygain-album-gain" MPV_FORMAT_DOUBLE

	      This gives access	to currently selected tracks. It redirects  to
	      the correct entry	in track-list.

	      The following sub-entries	are defined: video, audio, sub,	sub2

	      For example, current-tracks/audio/lang returns the current audio
	      track's language field (the same value as	track-list/N/lang).

	      A	sub-entry is accessible	only if	a track	of that	type is	 actu-
	      ally selected.  Tracks selected via --lavfi-complex never	appear
	      under this property.   current-tracks  and  current-tracks/  are
	      currently	not accessible,	and will not return anything.

	      Scripts  etc.  should  not use this. They	should use track-list,
	      loop over	all tracks, and	inspect	the  selected  field  to  test
	      whether  a  track	 is  selected  (or compare the id field	to the
	      video / audio etc.  options).

	      List of chapters,	current	entry marked. Currently, the raw prop-
	      erty value is useless.

	      This  has	a number of sub-properties. Replace N with the 0-based
	      chapter index.

		     Number of chapters.

		     Chapter title as stored in	the file.  Not	always	avail-

		     Chapter start time	in seconds as float.

	      When  querying  the  property with the client API	using MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

		     MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP (for each chapter)

       af, vf (RW)
	      See --vf/--af and	the vf/af command.

	      When  querying  the  property with the client API	using MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

		     MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP (for each filter entry)
			 "name"	     MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "label"     MPV_FORMAT_STRING [optional]
			 "enabled"   MPV_FORMAT_FLAG [optional]
			 "params"    MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP [optional]
			     "key"   MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			     "value" MPV_FORMAT_STRING

	      It's also	possible to write the property using this format.

	      Whether it's generally possible to seek in the current file.

	      Whether  the  current  file is considered	seekable, but only be-
	      cause the	cache is active. This means small relative  seeks  may
	      be  fine,	 but larger seeks may fail anyway. Whether a seek will
	      succeed or not is	generally not known in advance.

	      If this property returns yes/true, so will seekable.

	      Whether playback is stopped or is	to be stopped. (Useful in  ob-
	      scure  situations	 like during on_load hook processing, when the
	      user can stop playback, but the script  has  to  explicitly  end

       cursor-autohide (RW)
	      See  --cursor-autohide.  Setting this to a new value will	always
	      update the cursor, and reset the internal	timer.

	      Inserts the current OSD symbol as	opaque OSD control code	 (cc).
	      This  makes  sense  only	with  the show-text command or options
	      which set	OSD messages.  The control code	is implementation spe-
	      cific and	is useless for anything	else.

	      ${osd-ass-cc/0}  disables	escaping ASS sequences of text in OSD,
	      ${osd-ass-cc/1} enables it again.	By default, ASS	sequences  are
	      escaped  to  avoid  accidental formatting, and this property can
	      disable this behavior. Note that the properties return an	opaque
	      OSD  control code, which only makes sense	for the	show-text com-
	      mand or options which set	OSD messages.


		 o --osd-status-msg='This is ${osd-ass-cc/0}{\\b1}bold text'

		 o show-text "This is ${osd-ass-cc/0}{\b1}bold text"

	      Any ASS override tags as understood by libass can	be used.

	      Note that	you need to escape the \ character, because the	string
	      is processed for C escape	sequences before passing it to the OSD

	      A	    list     of	    tags     can      be      found	 here:

	      Whether the VO is	configured right now. Usually this corresponds
	      to whether the video window is visible.  If  the	--force-window
	      option is	used, this usually always returns yes/true.

	      Contains	introspection  about the VO's active render passes and
	      their execution times. Not implemented by	all VOs.

	      This is further subdivided into two frame	types, vo-passes/fresh
	      for  fresh  frames (which	have to	be uploaded, scaled, etc.) and
	      vo-passes/redraw for redrawn  frames  (which  only  have	to  be
	      re-painted).   The  number  of  passes for any given subtype can
	      change from frame	to frame, and should not be relied upon.

	      Each frame type has a number of further sub-properties.  Replace
	      TYPE  with  the frame type, N with the 0-based pass index, and M
	      with the 0-based sample index.

		     Number of passes.

		     Human-friendy description of the pass.

		     Last measured execution time, in nanoseconds.

		     Average execution time of this pass, in nanoseconds.  The
		     exact  timeframe  varies,	but  it	 should	generally be a
		     handful of	seconds.

		     The peak execution	time (highest value) within this aver-
		     aging range, in nanoseconds.

		     The number	of samples for this pass.

		     The  raw  execution  time	of  a specific sample for this
		     pass, in nanoseconds.

	      When querying the	property with the client  API  using  MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

			 "desc"	   MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "last"	   MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "avg"	   MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "peak"	   MPV_FORMAT_INT64
			 "count"   MPV_FORMAT_INT64

	      Note that	directly accessing this	structure via subkeys  is  not
	      supported,  the  only  access is through aforementioned MPV_FOR-

	      Further performance data.	Querying this property triggers	inter-
	      nal  collection of some data, and	may slow down the player. Each
	      query will reset some internal state. Property change  notifica-
	      tion  doesn't and	won't work.  All of this may change in the fu-
	      ture, so don't use this. The builtin stats script	is supposed to
	      be  the  only user; since	it's bundled and built with the	source
	      code, it can use knowledge of mpv	internal to render the	infor-
	      mation properly. See stats script	description for	some details.

       video-bitrate, audio-bitrate, sub-bitrate
	      Bitrate values calculated	on the packet level. This works	by di-
	      viding the bit size of all  packets  between  two	 keyframes  by
	      their presentation timestamp distance. (This uses	the timestamps
	      are stored in the	file, so e.g. playback speed does  not	influ-
	      ence the returned	values.) In particular,	the video bitrate will
	      update only per keyframe,	and show the "past" bitrate.  To  make
	      the  property  more UI friendly, updates to these	properties are
	      throttled	in a certain way.

	      The unit is bits per second. OSD formatting turns	 these	values
	      in  kilobits  (or	 megabits,  if appropriate), which can be pre-
	      vented by	using the raw property value, e.g.  with  ${=video-bi-

	      Note  that  the  accuracy	of these properties is influenced by a
	      few factors.  If the underlying demuxer rewrites the packets  on
	      demuxing	(done  for  some  file	formats), the bitrate might be
	      slightly off. If timestamps are bad  or  jittery	(like  in  Ma-
	      troska),	even  constant	bitrate	streams	might show fluctuating

	      How exactly these	values are calculated might change in the  fu-

	      In  earlier  versions of mpv, these properties returned a	static
	      (but bad)	guess using a completely different method.

       packet-video-bitrate, packet-audio-bitrate, packet-sub-bitrate
	      Old and deprecated properties for	video-bitrate,	audio-bitrate,
	      sub-bitrate. They	behave exactly the same, but return a value in
	      kilobits.	Also, they don't have any OSD formatting,  though  the
	      same can be achieved with	e.g. ${=video-bitrate}.

	      These properties shouldn't be used anymore.

	      The  list	 of  discovered	 audio devices.	This is	mostly for use
	      with the client API, and reflects	what --audio-device=help  with
	      the command line player returns.

	      When  querying  the  property with the client API	using MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

		     MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP (for each device entry)
			 "name"		 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "description"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING

	      The  name	 is  what is to	be passed to the --audio-device	option
	      (and often a rather cryptic audio	API-specific  ID),  while  de-
	      scription	 is  human readable free form text. The	description is
	      set to the device	name (minus mpv-specific <driver>/ prefix)  if
	      no  description  is available or the description would have been
	      an empty string.

	      The special entry	with the name set to auto selects the  default
	      audio output driver and the default device.

	      The property can be watched with the property observation	mecha-
	      nism in the client API and in Lua	scripts. (Technically,	change
	      notification is enabled the first	time this property is read.)

       audio-device (RW)
	      Set the audio device. This directly reads/writes the --audio-de-
	      vice option, but on write	accesses, the  audio  output  will  be
	      scheduled	for reloading.

	      Writing  this  property while no audio output is active will not
	      automatically enable audio. (This	is also	true in	the case  when
	      audio  was disabled due to reinitialization failure after	a pre-
	      vious write access to audio-device.)

	      This property also doesn't tell you which	audio device is	 actu-
	      ally in use.

	      How these	details	are handled may	change in the future.

	      Current video output driver (name	as used	with --vo).

	      Current audio output driver (name	as used	with --ao).

       shared-script-properties	(RW)
	      This  is	a  key/value  map  of arbitrary	strings	shared between
	      scripts for general use. The player itself does not use any data
	      in  it  (although	some builtin scripts may). The property	is not
	      preserved	across player restarts.

	      This is very primitive, inefficient, and annoying	to use.	It's a
	      makeshift	 solution  which  could	go away	any time (for example,
	      when a better solution becomes available). This is also why this
	      property has an annoying name. You should	avoid using it,	unless
	      you absolutely have to.

	      Lua      scripting      has      helpers	    starting	  with
	      utils.shared_script_property_.   They  are  undocumented because
	      you should not use this property.	If you still think  you	 must,
	      you should use the helpers instead of the	property directly.

	      You  are	supposed  to use the change-list command to modify the
	      contents.	 Reading, modifying, and writing the property manually
	      could data loss if two scripts update different keys at the same
	      time due to lack of synchronization. The Lua helpers  take  care
	      of this.

	      (There is	no way to ensure synchronization if two	scripts	try to
	      update the same key at the same time.)

	      The working directory of the mpv process.	Can be useful for JSON
	      IPC  users,  because  the	command	line player usually works with
	      relative paths.

	      List of protocol prefixes	potentially recognized by the  player.
	      They  are	 returned  without trailing ://	suffix (which is still
	      always required).	 In some cases,	the protocol will not actually
	      be  supported (consider https if ffmpeg is not compiled with TLS

	      List of decoders supported. This lists  decoders	which  can  be
	      passed to	--vd and --ad.

	      codec  Canonical codec name, which identifies the	format the de-
		     coder can handle.

	      driver The name of the decoder itself. Often, this is  the  same
		     as	 codec.	  Sometimes it can be different. It is used to
		     distinguish multiple decoders for the same	codec.

		     Human readable description	of the decoder and codec.

	      When querying the	property with the client  API  using  MPV_FOR-
	      MAT_NODE,	or with	Lua mp.get_property_native, this will return a
	      mpv_node with the	following contents:

		     MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP (for each decoder entry)
			 "codec"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "driver"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING
			 "description"	 MPV_FORMAT_STRING

	      List of libavcodec encoders. This	has the	 same  format  as  de-
	      coder-list.  The encoder names (driver entries) can be passed to
	      --ovc and	--oac (without the lavc: prefix	required by  --vd  and

	      List  of available libavformat demuxers' names. This can be used
	      to check for support for a specific format  or  use  with	 --de-

	      List of Key names, same as output	by --input-keylist.

	      The  mpv	version/copyright  string. Depending on	how the	binary
	      was built, it might contain either a release version, or just  a
	      git hash.

	      The  configuration arguments which were passed to	the build sys-
	      tem (typically the way ./waf configure ... was invoked).

	      The contents of the av_version_info() API	call. This is a	string
	      which identifies the build in some way, either through a release
	      version number, or a git hash. This applies  to  Libav  as  well
	      (the  property  is  still	 named the same.) This property	is un-
	      available	if mpv is linked against older FFmpeg and  Libav  ver-

	      The  value of ass_library_version(). This	is an integer, encoded
	      in a somewhat weird form (apparently "hex	BCD"), indicating  the
	      release version of the libass library linked to mpv.

       options/<name> (RW)
	      The  value  of  option  --<name>.	Most options can be changed at
	      runtime by writing to this property. Note	that many options  re-
	      quire reloading the file for changes to take effect. If there is
	      an equivalent property, prefer setting the property instead.

	      There shouldn't be any reason to access  options/<name>  instead
	      of  <name>,  except  in  situations in which the properties have
	      different	behavior or conflicting	semantics.

       file-local-options/<name> (RW)
	      Similar to options/<name>, but when setting  an  option  through
	      this  property,  the  option  is reset to	its old	value once the
	      current file has stopped playing.	 Trying	 to  write  an	option
	      while  no	file is	playing	(or is being loaded) results in	an er-

	      (Note that if an option is marked	as file-local,	even  options/
	      will  access  the	 local value, and the old value, which will be
	      restored on end of playback, cannot be read or written until end
	      of playback.)

	      Additional per-option information.

	      This  has	 a  number  of sub-properties. Replace <name> with the
	      name of a	top-level option. No guarantee of stability  is	 given
	      to  any  of  these sub-properties	- they may change radically in
	      the feature.

		     The name of the option.

		     The name of the option type, like String or Integer.  For
		     many complex types, this isn't very accurate.

		     Whether  the  option  was	set from the mpv command line.
		     What this is set to if the	option is e.g. changed at run-
		     time  is  left  undefined (meaning	it could change	in the

		     Whether the option	was set	per-file.  This	 is  the  case
		     with automatically	loaded profiles, file-dir configs, and
		     other cases. It means the option value will  be  restored
		     to	the value before playback start	when playback ends.

		     The default value of the option. May not always be	avail-

	      option-info/<name>/min, option-info/<name>/max
		     Integer minimum and maximum values	allowed	 for  the  op-
		     tion.  Only available if the options are numeric, and the
		     minimum/maximum has been set internally. It's also	possi-
		     ble that only one of these	is set.

		     If	 the  option is	a choice option, the possible choices.
		     Choices that are integers may  or	may  not  be  included
		     (they  can	 be implied by min and max). Note that options
		     which behave like choice  options,	 but  are  not	actual
		     choice  options internally, may not have this info	avail-

	      The list of top-level properties.

	      The list of profiles and their contents. This is	highly	imple-
	      mentation-specific,  and	may change any time. Currently,	it re-
	      turns an array of	options	for each profile. Each	option	has  a
	      name  and	 a  value,  with  the  value  currently	always being a
	      string. Note that	the options array is not a map,	as order  mat-
	      ters  and	duplicate entries are possible.	Recursive profiles are
	      not expanded, and	show up	as special profile options.

	      The list of input	commands. This returns an array	of maps, where
	      each  map	node represents	a command. This	map currently only has
	      a	single entry: name for the name	of the command.	(This property
	      is  supposed to be a replacement for --input-cmdlist. The	option
	      dumps some more information, but it's a valid feature request to
	      extend this property if needed.)

	      The list of current input	key bindings. This returns an array of
	      maps, where each map node	represents  a  binding	for  a	single
	      key/command. This	map has	the following entries:

	      key    The  key  name.  This is normalized and may look slightly
		     different from how	it was specified in the	 source	 (e.g.
		     in	input.conf).

	      cmd    The  command  mapped  to the key. (Currently, this	is ex-
		     actly the same string as specified	in the	source,	 other
		     than  stripping  whitespace  and  comments. It's possible
		     that it will be normalized	in the future.)

		     If	set to true, any existing  and	active	user  bindings
		     will take priority.

	      owner  If	this entry exists, the name of the script (or similar)
		     which added this binding.

		     Name of the section this binding is part of.  This	 is  a
		     rarely  used  mechanism.  This  entry  may	 be removed or
		     change meaning in the future.

		     A number. Bindings	with a higher value are	preferred over
		     bindings  with  a	lower value. If	the value is negative,
		     this binding is inactive and will not be triggered	by in-
		     put.  Note	 that  mpv does	not use	this value internally,
		     and matching of bindings may work slightly	differently in
		     some  cases.  In  addition, this value is dynamic and can
		     change around at runtime.

		     If	available, the comment following the  command  on  the
		     same line.	(For example, the input.conf entry f cycle bla
		     # toggle bla would	result in  an  entry  with  comment  =
		     "toggle bla", cmd = "cycle	bla".)

	      This  property is	read-only, and change notification is not sup-
	      ported.  Currently, there	is no mechanism	to change key bindings
	      at  runtime,  other  than	 scripts  adding or removing their own

   Inconsistencies between options and properties
       You can access (almost) all options as  properties,  though  there  are
       some caveats with some properties (due to historical reasons):

       vid, aid, sid
	      While  playback  is  active,  these  result  the actually	active
	      tracks. For example, if you set aid=5, and the currently	played
	      file  contains  no  audio	track with ID 5, the aid property will
	      return no.

	      Before mpv 0.31.0, you could  set	 existing  tracks  at  runtime

	      This  inconsistent behavior is deprecated. Post-deprecation, the
	      reported value and the option value are cleanly separated	(over-
	      ride-display-fps for the option value).

       vf, af If  you set the properties during	playback, and the filter chain
	      fails to reinitialize, the option	will be	set, but  the  runtime
	      filter  chain does not change. On	the other hand,	the next video
	      to be played will	fail, because the initial filter chain	cannot
	      be created.

	      This  behavior changed in	mpv 0.31.0. Before this, the new value
	      was rejected iff video (for vf) or audio (for af)	was active. If
	      playback	was  not active, the behavior was the same as the cur-
	      rent behavior.

	      The property is  read-only  and  returns	the  current  internal
	      playlist.	The option is for loading playlist during command line
	      parsing. For client API uses, you	should use the	loadlist  com-
	      mand instead.

       profile,	include
	      These are	write-only, and	will perform actions as	they are writ-
	      ten to, exactly as if they were used on the mpv CLI commandline.
	      Their  only  use	is  when using libmpv before mpv_initialize(),
	      which in turn is probably	only useful in encoding	 mode.	Normal
	      libmpv users should use other mechanisms,	such as	the apply-pro-
	      file command, and	the mpv_load_config_file API  function.	 Avoid
	      these properties.

   Property Expansion
       All string arguments to input commands as well as certain options (like
       --term-playing-msg) are subject to property expansion. Note that	 prop-
       erty  expansion	does  not work in places where e.g. numeric parameters
       are expected.  (For example, the	add command does not do	 property  ex-
       pansion.	The set	command	is an exception	and not	a general rule.)

	  Example for input.conf

	  i show-text Filename:	${filename}
		 shows	the  filename  of the current file when	pressing the i

       Within input.conf, property expansion can be inhibited by  putting  the
       raw prefix in front of commands.

       The following expansions	are supported:

	      Expands  to  the	value  of the property NAME. If	retrieving the
	      property fails, expand to	an error string. (Use ${NAME:} with  a
	      trailing	:  to  expand to an empty string instead.)  If NAME is
	      prefixed with =, expand to the raw value of  the	property  (see
	      section below).

	      Expands  to  the value of	the property NAME, or STR if the prop-
	      erty cannot be retrieved.	STR is expanded	recursively.

	      Expands to STR (recursively) if the property NAME	is available.

	      Expands to STR (recursively) if the property NAME	cannot be  re-

	      Expands  to  STR (recursively) if	the property NAME expands to a
	      string equal to VALUE. You can prefix NAME with =	 in  order  to
	      compare  the raw value of	a property (see	section	below).	If the
	      property is unavailable, or other	errors happen when  retrieving
	      it,  the value is	never considered equal.	 Note that VALUE can't
	      contain any of the characters : or }.  Also, it is possible that
	      escaping	with  "	 or % might be added in	the future, should the
	      need arise.

	      Same as with the ? variant, but STR is expanded if the value  is
	      not equal. (Using	the same semantics as with ?.)

       $$     Expands to $.

       $}     Expands to }. (To	produce	this character inside recursive	expan-

       $>     Disable property expansion and special handling  of  $  for  the
	      rest of the string.

       In  places where	property expansion is allowed, C-style escapes are of-
       ten accepted as well. Example:

	  o \n becomes a newline character

	  o \\ expands to \

   Raw and Formatted Properties
       Normally, properties are	formatted as human-readable text, meant	to  be
       displayed  on OSD or on the terminal. It	is possible to retrieve	an un-
       formatted (raw) value from a property by	prefixing  its	name  with  =.
       These  raw  values  can be parsed by other programs and follow the same
       conventions as the options associated with the properties.


	  o ${time-pos}	expands	to 00:14:23 (if	playback  position  is	at  14
	    minutes 23 seconds)

	  o ${=time-pos}  expands to 863.4 (same time, plus 400	milliseconds -
	    milliseconds are normally not shown	in the formatted case)

       Sometimes, the difference in amount of information carried by  raw  and
       formatted  property values can be rather	big. In	some cases, raw	values
       have  more  information,	 like  higher  precision  than	seconds	  with
       time-pos.  Sometimes  it	 is the	other way around, e.g. aid shows track
       title and language in the formatted case, but only the track number  if
       it is raw.

       The  On Screen Controller (short: OSC) is a minimal GUI integrated with
       mpv to offer basic mouse-controllability. It is intended	to make	inter-
       action easier for new users and to enable precise and direct seeking.

       The  OSC	is enabled by default if mpv was compiled with Lua support. It
       can be disabled entirely	using the --osc=no option.

   Using the OSC
       By default, the OSC will	show up	whenever the mouse is moved inside the
       player  window  and will	hide if	the mouse is not moved outside the OSC
       for 0.5 seconds or if the mouse leaves the window.

   The Interface
	  | pl prev | pl next  |  title					  |    cache |
	  | play | skip	| skip | time	 |  seekbar  | time | audio | sub | vol	| fs |
	  |	 | back	| frwd | elapsed |	     | left |	    |	  |	|    |

       pl prev

			|left-click    | play  previous	  file	 in |
			|	       | playlist		    |
			|right-click   | show playlist		    |
			|shift+L-click | show playlist		    |

       pl next

			|left-click    | play next file	in playlist |
			|right-click   | show playlist		    |
			|shift+L-click | show playlist		    |

	      Displays current media-title, filename, or custom	title

			 |left-click  |	show playlist position and |
			 |	      |	length and full	title	   |
			 |right-click |	show filename		   |

	      Shows current cache fill status


			      |left-click | toggle play/pause |

       skip back

			|left-click    | go to beginning of chapter |
			|	       | / previous chapter	    |
			|right-click   | show chapters		    |
			|shift+L-click | show chapters		    |

       skip frwd

			    |left-click	   | go	to next	chapter	|
			    |right-click   | show chapters	|
			    |shift+L-click | show chapters	|

       time elapsed
	      Shows current playback position timestamp

			 |left-click | toggle	displaying  time- |
			 |	     | codes with milliseconds	  |

	      Indicates	current	playback position and position of chapters

			      |left-click | seek to position |

       time left
	      Shows remaining playback time timestamp

			 |left-click | toggle between  total  and |
			 |	     | remaining time		  |

       audio and sub
	      Displays selected	track and amount of available tracks

			|left-click    | cycle	 audio/sub   tracks |
			|	       | forward		    |
			|right-click   | cycle	 audio/sub   tracks |
			|	       | backwards		    |
			|shift+L-click | show  available  audio/sub |
			|	       | tracks			    |


			       |left-click  | toggle mute    |
			       |mouse wheel | volume up/down |


			      |left-click | toggle fullscreen |

   Key Bindings
       These key bindings are active by	default	if  nothing  else  is  already
       bound  to  these	 keys.	In case	of collision, the function needs to be
       bound to	a different key. See the Script	Commands section.

			 |del |	Cycles visibility  between |
			 |    |	never  / auto (mouse-move) |
			 |    |	/ always		   |

       The  OSC	 offers	 limited   configuration   through   a	 config	  file
       script-opts/osc.conf   placed   in  mpv's  user	dir  and  through  the
       --script-opts command-line option. Options provided  through  the  com-
       mand-line will override those from the config file.

   Config Syntax
       The config file must exactly follow the following syntax:

	  # this is a comment

       #  can only be used at the beginning of a line and there	may be no spa-
       ces around the =	or anywhere else.

   Command-line	Syntax
       To avoid	collisions with	other scripts, all options need	to be prefixed
       with osc-.



   Configurable	Options
       layout Default: bottombar

	      The  layout  for the OSC.	Currently available are: box, slimbox,
	      bottombar	and topbar. Default pre-0.21.0 was 'box'.

	      Default: bar

	      Sets the style of	the playback position marker and overall shape
	      of the seekbar: bar, diamond or knob.

	      Default: 0.6

	      Size  ratio of the seek handle if	seekbarstyle is	set to dimaond
	      or knob. This is relative	to the full height of the seekbar.

	      Default: yes

	      Controls the mode	used to	seek when dragging  the	 seekbar  (de-
	      fault: true). If set to true, default seeking mode is used (usu-
	      ally keyframes, but player defaults and heuristics can change it
	      to exact). If set	to false, exact	seeking	on mouse drags will be
	      used instead. Keyframes are preferred, but exact	seeks  may  be
	      useful in	cases where keyframes cannot be	found. Note that using
	      exact seeks can potentially make mouse dragging much slower.

	      Default: inverted

	      Display seekable ranges on the seekbar. bar shows	 them  on  the
	      full  height  of the bar,	line as	a thick	line and inverted as a
	      thin line	that is	inverted over playback position	markers.  none
	      will  hide them. Additionally, slider will show a	permanent han-
	      dle inside the seekbar with cached ranges	 marked	 inside.  Note
	      that  these  will	look differently based on the seekbarstyle op-
	      tion. Also, slider does not work with seekbarstyle set to	bar.

	      Default: yes

	      Controls whether to show line-style seekable ranges  on  top  of
	      the seekbar or separately	if seekbarstyle	is set to bar.

	      Default: 200

	      Alpha of the seekable ranges, 0 (opaque) to 255 (fully transpar-

	      Default: 0.5

	      Size of the deadzone. The	deadzone is an	area  that  makes  the
	      mouse act	like leaving the window. Movement there	won't make the
	      OSC show up and it will hide immediately if the mouse enters it.
	      The deadzone starts at the window	border opposite	to the OSC and
	      the size controls	how much of the	window it  will	 span.	Values
	      between  0.0  and	 1.0,  where 0 means the OSC will always popup
	      with mouse movement in the window, and 1 means the OSC will only
	      show up when the mouse hovers it.	Default	pre-0.21.0 was 0.

	      Default: 0

	      Minimum  amount of pixels	the mouse has to move between ticks to
	      make the OSC show	up. Default pre-0.21.0 was 3.

	      Default: yes

	      Enable the OSC when windowed

	      Default: yes

	      Enable the OSC when fullscreen

	      Default: 1.0

	      Scale factor of the OSC when windowed.

	      Default: 1.0

	      Scale factor of the OSC when fullscreen

	      Default: 2.0

	      Scale factor of the OSC when rendered on a forced	(dummy)	window

	      Default: yes

	      Scale the	OSC with the video no tries to keep the	OSC size  con-
	      stant as much as the window size allows

       valign Default: 0.8

	      Vertical alignment, -1 (top) to 1	(bottom)

       halign Default: 0.0

	      Horizontal alignment, -1 (left) to 1 (right)

	      Default: 0

	      Margin from bottom (bottombar) or	top (topbar), in pixels

	      Default: 80

	      Alpha  of	the background box, 0 (opaque) to 255 (fully transpar-

	      Default: 500

	      Duration in ms until the OSC hides if no	mouse  movement,  must
	      not be negative

	      Default: 200

	      Duration of fade out in ms, 0 = no fade

       title  Default: ${media-title}

	      String  that  supports property expansion	that will be displayed
	      as OSC title.  ASS tags are escaped, and newlines	 and  trailing
	      slashes are stripped.

	      Default: 1

	      Size  of the tooltip outline when	using bottombar	or topbar lay-

	      Default: no

	      Show total time instead of time remaining

       timems Default: no

	      Display timecodes	with milliseconds

	      Default: auto (auto hide/show on mouse move)

	      Also supports never and always

	      Default: 80

	      Max chars	for the	osc title at the box layout. mpv does not mea-
	      sure  the	 text  width  on screen	and so it needs	to limit it by
	      number of	chars. The default is conservative to allow wide fonts
	      to  be used without overflow.  However, with many	common fonts a
	      bigger number can	be used. YMMV.

	      Default: no

	      Whether to overlay the osc over the video	(no), or  to  box  the
	      video within the areas not covered by the	osc (yes). If this op-
	      tion is set, the osc may	overwrite  the	--video-margin-ratio-*
	      options,	even  if the user has set them.	(It will not overwrite
	      them if all of them are set to  default  values.)	 Additionally,
	      visibility  must	be set to always.  Otherwise, this option does

	      Currently, this is supported for the bottombar and topbar	layout
	      only.  The  other	 layouts  do not change	if this	option is set.
	      Separately, if window controls are  present  (see	 below),  they
	      will be affected regardless of which osc layout is in use.

	      The  border  is static and appears even if the OSC is configured
	      to appear	only on	mouse interaction. If the  OSC	is  invisible,
	      the  border is simply filled with	the background color (black by

	      This currently still makes the OSC overlap  with	subtitles  (if
	      the  --sub-use-margins  option is	set to yes, the	default). This
	      may be fixed later.

	      This does	not work correctly with	video  outputs	like  --vo=xv,
	      which render OSD into the	unscaled video.

	      Default:	auto  (Show window controls if there is	no window bor-

	      Whether to show window management	controls over the  video,  and
	      if  so,  which side of the window	to place them. This may	be de-
	      sirable when the window has no decorations, either because  they
	      have been	explicitly disabled (border=no)	or because the current
	      platform doesn't support them (eg: gnome-shell with wayland).

	      The set of window	controls is fixed,  offering  minimize,	 maxi-
	      mize,  and  quit.	Not all	platforms implement minimize and maxi-
	      mize, but	quit will always work.

	      Default: right

	      If window	controls are shown, indicates which side  should  they
	      be aligned to.

	      Supports	left  and right	which will place the controls on those
	      respective sides.

	      Default: no

	      Set to yes to reduce festivity (i.e. disable santa hat in	Decem-

   Script Commands
       The  OSC	 script	listens	to certain script commands. These commands can
       bound in	input.conf, or sent by other scripts.

	      Show a message on	screen using the OSC. First  argument  is  the
	      message, second the duration in seconds.

	      Controls	visibility  mode never / auto (on mouse	move) /	always
	      and also cycle to	cycle between the modes


       You could put this into input.conf to hide the OSC with the a  key  and
       to set auto mode	(the default) with b:

	  a script-message osc-visibility never
	  b script-message osc-visibility auto

       osc-playlist, osc-chapterlist, osc-tracklist
	      Shows  a	limited	 view of the respective	type of	list using the
	      OSC. First argument is duration in seconds.

       This builtin script displays information	and statistics	for  the  cur-
       rently  played  file. It	is enabled by default if mpv was compiled with
       Lua support.  It	can be disabled	entirely using the  --load-stats-over-
       lay=no option.

       The  following key bindings are active by default unless	something else
       is already bound	to them:

			  |i | Show stats for a	fixed du- |
			  |  | ration			  |
			  |I | Toggle  stats (shown until |
			  |  | toggled again)		  |

       While the stats are visible on screen the following  key	 bindings  are
       active,	regardless  of existing	bindings. They allow you to switch be-
       tween pages of stats:

			  |1 | Show usual stats		  |
			  |2 | Show	frame	  timings |
			  |  | (scroll)			  |
			  |3 | Input cache stats	  |
			  |4 | Internal	stuff (scroll)	  |

       On pages	which support scroll, these key	bindings are also active:

			    |UP	  | Scroll one line up	 |
			    |DOWN | Scroll one line down |

       For  optimal  visual  experience,  a  font  with	 support for many font
       weights and monospaced digits is	 recommended.  By  default,  the  open
       source font Source Sans Pro is used.

       This    script	 can	be    customized   through   a	 config	  file
       script-opts/stats.conf placed in	mpv's user directory and  through  the
       --script-opts  command-line  option.  The  configuration	 syntax	is de-
       scribed in ON SCREEN CONTROLLER.

   Configurable	Options
	      Default: i

	      Default: I

	      Key bindings to display stats.

	      Default: 1

	      Default: 2

	      Default: 3

	      Default: 4

	      Key bindings for page switching while stats are displayed.

	      Default: UP

	      Default: DOWN

	      Default: 1

	      Scroll key bindings and number of	lines to scroll	on pages which
	      support it.

	      Default: 4

	      How long the stats are shown in seconds (oneshot).

	      Default: 1

	      How  long	 it  takes  to	refresh	the displayed stats in seconds

	      Default: no

	      When no, other scripts printing text to the screen can overwrite
	      the  displayed stats. When yes, displayed	stats are persistently
	      shown for	the respective duration. This can result  in  overlap-
	      ping text	when multiple scripts decide to	print text at the same

	      Default: yes

	      Show graphs for performance data (page 2).

	      Default: yes

	      Default: yes

	      Show graphs for vsync and	jitter values (page 1).	Only when tog-

	      Default: yes

	      Clear data buffers used for drawing graphs when toggling.

       font   Default: Source Sans Pro

	      Font  name.  Should support as many font weights as possible for
	      optimal visual experience.

	      Default: Source Sans Pro

	      Font name	for parts where	monospaced characters are necessary to
	      align text. Currently, monospaced	digits are sufficient.

	      Default: 8

	      Font size	used to	render text.

	      Default: FFFFFF

	      Font color.

	      Default: 0.8

	      Size of border drawn around the font.

	      Default: 262626

	      Color of drawn border.

       alpha  Default: 11

	      Transparency for drawn text.

	      Default: 0000FF

	      Border color used	for drawing graphs.

	      Default: 262626

	      Background color used for	drawing	graphs.

	      Default: FFFFFF

	      Color used for drawing graphs.

       Note:  colors  are  given  as hexadecimal values	and use	ASS tag	order:
       BBGGRR (blue green red).

   Different key bindings
       A different key binding can be defined with the aforementioned  options
       key_oneshot  and	 key_toggle  but also with commands in input.conf, for

	  e script-binding stats/display-stats
	  E script-binding stats/display-stats-toggle

       Using input.conf, it is also possible to	 directly  display  a  certain

	  i script-binding stats/display-page-1
	  e script-binding stats/display-page-2

   Internal stuff page
       Most  entries shown on this page	have rather vague meaning. Likely none
       of this is useful for you. Don't	attempt	to use it.  Forget  its	 exis-

       Selecting  this	for the	first time will	start collecting some internal
       performance data. That means performance	will be	 slightly  lower  than
       normal  for  the	 rest  of  the time the	player is running (even	if the
       stats page is closed).  Note that the stats page	itself uses a  lot  of
       CPU and even GPU	resources, and may have	a heavy	impact on performance.

       The  displayed  information is accumulated over the redraw delay	(shown
       as poll-time field).

       This adds entries for each Lua script. If there are  too	 many  scripts
       running,	parts of the list will simply be out of	the screen, but	it can
       be scrolled.

       If the underlying platform does not support pthread per	thread	times,
       the  displayed  times  will be 0	or something random (I suspect that at
       time of this writing, only Linux	provides the correct via pthread  APIs
       for per thread times).

       Most entries are	added lazily and only during data collection, which is
       why entries may pop up randomly after some time.	It's also why the mem-
       ory  usage  entries for scripts that have been inactive since the start
       of data collection are missing.

       Memory usage is approximate and does not	 reflect  internal  fragmenta-

       JS  scripts  memory reporting is	disabled by default because collecting
       the data	at the JS side has an overhead.	It can be enabled by exporting
       the env var MPV_LEAK_REPORT=1 before starting mpv, and will increase JS
       memory usage.

       If entries have /time and /cpu variants,	the former gives the real time
       (monotonic  clock),  while  the latter the thread CPU time (only	if the
       corresponding pthread API works and is supported).

       The console is a	REPL for mpv input commands. It	is  displayed  on  the
       video  window.  It also shows log messages. It can be disabled entirely
       using the --load-osd-console=no option.

       `      Show the console.

       ESC    Hide the console.

       ENTER  Run the typed command.

	      Type a literal newline character.

       Ctrl+LEFT and Ctrl+RIGHT
	      Move cursor to previous/next word.

       UP and DOWN
	      Navigate command history.

       PGUP   Go to the	first command in the history.

       PGDN   Stop navigating command history.

       INSERT Toggle insert mode.

	      Paste text (uses the primary selection on	X11).

       TAB    Complete the command or property name at the cursor.

       Ctrl+C Clear current line.

       Ctrl+K Delete text from the cursor to the end of	the line.

       Ctrl+L Clear all	log messages from the console.

       Ctrl+U Delete text from the cursor to the beginning of the line.

       Ctrl+V Paste text (uses the clipboard on	X11).

       Ctrl+W Delete text from the cursor to  the  beginning  of  the  current

       script-message-to console type <text> [<cursor_pos>]
	      Show the console and pre-fill it with the	provided text, option-
	      ally specifying the initial cursor position as a positive	 inte-
	      ger starting from	1.

		 Example for input.conf

			%  script-message-to console type "seek	 absolute-per-
			cent" 6

   Known issues
       o Pasting text is slow on Windows

       o Non-ASCII keyboard input has restrictions

       o The cursor keys move between Unicode code-points, not grapheme	 clus-

       This  script  can  be customized	through	a config file script-opts/con-
       sole.conf placed	in mpv's user directory	and through the	 --script-opts
       command-line option. The	configuration syntax is	described in ON	SCREEN

       Key bindings can	 be  changed  in  a  standard  way,  see  for  example
       stats.lua documentation.

   Configurable	Options
       scale  Default: 1

	      All  drawing is scaled by	this value, including the text borders
	      and the cursor.

	      If the VO	backend	in use has HiDPI scale reporting  implemented,
	      the option value is scaled with the reported HiDPI scale.

       font   Default:	unset  (picks  a  hardcoded font depending on detected

	      Set the font used	for the	REPL and the  console.	This  probably
	      doesn't have to be a monospaced font.

	      Default: 16

	      Set  the	font size used for the REPL and	the console. This will
	      be multiplied by "scale."

       mpv can load Lua	scripts. (See Script location.)

       mpv provides the	built-in module	mp, which contains functions  to  send
       commands	 to  the  mpv  core and	to retrieve information	about playback
       state, user settings, file information, and so on.

       These scripts can be used to control mpv	in  a  similar	way  to	 slave
       mode.  Technically, the Lua code	uses the client	API internally.

       A script	which leaves fullscreen	mode when the player is	paused:

	  function on_pause_change(name, value)
	      if value == true then
		  mp.set_property("fullscreen",	"no")
	  mp.observe_property("pause", "bool", on_pause_change)

   Script location
       Scripts	can  be	 passed	 to the	--script option, and are automatically
       loaded from the scripts subdirectory of the mpv configuration directory
       (usually	~/.config/mpv/scripts/).

       A script	can be a single	file. The file extension is used to select the
       scripting backend to use	for it.	For Lua, it is .lua. If	the  extension
       is  not	recognized, an error is	printed. (If an	error happens, the ex-
       tension is either mistyped, or the backend was not compiled  into  your
       mpv binary.)

       Entries with .disable extension are always ignored.

       If  a  script  is  a  directory	(either	 if  a	directory is passed to
       --script, or any	sub-directories	in the script directory, such  as  for
       example	~/.config/mpv/scripts/something/),  then  the directory	repre-
       sents a single script. The player will try to load a file named main.x,
       where  x	 is replaced with the file extension. For example, if main.lua
       exists, it is loaded with the Lua scripting backend.

       You must	not put	any other files	or directories that start  with	 main.
       into the	script's top level directory. If the script directory contains
       for example both	main.lua and main.js, only one of them will be	loaded
       (and  which  one	 depends  on  mpv internals that may change any	time).
       Likewise, if there is for example, your	script will  break  as
       soon as mpv adds	a backend that uses the	.foo file extension.

       mpv  also appends the top level directory of the	script to the start of
       Lua's package path so you can import scripts from there too.  Be	 aware
       that  this  will	 shadow	 Lua libraries that use	the same package path.
       (Single file scripts do not include  mpv	 specific  directory  the  Lua
       package path. This was silently changed in mpv 0.32.0.)

       Using  a	 script	 directory  is the recommended way to package a	script
       that consists of	multiple source	files, or requires  other  files  (you
       can  use	 mp.get_script_directory()  to	get the	location and e.g. load
       data files).

       Making a	script a git repository, basically a repository	which contains
       a main.lua` file	in the root directory, makes scripts easily updateable
       (without	the dangers of auto-updates). Another suggestion is to use git
       submodules to share common files	or libraries.

   Details on the script initialization	and lifecycle
       Your  script  will  be  loaded  by the player at	program	start from the
       scripts configuration subdirectory, or from a path specified  with  the
       --script	 option. Some scripts are loaded internally (like --osc). Each
       script runs in its own thread. Your script is first run	"as  is",  and
       once that is done, the event loop is entered. This event	loop will dis-
       patch events received by	mpv and	call your own event handlers which you
       have   registered   with	  mp.register_event,   or  timers  added  with
       mp.add_timeout or similar. Note that since the script starts  execution
       concurrently  with  player  initialization,  some properties may	not be
       populated with meaningful values	until  the  relevant  subsystems  have

       When  the  player  quits,  all scripts will be asked to terminate. This
       happens via a shutdown event, which by default will make	the event loop
       return.	If your	script got into	an endless loop, mpv will probably be-
       have fine during	playback, but it won't terminate  when	quitting,  be-
       cause it's waiting on your script.

       Internally,  the	 C code	will call the Lua function mp_event_loop after
       loading a Lua script. This function is normally defined by the  default
       prelude	loaded	before your script (see	player/lua/defaults.lua	in the
       mpv sources).  The event	loop will wait for events and dispatch	events
       registered  with	 mp.register_event.  It	 will also handle timers added
       with mp.add_timeout and similar (by waiting with	a timeout).

       Since mpv 0.6.0,	the player will	wait until the script is fully	loaded
       before  continuing  normal  operation. The player considers a script as
       fully loaded as soon as it starts waiting for mpv events	(or it exits).
       In  practice  this  means  the  player will more	or less	hang until the
       script returns from the main chunk (and mp_event_loop  is  called),  or
       the  script calls mp_event_loop or mp.dispatch_events directly. This is
       done to make it possible	for a script to	 fully	setup  event  handlers
       etc.  before playback actually starts. In older mpv versions, this hap-
       pened asynchronously. With mpv 0.29.0, this changes  slightly,  and  it
       merely  waits  for  scripts to be loaded	in this	manner before starting
       playback	as part	of the player initialization phase. Scripts run	though
       initialization in parallel. This	might change again.

   mp functions
       The mp module is	preloaded, although it can be loaded manually with re-
       quire 'mp'. It provides the core	client API.

	      Run the given command. This is similar to	the commands  used  in
	      input.conf.  See List of Input Commands.

	      By  default,  this  will show something on the OSD (depending on
	      the command), as if it was used in input.conf. See Input Command
	      Prefixes how to influence	OSD usage per command.

	      Returns true on success, or nil, error on	error.

       mp.commandv(arg1, arg2, ...)
	      Similar  to  mp.command, but pass	each command argument as sepa-
	      rate parameter. This has the advantage that you  don't  have  to
	      care about quoting and escaping in some cases.


		 mp.command("loadfile "	.. filename .. " append")
		 mp.commandv("loadfile", filename, "append")

	      These two	commands are equivalent, except	that the first version
	      breaks if	the filename contains spaces or	certain	special	 char-

	      Note  that  properties  are  not	expanded.   You	can use	either
	      mp.command, the expand-properties	prefix,	or the mp.get_property
	      family of	functions.

	      Unlike  mp.command, this will not	use OSD	by default either (ex-
	      cept for some OSD-specific commands).

       mp.command_native(table [,def])
	      Similar to mp.commandv, but pass the  argument  list  as	table.
	      This  has	 the  advantage	that in	at least some cases, arguments
	      can be passed as native types. It	also allows you	to  use	 named

	      If the table is an array,	each array item	is like	an argument in
	      mp.commandv() (but can be	a native type instead of a string).

	      If the table contains string keys, it's interpreted  as  command
	      with  named  arguments. This requires at least an	entry with the
	      key name to be present, which must be a string, and contains the
	      command  name.  The  special  entry  _flags  is optional,	and if
	      present, must be an array	of Input Command  Prefixes  to	apply.
	      All other	entries	are interpreted	as arguments.

	      Returns a	result table on	success	(usually empty), or def, error
	      on error.	def is the second parameter provided to	the  function,
	      and is nil if it's missing.

       mp.command_native_async(table [,fn])
	      Like  mp.command_native(), but the command is ran	asynchronously
	      (as far as possible), and	upon completion, fn is called. fn  has
	      three arguments: fn(success, result, error):

			    Always  a  Boolean	and is true if the command was
			    successful,	otherwise false.

		 result	The result value (can be nil) in case of success,  nil
			otherwise (as returned by mp.command_native()).

		 error	The error string in case of an error, nil otherwise.

	      Returns  a  table	 with undefined	contents, which	can be used as
	      argument for mp.abort_async_command.

	      If starting the command failed for some reason,  nil,  error  is
	      returned,	 and  fn  is called indicating failure,	using the same
	      error value.

	      Abort a mp.command_native_async call. The	argument is the	return
	      value  of	 that  command (which starts asynchronous execution of
	      the command).  Whether this works	and how	long it	takes  depends
	      on the command and the situation.	The abort call itself is asyn-
	      chronous.	Does not return	anything.

       mp.get_property(name [,def])
	      Return the value of the given property as	string.	These are  the
	      same properties as used in input.conf. See Properties for	a list
	      of properties. The  returned  string  is	formatted  similar  to
	      ${=name} (see Property Expansion).

	      Returns  the  string  on success,	or def,	error on error.	def is
	      the second parameter provided to the function,  and  is  nil  if
	      it's missing.

       mp.get_property_osd(name	[,def])
	      Similar  to  mp.get_property, but	return the property value for-
	      matted for OSD. This is the same string as printed with  ${name}
	      when used	in input.conf.

	      Returns  the  string  on success,	or def,	error on error.	def is
	      the second parameter provided to the function, and is  an	 empty
	      string if	it's missing. Unlike get_property(), assigning the re-
	      turn value to a variable will always result in a string.

       mp.get_property_bool(name [,def])
	      Similar to mp.get_property, but return  the  property  value  as

	      Returns a	Boolean	on success, or def, error on error.

       mp.get_property_number(name [,def])
	      Similar  to  mp.get_property,  but  return the property value as

	      Note that	while Lua does not distinguish	between	 integers  and
	      floats,  mpv internals do. This function simply request a	double
	      float from mpv, and mpv will usually  convert  integer  property
	      values to	float.

	      Returns a	number on success, or def, error on error.

       mp.get_property_native(name [,def])
	      Similar  to mp.get_property, but return the property value using
	      the best Lua type	for the	property. Most time, this will	return
	      a	string,	Boolean, or number. Some properties (for example chap-
	      ter-list)	are returned as	tables.

	      Returns a	value on success, or def, error	on  error.  Note  that
	      nil might	be a possible, valid value too in some corner cases.

       mp.set_property(name, value)
	      Set   the	  given	 property  to  the  given  string  value.  See
	      mp.get_property and Properties for more information about	 prop-

	      Returns true on success, or nil, error on	error.

       mp.set_property_bool(name, value)
	      Similar  to  mp.set_property,  but set the given property	to the
	      given Boolean value.

       mp.set_property_number(name, value)
	      Similar to mp.set_property, but set the given  property  to  the
	      given numeric value.

	      Note  that  while	 Lua does not distinguish between integers and
	      floats, mpv internals do.	This function will  test  whether  the
	      number can be represented	as integer, and	if so, it will pass an
	      integer value to mpv, otherwise a	double float.

       mp.set_property_native(name, value)
	      Similar to mp.set_property, but set the given property using its
	      native type.

	      Since  there are several data types which	cannot represented na-
	      tively in	Lua, this might	not always work	as expected. For exam-
	      ple,  while  the	Lua  wrapper  can  do some guesswork to	decide
	      whether a	Lua table is an	array or a map,	this would  fail  with
	      empty  tables.  Also, there are not many properties for which it
	      makes sense to use  this,	 instead  of  set_property,  set_prop-
	      erty_bool,  set_property_number.	 For these reasons, this func-
	      tion should probably be avoided for now, except  for  properties
	      that use tables natively.

	      Return  the  current  mpv	 internal time in seconds as a number.
	      This is basically	the system time, with an arbitrary offset.

       mp.add_key_binding(key, name|fn [,fn [,flags]])
	      Register callback	to be run on a key binding. The	 binding  will
	      be  mapped  to  the  given key, which is a string	describing the
	      physical key. This uses the same key names as in input.conf, and
	      also  allows  combinations (e.g. ctrl+a).	If the key is empty or
	      nil, no physical key is registered, but the user still can  cre-
	      ate own bindings (see below).

	      After calling this function, key presses will cause the function
	      fn to be called (unless the user remapped	the key	 with  another

	      The  name	 argument should be a short symbolic string. It	allows
	      the user to remap	the  key  binding  via	input.conf  using  the
	      script-message command, and the name of the key binding (see be-
	      low for an example). The name  should  be	 unique	 across	 other
	      bindings	in the same script - if	not, the previous binding with
	      the same name will be overwritten. You can  omit	the  name,  in
	      which  case  a  random  name  is generated internally. (Omitting
	      works as follows:	either pass nil	for name, or pass the fn argu-
	      ment  in place of	the name. The latter is	not recommended	and is
	      handled for compatibility	only.)

	      The last argument	is used	for optional flags. This is  a	table,
	      which can	have the following entries:

			If  set	 to true, enables key repeat for this specific

			If set to true,	then fn	is called on both key  up  and
			down  events (as well as key repeat, if	enabled), with
			the first argument being a table. This table  has  the
			following entries (and may contain undocumented	ones):

			    event  Set	to one of the strings down, repeat, up
				   or press (the latter	if key	up/down	 can't
				   be tracked).

				   Boolean  Whether  the event was caused by a
				   mouse button.

				   The name of they key	that  triggered	 this,
				   or  nil if invoked artificially. If the key
				   name	is unknown, it's an empty string.

				   Text	if triggered by	a text key,  otherwise
				   nil.	See description	of script-binding com-
				   mand	for details (this field	is  equivalent
				   to the 5th argument).

	      Internally,  key	bindings  are  dispatched  via the script-mes-
	      sage-to  or  script-binding   input   commands   and   mp.regis-

	      Trying to	map multiple commands to a key will essentially	prefer
	      a	random binding,	while the other	bindings are not called. It is
	      guaranteed  that user defined bindings in	the central input.conf
	      are preferred over bindings added	with this  function  (but  see


		 function something_handler()
		     print("the	key was	pressed")
		 mp.add_key_binding("x", "something", something_handler)

	      This  will  print	 the  message  the  key	was pressed when x was

	      The user can remap these key bindings. Then the user has to  put
	      the  following into their	input.conf to remap the	command	to the
	      y	key:

		 y script-binding something

	      This will	print the message when the key y is pressed.  (x  will
	      still work, unless the user remaps it.)

	      You  can	also explicitly	send a message to a named script only.
	      Assume the above script was using	the filename fooscript.lua:

		 y script-binding fooscript/something

	      This works almost	the same as mp.add_key_binding,	but  registers
	      the  key	binding	in a way that will overwrite the user's	custom
	      bindings in their	input.conf. (mp.add_key_binding	overwrites de-
	      fault  key  bindings  only,  but	not  those  by	the user's in-

	      Remove  a	 key  binding	added	with   mp.add_key_binding   or
	      mp.add_forced_key_binding.  Use  the  same name as you used when
	      adding the bindings. It's	not possible to	 remove	 bindings  for
	      which you	omitted	the name.

       mp.register_event(name, fn)
	      Call  a  specific	function when an event happens.	The event name
	      is a string, and the function fn is a Lua	function value.

	      Some events have associated data.	This is	put into a  Lua	 table
	      and  passed as argument to fn. The Lua table by default contains
	      a	name field, which is a string containing the  event  name.  If
	      the  event  has an error associated, the error field is set to a
	      string describing	the error, on success it's not set.

	      If multiple functions are	registered for the  same  event,  they
	      are  run in registration order, which the	first registered func-
	      tion running before all the other	ones.

	      Returns true if such an event exists, false otherwise.

	      See Events and List of events for	details.

	      Undo mp.register_event(..., fn). This removes all	event handlers
	      that are equal to	the fn parameter. This uses normal Lua == com-
	      parison, so be careful when dealing with closures.

       mp.observe_property(name, type, fn)
	      Watch a property for changes. If the property name  is  changed,
	      then  the	 function fn(name) will	be called. type	can be nil, or
	      be set to	one of none, native, bool, string, or number.  none is
	      the  same	 as  nil.  For	all other values, the new value	of the
	      property	will  be  passed  as  second  argument	to  fn,	 using
	      mp.get_property_<type> to	retrieve it. This means	if type	is for
	      example string, fn is roughly called as in fn(name, mp.get_prop-

	      If  possible,  change  events  are  coalesced.  If a property is
	      changed a	bunch of times in a row, only the last change triggers
	      the  change  function. (The exact	behavior depends on timing and
	      other things.)

	      If a property is unavailable, or on error, the value argument to
	      fn is nil. (The observe_property() call always succeeds, even if
	      a	property does not exist.)

	      In some cases the	function is not	called even  if	 the  property
	      changes.	This depends on	the property, and it's a valid feature
	      request to ask for better	update handling	of  a  specific	 prop-

	      If  the type is none or nil, sporadic property change events are
	      possible.	This means the change function fn can be  called  even
	      if the property doesn't actually change.

	      You  always get an initial change	notification. This is meant to
	      initialize the user's state to the current value	of  the	 prop-

	      Undo  mp.observe_property(...,  fn).  This  removes all property
	      handlers that are	equal to the fn	parameter.  This  uses	normal
	      Lua == comparison, so be careful when dealing with closures.

       mp.add_timeout(seconds, fn)
	      Call  the	given function fn when the given number	of seconds has
	      elapsed.	Note that the number of	seconds	can be fractional. For
	      now,  the	 timer's  resolution  may be as	low as 50 ms, although
	      this will	be improved in the future.

	      This is a	one-shot timer:	it will	be removed when	it's fired.

	      Returns a	timer object. See mp.add_periodic_timer	for details.

       mp.add_periodic_timer(seconds, fn)
	      Call the given function periodically. This is like  mp.add_time-
	      out, but the timer is re-added after the function	fn is run.

	      Returns  a timer object. The timer object	provides the following

		     stop() Disable the	timer. Does nothing if	the  timer  is
			    already  disabled.	This will remember the current
			    elapsed time when stopping,	so that	 resume()  es-
			    sentially unpauses the timer.

		     kill() Disable  the  timer.  Resets the elapsed time. re-
			    sume() will	restart	the timer.

			    Restart the	timer. If the timer was	disabled  with
			    stop(),  this  will	 resume	 at  the  time	it was
			    stopped. If	the timer was disabled with kill(), or
			    if	it's  a	previously fired one-shot timer	(added
			    with add_timeout()), this starts  the  timer  from
			    the	 beginning,  using  the	 initially  configured

			    Whether the	timer is currently enabled or was pre-
			    viously disabled (e.g. by stop() or	kill()).

		     timeout (RW)
			    This  field	 contains  the current timeout period.
			    This value is not updated as time progresses. It's
			    only  used to calculate when the timer should fire
			    next when the timer	expires.

			    If you write this, you can call t:kill()  ;	 t:re-
			    sume()  to	reset  the  current timeout to the new
			    one. (t:stop() won't use the new timeout.)

		     oneshot (RW)
			    Whether the	timer is  periodic  (false)  or	 fires
			    just  once	(true).	 This  value  is used when the
			    timer expires (but before the timer	callback func-
			    tion fn is run).

	      Note  that  these	are methods, and you have to call them using :
	      instead		of	     .		  (Refer	    to .)


		 seconds = 0
		 timer = mp.add_periodic_timer(1, function()
		     print("called every second")
		     # stop it after 10	seconds
		     seconds = seconds + 1
		     if	seconds	>= 10 then

	      Return  a	 setting from the --script-opts	option.	It's up	to the
	      user and the script how this mechanism is	used.  Currently,  all
	      scripts  can access this equally,	so you should be careful about

	      Return the name of the current script. The name is usually  made
	      of the filename of the script, with directory and	file extension
	      removed. If there	are several scripts which would	have the  same
	      name, it's made unique by	appending a number.


			The script /path/to/fooscript.lua becomes fooscript.

	      Return  the  directory if	this is	a script packaged as directory
	      (see Script location for a description). Return nothing if  this
	      is a single file script.

       mp.osd_message(text [,duration])
	      Show  an	OSD message on the screen. duration is in seconds, and
	      is optional (uses	--osd-duration by default).

   Advanced mp functions
       These also live in the mp module, but are documented separately as they
       are useful only in special situations.

	      This function has	been deprecated	in mpv 0.21.0 and does nothing
	      starting with mpv	0.23.0 (no replacement).

	      This function has	been deprecated	in mpv 0.21.0 and does nothing
	      starting with mpv	0.23.0 (no replacement).

	      This function has	been deprecated	in mpv 0.21.0 and does nothing
	      starting with mpv	0.23.0 (no replacement).

	      Calls mpv_get_wakeup_pipe() and returns  the  read  end  of  the
	      wakeup  pipe. This is deprecated,	but still works. (See client.h
	      for details.)

	      Return  the  relative  time  in  seconds	when  the  next	 timer
	      (mp.add_timeout  and similar) expires. If	there is no timer, re-
	      turn nil.

	      This can be used to run custom event loops. If you want to  have
	      direct control what the Lua script does (instead of being	called
	      by the default event loop), you  can  set	 the  global  variable
	      mp_event_loop  to	your own function running the event loop. From
	      your event loop, you should call mp.dispatch_events() to dequeue
	      and dispatch mpv events.

	      If  the  allow_wait  parameter is	set to true, the function will
	      block until the next event is received or	 the  next  timer  ex-
	      pires.  Otherwise	(and this is the default behavior), it returns
	      as soon as the event loop	is emptied. It's strongly  recommended
	      to  use mp.get_next_timeout() and	mp.get_wakeup_pipe() if	you're
	      interested in properly working notification of  new  events  and
	      working timers.

	      Register	an  event  loop	idle handler. Idle handlers are	called
	      before the script	goes to	sleep after handling all  new  events.
	      This  can	 be  used  for example to delay	processing of property
	      change events: if	you're observing multiple properties at	 once,
	      you might	not want to act	on each	property change, but only when
	      all change notifications have been received.

	      Undo mp.register_idle(fn). This removes all idle	handlers  that
	      are  equal to the	fn parameter. This uses	normal Lua == compari-
	      son, so be careful when dealing with closures.

	      Set the minimum log level	of which mpv  message  output  to  re-
	      ceive.  These  messages are normally printed to the terminal. By
	      calling this function, you can set the minimum log level of mes-
	      sages  which  should be received with the	log-message event. See
	      the description of this event  for  details.   The  level	 is  a
	      string, see msg.log for allowed log levels.

       mp.register_script_message(name,	fn)
	      This is a	helper to dispatch script-message or script-message-to
	      invocations to Lua functions. fn is called if script-message  or
	      script-message-to	 (with this script as destination) is run with
	      name as first parameter. The other parameters are	passed to  fn.
	      If  a  message  with  the	given name is already registered, it's

	      Used by mp.add_key_binding, so be	careful	about name collisions.

	      Undo a previous  registration  with  mp.register_script_message.
	      Does nothing if the name wasn't registered.

	      Create  an  OSD  overlay.	This is	a very thin wrapper around the
	      osd-overlay command. The function	returns	a table, which	mostly
	      contains	fields	that will be passed to osd-overlay. The	format
	      parameter	is used	to initialize the format field.	The data field
	      contains	the  text  to be used as overlay. For details, see the
	      osd-overlay command.

	      In addition, it provides the following methods:

		     Commit the	OSD overlay to the screen, or in other	words,
		     run  the  osd-overlay  command with the current fields of
		     the overlay table.	 Returns the result of the osd-overlay
		     command itself.

		     Remove  the overlay from the screen. A update() call will
		     add it again.


		 ov = mp.create_osd_overlay("ass-events") = "{\\an5}{\\b1}hello world!"

	      The advantage of using  this  wrapper  (as  opposed  to  running
	      osd-overlay directly) is that the	id field is allocated automat-

	      Returns a	tuple of osd_width, osd_height,	osd_par. The first two
	      give  the	 size  of  the	OSD  in	 pixels	(for video ouputs like
	      --vo=xv, this may	be "scaled" pixels). The third is the  display
	      pixel aspect ratio.

	      May  return  invalid/nonsense  values  if	OSD is not initialized

   mp.msg functions
       This module allows outputting messages to  the  terminal,  and  can  be
       loaded with require 'mp.msg'.

       msg.log(level, ...)
	      The  level  parameter is the message priority. It's a string and
	      one of fatal, error, warn, info, v,  debug,  trace.  The	user's
	      settings will determine which of these messages will be visible.
	      Normally,	all messages are visible, except v, debug and trace.

	      The parameters after that	are all	converted to  strings.	Spaces
	      are inserted to separate multiple	parameters.

	      You don't	need to	add newlines.

       msg.fatal(...),	msg.error(...),	msg.warn(...),, msg.ver-
       bose(...), msg.debug(...), msg.trace(...)
	      All of these are shortcuts and equivalent	to  the	 corresponding
	      msg.log(level, ...) call.

   mp.options functions
       mpv  comes  with	 a built-in module to manage options from config-files
       and the command-line. All you have to do	is to supply a table with  de-
       fault options to	the read_options function. The function	will overwrite
       the default values with values found in the config-file	and  the  com-
       mand-line (in that order).

       options.read_options(table [, identifier	[, on_update]])
	      A	 table with key-value pairs. The type of the default values is
	      important	for converting the values read from the	config file or
	      command-line back. Do not	use nil	as a default value!

	      The  identifier is used to identify the config-file and the com-
	      mand-line	options. These needs to	 unique	 to  avoid  collisions
	      with other scripts.  Defaults to mp.get_script_name() if the pa-
	      rameter is nil or	missing.

	      The on_update parameter enables run-time updates of all matching
	      option values via	the script-opts	option/property. If any	of the
	      matching options changes,	the values in  the  table  (which  was
	      originally  passed  to  the  function)  are  changed, and	on_up-
	      date(list) is called. list is a table where each updated	option
	      has  a  list[option_name]	 =  true  entry.   There is no initial
	      on_update()  call.  This	never  re-reads	  the	config	 file.
	      script-opts  is  always applied on the original config file, ig-
	      noring previous script-opts values (for example, if an option is
	      removed  from  script-opts  at runtime, the option will have the
	      value in the config file). table entries are  only  written  for
	      option values whose values effectively change (this is important
	      if the script changes table entries independently).

       Example implementation:

	  require 'mp.options'
	  local	options	= {
	      optionA =	"defaultvalueA",
	      optionB =	-0.5,
	      optionC =	true,
	  read_options(options,	"myscript")

       The config file will be stored in script-opts/identifier.conf in	 mpv's
       user  folder.  Comment lines can	be started with	# and stray spaces are
       not removed.  Boolean values will be represented	with yes/no.

       Example config:

	  # comment
	  optionA=Hello	World

       Command-line options are	read  from  the	 --script-opts	parameter.  To
       avoid collisions, all keys have to be prefixed with identifier-.

       Example command-line:


   mp.utils functions
       This  built-in  module  provides	 generic helper	functions for Lua, and
       have strictly speaking nothing to do with mpv or	video/audio  playback.
       They  are  provided  for	 convenience. Most compensate for Lua's	scarce
       standard	library.

       Be warned that any of these functions might disappear  any  time.  They
       are not strictly	part of	the guaranteed API.

	      Returns the directory that mpv was launched from.	On error, nil,
	      error is returned.

       utils.readdir(path [, filter])
	      Enumerate	all entries at the given path on the  filesystem,  and
	      return  them  as array. Each entry is a directory	entry (without
	      the path).  The list is unsorted (in whatever order the  operat-
	      ing system returns it).

	      If the filter argument is	given, it must be one of the following

		 files	List regular files only.  This	excludes  directories,
			special	 files	(like UNIX device files	or FIFOs), and
			dead symlinks. It includes UNIX	 symlinks  to  regular

		 dirs	List  directories  only, or symlinks to	directories. .
			and ..	are not	included.

		 normal	Include	the results of both files and dirs.  (This  is
			the default.)

		 all	List  all  entries,  even device files,	dead symlinks,
			FIFOs, and the . and ..	entries.

	      On error,	nil, error is returned.

	      Stats the	given path for information and returns	a  table  with
	      the following entries:

		 mode	protection  bits  (on  Windows,	always 755 (octal) for
			directories and	644 (octal) for	files)

		 size	size in	bytes

		 atime	time of	last access

		 mtime	time of	last modification

		 ctime	time of	last metadata change (Linux) /	time  of  cre-
			ation (Windows)

			Whether	path is	a regular file (boolean)

		 is_dir	Whether	path is	a directory (boolean)

	      mode and size are	integers.  Timestamps (atime, mtime and	ctime)
	      are integer seconds since	the Unix epoch (Unix time).  The bool-
	      eans  is_file and	is_dir are provided as a convenience; they can
	      be and are derived from mode.

	      On error (eg. path does not exist), nil, error is	returned.

	      Split a path into	directory component  and  filename  component,
	      and return them. The first return	value is always	the directory.
	      The second return	value is the trailing part of  the  path,  the
	      directory	entry.

       utils.join_path(p1, p2)
	      Return the concatenation of the 2	paths. Tries to	be clever. For
	      example, if p2 is	an  absolute  path,  p2	 is  returned  without

	      Runs  an	external  process  and	waits  until it	exits. Returns
	      process status and the captured output. This is a	legacy wrapper
	      around calling the subprocess command with mp.command_native. It
	      does the following things:

	      o	copy the table t

	      o	rename cancellable field to playback_only

	      o	rename max_size	to capture_size

	      o	set capture_stdout field to true if unset

	      o	set name field to subprocess

	      o	call mp.command_native(copied_t)

	      o	if the command failed, create a	dummy result table

	      o	copy error_string to error field if the	string is non-empty

	      o	return the result table

	      It is recommended	to  use	 mp.command_native  or	mp.command_na-
	      tive_async  directly, instead of calling this legacy wrapper. It
	      is for compatibility only.

	      See the subprocess documentation for semantics and  further  pa-

	      Runs an external process and detaches it from mpv's control.

	      The parameter t is a table. The function reads the following en-

		 args	Array of strings of the	same  semantics	 as  the  args
			used in	the subprocess function.

	      The function returns nil.

	      This  is	a  legacy  wrapper around calling the run command with
	      mp.commandv and other functions.

	      Returns the process ID of	the running mpv	process. This  can  be
	      used  to identify	the calling mpv	when launching (detached) sub-

	      Returns the C environment	as a list of strings. (Do not  confuse
	      this with	the Lua	"environment", which is	an unrelated concept.)

       utils.parse_json(str [, trail])
	      Parses  the  given  string argument as JSON, and returns it as a
	      Lua table. On error, returns nil,	error.	(Currently,  error  is
	      just  a  string  reading error, because there is no fine-grained
	      error reporting of any kind.)

	      The returned value  uses	similar	 conventions  as  mp.get_prop-
	      erty_native() to distinguish empty objects and arrays.

	      If  the  trail  parameter	 is true (or any value equal to	true),
	      then trailing non-whitespace text	is tolerated by	the  function,
	      and  the trailing	text is	returned as 3rd	return value. (The 3rd
	      return value is always there, but	with trail set,	 no  error  is

	      Format  the  given Lua table (or value) as a JSON	string and re-
	      turn it. On error, returns nil, error. (Errors usually only hap-
	      pen on value types incompatible with JSON.)

	      The  argument  value  uses  similar  conventions as mp.set_prop-
	      erty_native() to distinguish empty objects and arrays.

	      Turn the given value into	a string.  Formats  tables  and	 their
	      contents.	 This  doesn't	do anything special; it	is only	needed
	      because Lua is terrible.

       Events are notifications	from player core to scripts. You can  register
       an event	handler	with mp.register_event.

       Note  that  all	scripts	(and other parts of the	player)	receive	events
       equally,	and there's no such thing as blocking other scripts  from  re-
       ceiving events.


	  function my_fn(event)
	      print("start of playback!")

	  mp.register_event("file-loaded", my_fn)

       For the existing	event types, see List of events.

       This  documents	experimental  features,	or features that are "too spe-
       cial" to	guarantee a stable interface.

       mp.add_hook(type, priority, fn)
	      Add a hook callback for type (a  string  identifying  a  certain
	      kind of hook). These hooks allow the player to call script func-
	      tions and	wait for their result (normally, the Lua scripting in-
	      terface  is  asynchronous	 from  the point of view of the	player
	      core). priority is an arbitrary  integer	that  allows  ordering
	      among  hooks of the same kind. Using the value 50	is recommended
	      as neutral default value.

	      fn(hook) is the function that will be called during execution of
	      the hook.	The parameter passed to	it (hook) is a Lua object that
	      can control further aspects about	the currently invoked hook. It
	      provides the following methods:

			Returning  from	the hook function should not automati-
			cally continue the hook. Instead, the API  user	 wants
			to  call  hook:cont()  on  its own at a	later point in
			time (before or	after the function has returned).

		 cont()	Continue the hook. Doesn't need	to  be	called	unless
			defer()	was called.

	      See  Hooks  for currently	existing hooks and what	they do	- only
	      the hook list is interesting; handling hook execution is done by
	      the Lua script function automatically.

       JavaScript  support  in	mpv  is	near identical to its Lua support. Use
       this section as reference on differences	and availability of APIs,  but
       otherwise you should refer to the Lua documentation for API details and
       general scripting in mpv.

       JavaScript code which leaves fullscreen mode when the player is paused:

	  function on_pause_change(name, value)	{
	      if (value	== true)
		  mp.set_property("fullscreen",	"no");
	  mp.observe_property("pause", "bool", on_pause_change);

   Similarities	with Lua
       mpv tries to load a script file as JavaScript if	it has	a  .js	exten-
       sion,  but  otherwise,  the documented Lua options, script directories,
       loading,	etc apply to JavaScript	files too.

       Script initialization and lifecycle is the same as with Lua,  and  most
       of the Lua functions at the modules mp, mp.utils, mp.msg	and mp.options
       are available to	JavaScript with	identical  APIs	 -  including  running
       commands,   getting/setting  properties,	 registering  events/key-bind-
       ings/hooks, etc.

   Differences from Lua
       No need to load modules.	mp, mp.utils,  mp.msg and mp.options are  pre-
       loaded, and you can use e.g. var	cwd = mp.utils.getcwd(); without prior

       Errors are slightly different. Where the	Lua APIs return	nil for	error,
       the  JavaScript ones return undefined. Where Lua	returns	something, er-
       ror JavaScript returns only something - and makes error	available  via
       mp.last_error().	 Note  that only some of the functions have this addi-
       tional error value - typically the same ones which have it in Lua.

       Standard	APIs are preferred. For	instance setTimeout and	JSON.stringify
       are available, but mp.add_timeout and mp.utils.format_json are not.

       No  standard library. This means	that interaction with anything outside
       of mpv is limited to the	available APIs,	typically via  mp.utils.  How-
       ever, some file functions were added, and CommonJS require is available
       too - where the loaded modules  have  the  same	privileges  as	normal

   Language features - ECMAScript 5
       The  scripting  backend which mpv currently uses	is MuJS	- a compatible
       minimal ES5 interpreter.	As such, String.substring is  implemented  for
       instance,  while	 the  common  but  non-standard	 String.substr is not.
       Please consult the MuJS pages on	language features and platform support
       - .

   Unsupported Lua APIs	and their JS alternatives
       mp.add_timeout(seconds, fn)  JS:	id = setTimeout(fn, ms)

       mp.add_periodic_timer(seconds, fn)  JS: id = setInterval(fn, ms)

       utils.parse_json(str [, trail])	JS: JSON.parse(str)

       utils.format_json(v)  JS: JSON.stringify(v)

       utils.to_string(v)  see dump below.

       mp.suspend() JS:	none (deprecated).

       mp.resume() JS: none (deprecated).

       mp.resume_all() JS: none	(deprecated).

       mp.get_next_timeout() see event loop below.

       mp.dispatch_events([allow_wait])	see event loop below.

   Scripting APIs - identical to Lua
       (LE) - Last-Error, indicates that mp.last_error() can be	used after the
       call to test for	success	(empty string) or failure  (non	 empty	reason
       string).	 Where the Lua APIs use	nil to indicate	error, JS APIs use un-

       mp.command(string) (LE)

       mp.commandv(arg1, arg2, ...) (LE)

       mp.command_native(table [,def]) (LE)

       id = mp.command_native_async(table [,fn]) (LE) Notes: id	is true-thy on
       success,	fn is called always a-sync, error is empty string on success.


       mp.get_property(name [,def]) (LE)

       mp.get_property_osd(name	[,def])	(LE)

       mp.get_property_bool(name [,def]) (LE)

       mp.get_property_number(name [,def]) (LE)

       mp.get_property_native(name [,def]) (LE)

       mp.set_property(name, value) (LE)

       mp.set_property_bool(name, value) (LE)

       mp.set_property_number(name, value) (LE)

       mp.set_property_native(name, value) (LE)


       mp.add_key_binding(key, name|fn [,fn [,flags]])



       mp.register_event(name, fn)


       mp.observe_property(name, type, fn)





       mp.osd_message(text [,duration])





       mp.register_script_message(name,	fn)



       mp.get_osd_size()   (returned object has	properties: width, height, as-

       mp.msg.log(level, ...)







       mp.utils.getcwd() (LE)

       mp.utils.readdir(path [,	filter]) (LE)

       mp.utils.file_info(path)	(LE)


       mp.utils.join_path(p1, p2)




       mp.utils.getpid() (LE)

       mp.add_hook(type, priority, fn(hook))

       mp.options.read_options(obj  [,	identifier  [,	on_update]])   (types:

   Additional utilities
	      If  used	after an API call which	updates	last error, returns an
	      empty string if the API call succeeded,  or  a  non-empty	 error
	      reason string otherwise.

       Error.stack (string)
	      When  using  try	{  ... } catch(e) { ...	}, then	e.stack	is the
	      stack trace of the error - if  it	 was  created  using  the  Er-
	      ror(...) constructor.

       print (global)
	      A	convenient alias to

       dump (global)
	      Like print but also expands objects and arrays recursively.

	      Returns  the value of the	host environment variable name,	or un-
	      defined if the variable is not defined.

	      Expands (mpv)  meta  paths  like	~/x,  ~~/y,  ~~desktop/z  etc.
	      read_file, write_file and	require	already	use this internaly.

       mp.utils.read_file(fname	[,max])
	      Returns  the content of file fname as string. If max is provided
	      and not negative,	limit the read to max bytes.

       mp.utils.write_file(fname, str)
	      (Over)write file fname with text content str. fname must be pre-
	      fixed with file:// as simple protection against accidental argu-
	      ments   switch,	e.g.   mp.utils.write_file("file://~/abc.txt",
	      "hello world").

       Note:  read_file	 and  write_file  throw	 on errors, allow text content

	      Same as mp.get_time() but	in ms instead of seconds.

	      Returns the file name of the current script.

       exit() (global)
	      Make the script exit at the end of the current event loop	itera-
	      tion.   Note:  please  remove  added key bindings	before calling

       mp.utils.compile_js(fname, content_str)
	      Compiles the JS code content_str as  file	 name  fname  (without
	      loading anything from the	filesystem), and returns it as a func-
	      tion. Very similar to a Function constructor, but	shows at stack
	      traces as	fname.

	      Global  modules search paths array for the require function (see

   Timers (global)
       The standard HTML/node.js timers	are available:

       id = setTimeout(fn [,duration [,arg1 [,arg2...]]])

       id = setTimeout(code_string [,duration])


       id = setInterval(fn [,duration [,arg1 [,arg2...]]])

       id = setInterval(code_string [,duration])


       setTimeout and setInterval return id, and later	call  fn  (or  execute
       code_string) after duration ms. Interval	also repeat every duration.

       duration	 has  a	minimum	and default value of 0,	code_string is a plain
       string which is evaluated as JS code, and [,arg1	[,arg2..]] are used as
       arguments (if provided) when calling back fn.

       The clear...(id)	functions cancel timer id, and are irreversible.

       Note:  timers always call back asynchronously, e.g. setTimeout(fn) will
       never call fn before returning. fn will be called either	at the end  of
       this  event  loop iteration or at a later event loop iteration. This is
       true also for intervals - which also never call back twice at the  same
       event loop iteration.

       Additionally,  timers  are processed after the event queue is empty, so
       it's valid to use setTimeout(fn)	as a one-time idle observer.

   CommonJS modules and	require(id)
       CommonJS	Modules	are a standard system where scripts can	export	common
       functions  for use by other scripts. Specifically, a module is a	script
       which adds properties (functions, etc) to its pre-existing exports  ob-
       ject,  which  another  script  can access with require(module-id). This
       runs the	module and returns its exports object. Further	calls  to  re-
       quire for the same module will return its cached	exports	object without
       running the module again.

       Modules and require are supported, standard  compliant,	and  generally
       similar	to  node.js.  However,	most  node.js modules won't run	due to
       missing modules such as fs, process, etc, but some node.js modules with
       minimal	dependencies  do work. In general, this	is for mpv modules and
       not a node.js replacement.

       A .js file extension is always added to id, e.g.	require("./foo")  will
       load the	file ./foo.js and return its exports object.

       An  id  which starts with ./ or ../ is relative to the script or	module
       which require it. Otherwise it's	considered a  top-level	 id  (CommonJS

       Top-level id is evaluated as absolute filesystem	path if	possible, e.g.
       /x/y or ~/x. Otherwise it's considered a	global module id and  searched
       according  to  mp.module_paths in normal	array order, e.g. require("x")
       tries to	load x.js at one of the	array paths, and  id  foo/x  tries  to
       load x.js inside	dir foo	at one of the paths.

       The  mp.module_paths array is empty by default except for scripts which
       are loaded as a directory where it contains one item - <directory>/mod-
       ules/ .	The array may be updated from a	script (or using custom	init -
       see below) which	will affect future calls to require for	global	module
       id's which are not already loaded/cached.

       No global variable, but a module's this at its top lexical scope	is the
       global object - also in strict mode. If you have	a module  which	 needs
       global  as  the	global object, you could do	= this;	before

       Functions and variables declared	at a module don't pollute  the	global

   Custom initialization
       After  mpv  initializes the JavaScript environment for a	script but be-
       fore it loads the script	- it tries to run the  file  .init.js  at  the
       root  of	 the mpv configuration directory. Code at this file can	update
       the environment further for all scripts.	E.g. if	 it  contains  mp.mod-
       ule_paths.push("/foo")  then  require at	all scripts will search	global
       module id's also	at /foo.

   The event loop
       The event loop poll/dispatch mpv	events as long as  the	queue  is  not
       empty,  then  processes	the timers, then waits for the next event, and
       repeats this forever.

       You could put this code at your script to replace  the  built-in	 event
       loop, and also print every event	which mpv sends	to your	script:

	  function mp_event_loop() {
	      var wait = 0;
	      do {
		  var e	= mp.wait_event(wait);
		  dump(e);  // there could be a	lot of prints...
		  if (e.event != "none") {
		      wait = 0;
		  } else {
		      wait = mp.process_timers() / 1000;
		      if (wait != 0) {
			  wait = mp.peek_timers_wait() / 1000;
	      }	while (mp.keep_running);

       mp_event_loop is	a name which mpv tries to call after the script	loads.
       The internal implementation is similar to this (without dump though..).

       e = mp.wait_event(wait) returns when the	next mpv event arrives,	or af-
       ter wait	seconds	if positive and	no mpv events arrived. wait value of 0
       returns immediately (with e.event == "none" if the queue	is empty).

       mp.dispatch_event(e) calls back the handlers registered for e.event, if
       there  are  such	 (event	handlers, property observers, script messages,

       mp.process_timers() calls  back	the  already-added,  non-canceled  due
       timers,	and returns the	duration in ms till the	next due timer (possi-
       bly 0), or -1 if	there are no pending timers. Must not be called	recur-

       mp.notify_idle_observers()  calls  back the idle	observers, which we do
       when we're about	to sleep (wait != 0), but the observers	may add	timers
       or  take	 non-negligible	 duration to complete, so we re-calculate wait

       mp.peek_timers_wait() returns the same  values  as  mp.process_timers()
       but without doing anything. Invalid result if called from a timer call-

       Note: exit() is also registered for the shutdown	event, and its	imple-
       mentation is a simple mp.keep_running = false.

       mpv  can	 be  controlled	 by external programs using the	JSON-based IPC
       protocol.  It can be enabled by specifying the path to a	unix socket or
       a  named	 pipe using the	option --input-ipc-server. Clients can connect
       to this socket and send commands	to the player or receive  events  from

	  This	is not intended	to be a	secure network protocol. It is explic-
	  itly insecure: there is no authentication, no	 encryption,  and  the
	  commands  themselves	are insecure too. For example, the run command
	  is exposed, which can	run arbitrary system commands. The use-case is
	  controlling  the  player  locally.  This  is	not different from the
	  MPlayer slave	protocol.

   Socat example
       You can use the socat tool to send commands (and	receive	replies)  from
       the shell. Assuming mpv was started with:

	  mpv file.mkv --input-ipc-server=/tmp/mpvsocket

       Then you	can control it using socat:

	  > echo '{ "command": ["get_property",	"playback-time"] }' | socat - /tmp/mpvsocket

       In this case, socat copies data between stdin/stdout and	the mpv	socket

       See the --idle option how to make mpv start without exiting immediately
       or playing a file.

       It's also possible to send input.conf style text-only commands:

	  > echo 'show-text ${playback-time}' |	socat -	/tmp/mpvsocket

       But  you	 won't	get  a reply over the socket. (This particular command
       shows the playback time on the player's OSD.)

   Command Prompt example
       Unfortunately, it's not as easy to test the IPC	protocol  on  Windows,
       since  Windows  ports  of  socat	(in Cygwin and MSYS2) don't understand
       named pipes. In the absence of a	simple tool to send and	 receive  from
       bidirectional pipes, the	echo command can be used to send commands, but
       not receive replies from	the command prompt.

       Assuming	mpv was	started	with:

	  mpv file.mkv --input-ipc-server=\\.\pipe\mpvsocket

       You can send commands from a command prompt:

	  echo show-text ${playback-time} >\\.\pipe\mpvsocket

       To be able to simultaneously read and write from	the IPC	pipe, like  on
       Linux, it's necessary to	write an external program that uses overlapped
       file I/O	(or some wrapper like .NET's NamedPipeClientStream.)

       You can open the	pipe in	PuTTY as "serial" device.  This	 is  not  very
       comfortable,  but  gives	 a way to test interactively without having to
       write code.

       The protocol uses UTF-8-only JSON as defined by RFC-8259. Unlike	 stan-
       dard  JSON, "u" escape sequences	are not	allowed	to construct surrogate
       pairs. To avoid getting conflicts, encode all text characters including
       and  above  codepoint U+0020 as UTF-8. mpv might	output broken UTF-8 in
       corner cases (see "UTF-8" section below).

       Clients can execute commands on the player by sending JSON messages  of
       the following form:

	  { "command": ["command_name",	"param1", "param2", ...] }

       where  command_name is the name of the command to be executed, followed
       by a list of parameters.	Parameters must	be formatted  as  native  JSON
       values (integers, strings, booleans, ...). Every	message	must be	termi-
       nated with \n. Additionally, \n must not	 appear	 anywhere  inside  the
       message.	In practice this means that messages should be minified	before
       being sent to mpv.

       mpv will	then send back a reply indicating whether the command was  run
       correctly,  and an additional field holding the command-specific	return
       data (it	can also be null).

	  { "error": "success",	"data":	null }

       mpv will	also send events to clients with JSON messages of the  follow-
       ing form:

	  { "event": "event_name" }

       where  event_name  is  the name of the event. Additional	event-specific
       fields can also be present. See List of events for a list of  all  sup-
       ported events.

       Because	events	can occur at any time, it may be difficult at times to
       determine which response	goes with which	command. Commands may  option-
       ally  include  a	 request_id which, if provided in the command request,
       will be copied verbatim into the	response. mpv does not	intrepret  the
       request_id  in  any way;	it is solely for the use of the	requester. The
       only requirement	is that	the request_id field must  be  an  integer  (a
       number  without	fractional  parts  in  the range -2^63..2^63-1). Using
       other types is deprecated and will currently show a warning. In the fu-
       ture, this will raise an	error.

       For example, this request:

	  { "command": ["get_property",	"time-pos"], "request_id": 100 }

       Would generate this response:

	  { "error": "success",	"data":	1.468135, "request_id":	100 }

       If you don't specify a request_id, command replies will set it to 0.

       All  commands, replies, and events are separated	from each other	with a
       line break character (\n).

       If the first character (after skipping whitespace) is not {,  the  com-
       mand  will be interpreted as non-JSON text command, as they are used in
       input.conf (or mpv_command_string() in the client  API).	 Additionally,
       lines starting with # and empty lines are ignored.

       Currently,  embedded 0 bytes terminate the current line,	but you	should
       not rely	on this.

   Data	flow
       Currently, the mpv-side IPC implementation does not service the	socket
       while a command is executed and the reply is written. It	is for example
       not possible that other events, that happened during the	 execution  of
       the command, are	written	to the socket before the reply is written.

       This  might change in the future. The only guarantee is that replies to
       IPC messages are	sent in	sequence.

       Also, since socket I/O is inherently asynchronous, it is	possible  that
       you  read unrelated event messages from the socket, before you read the
       reply to	the previous command you sent. In this case, these events were
       queued  by the mpv side before it read and started processing your com-
       mand message.

       If the mpv-side IPC implementation switches away	from  blocking	writes
       and  blocking  command  execution, it may attempt to send events	at any

       You can also use	asynchronous commands, which can return	in any	order,
       and  which  do not block	IPC protocol interaction at all	while the com-
       mand is executed	in the background.

   Asynchronous	commands
       Command can be run asynchronously. This behaves exactly as with	normal
       command	execution,  except  that execution is not blocking. Other com-
       mands can be sent while it's executing, and command completion  can  be
       arbitrarily reordered.

       The  async  field  controls  this. If present, it must be a boolean. If
       missing,	false is assumed.

       For example, this initiates an asynchronous command:

	  { "command": ["screenshot"], "request_id": 123, "async": true	}

       And this	is the completion:


       By design, you will  not	 get  a	 confirmation  that  the  command  was
       started.	If a command is	long running, sending the message will lead to
       any reply until much later when the command finishes.

       Some commands execute synchronously, but	these will behave  like	 asyn-
       chronous	commands that finished execution immediately.

       Cancellation  of	 asynchronous commands is available in the libmpv API,
       but has not yet been implemented	in the IPC protocol.

   Commands with named arguments
       If the command field is a JSON object, named  arguments	are  expected.
       This  is	 described  in the C API mpv_command_node() documentation (the
       MPV_FORMAT_NODE_MAP case). In some cases, this may make	commands  more
       readable, while some obscure commands basically require using named ar-

       Currently, only "proper"	commands (as listed by List of Input Commands)
       support named arguments.

       In  addition to the commands described in List of Input Commands, a few
       extra commands can also be used as part of the protocol:

	      Return the name of the client as	string.	 This  is  the	string
	      ipc-N with N being an integer number.

	      Return  the  current mpv internal	time in	microseconds as	a num-
	      ber. This	is basically the system	time, with an  arbitrary  off-

	      Return  the  value of the	given property.	The value will be sent
	      in the data field	of the replay message.


		 { "command": ["get_property", "volume"] }
		 { "data": 50.0, "error": "success" }

	      Like get_property, but the  resulting  data  will	 always	 be  a


		 { "command": ["get_property_string", "volume"]	}
		 { "data": "50.000000",	"error": "success" }

	      Set  the	given  property	to the given value. See	Properties for
	      more information about properties.


		 { "command": ["set_property", "pause",	true] }
		 { "error": "success" }

	      Alias for	set_property. Both commands accept native  values  and

	      Watch  a property	for changes. If	the given property is changed,
	      then an event of type property-change will be generated


		 { "command": ["observe_property", 1, "volume"]	}
		 { "error": "success" }
		 { "event": "property-change", "id": 1,	"data":	52.0, "name": "volume" }

		 If the	connection is closed, the IPC client is	destroyed  in-
		 ternally,  and	the observed properties	are unregistered. This
		 happens for example when sending commands to  a  socket  with
		 separate socat	invocations.  This can make it seem like prop-
		 erty observation does not work. You must keep the IPC connec-
		 tion open to make it work.

	      Like  observe_property,  but the resulting data will always be a


		 { "command": ["observe_property_string", 1, "volume"] }
		 { "error": "success" }
		 { "event": "property-change", "id": 1,	"data":	"52.000000", "name": "volume" }

	      Undo observe_property or observe_property_string.	This  requires
	      the numeric id passed to the observed command as argument.


		 { "command": ["unobserve_property", 1]	}
		 { "error": "success" }

	      Enable  output  of  mpv  log  messages. They will	be received as
	      events. The parameter to this  command  is  the  log-level  (see
	      mpv_request_log_messages C API function).

	      Log  message  output is meant for	humans only (mostly for	debug-
	      ging).  Attempting to retrieve information by parsing these mes-
	      sages  will just lead to breakages with future mpv releases. In-
	      stead, make a feature request, and ask for a proper  event  that
	      returns the information you need.

       enable_event, disable_event
	      Enables  or  disables  the  named	 event.	 Mirrors  the  mpv_re-
	      quest_event C API	function. If the string	all is used instead of
	      an event name, all events	are enabled or disabled.

	      By  default,  most events	are enabled, and there is not much use
	      for this command.

	      Returns the client API version the C API of the remote  mpv  in-
	      stance provides.

	      See also:	DOCS/client-api-changes.rst.

       Normally,  all  strings	are  in	 UTF-8.	 Sometimes  it can happen that
       strings are in some broken encoding (often happens with file  tags  and
       such,  and filenames on many Unixes are not required to be in UTF-8 ei-
       ther). This means that mpv sometimes sends invalid JSON.	If that	 is  a
       problem	for  the client	application's parser, it should	filter the raw
       data for	invalid	UTF-8 sequences	and perform the	 desired  replacement,
       before feeding the data to its JSON parser.

       mpv  will not attempt to	construct invalid UTF-8	with broken "u"	escape
       sequences. This includes	surrogate pairs.

   JSON	extensions
       The following non-standard extensions are supported:

	  o a list or object item can have a trailing ","

	  o object syntax accepts "=" in addition of ":"

	  o object keys	can be unquoted, if they start	with  a	 character  in
	    "A-Za-z_" and contain only characters in "A-Za-z0-9_"

	  o byte  escapes  with	"xAB" are allowed (with	AB being a 2 digit hex


	  { objkey = "value\x0A" }

       Is equivalent to:

	  { "objkey": "value\n"	}

   Alternative ways of starting	clients
       You can create an anonymous IPC connection without having to set	 --in-
       put-ipc-server. This is achieved	through	a mpv pseudo scripting backend
       that starts processes.

       You can put .run	file extension in the mpv  scripts  directory  in  its
       config  directory  (see	the  FILES  section for	details), or load them
       through other means (see	Script location). These	scripts	are simply ex-
       ecuted  with the	OS native mechanism (as	if you ran them	in the shell).
       They must have a	proper shebang and have	the executable bit set.

       When executed, a	socket (the IPC	connection) is passed to them  through
       file  descriptor	 inheritance.  The file	descriptor is indicated	as the
       special command line argument --mpv-ipc-fd=N, where N  is  the  numeric
       file descriptor.

       The  rest  is  the same as with a normal	--input-ipc-server IPC connec-
       tion. mpv does not attempt  to  observe	or  other  interact  with  the
       started script process.

       This does not work in Windows yet.

       There is	no real	changelog, but you can look at the following things:

       o The   release	changelog,  which  should  contain  most  user-visible
	 changes, including new	features and bug fixes:

       o The git log, which is the "real" changelog

       o The								  file
	 documents changes to the command and user interface, such as  options
	 and  properties.  (It	usually	documents breaking changes only, addi-
	 tions and enhancements	are often not listed.)

       o C	   API	       changes	       are	    listed	    in

       o The file mplayer-changes.rst in the DOCS sub  directory  on  the  git
	 repository,  which  used to be	in place of this section. It documents
	 some changes that happened since mplayer2 forked  off	MPlayer.  (Not
	 updated anymore.)

       mpv  can	 be embedded into other	programs as video/audio	playback back-
       end. The	recommended way	to do so is using libmpv. See  libmpv/client.h
       in  the mpv source code repository. This	provides a C API. Bindings for
       other languages might be	available (see wiki).

       Since libmpv merely allows access to  underlying	 mechanisms  that  can
       control mpv, further documentation is spread over a few places:






       You  can	 write	C  plugins for mpv. These use the libmpv API, although
       they do not use the libmpv library itself.

       Currently, they must be explicitly enabled at  build  time  with	 --en-
       able-cplugins. They are available on Linux/BSD platforms	only.

   C plugins location
       C  plugins  are put into	the mpv	scripts	directory in its config	direc-
       tory (see the FILES section for details). They must have	a .so file ex-
       tension.	 They can also be explicitly loaded with the --script option.

       A C plugin must export the following function:

	  int mpv_open_cplugin(mpv_handle *handle)

       The  plugin function will be called on loading time. This function does
       not return as long as your  plugin  is  loaded  (it  runs  in  its  own
       thread).	 The handle will be deallocated	as soon	as the plugin function

       The return value	is interpreted as error	status.	A value	of 0 is	inter-
       preted  as  success, while -1 signals an	error. In the latter case, the
       player prints an	uninformative error message that loading failed.

       Return values other than	0 and -1 are reserved, and  trigger  undefined

       Within the plugin function, you can call	libmpv API functions. The han-
       dle is created by mpv_create_client() (or actually an internal  equiva-
       lent),  and  belongs  to	you. You can call mpv_wait_event() to wait for
       things happening, and so	on.

       Note  that  the	player	 might	 block	 until	 your	plugin	 calls
       mpv_wait_event()	for the	first time. This gives you a chance to install
       initial hooks etc.  before playback begins.

       The details are quite similar to	Lua scripts.

   Linkage to libmpv
       The current implementation requires that	your plugins  are  not	linked
       against	libmpv.	 What  your plugins uses are not symbols from a	libmpv
       binary, but symbols from	the mpv	host binary.



       There are a number of environment variables that	can be used to control
       the behavior of mpv.

	      Used  to	determine  mpv config directory. If XDG_CONFIG_HOME is
	      not set, $HOME/.config/mpv is used.

	      $HOME/.mpv is always added to the	list of	 config	 search	 paths
	      with a lower priority.

	      Directory	where mpv looks	for user settings. Overrides HOME, and
	      mpv will try to load the config file as $MPV_HOME/mpv.conf.

       MPV_VERBOSE (see	also -v	and --msg-level)
	      Set the initial verbosity	level across all message modules  (de-
	      fault: 0).  This is an integer, and the resulting	verbosity cor-
	      responds to the number of	--v  options  passed  to  the  command

	      If  set  to  1, enable internal talloc leak reporting. If	set to
	      another value, disable leak reporting. If	 unset,	 use  the  de-
	      fault,  which  normally  is  0.  If  mpv	was  built  with --en-
	      able-ta-leak-report, the default is 1.  If  leak	reporting  was
	      disabled	at  compile time (NDEBUG in custom CFLAGS), this envi-
	      ronment variable is ignored.

	      Specifies	the search path	for LADSPA plugins. If	it  is	unset,
	      fully qualified path names must be used.

	      Standard X11 display name	to use.

	      This  library  accesses  various environment variables. However,
	      they are not centrally documented, and documenting them  is  not
	      our job. Therefore, this list is incomplete.

	      Notable environment variables:

		     URL to proxy for http:// and https:// URLs.

		     List  of  domain  patterns	 for  which no proxy should be
		     used.  List entries are separated by ,. Patterns can  in-
		     clude *.


		     Specify  a	 directory in which to store title key values.
		     This will speed up	descrambling of	DVDs which are in  the
		     cache.  The  DVDCSS_CACHE directory is created if it does
		     not exist,	and a subdirectory is created named after  the
		     DVD's title or manufacturing date.	If DVDCSS_CACHE	is not
		     set or is empty, libdvdcss	will  use  the	default	 value
		     which  is ${HOME}/.dvdcss/	under Unix and the roaming ap-
		     plication data directory (%APPDATA%) under	 Windows.  The
		     special value "off" disables caching.

		     Sets  the authentication and decryption method that libd-
		     vdcss will	use to read scrambled discs. Can be one	of ti-
		     tle, key or disc.

		     key    is the default method. libdvdcss will use a	set of
			    calculated player keys to try to get the disc key.
			    This  can fail if the drive	does not recognize any
			    of the player keys.

		     disc   is a fallback method when key has failed.  Instead
			    of	using  player  keys,  libdvdcss	will crack the
			    disc key  using  a	brute  force  algorithm.  This
			    process  is	 CPU  intensive	 and requires 64 MB of
			    memory to store temporary data.

		     title  is	the  fallback  when  all  other	 methods  have
			    failed.  It	 does  not rely	on a key exchange with
			    the	DVD drive, but rather uses a crypto attack  to
			    guess  the	title key. On rare cases this may fail
			    because there is not enough	encrypted data on  the
			    disc  to  perform a	statistical attack, but	on the
			    other hand it is the only way  to  decrypt	a  DVD
			    stored on a	hard disc, or a	DVD with the wrong re-
			    gion on an RPC2 drive.

		     Specify the raw device to use. Exact usage	will depend on
		     your  operating  system,  the Linux utility to set	up raw
		     devices is	raw(8) for instance. Please note that on  most
		     operating	systems,  using	 a  raw	device requires	highly
		     aligned buffers: Linux requires a	2048  bytes  alignment
		     (which is the size	of a DVD sector).

		     Sets the libdvdcss	verbosity level.

		     0	    Outputs no messages	at all.

		     1	    Outputs error messages to stderr.

		     2	    Outputs  error  messages  and  debug  messages  to

		     Skip retrieving all keys on startup. Currently disabled.

	      HOME   FIXME: Document this.

       Normally	mpv returns 0 as exit code after finishing  playback  success-
       fully.  If errors happen, the following exit codes can be returned:

	  1	 Error	initializing mpv. This is also returned	if unknown op-
		 tions are passed to mpv.

	  2	 The file passed to mpv	couldn't be played. This  is  somewhat
		 fuzzy:	currently, playback of a file is considered to be suc-
		 cessful if initialization  was	 mostly	 successful,  even  if
		 playback fails	immediately after initialization.

	  3	 There	were  some  files that could be	played,	and some files
		 which couldn't	(using the definition of success from above).

	  4	 Quit due to a signal, Ctrl+c in a VO window (by default),  or
		 from the default quit key bindings in encoding	mode.

       Note that quitting the player manually will always lead to exit code 0,
       overriding the exit code	that would be  returned	 normally.  Also,  the
       quit  input command can take an exit code: in this case,	that exit code
       is returned.

       For Windows-specifics, see FILES	ON WINDOWS section.

	      mpv system-wide settings (depends	on --prefix passed to  config-
	      ure  - mpv in default configuration will use /usr/local/etc/mpv/
	      as config	directory, while most Linux distributions will set  it
	      to /etc/mpv/).

	      The  standard configuration directory. This can be overridden by
	      environment variables, in	ascending order:

	      1	     If	$XDG_CONFIG_HOME is set, then the  derived  configura-
		     tion directory will be $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/mpv.

	      2	     If	 $MPV_HOME  is set, then the derived configuration di-
		     rectory will be $MPV_HOME.

	      If this directory, nor the original configuration	directory (see
	      below) do	not exist, mpv tries to	create this directory automat-

	      The original (pre	0.5.0) configuration directory.	It  will  con-
	      tinue to be read if present.

	      If  both this directory and the standard configuration directory
	      are present, configuration will be read from both	with the stan-
	      dard configuration directory content taking precedence. However,
	      you should fully migrate to the standard directory and a warning
	      will be shown in this situation.

	      mpv user settings	(see CONFIGURATION FILES section)

	      key bindings (see	INPUT.CONF section)

	      Fontconfig fonts.conf that is customized for mpv.	You should in-
	      clude system fonts.conf in this file or mpv would	not know about
	      fonts that you already have in the system.

	      Only available when libass is built with fontconfig.

	      fallback subtitle	font

	      Font  files  in this directory are used by mpv/libass for	subti-
	      tles. Useful if you do not want to install fonts to your system.
	      Note  that files in this directory are loaded into memory	before
	      being used by mpv. If you	have a lot of  fonts,  consider	 using
	      fonts.conf  (see	above)	to  include additional fonts, which is
	      more memory-efficient.

	      All files	in this	directory are loaded as	if they	were passed to
	      the --script option. They	are loaded in alphabetical order.

	      The --load-scripts=no option disables loading these files.

	      See Script location for details.

	      Contains	temporary config files needed for resuming playback of
	      files with the watch later feature. See for example  the	Q  key
	      binding, or the quit-watch-later input command.

	      Each  file  is a small config file which is loaded if the	corre-
	      sponding media file is loaded. It	contains the playback position
	      and some (not necessarily	all) settings that were	changed	during
	      playback.	The filenames are hashed from the full	paths  of  the
	      media  files.  It's in general not possible to extract the media
	      filename from this hash. However,	you can	set the	 --write-file-
	      name-in-watch-later-config  option,  and the player will add the
	      media filename to	the contents of	the resume config file.

	      This is loaded by	the OSC	script.	See the	ON  SCREEN  CONTROLLER
	      docs for details.

	      Other  files in this directory are specific to the corresponding
	      scripts as well, and the mpv core	doesn't	touch them.

       On win32	(if compiled with MinGW, but not Cygwin), the  default	config
       file  locations	are  different.	They are generally located under %APP-
       DATA%/mpv/.    For   example,   the   path   to	 mpv.conf   is	 %APP-
       DATA%/mpv/mpv.conf,  which maps to a system and user-specific path, for

       You can find the	exact path by running echo  %APPDATA%\mpv\mpv.conf  in

       Other  config files (such as input.conf)	are in the same	directory. See
       the FILES section above.

       The environment variable	$MPV_HOME completely overrides these, like  on

       If  a  directory	 named portable_config next to the mpv.exe exists, all
       config will be loaded from this	directory  only.  Watch	 later	config
       files  are  written  to this directory as well. (This exists on Windows
       only and	is redundant with $MPV_HOME. However, since  Windows  is  very
       scripting unfriendly, a wrapper script just setting $MPV_HOME, like you
       could do	it on other systems, won't work. portable_config  is  provided
       for convenience to get around this restriction.)

       Config  files  located in the same directory as mpv.exe are loaded with
       lower priority. Some config files are loaded  only  once,  which	 means
       that e.g. of 2 input.conf files located in two config directories, only
       the one from the	directory with higher priority will be loaded.

       A third config directory	with the  lowest  priority  is	the  directory
       named  mpv in the same directory	as mpv.exe. This used to be the	direc-
       tory with the highest priority, but is now discouraged to use and might
       be removed in the future.

       Note  that  mpv	likes  to  mix / and \ path separators for simplicity.
       kernel32.dll accepts this, but cmd.exe does not.




Want to link to this manual page? Use this URL:

home | help